Home

MX2 (Model: 3G3MX2) User's Manual

1. 163Bh Pulse train frequency bias P057 R W 100 to 100 1 amount 163Ch Pulse train frequency limit P058 R W Oto 100 1 163Dh Pulse input lower cut P059 R W 0 01 to 20 00 0 01 163Eh Multi step position command O PO6O HIGH R W 268435455 to 268435455 1 163Fh PO60 LOW R W 1640h Multi step position command 1 P061 HIGH R W 268435455 to 268435455 1 1641h P061 LOW R W 1642h Multi step position command 2 PO62 HIGH R W _ 268435455 to 268435455 1 1643h PO62 LOW R W 1644h Multi step position command 3 PO63 HIGH R W_ 268435455 to 268435455 1 1645h PO063 LOW R W 1646h Multi step position command 4 PO64 HIGH R W 268435455 to 268435455 1 1647h PO64 LOW R W 1648h Multi step position command 5 PO65 HIGH R W _ 268435455 to 268435455 1 1649h PO65 LOW R W 164Ah Multi step position command 6 PO66 HIGH R W 268435455 to 268435455 1 164Bh PO66 LOW R W 164Ch Multi step position command 7 PO67 HIGH R W 268435455 to 268435455 1 164Dh P067 LOW R W 164Eh Zero return mode P068 R W 00 Low speed 01 High speed 164Fh Zero return direction selection P069 R W 00 FW 01 RV 1650h Low speed zero return P070 R W 0 to 1000 frequency 1651h High speed zero return P071 R W 0 to 40000 frequency 1652h Position rang
2. Terminal block cover screw 1 location for 3 0 kW and smaller models Terminal block cover screw 2 locations for 3 7 kW and larger models 33 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 3 4 Inverter Dimensions IP20 Locate the applicable drawing on the following pages for your inverter Dimen sions are given in millimeters inches format om ic om ome iG 00000000 SE es ome oe D1 mm Single phase 3G3MX2 AB001 200V 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 AB004 3 phase 200 V 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 3G3MX2 A2007 Note Some inverter housing require two mounting screws while other requires four Be sure to use lock washers or other means to ensure screws do not loosen due to vibration 34 Step by Step Basic Installation 2 04 5 C _ gt 000000000 000000000 Single phase 200 V 3G3MX2 AB007 Section 2 3 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 AB022 D1 mm 3 phase 200 V 3G3MX2 A2015 3G3MX2 A2022 3 phase 400V 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 A4022 3G3MX2 A4030 35 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 O4
3. C Group Parameters Default Setting User Name EU setting C047 Pulse train input scale conversion for 1 00 v EO output C052 PID FB upper limit 100 C053 PID FB lower limit 0 C054 Over torque under torque 00 selection C055 Overtorque level 100 x Forward power running C056 Overtorque level 100 x Reverse regeneration C057 Overtorque level 100 x Reverse power running C058 Overtorque level 100 x Forward regeneration C059 Signal output mode of Over under 01 x torque C061 Thermal warning level 90 x C063 0 Hz detection level 0 00 x C064 Fin overheat warning level 100 x C071 Communication speed selection 05 x Baud rate selection C072 Communication station No 1 x Selection C074 Communication parity selection 00 x C075 Communication stop bit selection 01 x C076 Communication error selection 02 x C077 Communication error timeout 0 00 x C078 Communication wait time 0 x C081 O adjustment 100 0 v C082 Ol adjustment 100 0 v C085 Thermistor adjustment 100 0 v Cco91 Debug mode selection 00 x C096 Communication selection 00 x C098 EzCOM start adr Of master 1 x Ccog9 EzCOM end adr Of master 1 x C100 EzCOM starting trigger 00 x C101 UP DWN selection 00 x C102 Reset selection 00 x C103 Reset frequency matching selection 00 x C104 UP DWN clear mode 00 x C105 EO gain setting 100 v C106 AM gain setting 100 v C1
4. Dimensions mm Model Current Voltage Reference W H L X Y M 3G3MX2 A AX FIM1010 RE 71 45 51 AB001 AB002 AB004 10 1 x 200 V AX FIM1014 RE 111 50 169 156 91 M4 AB007 14 AX FIM1024 RE AB015 AB022 24 AX FIM2010 RE 82 194 181 62 A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 10 AX FIM2020 RE 111 50 169 156 91 M4 A2015 A2022 20 3 x 200 V AX FIM2030 RE 144 174 161 120 A2037 30 AX FIM2060 RE 150 52 320 290 122 M5 A2055 A2075 60 AX FIM2080 RE 188 62 362 330 160 A2110 80 AX FIM2100 RE 220 415 380 192 M6 A2150 100 AX FIM3005 RE A4004 A4007 5 AX FIM3010 RE 114 49 169 186 a M4 A4015 A4022 A4030 10 3 x 400 V AX FIM3014 RE 144 50 174 161 120 A4040 14 AX FIM3030 RE 150 52 306 290 122 M5 A4055 A4075 30 AX FIM3050 RE 182 62 357 330 160 A4110 A4150 50 Schaffner footprint filters H Dimensions mm Model Current Voltage Reference W H L X Y A B M 3G3MX2 0 A AX FIM1010 SE V1 70 40 51 50 AB001 AB002 AB004 8 TRAUN AX FIM1024 SE V1 110 50 16 ae 91 80 AB007 AB015 AB022 27 AX FIM2010 SE V1 80 40 191 181 62 150 50 A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 7 8 AX FIM2020 SE V1 110 50 160 156 91 80 A2015 A2022 16 3 x200 V AX FIM2030 SE V1 142 171 161 120 112 A2037 25 AX FIM2060 SE V1 140 55 304 290 122 286 A2055 A2075 50 AX FIM2080 SE V1 180 344 330 160 323 140 M5 A2110 75 AX FIM2100 SE V1 220 65 394 380
5. DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Weight 3 5 3 5 4 7 5 2 7 7 7 7 10 4 11 5 MX2 Inverter Specifications Section 1 2 1 2 2 General Specifications The following table applies to all MX2 inverters Item General Specifications Protective hous ing IP 20 Control method Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation PWM control Carrier frequency 2 kHz to 15 kHz derating required depending on the model Output frequency range 0 1 to 400 Hz Frequency accuracy Digital command 0 01 of the maximum frequency Analog command 0 2 of the maximum frequency 25 C 10 C Frequency setti ng resolution Digital 0 01 Hz Analog max frequency 400 Volt Freq characteristic V f control constant torque reduced torque free V F base freq 30 Hz 400 Hz ad justable Sensorless vector control Closed loop control with motor encoder feed back base freq 30 Hz 400 Hz ad justable Overload capacity Dual rating CT Heavy duty 60 sec 150 VT Normal duty 60 sec 120 Acceleration deceleration time 0 01 to 3600 seconds linear and S curve accel decel second accel decel setting available Starting torque 200 0 5 Hz sensorless vector control Input signal Freq setting Operator panel Up and Down keys Value settings External signal 0 to 10 VDC input imped
6. Dimensions mm Weight Max motor Current Inductance Voltage Reference ATP bel De De l belt kg output kW value A mH AX RAI02000070 DE 96 1 22 0 4 7 0 2 0 AX RAI01700140 DE 116 1 95 0 75 14 0 1 7 ae AX RAI01200200 DE e 131 USE r S RRR 2 55 1 5 20 0 1 2 AX RAI00630240 DE 116 1 95 2 2 24 0 0 63 Fig 2 three phase input AC reactor Dimensions mm Weight Max motor Current Inductance Voltage Reference A B2 C2 D E F kg output kW value A mH AX RAI02800080 DE 70 52 1 78 1 5 8 0 2 8 200 V AX RAI00880200 DE I 80 ney pee 62 os 2 35 3 7 20 0 0 88 AX RAI00350335 DE 7 5 33 5 0 35 AX RAI00180670 DE a ha oe 15 67 0 0 18 AX RAI07700050 DE 70 52 1 78 1 5 5 0 7 7 AX RAI03500100 DE 120 120 80 5 5 2 35 4 0 10 0 3 5 2 SAUN AX RAI01300170 DE saa i 2 50 7 5 17 0 1 3 AX RAI00740335 DE 180 85 190 140 55 6 5 5 15 33 5 0 74 AC reactor MX2 Power supply MCCB U ax X R P T v mwm Y S24 iy Wl ma m Zz Tg a Voltage Inverter model DC reactor model 1 phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2 AB002 AB004 AX RAI02000070 DE 3G3MX2 AB007 AX RAIO1700140 DE 3G3MX2 AB015 AX RAI01200200 DE 3G3MX2 AB022 AX RAI00630240 DE 3 phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2 A2002 A2004 A2007 AX RAI02800080 DE 3G3MX2 A2015 A2022 A2037 AX RAI00880200 DE 3G3MX2 A2055 A2075 AX RAI00350335 DE 3G3MX2 A2110 A2150 AX RAI00180670 DE 3 phase 400 V
7. 336 ModBus Data Listing Parameter group H Register No Function name Auto tuning selection Function code Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 00 disabled 01 stop 02 rotation Data resolution Motor parameter selecion 00 Standard motor parameter 02 auto tuning parameter Motor capacity selection 00 0 1kW 15 18 5kW Motor pole number selection 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 Reserved Speed response 1 to 1000 Stabilization parameter 0 to 255 Reserved Motor parameter R1 H020 1 to 65530 0 001 O Reserved Motor parameter R2 H021 1 to 65530 0 001 O Reserved Motor parameter L H022 1 to 65530 0 01 mH Reserved Motor parameter lo H023 1 to 65530 0 01 A Motor parameter J H024 high H024 low 1 to 9999000 0 001 Reserved Motor parameter R 1 auto tuning data 1 to 65530 0 001 O Reserved Inaccessible Motor parameter R 2 auto tuning data 1 to 65530 0 001 O Reserved Motor parameter L auto tuning data H032 1 to 65530 0 01 mH Reserved Inaccessible Motor parameter lo auto tuning data H033 1 to 65530 0 01 A Motor parameter J auto tuning data H034 high H034 low 1 to 9999
8. 14 16 kH 4 6 8 Carrier frequency 0 2 10 12 12 Section 1 2 VT 11 1 A 12 i 740 C individual 40 C side by side 10 4 9 8 7 6 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency VT 40 0 A 42 40 F 33 _ 40 C individual opeten 40 C side by side 36 f 34 32 30 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency VT 23 0 A 26 24 po 22 Ea 40 C individue 20 50 C individue 18 16 14 4 6 8 10 T2 14 kH Carrier frequency 0 2 VT 56 0 A 40 C individual 40 C sidee by side e a a D a A a 10 12 14kH 4 6 8 Carrier frequency 0 2 MX2 Inverter Specifications Section 1 2 3G3MX2 A4110 CT 24 0 A VT 31 0 A 32 30 28 26 l 50 C individual et 40 C side by side 24 ppp output current 22 20 O 2 4 6 8 10 12 1416kH O 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A2150 CT 60 0 A VT 69 0 A 75 7 7 75 70 70 65 4 65 o a sedi al E E aa fos jah eta output current sS eons PLE y T east 55 as 55 50 C individual 50 C individual fa Geis 50 40 C side by side l 45 O 2 4 6 8 10 12 1416kH O 2 4 6 8 10 1
9. AX REM03K5010 IE 264 Dynamic Braking Section 5 3 Inverter Braking resistor unit Max f Inverter mounted type Voltage motor IEEE EIS otha Hate 3 ED 10 sec max kW 3 phase 1 phase Type AX Resist Q 0 12 2001 B001 REM00K1400 IE 4 0 25 2002 B002 100 o3 00 oe 0 55 2004 B004 14 2007 B007 a REMO0K1200 IE 200 1 5 2015 B015 200 V REM00K2070 IE 70 single 2 2 2022 B022 35 three phase 4 0 2040 REM00K4075 IE 75 5 5 2055 20 75 2075 z REM00K4035 IE 35 11 2110 REM00K6035 IE 35 15 2150 10 REM00K9017 IE 17 0 55 4004 M00K1400 IE 4 1 1 4007 180 REMO 00 Oe 1 5 4015 REMO0K1200 IE 200 2 2 4022 REM00K2200 IE 200 400 V 3 0 4030 100 three phase 40 4040 REMO0K2120 lIE 120 5 5 4055 EM00K4075 IE 7 7 5 4075 70 ee 3 11 4110 REMO0K6100 IE 100 15 4150 35 REMO0K9070 IE 70 Inverter Braking resistor unit Max Inverter 3G3MX2 connectable min Inverter mounted type 10 ED 10 Braking Voltage morc resistance Q SGC NAX torque kW 3 phase 1 phase Type AX Resist Q 0 12 2001 B001 200 0 25 2002 B002 100 REMOORT4O0 IE 400 180 0 55 2004 B004 REMOOK1200 IE 200 180 1 1 2007 B007 50 REM00K2070 IE 70 200 200 V 1 5 2015 B015 REM00K4075 IE
10. 2 Powerinput Output to Motor Power input Output to Motor Dg Chassis Ground M4 47 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 48 Single phase 200 V 0 75 to 2 2 kW Three phase 200 V 1 5 2 2 kW Three phase 400 V 0 4 to 3 0 kW Single phase Three phase Power input Output to Motor Power input Output to Motor Chassis Ground M4 Three phase 200 V 3 7 kW Three phase 400 V 4 0 kW 0 A ns M E T es E a A NA Chassis Ground M4 Power input Output to Motor Three phase 200 V 5 5 7 5 kW Three phase 400 V 5 5 7 5 kW Power input Output to Motor Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 Three phase 200 V 11 kW Three phase 400 V 11 15 kW ie ie Power input Output to Motor Power input Output to Motor Note An inverter powered by a portable power generator may receive a distorted power waveform overheating the generator In general the generator capac ity should be five times that of the inverter kVA Z Caution Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications e Single phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 1 kW 2 2 kW for 3G3MX2 AB models e Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 1 kW 15 kW for
11. Start with ae maretia If the inverter trips because of overcurrent when it starts the motor with fre quency matching increase the retry wait time before motor starts b003 Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Commercial switch Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings b003 b007 Notes inverter may start the motor with 0 Hz if e the motor speed is no more than half of the base frequency or e the voltage induced on the motor is attenuated quickly 4 5 7 Reset The RS terminal causes the inverter to execute the reset operation If the inverter is in Trip Mode the reset cancels the Trip state When the signal RS is turned ON and OFF the inverter executes the reset operation Z N WARNING After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs the motor will restart suddenly if the Run command is already active Be sure to set the alarm reset after verifying that the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel Terminal Function Description Symbol Name The motor output is turned OFF the Trip Mode is cleared if it exists and powerup reset is applied Normal power ON operation Valid for inputs C00 Co07 Required settings none 210 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Notes While the control terminal RS input is ON the ke
12. 5 Terminal block cover 1 Cooling fan cover 6 Optional board cover Cooling fan Cooling fin 2 Backing plate 7 3 4 Main housing 24 Section 2 1 Orientation to Inverter Features 3 phase 200 V 11 kW 3 phase 400 V 11 15 kW phase 200 V 15 kW 3 5 Terminal block cover Cooling fan cover Cooling fan Cooling fin 1 2 6 Optional board cover Backing plate 7 3 Main housing 4 25 Orientation to Inverter Features Section 2 1 IP54 Mounting plate Air outlet Window for Mx2 inverter display Lock for front cover USBoonnector mini B Panel hole for accessory Chassis ground of mounting plate Chassis ground of EMC filter Power input to EMC filter Bracket with EMC filter MX2 inverter Dust filter 26 Orientation to Inverter Features Section 2 1 DIN rail for mounting options Fuse for cooling fan Cooling fan YS Wiring access hole 27 Basic System Description Section 2 2 2 2 Basic System Description A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter as well as a circuit breaker or fuses for safety If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started that s all you may need fo
13. OMRON MX2 INVERTER ir 21 Orientation to Inverter Features Section 2 1 22 Power Wiring Access First ensure no power source is connected to the inverter If power has been connected verify that the Power LED is OFF and then wait ten minutes after power down to proceed After removing the termi nal cover and front housing cover the housing partitions that cover the power and motor wiring exits will be able to slide upward as shown below Notice the four wire exit slots in the housing partition This helps keep the power and motor wiring to the left separated from the signal level logic or analog wiring to the right Remove the housing partition and as shown as set them aside in a secure place while wiring Be sure to replace them afterward Never operate the inverter with the partition removed or the front housing cover removed The power input and motor 3 phase wiring connect to the lower row of the ter minals The upper row of power terminals connect to optional braking units or DC link choke The following section in this chapter will describe system design and guide you through a step by step installation process After the section on wiring this chapter will show how to use the front panel keys to access functions and edit parameters if L Terminal cover Front cover Housing partition Note The housing partition can be removed without removing the front cover in the following models
14. e If Frequency Reference Selection is set to Digital Operator A001 02 enabling d001 d007 Freq set in monitoring 6163 01 lets you change the Output Frequency Monitor d001 setting using the Increment Decrement keys only during operation Changed Output Frequency d001 will be reflected to the Output Frequency Setting F001 Pressing the Enter key stores the setting in the EEPROM Since F001 is rewritten while d007 is still displayed there may be a time gap between the key operation and display change depending on the acceleration decel eration time While the PID function is activated or being stopped the output frequency cannot be changed The frequency cannot be changed in the individual input mode by pressing the Increment Decrement keys simultaneously e e e e 79 D Group Monitoring Functions 3 3 9 Real Frequency Monitor d008 The actual frequency monitor d008 will reflect the real motor speed always that the encoder feedback is active by parameter P003 01 independently of parameter A044 and P012 settings Section 3 3 Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit d008 Real frequency monitor 400 00 to 400 00 Hz Related functions P011 H004 Set Number of Encoder Pulse P011 and Motor Pole Number H004 H204 correctly 3 3 10 Torque Reference Monitor d009 Displays the currently entered torque reference value w
15. Monitoring timer lt Communication line Commbuicetian disconnection signal NDc trip time C071 Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Network ON When there is a disconnection in error communiciation OFF When there is no disconnection in communiciation Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings COTI Notes e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 243 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 22 Logic Operation Outputs The inverter has a built in logic output feature Select any two operands out of all intelligent output options except LOG1 LOG3 and their operator out of AND OR or XOR exclusive OR The terminal symbol for the new output is LOG Use CO2 1 COee or C026 to route the logical result to terminal 11 12 or the relay terminals Intelligent outputs used as internal inputs C IH2 E 145 E 18 RUN FA1 FA2 or all other output signals LOG1 L0G2 L0G3 F S Ar cn C 4 0 iH WC 150 Operator AND OR XOR RUN FA1 FA2 or all other output signals Operand B Input LOG Output Status State A B AND OR XOR Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Logic when the Boolean operation
16. Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Note 2 The change data is a set of high order data and low order data So when the size in bytes of data to be changed is an odd start coil number 7 add 1 to the data size in bytes to make it an even number Note 3 The PDU Coils are addressed starting at zero Therefore coils numbered 1 31 are addressed as 0 30 Coil address value transmitted on Modbus line is 1 less than the Coil Number 307 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 Write in Holding Registers 10h This function writes data in consecutive holding registers An example follows e Write 8000 seconds as the first acceleration time 1 F002 in an inverter having a slave address 8 e This example uses change data 300000 493E0h to set 3000 seconds as the data resolution of the registers 1014h and 1015h holding the first acceleration time 1 F002 is 0 01 second Field Name Slave address 1 Example Hex Field Name Slave address Example Hex Function code Function code Start address 3 high order Start address 3 high order Start address 3 low order Start address 3 low order Number of holding registers high order Number of holding registers high order Number of holding registers low order Number of holding registers low order Byte number 2 CRC 16 high order Change data 1 high order
17. 269 Troubleshooting Section 6 1 7 Parameter data does not change Possible Cause s Corrective Action Inverter is in RUN status Stop the inverter make sure the motor stops and try again If RUN mode edit is enabled a part of function codes can be changed in RUN status Soft lock selection b03 1 is Disable software lock function enabled 8 Motor rotates reverse direction with forward command Possible Cause s Corrective Action Incorrect power wiring Exchange any two of U T1 V T2 or W T3 Incorrect logic of direction signal Check the logic of input set as 22 F R in 3 wire operation 9 Motor rotates reverse direction with RUN key of keypad Possible Cause s Corrective Action Operator rotation direction Check F004 selection FQQ4 is incorrectly set 10 Overcurrent trip E03 Possible Cause s Corrective Action Acceleration time is short Change acceleration time F0OD2 A092 A292 Enable acceleration stop function AG69 A070 Excess load Remove excess load Enable torque boost function Set free V f in V F characteristics selection AQY4 Re44 02 Overload limit selection be 1 Enable overload limit selection bbe t 1 02 03 is disabled 08 Despite overload restriction is enabled the inverter trips due to Overcurrent E03 Overload limit level Set overload limit level b022 b025 lower bO2e b0eS is high O
18. 2nd set base frequency 300 to maximum frequency 2nd motor 0 1 Hz 2nd maximum frequency 300 to 4000 0 1 Hz Reserved Inaccessible 2nd multi step speed reference 0 A220 high A220 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 2nd motor 0 01 Hz Reserved Inaccessible 2nd torque boost selection 00 manual torque boost 01 automatic torque boost 2nd torque boost voltage 20 to 200 2nd manual torque boost frequency 0 to 50 2nd V f characteristics selection 00 VC 01 VP 02 free V f 03 sensorless vector control Output voltage gain 2nd motor 20 to 100 2nd automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain 0 to 255 2nd automatic torque boost slip compensation gain 0 to 255 Reserved Inaccessible 2nd frequency upper limit A261 high 00 or 2nd minimum frequency limit to maximum frequency 2nd motor 0 01 Hz 2nd frequency lower limit A262 high A261 low A262 low 00 or start frequency to maximum frequency 2nd motor limit 0 01 Hz Reserved Inaccessible AVR selection 2nd motor 00 always on 01 always off 02 off during deceleration AVR voltage selection 2nd motor 200 V class 0 200 1 215 2 220 3 230 4 240 400 V class 5 380 6 400 7 415 8 440 9 460 10 480
19. DC injection braking power DC injection braking time 106 Additionally is possible to trigger the DC injection by a digital input when RM the terminal DB is turned ON Set the following parameters to do it DB e A053 DC braking delay time set suite ting The range is 0 1 to 5 0 sec Taal onds e A054 DC braking force setting The range is 0 to 100 The scenarios to the right help show how DC braking works in various situ DB ations 1 Scenario 1 The FW or RV ter Output frequency minal is ON When DB is ON DC braking is applied When DB is OFF again the output frequen cy ramps to the prior level 2 Scenario 2 The Run command is applied from the operator key DB pad When the DB terminal is ON DC braking is applied When Output frequency the DB terminal is OFF again the inverter output remains OFF Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Run command from operator Scenario 3 Run command from operator A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 3 Scenario 3 The Run command is applied from the operator keypad When the DB terminal is ON DC braking is applied after the delay time set by A053 expires The motor is in a free running coasting condition When the DB terminal is OFF again the inverter output remains OFF Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name External DC ON Applies DC injection
20. Slip compensation P gain for V f control with FB Slip compensation gain for V f con trol with FB 2 PM motor code selection 00 PM motor capacity kW dependent PM motor pole number selection 4 PM rated current Rated current PM parameter R kW dependent PM parameter Ld kW dependent PM parameter Lq kW dependent PM parameter Ke kW dependent PM parameter J kW dependent PM parameter R auto tuning data kW dependent PM parameter Ld auto tuning data kW dependent PM parameter Lq auto tuning data kW dependent PM speed response 100 PM starting current 70 00 PM starting time 1 00 PM stabilization constant 100 PM minimum frequency 8 0 PM No Load current 10 00 PM starting method 00 PM IMPE OV wait 10 PM IMPE detect wait 10 PM IMPE detect 30 368 PM IMPE voltage gain 100 x x x x et lt lt lt tc lt tc lt f wf we x wf wd x x wl we x x x Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Section C 2 C 2 6 Expansion Card Functions P parameters will be appeared when the expansion option is connected P Group Parameters Default Setting b031 10 User Name EU Setting Operation selection at option 1 error EA terminal selection Pulse train input mode for feedback Encoder pulses Simple positioning selection Creep
21. Note The motor behave as generator during deceleration and the energy is regen erated to the drive As a result the DC voltage in the inverter increases and cause over voltage trip when exceeding the OV level When the voltage is set high deceleration time can be set shorter thanks to the energy consumption due to the increase of losses in inverter In order to set deceleration time shorter without over voltage trip please try to set AVR off during deceleration or to tune the AVR filter time constant and AVR deceleration gain 113 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 3 5 11 Energy Savings Mode Optional Accel Decel Energy Saving Mode This function allows the inverter to deliver the mini mum power necessary to maintain speed at any given frequency This works best when driving variable torque characteristic loads such as fans and pumps Parameter A085 0 enables this function and A086 controls the degrees of its effect A setting of 0 0 yields slow response but high accuracy while a setting of 100 will yield a fast response with lower accuracy A Function Defaults Description Energy saving operation mode Two option codes 00 Normal operation D I Eco Energy saving operation Energy saving response Range is 0 0 to 100 0 accuracy adjustment The acceleration time is controlled so that the output current is below the level set by the Overload Restriction Function if enabled
22. Required settings 248 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 4 6 33 2nd Motor Selection This function allows you to switch the inverter setting to control two different types of motors To use this function assign function 08 to one of the input terminal and make it on or off When 2nd motor parameters are selected out put signal SETM turns on Section 4 6 Terminal Symbol Option Code Function Name 2nd motor selection Codes Description No Codes Description FeOe 2nd acceleration time 1 22 ACIS Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point 2nd motor FeO3 2nd deceleration time 1 23 ACI6 Dect to Dec2 frequency transition point 2nd motor Aco Frequency reference selection 2nd motor 24 C24 Overload warning level 2nd motor ADe RUN command selection 2nd motor 25 Hede 2nd motor parameter selection A03 2nd set base frequency 26 H203 2nd motor capacity selection Aegy 2nd maximum frequency 27 H2eO4 2nd motor pole number selection Aeed 2nd multi step speed reference 0 28 H205 2nd speed response Ae4 i 2nd torque boost selection 29 HeO6 2nd stabilization parameter Ae 2 2nd manual torque boost voltage 30 H 2nd motor parameter R1 A243 2nd manual torque boost frequency 31 H 2nd motor parameter R2 A244 2nd v f characteristics selection 32 Heee 2nd motor parameter L Ae4S Output voltage ga
23. Reserved Inaccessible 2nd acceleration time 2 344 A292 high A292 low 1 to 360000 0 01 sec ModBus Data Listing Function name 2nd deceleration time 2 Function code A293 high A293 low Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 1 to 360000 Data resolution 0 01 sec Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile 2nd motor A294 00 switching by 2CH terminal 01 switching by setting 02 switching only when the rotation is forward reversed Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transi tion point 2nd motor A295 high 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transi tion point 2nd motor A296 high A295 low A296 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Reserved 2nd electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current 0 1 2nd electronic thermal charac teristics selection 00 reduced TRQ 01 constant torque characteristics 02 free setting Reserved Overload limit selection 2nd motor 00 disabling 01 enabling during acceleration and constant speed opera tion 02 enabling during constant speed operation 03 enabling during acceleration and constant speed opera tion speed increase at regeneration Overload limit level 2nd motor 100 to 2000 0 1 Overload limit parameter 2nd motor 1 to 30000 0 117 unused Inac
24. Change data 1 low order Change data 2 high order Change data 2 low order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 low order CRC 16 low order Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Note 2 This is not the number of holding registers Specify the number of bytes of data to be changed Note 3 The PDU Register Number are addressed starting at zero Therefore register numbered 1014h are addressed as 1013h Register address value trans mitted on Modbus line is 1 less than the Register Number When writing in selected holding registers fails see the exception response 308 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 Write in Holding Registers 17h This function is to read and write data in consecutive holding registers An example follows e Write 50 0 Hz as the set frequency F001 in an inverter having a slave address 1 and then to read out the output frequency d001 Field Name Example Field Name Example Hex Hex Slave address 1 Slave address Function code Function code Start address to Byte number n read 3 high order Start address to Register Data 1 read 3 low order high order Number of holding Register Data 1 low registers to read order high order Number of holding Register Data 2 registers to read high order low order Start address to Register Data 2 low write 3 high order order Start address to CRC 16 h
25. If your application only has single phase power available refer to MX2 inverter of 3HP or less they can accept single phase input power Note Larger mod els may be able to accept single phase with derating Contact your Omron distributor for assistance The common terminology for single phase power is line L and Neutral N Three phase power connections are usually labeled Line 1 R L1 Line 2 S L2 and Line 3 T L3 In any case the power source should include an earth ground connection That ground connection will need to connect to the inverter chassis and to the motor frame see Wire the Inverter Output to Motor in section 2 3 12 page 51 and Inverter output terminal U T1 V T2 W T3 in section 2 3 9 page 47 1 3 5 Inverter Output to the Motor The AC motor must be connected only to the inverter s 3 phase AC motor output terminals The output terminals are uniquely UTI labeled to differentiate them from the input terminals with the designations U T1 V T2 and W T3 This cor responds to typical motor lead connection designations T1 T2 and T3 It is often not necessary to connect a particular motor lead for a new application The conse quence of swapping any two of the three connections is the reversal of the motor direction In applications w r3 W2 where reversed rotation could cause equipment dam Earth GND age or personnel injury be sure to verify direction of rotation before attempting full s
26. orGinput__ ON 1 Acceleration up to the speed P070 ORL input __ f on sid 2 Running at low speed P070 3 DC braking when ORL signal ON Outut Freq j Low speed P070 Position Home position 2 High speed homing P068 01 ORG input 2 Running at high speed P071 ORL input iii eae 1 Acceleration up to the speed P071 3 Deceleration when ORL signal ON 4 Running at low speed P070 in reverse direction 3 5 DC braking when ORL signal OFF Outut Freq pes High speed P071 Home position Position 4 Low speed P070 4 3 9 9 Preset Position Function If the P083 parameter is not 0 when Input terminal function PSET 91 which added newly as a set range of C001 to C007 is ON the inverter set a value of P083x4 into a current position inside level Here P083 is the value that is not 4 multiply like a position command This function is effective about P075 Positioning Mode Selection 00 01 both sides P Function Run Func Setting Range Mode poaa Preset positon data 268435455 to 268435455 V 0o 3 9 10 Positioning with Brake Control In the case of brake control significance b120 01 close brakes with the position management end in simple position control significance P012 02 Ignore b127 as brakes injection frequency then and apply P015 creep speed setting automatically In the case of brake control function is enabled b120 01 and sim
27. 0 01 A 2nd motor parameter J auto tuning data H234 high H234 low 1 to 9999000 0 001 346 Unused Inaccessible ModBus mapping Section B 5 B 5 ModBus mapping B 5 1 Modbus mapping function B 5 1 1 Functional outline An existing register number is allocated in an arbitrary register number The list of the communication that can use this function is shown below Communication Option board Modbus RS485 USB B 5 1 2 Setting parameter Setting parameters of Modbus mapping function P200 Serial comms mode Communication mode selection P201 to P210 Modbus external register 1 to 10 External register selection P211 to P220 Modbus register format 1 to 10 Format of external register P221 to P230 Modbus register scaling 1 to 10 Scaling data P301 to P310 Modbus internal register 1 to 10 Internal register selection The number of set registers is limited to 10 B 5 1 2 1 P200 Serial comms mode Communication mode selection Func Code Name Settings Peod Serial comms mode 00 Standard 01 Free mapping 00 Standard Modbus registers according with Appendix B 4 list 01 Free mapping where special registers on parameters P201 to P210 could be used When the setting is changed new configuration will be reflected immediately But only if inverter is not in RUN Please don t access the register relevant to Modbus mapping at the time of P200
28. 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Output current at tripping 0 07 A DC input voltage at tripping 1 V Cumulative running time at tripping 1 h Cumulative power on time at tripping Th Fault monitor 3 factor Fault monitor 3 inverter status Fault monitor 3 frequency high Fault monitor 3 frequency low Fault monitor 3 voltage Fault monitor 3 running time high Fault monitor 3 running time low Fault monitor 3 current Fault monitor 3 power on time high Fault monitor 3 power on time low See the list of inverter trip factors below See the list of inverter trip factors below 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Output current at tripping 0 07 A DC input voltage at tripping 1 V Cumulative running time at tripping 1 h Cumulative power on time at tripping Th Fault monitor 4 factor Fault monitor 4 inverter status Fault monitor 4 frequency high Fault monitor 4 frequency low Fault monitor 4 voltage Fault monitor 4 running time high Fault monitor 4 running time low Fault monitor 4 current Fault monitor 4 power on time high Fault monitor 4 power on time low See the list of inverter trip factors below See the list of inverter trip factors below 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Output
29. 0Q ooQ V 0Q RB 0Q TR3 W H o0Q RB L ie woe i TRB jeee Note The resistance values for the diodes or the transistors will not be exactly the same but they will be close If you find a significance difference a problem may exist Note Before measuring the voltage between and with the DC current range confirm that the smoothing capacitor is discharged fully then execute the tests 282 Maintenance and Inspection 6 4 4 General Inverter Electrical Measurements The following table specifies how to measure key system electrical parame ters The diagrams on the next page show inverter motor systems and the location of measurement points for these parameters Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Parameter Supply voltage E4 Circuit location of measurement Er across L1 and L2 Es across L2 and L3 Ey across L3 and L1 Supply current l4 eae I L2 k La Supply power W W441 across L1 and L2 W12 across L2 and L3 Measuring instrument Moving coil type volt meter or rectifier type voltmeter Fundamental wave effective value Section 6 4 Reference Value Commercial supply volt age 200 V class 200 240 V 50 60 Hz 400 V class 380 460 V 50 60 Hz Total effective value Total effective value Supply power factor Pf Pf ui x100 J3 xE xl Output voltage Eo Ey across U and V Ey ac
30. Although LAD refers to linear acceleration deceleration the inverter only STOPs the accel Output eration and deceleration ramp so frequency that it will not cause an over cur rent trip event The graph at right shows an pe umesae inverter output profile that starts 0 i it acceleration to a constant Set acc time speed At two different points Actual acc time during the acceleration motor current increases and exceeds the fixed level of Over current Trip Suppression level When the Over current Trip Suppression feature is enabled by bU271 0 the inverter stops the acceleration ramp in each case until the motor current level is again less than the threshold value which is approximately 180 of the rated current of the inverter When using the Over current Trip Suppression feature please note the follow ing e When the feature is enabled b027 0 the actual acceleration may be longer than the value set by parameters FO0e FeGe in some cases e With bg271 Ue the behavior will be the same than with option 01 only dif ference is that reduced voltage start will be used when the ramp is changed B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 e The Over current Trip Suppression feature does not operate by maintain ing a constant motor current So it is still possible to have an over current trip event during extreme acceleration B Function Defaults bOe Overloa
31. Digital operator selected Press the _y key to store Stores parameter returns to A002 Note After completing the steps above the Run Key Enable LED will be ON This does not mean the motor is trying to run it means that the RUN key is now enabled DO NOT press the RUN key at this time complete the parameter setup first 3 Set the Motor Base Frequency and AVR voltage of the motor The motor is designed to operate at a specific AC frequency Most commercial motors are designed for 50 60 Hz operation First check the motor specifica tions Then follow the steps below to verify the setting or correct it for your motor DO NOT set it greater than 50 60 Hz unless the motor manufacturer specifically approves operation at the higher frequency Action Display Func Parameter Starting point RODE Run command source setting Press the A key once pggg Base frequency setting Press the _ key 60 4 Default value for the base frequency US 60 Hz Europe 50 Hz Ww ca ia Press the A key to select 60 0 Set to your motor specs your display may be different Press the key ADO Stores parameter returns to A003 Z Caution If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting 50 Hz 60 Hz be sure to check the motor an
32. Option Code Function Name Fatal fault ON Description signal OFF Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings Notes e The output applies to the tripping caused by hardware as shown below 4 6 31 Window Comparator for Analog Inputs The window comparator function outputs signals when the value of analog inputs O and Ol are within the maximum and minimum limits specified for the window comparator You can monitor analog inputs with reference to arbi trary levels to find input terminal disconnection and other errors Refer to SECTION 3 Configuring Drive Parameters on page 69 for detailed information Terminal Symbol Option Code Function Name Window comparator O ON Description O input is inside of the window comparator OFF O input is outside of the window comparator Window ON comparator Ol Ol input is inside of the window comparator OFF Ol input is outside of the window comparator Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings bO60 6065 b010 bO Notes e Output values of ODc and OlDc are the same as those of WCO and WCOI respectively 4 6 32 Frequency Command Source Run Command Source Terminal Symbol Function Name Frequency command Description source Run ON command source OFF Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2
33. Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Section C 2 B Group Parameters Default Setting User Name EU Setting Carrier frequency Initialization selection 00 Initialization parameter selection 01 Frequency conversion coefficient STOP key selection 00 Free run stop selection 00 Automatic carrier reduction 01 Usage rate of regenerative bracking 0 0 function Stop selection 00 Cooling fan control 01 Clear elapsed time of cooling fan 00 Initialization target data 00 Regenerative braking function 00 operation selection Regenerative braking function ON 360 720 level BRD resistor 100 0 Free V f frequency 1 0 Free V f voltage 1 0 0 Free V f frequency 2 0 Free V f voltage 2 0 0 Free V f frequency 3 0 Free V f voltage 3 0 0 Free V f frequency 4 0 Free V f voltage 4 0 0 Free V f frequency 5 0 Free V f voltage 5 0 0 Free V f frequency 6 0 Free V f voltage 6 0 0 Free V f frequency 7 0 Free V f voltage 7 0 0 Brake control selection 00 Brake wait time for release 0 00 Brake wait time for acceleration 0 00 Brake wait time for stopping 0 00 Brake wait time for confirmation 0 00 Brake release frequency 0 00 Brake release current Rated current Braking input frequency 0 00 Overvoltage protection function 01 selection during deceleration Overvoltage protection level during 380 760 deceleration Overvoltage protection parameter 1 00 Overvoltage protection proportional 0 20 gain setting Overvoltage protect
34. Single phase 200 V 0 7 to 2 2 kW Three phase 200 V 1 5 to 15 kW Three phase 400 V All size Section 2 1 Orientation to Inverter Features 2 1 3 User removable parts by each inverter size 1 phase 200 V 0 1 0 2 0 4 kW 3 phase 200 V 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 75 kW IP20 A A dimension is the same the D dimension for the cooling fin varies depending on the capacity Even if the W x H phase 200 V 0 75 1 5 2 2 kW 3 phase 200 V 1 5 2 2 kW 1 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 0 kW 3 phase 400 V 0 4 nn TN NI N i AVY ONY V N 7 Ss O gt THY At A N NX WL 1 Cooling fan cover 2 Cooling fan dimension is the same the D dimension for the cooling fin varies depending on the capacity Even if the W x H NINUN 5 Terminal block cover 6 Optional board cover 7 Backing plate Cooling fin 3 Main housing 4 3 Note phase 200 V 0 75 kW models come with a cooling fan 1 phase 200 V 0 75 kW models and 3 phase 400 V 0 4 kW 0 75 kW models do not come with a cooling fan 23 Section 2 1 Orientation to Inverter Features 3 phase 200 V 3 7 kW 3 phase 400V 4 0 kW AN LSM NY WWW A Sa aa zman AUI WO WON WU phase 200 V 5 5 7 5 kW 3 phase 400 V 5 5 7 5 kW 3 WWW A WMA
35. Use of the ON OFF signal delay functions are optional Note that any of the intelligent output assignments in this section can be combined with ON OFF signal timing delay configurations 227 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 4 6 5 Run Signal 228 When the RUN signal is selected as an intelligent output terminal the inverter outputs a signal on that terminal when it is in Run Mode The output logic is active low and is the open collector type switch to ground Function Name Run Signal Option Terminal Code Symbol ON Section 4 6 FW RV Output frequency Run signal Description when inverter is in Run Mode OFF when inverter is in Stop Mode Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Example for terminal 11 default Required settings none output configuration shown see Notes e The inverter outputs the RUN signal when ever the inverter output exceeds the start fre quency specified by parameter bU82 The start frequency is the initial inverter output fre quency when it turns ON The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor page 158 1 Inverter output 1 terminal circuit l Example for terminal ALO AL1 AL2 requires output configuration see page 226 and page 158 r 1 Inve
36. Valid for inputs Coo i coo7 Required settings 4 5 13 Torque Limit Enabled bOe I bOeb_ bee I bees This function is to select the torque limit mode Please refer to chapter 3 for the detailed description of the function Terminal Symbol Option Code Function Name Torque limit Description b040 value is enabled as torque enabled b040 value is disabled Valid for inputs Coo i coo7 Required settings 4 5 14 Torque Limit Switching bO4O bO4Y This function is to select the torque limit mode Please refer to chapter 3 6 for the detailed description of the function Terminal Symbol Option Code Function Name Torque limit switching Description Torque limit value of bO4 to bO4YY will be selected by the combination of the switches Valid for inputs Coo Com7 Required settings 4 5 15 Brake Confirmation BOY I bO44 This function is for brake performance Please refer to chapter 3 for the detailed description of the function Terminal Symbol Option Code Function Name Brake confirmation Description Brake confirmation signal is being given Brake confirmation signal is not given Valid for inputs Coo i Coo7 Required settings b 20 b 121 COe COee 215 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 16 LAD Cancel This function is for canceling the set ram
37. output current 3 6 Section 1 2 VT 3 5 A 4 6 8 10 12 1416kH Carrier frequency CT 3 0 A 1 O 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency VT 3 5 A 3 6 40 C individual 40 C side by side 50 C individual C individual C side by side 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 1416kH 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency Carrier frequency CT 3 4 A VT 4 1 A 44 4 0 Vl WA 3 0 40 C Side by side shen 50 C Norma 2 0 4 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16kH 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency Carrier frequency VT 19 6 A CT 17 5 A 10 12 14 16kH 4 6 8 Carrier frequency 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency i i 11 MX2 Inverter Specifications 3G3MX2 A4040 CT 9 2 A 12 11 A EPE i 40 C individual 10 ae side by sid 9 output current 7 6 O 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16kH Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A2075 CT 33 0 A output current 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16kH Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A4075 CT 18 0 A output current 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16kH Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A2110 CT 47 0 A 40 C individual 40 C sidee by side output current
38. 55Hz e Location 1000 meters or less altitude indoors no corrosive gas or dust 377 Omron EMC Recommendations Section D 2 378 E 1 Introduction Appendix E Safety ISO 13849 1 The Gate Suppress function can be utilized to perform a safe stop according to the EN60204 1 stop category 0 Uncontrolled stop by power removal It is designed to meet the requirements of the 1S013849 1 PL d and IEC61508 SIL 2 only in a system in which EDM signal is monitored by an external device monitor E 2 Stop Category defined in EN60204 1 E 3 How it works Category 0 Uncontrolled stop by immediate lt 200 ms shut down of the power supply to the actuators Category 1 Controlled stop by interrupting the power supply to the actuator level if for example the hazardous movement has been brought to a standstill time delayed shut down of the power supply Category 2 Controlled stop The power supply to the drive element is not interrupted Additional measures to EN 1037 protection from unexpected restart are necessary Interrupting the current to GS1 or GS2 for example removing the link between either GS1 or GS2 and PLC or both GS1 GS2 and PLC disables the drive output i e the power supply to the motor is cut by stopping the switching of the output transistors in a safe way EDM output is activated when GS1 and GS2 are given to the drive Always use both inputs to disable the drive EDM output conducts when both GS1 and G
39. Connection to field wiring terminals must be reliably fixed having two indepen dent means of mechanical support Use a termination with cable support fig ure below or strain relief cable clamp etc A double pole disconnection device must be fitted to the incoming main power supply close to the inverter Additionally a protection device meet IEC947 1 IEC947 3 must be fitted at this point protection device data shown in 2 3 6 Determining Wire and Fuse Sizes on page 45 The above instructions together with any other requirements highlighted in this manual must be followed for continue LVD European Low Voltage Direc tive compliance Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual 3 3 Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual N HIGH VOLTAGE N HIGH VOLTAGE N WARNING A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution Cautions and Warnings for Orientation and Mounting Procedures Hazard of electrical shock Disconnect incoming power before changing wir ing put on or take off optional devices or replace cooling fans Wait ten 10 minutes before removing the front COVED ssssssssssssrisssssrrsssrsrrrssrrrnnssrnens 22 Hazard of electrical shock Never touch the naked PCB printed circuit board portions while the unit is powered up Even for switch portion the inverter must be powered OFF before you change ccsceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesenes 29 In the cases be
40. Other device on the electrical input output Input meaa Output characteristics at both ends of Giauii Giren each connection shown in the Output Input diagram to the right The O sum circuit inverter s configurable inputs accept either a sourcing or sink ing output from an external device such as PLC This Other device MX2 inverter chapter shows the inverter s internal electrical component s at each I O terminal In some cases you will need to insert a power source in the interface wiring In order to avoid equipment damage and get your application running smoothly we recom mend drawing a schematic of each connection between the inverter and the other device Include the internal components of each device in the schematic so that it makes a complete cir cuit loop After making the schematic then 1 Verify that the current and voltage for each connection is within the oper ating limits of each device 2 Make sure that the logic sense active high or active low of any ON OFF connection is correct 3 Check the zero and span curve end points for analog connections and be sure the scale factor from input to output is correct 4 Understand what will happen at the system level if any particular device suddenly loses power or powers up after other devices 193 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices Section 4 2 4 2 1 Example Wiring Diagram The schematic diagram below provides a general example of logi
41. 12 or to the relay output terminal Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name 3 THM Thermal ON Accumulated thermal level exceeds warning the electronic thermal warning level EDE OFF Accumulated thermal level does not exceed the electronic thermal warning level CO6 1 Valid for inputs Required settings Notes e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 4 6 15 External Brake Related Output Signals These signals are used with brake control function To output the warning signals assign function 19 BRK and 20 BER to the intelligent output terminals 11 and 12 or to the relay output terminal Refer to SECTION 3 Configuring Drive Parameters on page 69 detailed explanation of the brake control function 11 12 ALO AL2 CO6 I Function Name Brake ON release OFF Brake ON error OFF 11 12 ALO AL2 b Ie b Ie Terminal Symbol Description Brake is ready to be released Brake is not ready to be released Brake error has occurred Brake is working properly Valid for inputs Required settings Notes e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by
42. 192 376 180 A2150 100 AX FIM3005 SE V1 A4004 A4007 6 AX FIM3010 SE V1 mQ 50 166 1136 31 150 BO A4015 A4022 A4030 12 3 x 400 V AX FIM3014 SE V1 142 171 161 120 112 A4040 15 AX FIM3030 SE V1 140 55 304 290 122 286 A4055 A4075 29 AX FIM3050 SE V1 180 344 330 160 323 140 A4110 A4150 48 260 Component Descriptions Section 5 2 5 2 5 DC Reactor The DC Reactor suppresses harmonics generated by the inverter It attenu ates the high frequency components on the inverter s internal DC bus link However note that it does not protect the diode rectifiers in the inverter input circuit Dimensions mm crisis Max a eight motor Current Inductance Voltage Reference A B c D E F G H kg output value A mH kW AX RC21400016 DE 96 1 22 0 2 1 6 21 4 AX RC10700032 DE f 0 4 3 2 10 7 AX RC06750061 DE 84 113 105 101 66 5 7 5 2 1 60 0 7 6 1 6 75 AX RC03510093 DE f 1 5 9 3 3 51 200 V AX RC02510138 DE 116 1 95 2 2 13 8 2 51 AX RC01600223 DE 108 135 124 120 82 6 5 9 5 3 20 3 7 22 3 1 60 AX RC01110309 DE 136 9 5 5 20 5 5 30 9 1 11 AX RC00840437 DE He Pe 146 kadi 7 6 00 7 5 43 7 0 84 AX RC00590614 DE 160 11 4 11 0 61 4 0 59 AX RC00440859 DE TOO ee 182 6 1O01 a
43. ACC DEC CST Enabled during acceleration decelera tion constant speed 0 I Const Enabled only during constant speed Thermal warning level Set range is 0 to 100 Setting 0 means disabled 90 0 Hz detection level Set range is 0 00 to 100 00 Hz 0 00 Fin overheat warning level Set range is 0 to 110 C 100 Overload warning level 2 0 0 to 3 20 x Rated current Rated current C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 3 7 6 Network Communications Settings The following table lists parameters that configure the inverter s serial commu nications port The settings affect how the inverter communication with a digi tal operator such as 3G3AX OP05 as well as a ModBus network for networked inverter applications The settings cannot be edited via the network in order to ensure network reliability Refer to Appendix B ModBus Network Communications on page 295 for more information on controlling any monitoring your inverter from a network C Function Communication speed selection Description Eight option codes 03 2 400 bps 04 4 800 bps D5 9 600 bps D6 19 200 bps 01 38 400 bps 08 57 600 bps 09 76 800 bps 10 115 200 bps Section 3 7 Defaults Communication station No Selection Set the address of the inverter on the network Range is 1 to 247 Communication parity selection Three option codes 00 No parity 01
44. D 1 ON Enabled Oe Decel OFF Disabled during stop and deceleration stop Momentary power interruption retry time selection Two option codes 00 16 times D I No limit Frequency matching lower limit frequency setting Restart the motor from OHZ if the frequency becomes less than this set value during the motor is coasting range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Trip retry selection Select inverter restart method Five option codes 00 TRIP 01 0 Hz start Oe f match Frequency matching start 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 Actv F match Active Fre quency Matching restart Overvoltage overcurrent retry time selection Range is 1 to 3 times Trip retry wait time Range is 0 3 to 100 0 sec B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 2 Active Frequency Matching Restart Goal of the active frequency matching is the same as normal frequency matching Difference is the method Please select the suitable one for your application B Function Defaults Description Active Frequency Matching Sets the current level of active Rated restart level freq matching restart range is current 0 32 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current Active Frequency Matching Sets the deceleration rate when 0 50 restart parameter active freq matching restart range is 0 10 to 3000 0 resolution 0 1 Starting frequency a
45. EZCOM function is interrupted in case the data from master inverter was not received In case it is interrupted please turn on off the power or reset reset terminal on off Communication station No Selection Data Range Description Network address Communication error selection Trip Trip after deceleration stop Ignore Free run stop Deceleration stop Communication error timeout 0 00 Disabled 0 01 99 99 sec Communication wait time 0 1000 ms Communication selection 00 Modbus RTU 01 EzCOM 02 EzCOM admin EzCOM start adr of master EzCOM end adr of master EzCOM starting trigger 00 485 input 01 Always ON EZCOM number of data 1to5 EzCOM destination 1 address 1 to 247 Note 3 EzCOM destination 1 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM source 1 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM destination 2 address 1 to 247 EzCOM destination 2 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM source 2 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM destination 3 address 1 to 247 EZCOM destination 3 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM source 3 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM destination 4 address 1 to 247 EzCOM destination 4 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM source 4 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM destination 5 address 1 to 247 EzCOM destination 5 register 0000 to FFFF EzCOM source 5 r
46. Even Oe Odd Communication stop bit selection Two option codes 01 1 bit Oe 2 bit Communication error selection Selects inverter response to com munications error Five options 00 Trip D I Decel Trip Trip after deceleration stop Qe Ignore 03 Free RUN Free run stop 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop Communication error timeout Sets the communications watch dog timer period Range is 0 00 to 99 99 sec 0 00 disabled Communication wait time Time the inverter waits after receiving a message before it transmits Range is 0 to 1000 ms 167 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 3 7 7 Analog Input Signal Calibration Settings The functions in the following Freq setpoint table configure the signals fOr Max freq f eats the analog input terminals Note that these settings do not change the current voltage or sink source characteristics only the zero and span scaling of Max freq 2 the signals These parameters are already 0 i adjusted before the shipment OV 4mA 5V 12mA 10V 20mA and therefore it is not recom mended to do the adjustment at the customer C Function Defaults Description O adjustment Scale factor between the external frequency command on terminals L O voltage input and the fre quency output range is 0 0 to 200 0 Ol adjustment Scale factor between the external frequency comm
47. Low speed overload protection If overload occurs during the motor operation at a very low speed the inverter will detect the overload and shut off the inverter output Operator connection When the connection between inverter and operator keypad failed inverter trips and displays the error code Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions Modbus communication error Section 6 2 Cause s When trip is selected C076 00 as a behavior in case of communication error inverter trips when timeout happens Drive Programming invalid instruction The program stored in inverter memory has been destroyed or the PRG terminal was turned on without a program downloaded to the inverter Drive Programming nesting count error Subroutines if statement or for next loop are nested in more than eight layers Drive Programming instruction error Inverter found the command which cannot be executed Drive Programming user trip 0 to 9 When user defined trip happens inverter trips and displays the error code Option errors error in con nected option board the meanings change upon the connected option These errors are reserved for the option board Each option board can show the errors for a dif ferent meaning To check the specific mean ing please refer to the corresponding option board user manual and documentation Encoder disconnection If the encoder wiring
48. MX2 No 1 Terminate Network Wiring The RS 485 wiring must be terminated at each physical end to suppress electrical reflections and help decrease transmission errors MX2 has a built in 200 resistor activated by a dip switch Select termi nation resistors that match the characteristic impedance of the network cable The diagram above shows a network with the needed termination resistor at each end 296 Connecting the Inverter to ModBus Section B 2 Inverter Parameter Setup The inverter has several settings related to ModBus communications The table below lists them together The Required column indicates which parameters must be set properly to allow communica tions You may need to refer to the host computer documentation in order to match some of its settings Frequency reference selection Required Settings 00 Digital operator 01 Terminal 02 Operator 03 ModBus communication 10 Operation function result Run command selection 01 Terminal 02 Operator 03 ModBus communication Communication speed selection Baud rate selection 03 2400 bps 04 4800 bps 05 9600 bps 06 19 2 k bps 07 38 4 k bps 08 57 6 k bps 09 76 8 k bps 10 115 2 k bps Communication station No Selection Network address range is 1 to 247 Communication parity selection 00 No parity 01 Even 02 Odd Communication stop bit selection Range is 1 or 2 Communication error selection 00 Trip 01 Decel Tri
49. Mode The Program LED is ON when the inverter is in Program Mode and OFF for Monitor Mode All four mode combinations are possible The dia Proa gram to the right depicts the modes me and the mode transitions via keypad STOP RESET RUN Some factory automation devices such as PLCs have alternative Run Pro gram modes the device is in either one mode or the other In the Omron inverter however Run Mode alternates with Stop Mode and Program Mode alternates with Monitor Mode This arrangement lets you program some value while the inverter is operating providing flexibility for maintenance person nel 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 SECTION 3 Configuring Drive Parameters Choosing a Programming Device Introduction Omron variable frequency drives inverters use the latest electronics technol ogy for getting the right AC waveform to the motor at the right time The bene fits are many including energy savings and higher machine output or productivity The flexibility required to handle a broad range of applications has required ever more configurable options and parameters inverter are now a complex industrial automation component And this can make a prod uct seem difficult to use but the goal of this chapter is to make this easier for you As the powerup test in 2 4 Powerup Test demonstrated you do not have to program very many parameters to run the motor In fact most applications would benefit only from programming
50. Multi step speed reference 1 to 15 Ade I A035 Jump frequency A063 A063 A063 A064 AQ66 AG68 Free setting V f frequency 7 Frequency upper limit ADE 1 Free setting V f frequency 7 Frequency lower limit A062 Free setting V f frequency 7 Output frequency setting monitor F00 I Multi step speed reference 0 A020 Frequency upper limit ACB 1 2nd maximum Frequency A204 Frequency lower limit Ac6e 2nd maximum Frequency A204 Output frequency setting monitor FOD 1 2nd multi step speed reference 0 A220 2nd maximum Frequency A204 Output frequency setting monitor FOD 1 2nd multi step speed reference 0 A220 Frequency upper limit A26 1 Frequency lower limit A262 Output frequency setting monitor F00 1 2nd multi step speed reference 0 Acca Starting frequency b08e Frequency upper limit A26 1 Starting frequency b082 Frequency lower limit A262 Starting frequency b08e Output frequency setting monitor F00 1 2nd multi step speed reference 0 AccQ Output frequency setting monitor FOD 1 2nd multi step speed reference 0 AccQ Jump frequency A063 AG63 AQ63 A064 A066 A068 Free setting V f frequency 7 Frequency upper limit A26 1 Free setting V f frequency 7 Frequency lower limit A262 Free setting V f frequency 7 Output frequency setting monitor F00 1 2nd multi step speed refe
51. Operations and Monitoring ccc cree cccccccccccescssccesecsccsscsecs 191 Introduction scena rene A tach vata aliphatic an bebe oe bare atthe 191 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices 0 0 ee cece tenn ene eens 193 Control Logic Signal Specifications si ieran tei a eee een eee nen neee 195 IntelligentTermunal Listing sioa e yaa Mahe Fees Kah cd eels Sas Wad eee SE BRE Capes baw ERRET 198 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 2 2 2 eee een n eens 201 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 0 2 tee ete eee e nen n eee 225 Analog Input Operation 204di toda edtbawd chew badd bowtbac abate teabawetbe dad heen hd 250 Analogs Output Operatone S misa 1 seed Wk Beek BE Bed BA Ee Fed BE Pe PEA REEDS A PER eS 252 iv Table of contents SECTION 5 Inverter System Accessories lt 5 e694ko 6 oh CeO VES we EOS Rea ed Ne oe EROS Seeeee ee 255 Intouch Onis 45 0 42 seit asada pee Sho wat ech ceo Wendel arama ag cig EEEE E AAE E E EEE teeth 255 Component Descriptions 34 4 ecaes ete ee Ries ik 64 OS Re ee eee Lo etled Hae Et eee beeen seg oSP eel shes 256 Dynamic Braking vice 220 0 2 Sed gh a Se dig ih ly Bh A eS UME Sole oe aah Oe eR a es Soh Se Be 262 SECTION 6 Troubleshooting and Maintenance c cece cece cece cece ce eccscescsecsees 267 Eroubleshootins i603 334 5s oA a Ao SANE ae Soha be Sige k AL aes eke ate ead ak ke eb alae 267 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions 0 0 eee cee cece enn
52. Please refer to page 237 for detailed information Zero speed detection Output The inverter outputs the 0 Hz speed detec tion signal when the inverter output frequency falls below the threshold fre quency specified in the zero speed detection level C053 To use this function assign parameter 2 l to one of the intelligent output ter minals 11 to 12 CO2 to C022 or to the alarm relay output terminal C026 This function applies to the inverter output frequency when the V F character istic curve selection is based on the constant torque VC reduced torque VP free V F or sensorless vector control Heat Sink Overheat Warning Output The inverter monitors the tempera ture of its heat sink and outputs the heat sink overheat warning OHF signal when the temperature exceeds the heat sink overheat warning level specified in parameter COBY C Function Defaults Description Overload warning signal output Two option codes mode 00 ACC DEC CST Enabled during acceleration decelera tion constant speed D 1 Const Enabled only during constant speed Overload warning level 0 0 Does not operate Rated current 0 1 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current Overload warning level 0 0 Does not operate Rated current 2nd motor 0 1 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current Arrival frequency during Sets the frequency arrival setting acceleration threshold for the output frequency during acceleration
53. USB power Self power f Option port connector Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 MX2 control wiring quick reference IP54 Breaker MCCB Rea a or GFI Power source 3 phase or 1 phase per inverter model i i 1 S i 1 i l f NS EMC Lc i OO e Be y es i I A 1 eevee oc 14 I L ee DC reactor P 5 optional Intelligent inputs 7 terminals P24 P Forward l NOTE l Braking For the wiring of intelligent O O l resistor unit 1 0 and analog inputs optional optional be sure to use twisted O O pair shielded cable Attach the shielded wire O O 3 circuits for each signal to its l respective common O O 4 GS2 terminal at the inverter end only Input impedance of each intelligent input is J I I Relay contacts I type 1 Form C I I I I 5 configurable as discrete input or thermistor input 4 7 kW Open collector output Freq arrival signal TED Thermistor Short bar Source type GND for logic inputs I l Freq Meter I CM2 Termination resistor 200 W p Common for logic outputs Change by slide switch I sila Serial communication I port I RS485 MocBus RJ45 port Optional operator port Pulse train input 24 VDC 32 kHz max USB mini B port PC communication port USB power Self power Option port connector Option port controller GND for analog signals 53 Step by St
54. a wire as possible When the EEPROM error E08 occurs be sure to confirm the setting values again xvii Precautions for Safe Use 5 xviii A Caution A Caution A Caution 5 When using normally closed active state settings C011 to C017 for exter nally commanded Forward or Reverse terminals FW or RV the inverter may start automatically when the external system is powered OFF or discon nected from the inverter So do not use normally closed active state settings for Forward or Reverse terminals FW or RV unless your system design pro tects against unintended motor operation In all the instrumentations in this manual covers and safety devices are occa sionally removed to describe the details While operating the product make sure that the covers and safety devices are placed as they were specified originally and operate it according to the instruction manual Do not discard the inverter with household waste Contact an industrial waste management company in your area who can treat industrial waste without polluting the environment Precautions for Safe Use Installation and Storage Do not store or use the product in the following places e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications e Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications e Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations e Locations sub
55. check voltage between O and L termi nal In case of analog current check current between current source and Ol terminal Overload restriction or OC suppression function works Check the function level Max frequency A004 or upper limit AGE I A26 1 is lower than as expected Check the value Acceleration time is excessive Change acceleration time FO0 A09 Ac9e Multi speed input s D2 to 05 CF1 to CF4 is are set to input terminal s and active Deactivate the input s 06 JG is set to input terminal and the input is active Deactivate the input Excess load Remove excess load Motor is locked Unlock the motor 4 Inverter does not respond to changes in frequency setting from operator Possible Cause s Corrective Action Incorrect frequency source is selected Check frequency reference selection AQG I 02 5 F TM is set to input terminal and the input is active 5 Apart of function codes is n Deactivate the input ot displayed Possible Cause s Corrective Action Display selection 6037 is enabled Set 00 complete display to b037 B6 DISP is set to input terminal and the input is active 6 Operator keypad does not Deactivate the input respond Possible Cause s Corrective Action B6 DISP is set to input terminal and the input is active Deactivate the input
56. if the motor 0 current rises up to the value set in 6028 the inverter decreases the frequency according to the deceleration time set in b829 and finally comes to the required speed Following are the related Motor parameters for this control a oO Zero frequency start or co Lo co Wait time i i bog t uu H 7 i Motor speed Code Parameter contents bO28 Active frequency matching restart level bO29 Active frequency matching restart parameter b030 Start frequency at active frequency matching restart bO88 Free run stop selection b09 Stop selection B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 B Function Defaults Description EU Units Free run stop selection Selects how the inverter resumes operation when free run stop FRS is cancelled three options 00 OHz start D1 f match Frequency matching start De Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart Stop mode selection Select how the inverter stops the motor two option codes 00 DEC decelerate to stop D1 FRS free run to stop 3 6 20 Free V F Settings Related Please refer to chapter 3 for detailed explanation of the function B Function Defaults Description Units Free V F frequency 1 Set range 0 value of b IDe Free V F voltage 1 Set range 0 0 800 0 V Free V F frequency 2 Set range value of b 100 b 104 Free V F voltage
57. it may fall and cause injury to personnel o oo eee eeeeee ee eeeee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaae 30 Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to vibra tion Otherwise it may fall and cause injury to personnel n 30 Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing parts Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel 2 9Be sure to install the inverter in a well ventilated room that does not have direct exposure to sun light a tendency for high temperature high humidity or dew condensation high levels of dust corrosive gas explosive gas inflammable gas grinding fluid mist salt damage etc Otherwise there is the danger of fire 30 Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to provide adequate ventilation Otherwise the inverter may overheat and cause equipment damage OF fire ccc ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 ix Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual 3 N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N HIGH VOLTAGE N HIGH VOLTAGE N HIGH VOLTAGE N HIGH VOLTAGE Z N WARNING Wiring Warnings for Electrical Practice and Wire Specifications USE 60 75 C Cu wire only or equivalent For models 3G3MX2 AB004 AB007 AB022 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 seses 45 USE 75 C Cu wire only or equivalent For models 3G
58. lower limit b063 b064 2 1 teresis width 1345h to Reserved 1348h 1349h Analog operation level atO dis 0 to 100 or no ignore 1 connection 134Ah Analog operation level at Ol 0 to 100 or no ignore 1 disconnection 134Bh to reserved 134Dh 134Eh Ambient temperature 10 to 50 134Fh to reserved 1350 1351h Integrated power clear Clearance by setting 01 1352h Integrated power display gain 1 to 1000 1353h to Reserved 1354h 1355h Starting frequency 10 to 999 0 01 Hz 1356h Carrier frequency 20 to 150 0 1 kHz 1357h Initialization selection 00 clears the trip monitor 01 initializes data 02 clears the trip monitor and ini tializes data 03 clears the trip monitor and parameters 4 clears the trip mon itor parameters Drive program 1358h Initialization parameter selection 00 JPN 01 EUR 1359h Frequency conversion 1 to 9999 coefficient 135Ah STOP key selection 00 enabling 01 disabling 0 disabling only stop 135Bh Free run stop selection 0 starting with 0 Hz 1 starting with matching frequency 2 starting with active matching frequency 135Ch Automatic carrier frequency 00 0 Hz start 01 frequency matching reduction start 02 active frequency matching restart 135Dh Usage rate of regenerative 0 to 1000 braking function 135Eh Stop selection 00 deceleration until stop 01 free run stop 135Fh Cooling fan control 00 alwa
59. nor will it reset a trip alarm N WARNING Be sure to provide a separate hard wired emergency stop switch when the application warrants it 192 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices Section 4 2 4 2 Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices A Caution Omron inverters drives are useful in many types of applications During installation the inverter keypad or other programming device will facilitate the initial configuration After installation the inverter will generally receive its control commands through the control logic connector or serial interface from another controlling device In a simple application such as single conveyor speed control a Run Stop switch and potentiometer will give the operator all the required control In a sophisticated application you may have a program mable logic controller PLC as the system controller with several connections to the inverter It is not possible to cover all the possible types of application in this manual It will be necessary for you to know the electrical characteristics of the devices you want to connect to the inverter Then this section and the following sec tions on I O terminal functions can help you quickly and safely connect those devices to the inverter It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your application exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection point The connections between the inverter and other devices rely
60. not check signals during operation Be sure to connect the grounding terminal to earth ground When inspecting the unit be sure to wait ten minutes after turning OFF the power supply before opening the cover XV General Warnings and Cautions 4 xvi A Caution A Caution A Caution Do not stop operation by switching OFF electromagnetic contactors on the primary or secondary side of the inverter Ground fault interrupter Power Inverter npe ere L1 L2 L3 S oW When there has been a sudden power failure while an operation instruction is active then the unit may restart operation automatically after the power failure has ended If there is a possibility that such an occurrence may harm humans then install an electromagnetic contactor Mgo on the power supply side so that the circuit does not allow automatic restarting after the power supply recovers If the optional remote operator is used and the retry function has been selected this will also cause automatic restarting when a Run command is active So please be careful Do not insert leading power factor capacitors or surge absorbers between the output terminals of the inverter and motor Ground fault interrupter Power Input PONS Inverter L1 L2 L3 U V W GND lug When there has been a sudden power failure while an operation instruction is active then the unit may restart operation automatically after the power failu
61. range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Arrival frequency during Sets the frequency arrival setting deceleration threshold for the output frequency during deceleration range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 165 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 166 C Function PID deviation excessive level Description Sets the allowable PID loop error magnitude absolute value SP PV range is 0 0 to 100 0 Section 3 7 Defaults Arrival frequency during acceleration 2 Set range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Arrival frequency during deceleration 2 Set range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Pulse train input scale conversion for EO output Sets the scale for the pulse input 0 01 to 99 99 PID FB upper limit When the PV exceeds this value the PID loop turns OFF the PID second stage output range is 0 0 to 100 0 PID FB lower limit When the PV goes below this value the PID loop turns ON the PID second stage output range is 0 0 to 100 0 Over torque under torque selection Two option codes 00 Over torque D 1 Under torque Overtorque level Forward power running Set range is 0 to 200 Overtorque level Reverse regeneration Set range is 0 to 200 Overtorque level Reverse power running Set range is 0 to 200 Overtorque level Forward regeneration Set range is 0 to 200 Signal output mode of Over under torque Two option codes 00
62. register for inverter output frequency D4 Option Select when an option card is connected and manual of each use the frequency source from the option option 06 Pulse train input The pulse train given to EA termi 179 251 nal The pulse train must be 24 VDC and 32 kHz max 7 Via Drive Programming The frequency source can Drive be given by the Drive Programming function when it Programming is used manual 0 Calculate function output The Calculated function 118 has user selectable analog input sources A and B The output can be the sum difference or product X of the two outputs A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 Run Command Source Setting For parameter A002 the following table pro vides a further description of each option and a reference to other page s for more information Run Command Source Refer to page s Control terminal The FW or RV input terminals control Run Stop operation Keypad Run key The Run and Stop keys provide 70 control ModBus network input The network has a dedicated 318 coil for Run Stop command and a coil for FW RV Option Select when an option card is connected and manual of each use the frequency source from the option option ADO Adde Override Sources The inverter allows some sources to override the setting for output frequency and Run command in ADO I and A002 This pro vides flexibility for applications that occ
63. to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 6 A026 high A026 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 7 A023 low A027 high 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency After changing the setting keep the time 40 ms or longer before actually give run command 324 0 01 Hz ModBus Data Listing Function name Multi step speed reference 8 Function code A028 high A028 low Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency Data resolution 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 9 A029 high A029 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 10 A030 high A030 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 11 A031 high A031 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 12 A032 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 13 A033 high A033 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 14 A034 high A034 low 0 or start fre
64. 0 kHz 2 0 kHz Motor capacity selection Func code 0 10 to 18 50 kHz Torque reference monitor Depends on type Func code H020 H220 0 10 to 18 50 kHz When ND is selected following parameters are not displayed Motor parameter R1 One size up than HD H021 H221 H022 H222 H023 H223 H024 H224 H030 H230 H031 H231 H032 H232 H033 H233 H034 H234 Torque bias monitor Output torque monitor Torque limit selection Torque limit 1 Torque limit 2 Torque limit 3 Torque limit 4 Torque LADSTOP selection Reverse rotation prevention selection Motor parameter R2 Motor parameter L Motor parameter lo Motor parameter J Motor parameter R1 auto tuning data Motor parameter R2 auto tuning data Motor parameter L auto tuning data Motor parameter lo auto tuning data Motor parameter J auto tuning data 72 Using the Keypad Devices Func code C054 Over torque under torque selection Func code Section 3 2 Torque reference input selection C055 Overtorque level FW PW Torque reference setting C056 Overtorque level RV RG Torque bias mode C057 Overtorque level RV PW Torque bias value C058 Overtorque level FW RG Torque bias polarity selection C059 Signal output mode of Over under torque Speed limit value in torque control FW H001 Auto tuning selection Spe
65. 0 0 to 25 5 1587h PM No Load current 0 00 to 100 00 1588h PM starting method 06 Normal 0I IMPE 158Ah PM IMPE OV wait 0 to 255 158Bh PM IMPE detect wait 0 to 255 158Ch PM IMPE detect 0 to 255 158Dh PM IMPE voltage gain 0 to 200 158Eh to 1600h 338 unused Inaccessible ModBus Data Listing Parameter group P Function name Operation selection at option 1 error Function Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 00 trip 01 continues operation Data resolution Reserved EA terminal selection 00 FQ set 01 Encoder FB 02 EzSQ Pulse train input mode for feed back 00 Single ph 01 2 ph 1 02 2 ph 2 03 Single Dir Reserved Encoder pulses 32 to 1024 Simple positioning selection 00 OFF 02 ON Reserved Creep speed start frequency to 1000 0 01 Hz Reserved Positioning range 0 to 10000 pulses Reserved Over speed error detection level 0 to 1500 0 1 Speed deviation error detection level 0 to 12000 0 01 Hz Reserved Acceleration deceleration time input type P031 00 digital operator 03 drive programming Reserved Torque reference input selection P033 00 terminal O 01 terminal Ol 03 digital operator 06 Option 1 Torque reference setting
66. 0 10 30 00 sec Overvoltage protection Proportional gain when b 130 0 proportional gain setting Range is 0 00 to 5 00 Overvoltage protection inte Integration time when b 130 0 gral time setting Range is 0 0 to 150 0 3 6 23 STO Safe Torque Off Setting Please refer to Appendix E Safety ISO 13849 1 on page 379 for detailed information B Function Defaults Description b 14S GS input mode Two option codes 00 No trip DI Trip 150 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 24 Inverter Mode Setting Besides Dual rating selection b049 MX2 supports two different operation modes standard mode and permanent magnet mode The inverter mode cannot be changed just setting b N 1 After setting b N I be sure to execute initialization to activate new mode Actual inverter mode can be monitored with d060 B Function Defaults Description EU Units Inverter mode selection Two option codes 00 No function DI Std IM Oe Reserved 03 PM Main differences between std mode and permanent magnet mode are as fol lows Function Standard mode Permanent Magnet Rating HD ND HD Max freq A004 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz Start freq b082 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 0 10 to 9 99 Hz 0 10 to 9 99 Hz Carrier freq b083 2 0 to 15 0 KHz 2 0 to 10 0 kHz 2 0 to 15 0 KHz V f characteristic curve 00 Const torque 00 Const torque Not available R04
67. 01 9999 00 to 9999 00 A071 02 A071 PID selection 00 OFF Disabled 00 01 ON Enabled 02 ON Reverse output enabled A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 d155 PID output value x PID scale A075 Note PID output value is a value limited by frequency limit A061 A261 and PID output limit A078 Monitor d155 displays a value after a limit was set The display by digital operator is shown below Display Data 999 to 100 9999 00 to 1000 00 999 to 100 999 99 to 100 00 99 9 to 10 0 99 99 to 10 00 9 99 to 99 99 9 99 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 100 00 to 999 99 1000 to 9999 1000 00 to 9999 00 87 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 3 3 36 Local Monitoring with Keypad Connected The MX2 inverter s serial port may be connected to an external digital opera tor During those times the inverter keypad keys will not function except for the Stop key However the inverter s 4 digit display still provides the Monitor Mode function displaying any of the parameters dQd I to d060 Function b 150 Monitor Display Select for Networked Inverter determines the particular d00x parameter displayed Refer to the previous table When monitoring the inverter with external keypad connected please note the following e The inverter display will monitor d0Ox functions according to b 150 setting when a device is already connected to t
68. 1 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A2022 AWG12 3 3 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A2037 AWG10 5 3 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 AWG6 13 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A2110 AWG4 21 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A2150 AWG2 34 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 AWG16 1 3 mm 3G3MX2 A4022 3G3MX2 A4030 AWG14 2 1 mm 3G3MX2 A4040 AWG12 3 3 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A4075 AWG10 5 3 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A4110 AWG6 13 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 A4150 AWG6 13 mm 75 C only Signal Lines 18 to 28 AWG 0 14 to 0 75 mm2 shielded wire 4 Applicable equipment Fuse UL rated class J 600 V Note 1 Field wiring must be made by a UL Listed and CSA certified closed loop ter minal connector sized for the wire gauge involved Connector must be fixed by using the crimping tool specified by the connector manufacturer Note 2 Be sure to consider the capacity of the circuit breaker to be used Note 3 Be sure to use a larger wire gauge if power line length exceeds 66 ft 20 m Note 4 Use 18 AWG 0 75 mm wire for the alarm signal wire ALO AL1 AL2 ter minals 45 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 3 7 Terminal Dimensions and Torque Specs The terminal screw dimensions for all MX2 inverters are listed in tabl
69. 12 OFF delay Set range is 0 0 to 100 0 sec Relay output ON delay Relay output OFF delay Set range is 0 0 to 100 0 sec Note If you are using the output terminal OFF delay feature any of C 145 C 149 gt 0 0 sec the RS reset terminal affects the ON to OFF transition slightly Nor mally with using OFF delays the RS input causes the motor output and the logic outputs to turn OFF together immediately However when any output uses an OFF delay then after the RS input turns ON that output will remain ON for an additional 1 sec period approximate before turning OFF C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Option Terminal Code Symbol Section 3 7 Output Function Summary Table This table shows all functions for the log ical outputs terminals 11 12 and AL at a glance Detailed descriptions of these functions related parameters and settings and example wiring dia grams are in 4 6 Using Intelligent Output Terminals on page 225 Output Function Summary Table Function Name Signal during RUN Description When the inverter is in Run Mode When the inverter is in Stop Mode Constant speed arrival signal When output to motor is at the set frequency When output to motor is OFF or in any acceleration or deceleration ramp Over set frequency arrival signal When output to motor is at or above the set freq even if in accel C042 or dece
70. 14 3 15 0 85 9 0 44 AX RC43000020 DE 96 1 22 0 4 2 0 43 0 AX RC27000030 DE 105 1 60 0 7 3 0 27 0 AX RC14000047 DE 84 113 101 66 5 7 5 2 i 1 5 4 7 14 0 AX RC10100069 DE 116 1 95 2 2 6 9 10 1 400 V AX RC08250093 DE 131 2 65 3 0 9 3 8 25 AX RC06400116 DE 108 135 133 120 82 6 5 9 5 3 70 4 0 11 6 6 40 AX RC04410167 DE 136 9 5 5 20 5 5 16 7 4 41 AX RC03350219 DE TEO Ase 146 da 7 6 00 7 5 21 9 3 35 AX RC02330307 DE 160 11 4 11 0 30 7 2 33 AX RC01750430 DE TAA 182 6 LSW eg E 14 3 15 0 43 0 1 75 MX2 Power supply RIL ae af j as xm S L2 T3 d we ali 7 2 band DC reactor 261 Dynamic Braking Section 5 3 Voltage Inverter model DC reactor model 1 phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 AX RC10700032 DE 3G3MX2 AB004 AX RC06750061 DE 3G3MX2 AB007 AX RC03510093 DE 3G3MX2 AB015 AX RC02510138 DE 3G3MX2 AB022 AX RC01600223 DE 3 phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 AX RC21400016 DE 3G3MX2 A2004 AX RC10700032 DE 3G3MX2 A2007 AX RC06750061 DE 3G3MX2 A2015 AX RC03510093 DE 3G3MX2 A2022 AX RC02510138 DE 3G3MX2 A2037 AX RC01600223 DE 3G3MX2 A2055 AX RC01110309 DE 3G3MX2 A2075 AX RC00840437 DE 3G3MX2 A2110 AX RC00590614 DE 3G3MX2 A2150 AX RC00440859 DE 3 phase 400 VAC 3G3MX2 A4004 AX RC43000020 DE 3G3MX2 A4007 AX RG27000030 DE 3G3MX2 A40
71. 2 Set range 0 0 800 0 V Free V F frequency 3 Set range value of b 02 b 106 Free V F voltage 3 Set range 0 0 800 0 V Free V F frequency 4 Set range value of b 104 b 108 Free V F voltage 4 Set range 0 0 800 0 V Free V F frequency 5 Set range value of b IDB b I 10 Free V F voltage 5 Set range 0 0 800 0 V Free V F frequency 6 Set range value of b IDB b I Ie Free V F voltage 6 Set range 0 0 800 0 V Free V F frequency 7 Set range b I ID 400 Free V F voltage 7 Set range 0 0 800 0 V x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 3 6 21 Brake Control Function Related The brake control function allows you to make the inverter control an external brake used for a lift or other machines To enable this function specify 0 enabling the brake control function for the Brake Control Enable b 120 This function operates as described below 1 When the inverter receives an operation command it starts the output and accelerates the motor up to the Brake Release Frequency Setting b 125 2 After the Brake Release Frequency Setting is reached the inverter waits for the braking wait time b IZ and then outputs the brake release signal BOK However if the inverter output current has not reached the brake release current b 26 the inverter does not output the brake release sig nal but trips and outputs a brake error signal BER 3 When the braking
72. 2J key to set data has not been activated yet and save the data a lt J Fix and stores the data and moves back to the function code cD Cancels the change and moves back to the function code Note Function code bxxx are for monitor and not possible to change Function codes Fxxx other than FHHH are reflected on the performance just after changing the data before pressing key and there will be no blinking When a function code is shown When a data is shown Move on to the next function group Cancels the change and moves back to the function code Move on to the data display Fix and stores the data and moves back to the function code Increase function code Increase data value Decrease function code Decrease data value Note Keep pressing for more than 1 second leads to d001 display regardless the display situation But note that the display will circulates while keep pressing the key because of the original function of the key e g FOO I gt ABO I gt bO0 I gt C00 I gt gt displays 50 00 after 1 second 61 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 2 5 3 Selecting Functions and Editing Parameters To prepare to run the motor in the powerup test this section will show how to configure the necessary parameters 1 Select the digital operator as the source of motor speed command AGO I 02 Select the digital oper
73. 4 00 high order 11 Register data 4 00 low order 12 Register data 5 00 high order 13 Register data 5 1E low order 14 Register data 6 01 high order 15 Register data 6 1C low order 16 CRC 16 high order AF 17 CRC 16 low order 6D Broadcasting is disabled Data is transferred by the specified number of data bytes data size In this case 6 bytes are used to return the content of three holding registers The PDU Register Number are addressed starting at zero Therefore register numbered 0012h are addressed as 0011h Register address value trans mitted on Modbus line is 1 less than the Register Number 303 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 The data set in the response is as follows Response Buffer 4 5 6 7 8 9 Register Number 12 0 12 0 12 1 12 1 12 2 12 2 high order low order high order low order high order low order 0003h 00h 00h 0063h Trip factor E03 Not used Frequency 9 9Hz Register Data Trip data Response Buffer Register Number 12 4 low order 1245 high order 011Ch DC bus voltage 284V 1245 low order 1243 low order 00h 12 4 high order 001Eh Output current 3 0A 1243 high order 00h Not used Register Data Trip data When the Read Holding Register command cannot be executed normally refer to the exception response Write in Coil 05h This function writes data in a si
74. 6 12 8 A Output frequency Hz 109 150 200 87 2 120 160 Motor current A Motor current A e Free setting b0 13 02 Reduction rate Output current A b018 x0 8 Setting range b016 0 5 400 0 b0l5 b017 bO19 A004 Max FO Output frequency Hz Output frequency Hz 3 6 3 2 Motor Cooling Rate e Several cooling patterns are added If b910 is set to zero exactly the same model than inverter will be used The other options allow to adjust the cooling ramp on a better way and avoid the overload detection in some cases where really the motor is not getting hot 125 126 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 Thermal decrement mode Off b910 00 With this method the thermal level increases when the output current is bigger than internal level value defined in b012 The increase rate is proportional to the overload value When this thermal level counter d104 reach the 100 and overload error E05 is detected This trip could not be reset within 10 seconds after it appears The thermal counter is clear after 10 minutes cycle or when the Reset com mand is used or at inverter power ON Thermal decrement mode with fixed linear ramp b910 01 This setting also increase the counter when the output current is bigger than the internal level but on this case a ramp down of the counter is applied when the output current below this level The decrement rate is fixed to a value of 100 for 10 minutes Ne
75. 999 10 000 to 99 900 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 D Function Power ON time monitor Description Displays total time the inverter has been pow ered up in hours Range is 0 to 9999 1000 to 9999 100 to 999 10 000 to 99 900 Fin temperature monitor Temperature of the cooling fin range is 20 0 150 0 Life assessment monitor Displays the state of lifetime of electrolytic capacitors on the PWB and cooling fan Lifetime expired Normal Cooling fan Electrolytic caps Program counter Range is 0 to 1024 Program number Range is 0 to 9999 Drive Programming monitor UMO Result of Drive Programming execution range is 2147483647 2147483647 Drive Programming monitor UM1 Result of Drive Programming execution range is 2147483647 2147483647 Drive Programming monitor UM2 Result of Drive Programming execution range is 2147483647 2147483647 Position command monitor 268435455 268435455 Current position monitor 268435455 268435455 Clock Setting Data and Time for LCD digital operator Dual monitor Displays two different data configured in b 160 and b 6 Inverter mode Displays currently selected inverter mode IM PM Frequency source monitor 0 Operator 1 to 15 Multi speed freq 1 to 15 16 Jog frequency 18 Modbus network 19 Option 21 Potentiometer 22 Pulse train 23 Calculat
76. AX FIM3005 RE D 1 1 Important notes 1 A4015 A4022 A4030 AX FIM3010 RE A4040 AX FIM3014 RE A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 Input choke or other equipment is required if necessary to comply with EMC directive from the harmonic distortion point of view IEC 61000 3 2 and 4 If the motor cable length exceeds 25 m use output choke to avoid unex pected problem due to the leakage current from the motor cable such as malfunction of the thermal relay vibration of the motor etc As user you must ensure that the HF high frequency impedance between adjustable frequency inverter filter and ground is as small as possible Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact areas zinc plated mounting plates Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas especially loops that encom pass large areas Avoid unnecessary conductor loops Avoid parallel arrangement of low level signal wiring and power carrying or noise prone conductors 373 CE EMC Installation Guidelines Section D 1 374 5 Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines e Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possi ble i e do not strip away the shield screen further away from the cable end than absolutely necessary With integrated systems for example when the adjustable frequency inverter is communicating with some type of supervisory con
77. Ag8e AcBe v HO30 HO34 v nogeAege v z HeJO HeJ y Terminal Symbol Function Name Description oa SET Set 2nd ON causes the inverter to use the 2nd control set of motor parameters for gener ating the frequency output to motor OFF causes the inverter to use the 1st main set of motor parameters for generating the frequency output to motor Valid for inputs C00 1 cC007 Required settings none Notes e If the terminal state is changed while the inverter is running the inverter continues using the current set of parameters until the inverter is stopped Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 3 Free run Stop When the terminal FRS is turned ON the inverter stops the output and the motor enters the free run state coasting If terminal FRS is turned OFF the output resumes sending power to the motor if the Run command is still active The free run stop feature works with other parameters to provide flexibility in stopping and starting motor rotation In the figure below parameter b088 selects whether the inverter resumes operation from 0 Hz left graph or the current motor rotation speed right graph when the FRS terminal turns OFF The application determines the best setting Parameter b003 specifies a delay time before resuming operation from a free run stop To disable this feature use a zero delay time aT p oubo U i Resume from motor spee
78. Free mapping 16C9h Modbus external register 1 0000 to FFFF 16CAh Modbus external register 2 0000 to FFFF 16CBh Modbus external register 3 0000 to FFFF 16CCh Modbus external register 4 0000 to FFFF 16CDh Modbus external register 5 0000 to FFFF 16CEh Modbus external register 6 0000 to FFFF 16CFh Modbus external register 7 0000 to FFFF 16D0h Modbus external register 8 0000 to FFFF 16Dih Modbus external register 9 0000 to FFFF 16D2h Modbus external register 10 0000 to FFFF 16D3h Modbus register format 1 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16D4h Modbus register format 2 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16D5h Modbus register format 3 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16D6h Modbus register format 4 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16D7h Modbus register format 5 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16D8h Modbus register format 6 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16D9h Modbus register format 7 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16DAh Modbus register format 8 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16DBh Modbus register format 9 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16DCh Modbus register format 10 00 Unsigned 01 Signed 16DDh Modbus register scaling 1 0 001 to 65 535 16DEh Modbus register scaling 2 0 001 to 65 535 16DFh Modbus register scaling 3 0 001 to 65 535 16E0h Modbus re
79. Functions 156 Section 3 7 Input Function Summary Table Option Terminal Symbol Function Name PTC thermistor Thermal Protection C005 only Description When a thermistor is connected to terminal 5 and L the inverter checks for over temperature and will cause trip event and turn OFF output to motor A disconnect of the thermistor causes a trip event and the inverter turns OFF the motor 3 wire start Starts the motor rotation No change to present motor status 3 wire stop Stops the motor rotation No change to present motor status 3 wire forward reverse Selects the direction of motor rotation ON FWD While the motor is rotating a change of F R will start a deceleration followed by a change in direction Selects the direction of motor rotation OFF REV While the motor is rotating a change of F R will start a deceleration followed by a change in direction PID enabled disabled Temporarily disables PID loop control Inverter out put turns OFF as long as PID Enable is active ADT 1 0 1 Has no effect on PID loop operation which operates normally if PID Enable is active A0 1 PID integral reset Resets the PID loop controller The main conse quence is that the integrator sum is forced to zero No effect on PID controller UP DWN function accel erated Accelerates increases output frequency motor from current frequency Output to mot
80. If the cable length exceeds 20 m particularly with 400 V class a surge volt age may be generated at the motor terminal depending on stray capacitance or inductance of the cable causing the motor to risk his isolation depending on motor isolation class and conditions To suppress surge voltage output filters are recommended From simple choke and output dV dt filters to sinus filters To connect several motors provide a thermal protection relay for each as the inverter can not recognize how current is shared among the motors The RC value of each thermal relay should be 1 1 times larger than the motor rated current The relay may trip earlier depending on the cable length In this case connect an AC reactor to the Inverter output 2 3 10 DC Reactor Connection 1 P 2 This terminal is used to connect the optional DC reactor By factory default a shorting bar has been connected between terminals 1 and P 2 Before connecting the DC reactor remove this shorting bar The length of the DC reactor connection cable should be 5 m or shorter If the DC reactor is not being used do not remove the shorting bar If you remove the shorting bar without connecting the DC reactor no power is supplied to the Inverter main circuit disabling operation 2 3 11 Power connections for each inverter size Single phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 4 kW Three phase 200 V 0 1 to 0 75 kW Single phase Three phase
81. Interruptions EN61 800 3 2004 EN6 1000 4 11 2004 The examination was performed by Category C1 LVD Low Voltage Directive EN61800 5 1 2003 The year in which the CE marking was affixed 2009 Manufacturer Name OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Control Device Division H Q Automation amp Drive Div Drive Dept 2 Address 2 2 Nishi Kusatsu Kusatsu city Shiga pref 525 0035 JAPAN Ha 27 oF Date Signed E Representative in EU Name OMRON Europe B V Address Zilverenberg 2 5234 GM s Hertogenbosch THE NETHERLANDS de 706 2059 gt Signed _ si Mr H Sintnicolaas European Manufacturing and Quality Manager 385 Section E 10 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY es List for EC Directive PERE IGIMN2 ABOTS i S S amp PECPEEEEE ith phase AC3A0 480V 50 60Hz phase ACINO 4H0V 50 60Hz S 2 3GIMX2 A2 10 JGIMX2 A4075 JG3MXI 44110 se AC380 480V S0 60H JIGIMXZ A4150 386 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Section E 10 387 Safety Certification Section E 11 E 11 Safety Certification 388 A TUVRheiniand 2010 42 03 Procesety Right Annes to Report No 968M 247 00 10 Summary of the characteristic data for use of the product in safety related applications Prodect Weerter Orve IGIMX2 senes and MOQ seres mth STO lestre Customer Onvron Corporation vou aaa Japan 1 Characteristic data acc to IEC 61508 1 ull 7
82. MCCB or GFI EEEE 1 I Power source O O 3 phase or MX2 1 phase per O 1 1 i inverter model 1 I Intelligent inputs 7 terminals A 1 1 Li Li 1 Li 1 O 1 ao B etboe Forward NOTE For the wiring of intelligent O O 1 0 and analog inputs H be sure to use twisted Oy O pair shielded cable Input Attach the shielded wire O O 3 GS1 circuits for each signal to its respective common O O 4 GS2 terminal at the inverter end only O O 5 PTC 5 configurable as discrete input or thermistor input Input impedance of each intelligent input is T eh 4 7 KQ E O OH 7 EB Thermistor i Short bar PLC Source type i 4 EH GND for logic inputs A Freq Meter lt A ID ID transceiver Analog reference 0 10VDC 4 20mA Pulse train input 24 VDC 32 kHz max GND for analog signals Termination resistor 200 Q Change by slide switch RS485 I transceiver O PD 1 DC reactor P Brake Braking resistor unit optional optional Relay contacts type 1 Form C Open collector output Freq arrival signal feo toes Output circuit 7 jE CA for logic outputs wn me Serial communication port RS485 ModBus L Q RS485 transceiver L USB transceiver L Option port controller RJ45 port gt Optional operator port USB mini B port PC communication port
83. No Function name Data setting Unit d102 DC voltage monitor 0 0 to 999 9 V 85 D Group Monitoring Functions 3 3 30 Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor d103 Displays a regenerative braking load rate When the displayed value exceeds the value set in the Usage Rate of Regenerative Braking b090 the inverter trips beacuse of E06 Braking resistor overload protection Section 3 3 Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit d103 Regenerative braking 0 0 to 100 0 load rate monitor Related functions b090 3 3 31 Electronic Thermal Monitor d104 Displays an electronic thermal load rate When the displayed value exceeds 100 the inverter trips because of E05 Overload protection When the power is shut off the displayed value changes to 0 Also when totaling does not occur for 10 minutes the displayed value changes to 0 Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit d104 Electronic thermal 0 0 to 100 0 monitor 3 3 32 Analog Input O OI Monitors d130 d131 Displays the analog input O Ol value The data range is from 0 to 1023 and it can be read from Modbus and Drive Programming Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit d130 Analog input O monitor d131 Analog input Ol monitor 0 to 1023 3 3 33 Pulse Train Input Monitor d133 Th
84. Output Frequency Setting F001 Pressing the Enter key stores the setting in the EEPROM Since F001 is rewritten while d001 is still displayed there may be a time gap between the key operation and display change depending on the acceleration decel eration time While the PID function is activated or being stopped the output frequency cannot be changed The frequency cannot be changed in the individual input mode by pressing the Increment Decrement keys simultaneously 3 3 3 Output Current Monitor d002 Displays the output current value of the inverter During stop 0 0 is dis played The monitor LED indicator A is lit while the d002 setting is displayed Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit d002 Output current monitor 0 00 to 9999 00 A The minimum unit varies depending on the capacity 3 3 4 Rotation Direction Monitor d003 Displays the rotation direction of the inverter The RUN LED indicator is lit during forward reverse rotation Parameter i Default No Function name Data setting Unit d003 Rotation direction FWD Forward monitor STOP Stop REV Reverse In general the forward direction of the motor is the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the axial direction EO Forward 77 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 3 3 5 PID Feedback Value Monitor d004 When 01 Enabled or 02 Reverse
85. Parameter AGG sets the source selection for the inverter s output frequency Parameter A002 selects the Run command source for FW or RV Run commands The default settings use the input ter minals for Europe EU Frequency reference selection A Function Description Eight options select codes Frequency reference selection 2nd motor Defaults 00 VR Digital Operator D I Terminal Oe Operator F001 03 ModBus RS485 D4 Option 06 Pulse train frequency D EzSQ Drive Programming 0 Math Operator function result Run command selection Five options select codes Run command selection 2nd motor D I Terminal Oe Operator F001 03 ModBus RS485 04 Option Frequency Source Setting For parameter A00 the following table provides a further description of each option and a reference to other page s for more information Frequency Source Refer to page s 00 POT on ext operator The range of rotation of the knob matches the range defined by b08e start fre quency to AGGY max frequency when external operator is used DI Control terminal The active analog input signalon 93 240 248 250 analog terminals O or Ol sets the output frequency Oe Function FDO I setting The value in FOO I is a con 89 stant used for the output frequency 03 ModBus network input The network has a dedicated 318
86. Read Write Protected Initialize trigger This is to perform initialization by parameter input with 084 6085 and 6994 Two option codes 00 No action D1 Initialize Note When 01 is set on b 80 and key is pressed initialization starts immedi ately and there is not any way to restore the previous parameter setting MX2 doesn t have a method to trigger the initialization by key action as others Omron inverter models have Stop Mode Restart Mode Configuration b09 i b088 You can configure how the inverter performs a standard stop each time Run FWD and REV sig nals turn OFF Setting b09 determines whether the inverter will control the deceleration or whether it will perform a free run stop coast to a stop When using the free run stop selection it is imperative to also configure how you want the inverter to resume control of motor speed Setting b088 determines whether the inverter will ensure the motor always resumes at 0 Hz or whether the motor resumes from its current coasting speed also called active fre quency matching The run command may turn OFF briefly allowing the motor to coast to a slower speed from which normal operation can resume 145 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 146 Note In most applications a controlled deceleration is desirable corresponding to b09 1 00 However applications such as HVAC fan control will often use a free run stop b09 l 0 I
87. Refer also to Light load detection level Set the level of low load detection Rated range is 0 0 to 3 20 x Rated current Output current Output freq cove C041 FA2 output i A a 0 t SECTION 4 Operations and Monitoring on page 191 164 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 PID FBV Output The Error forthe PID PID Error PV SP deviation threshold loop is the magnitude absolute value of the difference between the Set point desired value and Process Variable actual value The PID output deviation signal OD output terminal function option code JY indicates when the error magnitude has exceeded a mag nitude you define Over Under torque Output The inverter outputs the over under torque signal when it detects that the esti mated motor output torque exceeds the specified level To enable this func tion assign parameter 07 OTQ over under torque signal to an intelligent output terminal Over torque or under torque can be selected by function COS This function is effective only when the V F characteristic curve selection A049 or AC44 is the sensorless vector control With any other V F charac teristic curve selected the output of the OTQ signal is unpredictable When using the inverter for a lift use the OTQ signal as the trigger to stop braking Use the frequency arrival signal as the trigger to start braking Electronic Thermal Warning Output
88. Register number 120Fh Value 33 21h F002 Register number 1103h Value 360000 57E40h 1 Read 0x03 Object register 120Fh A013 Transmission 01 03 12 OE 00 01 EO B1 Reception 01 03 02 00 21 78 5C 2 Read 0x03 Object register 1103h F002 Transmission 01 03 11 02 00 02 60 F7 Reception 01 03 04 7E 40 00 05 23 CC 3 Write 0x06 Object register 120Fh A013 Write data 100 64h Transmission 01 06 12 OE 00 64 EC 9A Reception 01 06 12 OE 00 64 EC 9A 4 Write 0x10 Object register 1103h F002 Write data 74565 12345h Transmission 01 10 11 02 00 02 04 23 45 00 01 69 B7 Reception 01 10 11 02 00 02 E5 34 Appendix C Drive Parameter Setting Tables C 1 Introduction This appendix lists the user programmable parameters for the MX2 series inverters and the default values for European and U S product types The right most column of the tables is blank so you can record values you have changed from the default This involves just a few parameters for most appli cations This appendix presents the parameters in a format oriented toward the keypad on the inverter C 2 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry MX2 series inverters provide many functions and parameters that can be con figured by the user We recommend that you record all parameters that have been edited in order to help in troubleshooting or recovery from a loss of parameter data Inverter model MX2 This information is printed on the
89. System Accessories A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter as well as fuses for safety If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started that s all you may need for now But a fully developed sys tem can also have a variety of additional components Some can be for noise suppression while others may enhance the inverter s braking performance The figure below shows a system with several possible optional components and the table gives part number information Part No Series AC reactor input side AX RAIXxxxxxxxx DE 256 EMC filter for CE AX FIMxxxx RE 259 DC reactor AX RCxxxxxxxx RE 261 Braking resistor AX REMXxxxxxx lE 263 RF noise filter choke output side AX FERxxxx RE 259 AC reactor output side AX RAOXxxxxxxx DE 258 255 Component Descriptions Section 5 2 5 2 Component Descriptions 5 2 1 AC Reactors Input Side This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on the power supply lines or when the main power voltage imbalance exceeds 3 and power source capacity is more than 500 kVA or to smooth out line fluctuations It also improves the power factor In the following cases for a general purpose inverter a large peak current flows on the main power supply side and is able to destroy the inverter mod ule If the unbalanced factor of the power supply is 3 or higher e If the power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater tha
90. This practice decreases dynamic stress on system components prolonging system life In this case you will typically set b0BB 0 1 in order to resume from the current speed after a free run stop see diagram down below active frequency matching resume Note that using the default setting b088 00 can cause trip events when the inverter attempts to force the load quickly to zero speed Other events can cause or be configured to cause a free run stop such as power loss see 3 6 7 Automatic Restart Mode on page 121 or an intelligent input terminal FRS signal If all free run stop behavior is important to your application Such as HVAC be sure to configure each event accordingly An additional parameter fur ther configures all instances of a free run stop Parameter Stop mode free run stop B003 Retry Wait Time Before 4088 00 Resume from OHz Motor Restart sets the mini mum time the inverter will free FRS run For example if bO03 4 seconds and 609 0 i and the cause of the free run stop Motor lasts 10 seconds the inverter speed will free run coast for a total i of 14 seconds before driving the motor again The figure at below right describes how active fre quency matching resume operates After waiting the Stop mode irgezr n stop time set in b003 the inverter Resume from current speed tries to catch the speed of the motor shaft and output speed FRS depends of the setting in b030 At this time
91. When no is speci fied the analog input data is reflected as input Output values of Odc and OlDc are the same as those of WCO and WCOI respectively Defaults EU Units B Function Description Window comparator O upper limit level Set range Min limit level b06 1 hysteresis width b062 x2 to 100 Minimum of 0 Set range 0 to Max limit level b060 hysteresis width bOB2 x2 Maximum of 0 Set range 0 to Max limit level b06Q Min limit level b06 2 Maximum of 10 Set range Min limit level 6064 hysteresis width b065 x2 to 100 Minimum of 0 Window comparator O lower limit level Window comparator O teresis width hys Window comparator Ol upper limit level Window comparator Ol lower limit level Set range 0 to Max limit level b063 hysteresis width b0B5 x2 Maximum of 0 Window comparator Ol hysteresis width Set range 0 to Max limit level b063 Min limit level b064 2 Maximum of 10 Analog operation level at O disconnection Set range 0 to 100 or no ignored Analog operation level at Ol disconnection Set range 0 to 100 or no ignored OorOl 0 Ma T 0926 Hysteresis width b062 b065 b068 BERF Max limit level of window comparator b06 5054 EEEN E S E E E EEE Analog operation level at disconnection b010 07 1 Min limit level of windo
92. a fault state After the fault is cleared the inverter can enter Run Mode again Inverter thermal trip When the inverter internal temperature is above the threshold the thermal sensor in the inverter module detects the excessive temperature of the power devices and trips turning the inverter output OFF CPU communication error When communication between two CPU fails inverter trips and displays the error code Main circuit error 3 The inverter will trip if the power supply estab lishment is not recognized because of a mal function due to noise or damage to the main circuit element Driver error If instantaneous overcurrent occurs the Inverter will shut off IGBT s output to protect the main circuit element After tripping due this protective function the inverter cannot retry the operation Thermistor When a thermistor is connected to terminals 5 and L and the inverter has sensed the temper ature is too high the inverter trips and turns OFF the output Braking error When 0 P has been specified for the Brake Control Selection 6120 the inverter will trip if it cannot receive the braking confirmation signal within the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b 24 after the output of the brake release sig nal Or when the output current doesn t reach the brake release current b 26 during the brake wait time for release b Ie Safe Stop Safe stop signal is given
93. an alarm occurs or when power is OFF When an alarm occurs Run Mode Normal ALO AL1 Closed ALO AL2 Open Run Mode Normal ALO AL1 Open ALO AL2 Closed Trip Open Closed Trip Closed Open 234 Open Closed Open Closed Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 10 Overtorque The inverter outputs the over torque signal when it detects that the estimated motor output torque exceeds the specified level To enable this function assign O7 OTQ to an intelligent output terminal Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Overtorque ON when the estimated output torque gt C055 COS8 OFF when no over torque is detected Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings AQY4 03 or 04 055 C058 Notes e This function is effective only when the V F characteristic curve selection AQYY is set to 03 SLV mode With any other V F characteristic curve selection the out put of the OTQ signal is unpredictable When using the inverter for a lift use the OTQ signal as the trigger to stop braking Use the frequency arrival signal as the trigger to start braking The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 4 6 11 Signal during Undervoltage The inverter
94. and IEC 62061 1 7 Data for use of the product as a subsystem in safety functions Pr E _ comrwaponce w 108 Wot SK 2 corresponds to 4 7 of Sil 2 fhis valve is val for the stated Proof Test iniarval T ProfTetimeviT fie Remat At a PFH valve which a lt 1 of the allowed Sil twestcld the performance of special Proof Tests within the mission ame of the product s regarded as not necessary 2 Characteristic data acc to EN ISO 13849 1 ferdes ese ol the characteratic data always the miommaton provided n the product documents of the have tobe Source of laive rate data SN 29500 so far no data from te component manufacturer were Mar average orbeent temperature 40 C General assumption that 50 of the component atures are dangerous latwes De 0 5 MTITF 2 MTTF so far no further ntormaton was available TU Banas huta Ser nce rar owen Sle Appendix F Unprotected Inverter Operation Mode F 1 Unprotected Inverter Operation Mode 1 With this function when unprotected signal is input the inverter can continue driving It means that some trips are reflected or it not possible to avoid they are automatically reset with no limits The forced driving is only activated via digital input terminal cannot be activated via fieldbus or Drive Programming The software trips is invalid in this mode When a hardware trip occurs the inverter is turned off and restarts automatically Then the inverter
95. and Limita tions of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proof reading errors or omissions iii Table of contents S fety Messages 355 wise Sa E ek ear E eis oO Swe EWR ERR ORE OE E OEE vi Hazardous Hish Voltage sine se raa serene Wa ea ee PN ee alee eee ee bw Be be BEE IKEE vi General Precautions Read These First 2 0 cent reee vii Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual 0 0 cece teen ene ix General Warnings and Cautions 0 0 0 ne eee EE E E A E e beeen XV Precautions for Sate Use iare ca hee aioe Sees BE ee ene BR le oe bee b Meek Gens Bape xviii UL Cautions Warnings and Instructions 0 0 0 nee reer XIX Fuse SIZES pet thee Ste a bon elend 4d ele A opeh Gis bthbane paw Oe bie gik Ue Sle ee nae SRN btw wie EMS Fetes xxii Revision History weie en E ail had ae e teats aad a a a aaa eae LG xxiii SECTION 1 setting Started soen da eed che gis re ed i Ss he a a eh Oe Se R EE N 1 Introd ction s pei eia a what oa ki ised Sas sake bet seh ls Se babel 1 MX2 Inverter Specilicatons y2c5 436 nadie teas ce We PU ee ies Pee yee lat te LA E EG 3 Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives 20 ccc cence e ene e teen ene e ene 14 Frequently Asked Questions ian tuton r treba a a ghd aE a EA e te bette bk 18 International Stan
96. and still deliver torque The MX2 inverter will deliver full torque while turning the motor at 6Hz 180RPM DO NOT use an inverter if you need the motor to stop and hold the load position without the aid of a mechanical brake use a servo or stepper motion control system Q Can the inverter be controlled and monitored via a network A Yes MX2 inverters have built in ModBus communications See Appen dix B for more information on network communications Q Why does the manual or other documentation use terminology such as 200 V class instead of naming the actual voltage such as 230 VAC Q A A specific inverter model is set at the factory to work across a voltage range particular to the destination country for that model The model spec ifications are on the label on the side of the inverter A European 200V class inverter EU marking has different parameter settings than a USA 200 V class Why doesn t the motor have a neutral connection as a return to the inverter A The motor theoretically represents a balanced Y load if all three stator windings have the same impedance The Y connection allows each of the three wires to alternatively serve as input or return on alternate half cycle Frequently Asked Questions Note Section 1 4 Q Does the motor need a chassis ground connection A Yes for several reasons Most importantly this provides protection in the event of a short in the motor that p
97. and to set the speed Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Forced Forces the operator interface to operator override AGG Frequency Source Setting and A002 Run Command Source Setting Parameters ADO and AGG are in effect again for the frequency source and the Run command source respectively Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings AQ I set not equal to 00 AgGe set not equal to Ge Notes e When changing the OPE state during Run Mode inverter is driving the motor the inverter will stop the motor before the new OPE state takes effect e Ifthe OPE input turns ON and the digital operator gives a Run command while the inverter is already running the inverter stops the motor Then the digital operator can control the motor 4 5 12 Overload Limit Switching 214 The inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation and lowers output frequency automatically when the motor current reaches to the overload limit level This function prevents an overcurrent trip caused by excessive moment of inertia during acceleration or caused by sporadic load fluctuations during constant speed operation You can set 2 types of overload limit functions in b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 To switch between b021 b022 b023 and b024 b025 b026 allocate 39 OLR to a multi function input terminal and then turn it ON OFF The o
98. applied Set select 2 motor Data The inverter uses 2 motor parameters for generat ing frequency output to motor The inverter uses 1st main motor parameters for generating frequency output to motor 2 step acceleration deceleration Frequency output uses 2nd stage acceleration and deceleration values Frequency output uses standard acceleration and deceleration values Free run stop Causes output to turn OFF allowing motor to free run coast to stop Output operates normally so controlled deceleration stop motor External trip When assigned input transitions OFF to ON inverter latches trip event and displays E 12 No trip event for ON to OFF any recorded trip events remain in history until reset Unattended start protection On powerup the inverter will not resume a Run com mand On powerup the inverter will resume a Run com mand that was active before power loss Commercial switch Motor can be driven by commercial power Motor is driven via the inverter Soft lock The keypad and remote programming devices are prevented from changing parameters The parameters may be edited and stored Analog input switching Refer to Analog Input Settings on page 93 Reset The trip condition is reset the motor output is turned OFF and powerup reset is asserted Normal power ON operation 155 C Group Intelligent Terminal
99. b007 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Trip retry selection b008 00 trip 01 0 Hz start 02 frequency matching start 03 trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 active frequency matching restart Reserved Overvoltage overcurrent retry time selection 1to3 1 time Trip retry wait time 3 to 1000 0 1 sec Electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current 0 1 Electronic thermal characteris tics selection 00 reduced torque characteristic 01 constant torque characteristic 02 free setting Reserved Inaccessible Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 0 to b017 i Hz Free setting electronic thermal current 1 0 to Rated current 0 1 Al Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 0 to b019 1 Hz Free setting electronic thermal current 2 0 to Rated current 0 1 Al Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 0 to 400 1 Hz Free setting electronic thermal current 3 0 to Rated current 0 1 Al Overload limit selection 00 disabling 01 enabling during acceleration and constant speed opera tion 02 enabling during constant speed operation 03 enabling during acceleration and constant speed opera tion speed increase at regeneration Overload limit level 0 32 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current 0 1 Overload limit par
100. braking during Braking deceleration OFF Does not apply DC injection braking during deceleration Valid for inputs C00 1 C007 Required settings A053 AQSY Notes Do not use the DB input continuously or for a long time when the DC braking force setting AQSY is high depends on the motor application Do not use the DB feature for continuous or high duty cycle as a holding brake The DB input is designed to improve stopping performance Use a mechanical brake for holding a stop position 3 5 6 Frequency related Functions Frequency Limits Upper Output and lower limits can be frequency imposed on the inverter out gt _ Upper put frequency These limits limit will apply regardless of the source of the speed refer ence You can configure the lower frequency limit to be greater than zero as shown in cane 0 the graph The upper limit Frequency command must not exceed the rating of the motor or capability of the machinery The maximum frequency setting A004 A204 takes precedence over frequency upper limit A061 A261 Settable range Lower limit o EJ ag M A Function Defaults Description Frequency upper limit Sets a limit on output frequency less than the maximum frequency R0D4 A204 Range is from fre quency lower limit AG62 AcB2 to maximum frequency A004 A204 0 0 setting is disabled gt 0 0 setting is enabled Frequency lower limit Sets a limit on out
101. can turn ON the F TM input to force the inverter to temporarily allow control frequency source and Run command via con trol terminals When the F TM input is OFF then the inverter uses the regu lar sources specified by ADO i and A00 again Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Forced Forces ADD 0 I terminal frequency source setting control block terminal and AG 02 0 Run com mand source setting control ter minal Inverter applies the user setting for R00 I and A002 normally Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings Notes When changing the F TM state during Run Mode inverter is driving the motor the inverter will stop the motor before the new F TM state takes effect 4 5 20 Torque Command Input Permission This function is to permit the torque command input Please refer to chapter 3 for the detailed description of the function Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Torque Inverter is ready to accept the command torque command Senge Inverter is in a normal mode Valid for inputs C00 Coo7 Required settings 218 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 4 5 21 Integrated Power Clear Section 4 5 This function is to clear the cumulative input power data Option Terminal Function Code Symbol Name Integrated power clear Description Clear the cumulative power data Does not clear
102. common and default use of the relay is for AL thus the labeling of its terminals Use an open collector output terminal 11 or 12 for a low current logic signal interface or to energize a small relay 50 mA maximum Use the relay output to interface to higher volt age and current devices 10 mA minimum Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Alarm ON when an alarm signal has occurred output and has not been cleared OFF when no alarm has occurred since the last clearing of alarm s Alarm signal active Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings C03 1 C032 C036 Notes By default the relay is configured as normally closed 036 0 Refer to the next page for an explanation In the default relay configuration an inverter power loss turns ON the alarm output the alarm signal remains ON as long as the external control circuit has power When the relay output is set to normally closed a time delay of less than 2 seconds occurs after powerup before the contact is closed Terminals 11 and 12 are open collector outputs so the electric specifications of AL are different from the contact output terminals ALO AL1 AL2 This signal output has the delay time 300 ms nominal from the fault alarm output The relay contact specifications are in 4 3 Control Logic Signal Specifications on page 195 The contact diagrams for different conditions are on the next
103. data change to avoid unexpected operation P201 to P230 P301 to P310 When this parameters are modified is neces sary to recycle power supply for this changes to become effective B 5 1 2 2 P201 P210 Modbus external register 1 to 10 External register select Func Code Name Settings Ped I to Modbus external 0000h to FFFFh saath Pe 10 register 1 to 10 Defines the addresses to be used by the external controller 0000h is considered as not used B 5 1 2 3 P301 P310 Modbus internal register 1 to 10 Internal register selection Func Code Name Settings P30 to Modbus internal register 0000h to FFFFh aah P310 1 to 10 Defines the internal register address that will be linked to external registers in parameters P201 to P210 0000h is considered as not used 347 ModBus mapping Section B 5 Only single word registers could be addressed but some double word registers could be accessed by a single word with limited range Check next table for details Register No R W Function name Data range d001 Output frequency monitor 0 00 to 400 00 Hz d004 PID feedback value monitor 0 00 to 10000 d007 Output frequency monitor 0 00 to 40000 00 d008 Real frequency monitor 327 68 to 327 68 Hz d081 Fault monitor 1 F001 Output frequency setting monitor 0 0 Start frequency to 655 35 Hz F002 Acceleration time 1 0 00 to 655 35 sec F003 Deceleration time 1 0 00 to 655 35
104. data is not acceptable The data to be written in a holding register is outside the inverter The specified functions are not available to the inverter e Function to change the content of a register that cannot be changed while the inverter is in service e Function to submit an ENTER command during running UV Function to write in a register during tripping UV Function to change the I O terminal configuration which is not allowed Function to change active state of RS reset terminal Function to write in a register during auto tuning Function to write in a register locked by password The register or coil to be written in is read only 300 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 No response occurs In the cases below the inverter ignores a query and returns no response e When receiving a broadcasting query e When detecting a transmission error in reception of a query e When the slave address set in the query is not equal to the slave address of the inverter e When a time interval between data elements constituting a message is shorter than 3 5 characters e When the data length of the query is invalid e When broadcast message received Note Provide a timer in the master and make the master retransmit the same query when no response is made within a preset time period after the preceding query was sent 301 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 B 3 4 Explanation of function codes Read Coil Statu
105. decelera Speed 1 tion transitions from any preset to any other preset speed A multi 0 speed profile shown at right uses Multi speed Profile t two or more preset speeds which you can select via intelligent input terminals This external control can apply any preset speed at any time Alternatively the selected speed is infinitely variable across the speed range You can use the potentiometer control on the keypad for manual control The drive accepts analog 0 10 VDC signals and 4 20 mA control signals as well The inverter can drive the motor in either direction Separate FW and RV commands select the direction of rotation The motion profile example shows a forward motion followed by a reverse motion of shorter duration The speed presets and analog sig nals control the magnitude of the speed while the FWD and REV commands determine the direction before the motion starts Speed Forward move Reverse move Bi directional Profile The MX2 can move loads in both directions However it is not designed for use in servo type applications that use a bipolar velocity signal that deter mines direction 17 Frequently Asked Questions Section 1 4 1 4 Frequently Asked Questions Q What is the main advantage in using an inverter to drive a motor com pared to alternative solutions 18 A An inverter can vary the motor speed with very little loss of efficiency unlike mechanical or hydraulic speed control soluti
106. drive solution In general some application can rely on system loss es such as friction to serve as the deceleration force or otherwise can tol erate a long decel time These applications will not need dynamic braking However applications with a combination of a high inertia load and a re quired short decel time will need dynamic braking This is a physics ques tion that may be answered either empirically or through extensive calculations Q Several options related to electrical noise suppression are available for the Omron inverters How can know if my application require any of these options A The purpose of these noise filters is to reduce the inverter electrical noise so the operation of nearby electrical devices is not affected Some applications are governed by particular regulatory agencies and noise suppression is mandatory in those cases the inverter must have the cor responding noise filter installed Other applications may not need noise suppression unless you notice electrical interference with the operation of other devices 19 International Standards 1 5 20 Section 1 5 Q The MX2 features a PID control PID loops are usually associated with water control flow control processes heating or process industries in gen eral How could the PID loop feature be useful in my application A You will need to determine the particular main variable in your applica tion the motor affects That is the proce
107. ees 273 Restoring Factory Default Settings cooo isas iee dae ge cee ke sev E bade a ad vow Ae eke ae eee eee 279 Maintenance and Inspection iesise creii eteen eee eben nent een e eee 280 Wattanty svc cin cit aes aie ks ote ea eae ei si ad bt ety Be eee Altay EA 287 Appendix A Glossary and Bibliography 0c ccc cece cece cece ccc c eee cescsscsscsecseces 289 Glossary oeaan sc Speen 0 eA eh han Ve ree a E Ee od ee ERs erent eEN Spee hee ota bec 289 Bibliography escuchar gee ec ni add eae gee pete gine asta ell ie ace a ESERE 294 Appendix B ModBus Network Communications 0 c cece eee e eee e cee eeceececcees 295 INtrOGUCHONE ene an dah oes Sieh era cca sp whe RS se Booka ete abe nae HARA SAG Roe OR aa hula Soe alee 295 Connecting the Inverter to ModBus 0 0 eee eee e eee n enn ees 296 Network Protocol Reference ji 005 3430s cdo hee eG et Ses OA ele Aa PAS so ae WSS eG 298 ModBus Data Lisin T cst alse nets aie eae wes SU ee ea ey aon A ee LAA 316 Mod Bus mappin s sisri piss passe pipety Ee M Rie BEM OH Herd E gee 6 SoH ep ASS E EE Rake ganng oh has 347 Appendix C Drive Parameter Setting Tables 0 cc ccc cece cece cece csc csecsscsscsecsee 357 INtFOCUCHOM se coii Soe i a EA ee hee tate DA eel nedtra Shen te eed et beh a e a a ia a let aeee Ge a a 357 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry 0 0 oc cece een enn eee 357 Appendix D CE EMC Installation Guidelines 4 5 4 0100 0 6 20 60 sie cs eoeeta dene s
108. frequency 04 output voltage 05 input power 06 electronic thermal overload 07 LAD frequency 08 digi tal current monitoring 10 heat sink temperature 12 general purpose out put YAO 15 pulse input 16 option AM selection 00 output frequency 01 output cur rent 02 output torque 04 output volt age 05 input power 06 electronic thermal overload 07 LAD frequency 10 heat sink temperature 11 output torque signed value 13 general pur pose output YA1 16 option reserved Digital current monitor reference value 0 32 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current 51 Multi function output terminal 11 contact selection 00 NO 01 NC 333 ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 Register Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Data No code resolution 1420h Multi function output terminal 12 C032 R W 00 NO 01 NC contact selection 1421h to Reserved 1423h 1424h Relay output AL2 AL1 contact C036 R W 00 NO contact at AL2 NC contact at selection AL1 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 1425h Reserved 1426h Light load signal output mode C038 R W 00 output during acceleration decelera tion and constant speed operation 01 output only during constant speed operation 1427h Li
109. frequency source is selected Check frequency reference selection ABO I for correct source Ex Terminal analog input 01 Operator F001 02 Frequency setting is 0 Hz If frequency reference selection is terminal AGO t 1 check analog voltage or current signal at O or Ol terminals If frequency reference selection is operator AGG I 02 set frequency in FOD I Depending on frequency source input proper frequency reference If frequency reference selection is multi speed operation set frequency in A020 to A035 and Reed RUN command is not set to input terminal If RUN command selection is terminal AGG2 0 set forward O0 FW or reverse 0 RV to any input terminals In case of 3 wire control set 3 wire start C0 STA 3 wire stop 2 STP and 3 wire FW RV 22 F R to any input terminals Multi step speed reference Oe to 05 CF1 to CF4 is are set to input terminal s and active Deactivate the input s or check the frequency reference parameters associated Ade to A035 Both FWD and REV input are active If RUN command source is FWD REV input activate either FWD or REV input Rotation direction limit selection b035 is enabled Check b035 Incorrect input wiring or short bar position Wire inputs correctly and or install short bar ON OFF status of inputs are monitored in d0 5 Incorrect analog input
110. functions Program Intelligent terminal functions Program Motor constant related functions Program Pulse train input torque Drive Program Programming and communication related functions User selected parameters Program Error codes E 59 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 2 5 2 Keypad Navigation Map Note 60 The MX2 Series inverter drives have many programmable functions and parameters Chapter 3 will cover these in detail but you need to access just a few items to perform the powerup test The menu structure makes use of function codes and parameter codes to allow programming and monitoring with only a 4 digit display and keys and LEDs So it is important to become familiar with the basic navigation map of parameters and functions in the dia gram below You may later use this map as a reference Func code display Group d zs Moves to data display Func code display Group F gt 2 Func code display conn IL Data display F001 to F 03 Data does not blink because of real time synchronizing lt J Saves the data in EEPROM and returns to func code display C2 Returns to func code display without saving data ud x TA Data display When data is changed the displa
111. in the table below to verify the motor poles setting and change if necessary the table resumes action from the end of the previous table Action Display Func Parameter Starting point F Level of electronic thermal setting Press the key oo H Group selected Press the A key three times o0 Motor poles parameter 2 2 poles 4 4 poles default 6 6 poles B 8 poles ID 10 poles Press the key to select ag Set to your motor specs your display may be different Press the D jg Stores parameter returns to HD04 Press the key This step concludes the parameter setups for the inverter You are almost ready to run the motor for the first time A Tip If you became lost during any of these steps first observe the state of the PRG LED Then study the Keypad Navigation Map on page 60 to determine the current state of the keypad controls and display As long as you do not press the key no parameter will be changed by keypad entry errors Note that power cycling the inverter causes it to power up Monitor Mode dis playing the value for dJ0 I output frequency The next section will show you how to monitor a particular parameter from the display Then you will be ready to run the motor 65 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 2 5 4 Monitoring Parameters with the Dis
112. installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable you MUST install an input side AC reactor of 3 at a voltage drop at rated current with respect to the supply voltage on the power supply side Also where the effects of an indirect lightning strike are possible install a lightning conductor 2 3 Step by Step Basic Installation Note Z N WARNING A Caution A Caution This section will guide you through the following basic steps of installation Activity Choose a mounting location in compliance with the Warnings page 29 and Cautions See notes below Check the mounting location for adequate ventilation page 32 Cover the inverter s ventilation openings to prevent debris from page 42 entering Check the inverter dimensions for footprint and mounting hole page 34 locations Study the Cautions Warnings wire and fuse sizes and termi page 42 nal torque specifications before wiring the inverter Connect wiring for the inverter power input page 46 Wire the inverter output to the motor page 51 Uncover the inverter s ventilation openings applied in Step 3 page 55 Perform the Powerup Test This step includes several sub page 56 steps Make observations and check your installation page 68 If the installation is in an EU country study the EMC installation guidelines in Appendix D CE EMC Ins
113. is connected through long wires 2 3 13 Ground Terminal To prevent electric shock be sure to ground the Inverter and the motor The 200 V class should be connected to the ground terminal under Class D grounding conditions conventional Class 3 grounding conditions 100 Q or less ground resistance The 400 V class should be connected to the ground terminal under Class C grounding conditions conventional special Class 3 grounding conditions 10 Q or less ground resistance For the ground cable use the compatible cable or a cable with a larger diame ter Make the cable length as short as possible When several Inverters are connected the ground cable must not be con nected across several Inverters and must not be looped Otherwise the Inverter and surrounding control machines may malfunction Your ground bolt 2 3 14 Logic Control Wiring After completing the initial installation and powerup test in this chapter you may need to wire the logic signal connector for your application For new inverter users applications we highly recommend that you first complete the powerup test in this chapter without adding any logic control wiring As a quick reference here is included the control connection diagram But for more details about inputs and outputs configuration please check SECTION 4 Operations and Monitoring 51 Step by Step Basic Installation 52 Section 2 3 MX2 control wiring quick reference IP20 Breaker
114. is described before When using this function observe the following precautions 1 If you use the inverter to drive a motor of which the capacity is two class lower than the maximum applicable capacity of the inverter you may not be able to obtain adequate motor characteristics 2 If you cannot obtain the desired characteristics from the motor driven un der the SLV control readjust the motor constants according to the symp tom as described in the table below Status Symptom Adjustment method Adjustment item Momentary speed variation is Increase the motor constant R2 step by step HOZ I Hee negative from the set value up to 1 2 times of the set value Momentary speed variation is Decrease the motor constant R2 step by step HOZ I Hee positive from the set value up to 0 8 times of the set value Regeneration Torque is insufficient at low Increase the motor constant R1 step by step H020 Heeo speed few Hz from the set value up to 1 2 times of the set value Increase the motor constant lo step by step HOe23 Hees from the set value up to 1 2 times of the set value Motor generates an impact at Reduce the motor constant J from the set value HOe4 Hec4 start Decrease the speed response factor H005 H205 Motor runs backward for short Set 01 enable on reverse run protection func b046 moment at start tion b046 Decelerating Motor runs unsteadily Decrease the speed response factor H005 H205 Decrease the
115. is useful in applications that must tailor inverter output signals to meet timing requirements of certain external devices The timing diagram below shows a sample output signal top line and the results of various ON OFF delay configurations e Original signal This example signal waveform consists of three sepa rate pulses named A B and C e with ON delay Pulse A is delayed by the duration of the ON delay time Pulses B and C do not appear at the output because they are shorter than the ON delay e with OFF delay Pulse A is lengthened by the amount of the OFF delay time The separation between pulses B and C does not appear at the output because it is shorter than the OFF delay time with ON OFF delays Pulse A is delayed on both leading and trailing edges by the amounts of the ON and OFF delay times respectively Pulses B and C do not appear at the output because they are shorter than the ON delay time ON OFF ON delay delay delays Output Signals lt gt lt gt Original no delays gt OFF With ON delay i delays With OFF delay ont Oo O Oo With ON OFF delays Description Default Output 11 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 sec Output 11 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 sec Output 12 ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 sec Output 12 OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 sec Relay output ON delay 0 0 to 100 0 sec Relay output OFF delay 0 0 to 100 0 sec
116. level sensitive input STA terminal STP terminal i F R terminal 1 0 Motor revolution speed Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 10 Remote Control Up and Down Functions The UP DWN terminal functions can adjust the output frequency for remote control while the motor is running The acceleration time and deceleration time of this function is same as normal operation ACC1 and DEC1 2ACC1 2DEC1 The input terminals operate according to these principles e Acceleration When the UP contact is turned ON the output frequen cy accelerates from the current value When it is turned OFF the out put frequency maintains its current value at that moment Deceleration When the DWN contact is turned ON the output fre quency decelerates from the current value When it is turned OFF the output frequency maintains its current value at that moment In the graph below the UP and DWN terminals activate while the Run com mand remains ON The output frequency responds to the UP and DWN commands Motor speed UP DWN o oO Oo FW RV It is possible for the inverter to retain the frequency set from the UP and DWN terminals through a power loss Parameter 10 enables disables the memory If disabled the inverter retains the last frequency before an UP DWN adjustment Use the UDC terminal to clear the memory and return to the original set output frequency Option Te
117. lower limit 2nd frequency lower limit Jump frequency 1 to 3 Jump frequency width 1 to 3 Acceleration stop frequency Acceleration stop time PID selection PID P gain PID gain PID D gain PID scale PID feedback selection 00 Reverse PID function 00 PID output limit function 0 0 PID feedforward selection 00 AVR selection 02 AVR selection 2nd motor 02 AVR voltage selection 230 400 AVR voltage selection 2nd motor 230 400 AVR filter time constant 0 300 AVR deceleration gain 100 Energy saving operation mode 00 Energy saving response accuracy 50 0 adjustment lt xi xl xl wx xix xi wl xl wx x x lt lt lt lt x x x 359 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry A Group Parameters Default Setting Name Acceleration time 2 2nd acceleration time 2 EU b031 10 Section C 2 User Setting Deceleration time 2 2nd deceleration time 2 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec 2 profile 2nd motor Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point Acci to Acc2 frequency transition point 2nd motor Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point Deci to Dec2 frequency transition point 2nd motor Acceleration curve selection Deceleration curve selection Ol input active range start frequency Ol input active range end frequency
118. observe the following e Use only short time invariant and pulse current sensitive ground fault interrupters with higher trigger current e Other components should be secured with separate ground fault inter rupters e Ground fault interrupters in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an absolute protection against electric SHOCK cccceceeeeeeeeeeeettteteeeeeees 50 Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply to the inverter Otherwise there is the danger Of fire cceesseeeesseseeeeeseeeteeeees 50 For motor leads ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic con tactors be sure to size these components properly each must have the capacity for rated current and voltage Otherwise there is the danger of fire A A E E ETE A awit cass least civ eee dav ea ie lle 50 Powerup Test Caution Messages The heat sink fins will have a high temperature Be careful not to touch them Otherwise there is the danger of getting burned cccceeeeeeeeesteeeeeees 56 The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the inverter Otherwise there is the danger of injury iaa ee ei eaei ad awe Ade ie Ai aa eee 56 If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting 50HZ 60Hz be sure to check the motor and machine specific
119. operation at instantaneous power failure brake control DC injection braking dynamic braking BRD frequency upper and lower limiters jump frequencies curve accel and decel S U inversed U EL S 16 stage speed profile fine adjustment of start frequency accel and decel stop process jogging fre quency calculation frequency addition 2 stage accel decel stop mode selection start end freq analog input filter window comparators input ter minal response time output signal delay hold function rotation direction restriction stop key selection software lock safe stop function scaling function display restriction password function user parameter initializa tion initial display selection cooling fan control warning trip retry fre quency pull in restart frequency matching overload restriction over current restriction DC bus voltage AVR Protective function Over current over voltage under voltage overload brake resistor over load CPU error memory error external trip USP error ground fault detec tion at power on temperature error internal communication error driver error thermistor error brake error safe stop overload at low speed mod bus communication error option error encoder disconnection speed excessive Drive Programming command error Drive Programming nest ing error Drive Programming execution error Drive Programming user trip Operating environment Temperature Operating ambi
120. operation specified by C 144 C 145 CE H7 outputs has a logical 1 result OFF when the Boolean operation specified by C 44 C 1H5 C 1H has a logical 0 result Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings C 14 I C 50 244 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 23 Life time Warning Output Function Capacitor life warning signal The inverter checks the operating life of the capacitors on the internal circuit board on the basis of the internal tempera ture and cumulative power on time You can also monitor the state of the capacitor life warning signal WAC in dQee If the WAC signal is given out it is recommended to replace the main PCB and control PCB Cooling fan warning signal If the signal is given out check the cooling fan cover for clogging You can also monitor the state of WAF signal in dee Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Capacitor ON Calculated lifetime of the life warning electrolytic capacitor is expired signal OFF Electrolytic capacitor is normal Cooling ON Calculated lifetime of the cooling fan life warn fan is expired ing signal OFF Cooling fan is normal Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings 4 6 24 Starting Contact Signal The inverter gives out the starting contact signal FR while it is receiving an operational command The FR signal is given out regardless the setting of the run comm
121. or variable resistor wiring Wire correctly In case of analog voltage or variable resistor input check voltage between O and L termi nal In case of analog current check current between current source and Ol terminal RUN command source is operator but input terminal is set to Force terminal and active Deactivate the input RUN command source is terminal but input terminal is set to Force operator and active Deactivate the input Inverter is in trip status With ALARM LED and Exxx indication Reset inverter by STOP RESET key and check error code Troubleshooting Section 6 1 Possible Cause s Corrective Action If safety function is used activate both GS1 and GS2 If not disable safety function by dip switch Safety function is enabled and either GS1 or GS2 input is inactive 1B RS 1H CS or 1 FRS is set to input terminal and the input is inactive Deactivate the input B4 ROK is set to input terminal and the input is active Activate the input Cable between inverter and motor or internal cable of motor is breaking Check the wiring Excess load Remove excess load Motor is locked Unlock the motor 3 Motor does not accelerate to command speed Possible Cause s Corrective Action Bad connection of analog wiring Check the wiring In case of analog voltage or variable resistor input
122. output enabled is selected in PID Selection A071 the PID feedback value can be monitored Also conversion is possible using PID Scale A075 d004 display Feedback value X PID Scale A075 Parameter A Default No Function name Data setting d004 PID feedback value 0 00 to 99 99 Displayed in monitor increments of 0 01 100 0 to 999 9 Displayed in increments of 0 1 1 000 to 9 999 Displayed in increments of 1 1 000 to 9 999 Displayed in increments of 10 Unit T100 to T999 Displayed in increments of 1 000 A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 Displayed in 1 00 Time increments of 0 01 Related functions A071 A075 3 3 6 Multi function Input Monitor d005 The LED lighting position indicates the input status of the multi function inputs The item that the built in CPU recognizes to be input is indicated as being ON This does not depend on the NO NC contact setting Example Multi function inpu t terminals S7 EB S2 S1 ON PP terminal multi function input terminals 6 S5 TH S4 G amp 2 S3 GS1__ OFF Displa 9 DA Aoa tu CY WW a ma OFF l Turned OFF ar ae ee S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON If the input terminal response time function is used the recognition of input is delayed Monitoring cannot be performed even when TH thermistor is allocated to the multi function input termina
123. outputs the undervoltage signal when it detects that the inverter is in undervoltage situation To enable this function assign 09 UV to an intelligent output terminal Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Signal ON Inverter is in undervoltage during OFF Inverter is in normal condition undervolt age Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings Notes e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 235 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 4 6 12 Torque Limit Section 4 6 The inverter outputs the torque limited signal when it is in torque limit opera tion To enable this function assign 10 TRQ to an intelligent output terminal Refer to SECTION 3 Configuring Drive Parameters on page 69 for detailed explanation Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Torque limit ON Description Inverter is in torque limiting mode OFF Inverter is not in torque limiting mode Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings A044 03 bOYO bO4Y Notes e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor
124. overlaps with existing register 1 word 1 P201 External register 1201h A001 P301 Internal register 1210h A014 P221 Scaling 1 000 P211 Format Unsigned 2 P202 External register 5001h P302 Internal register 1201h A001 P222 Scaling 1 000 P212 Format Unsigned A014 value 100 64h A001 value 1 01h 1 Read 0x03 Object register External register 1 1201h Transmission 01 03 12 00 00 01 81 72 Reception 01 03 02 00 64 B9 AF 2 Read 0x03 Object register Internal register 1 1210h Transmission 01 03 12 OF 00 01 B1 71 Reception 01 03 02 00 64 B9 AF 350 ModBus mapping Section B 5 3 Write 0x06 Object register External register 1 1201h Transmission 01 06 12 00 00 50 8C 8E Reception 01 06 12 00 00 50 8C 8E 4 Read 0x03 Object register Internal register 1 1210h Transmission 01 03 12 OF 00 01 B1 71 Reception 01 03 02 00 50 B8 78 5 Read 0x03 Object register External register 2 5001h Transmission 01 03 50 00 00 01 95 0A Reception 01 03 02 00 01 79 84 B 5 1 4 3 When external register overlaps with existing register 2 word higher rank P201 External register 1218h A021 HIGH P301 Internal register 120Fh A013 P221 Scaling 1 000 P211 Format Unsigned A013 value 33 21h 1 Read 0x03 Object register External register 1218h Transmission 01 03 12 17 00 01 31 76 Reception 01 03 02 00 21 78 5C 2 Read 0x03 Object regi
125. page 233 Using Intelligent Output Terminals The alarm relay output can be configured in two main ways Trip Power Loss Alarm The alarm relay is configured as normally closed 036 0 by default shown below left An external alarm circuit that detects broken wiring also as an alarm connects to ALO and AL1 After powerup and short delay lt 2 seconds the relay energizes and the alarm circuit is OFF Then either an inverter trip event or an inverter power loss will de energize the relay and open the alarm circuit e Trip Alarm Alternatively you can configure the relay as normally open 036 00 shown below right An external alarm circuit that detects bro ken wiring also as an alarm connects to ALO and AL2 After powerup the relay energizes only when an inverter trip event occurs opening the alarm circuit However in this configuration an inverter power loss does not open the alarm circuit Section 4 6 Be sure to use the relay configuration that is appropriate for your system design Note that the external circuits shown assume that a closed circuit no alarm condition so that a broken wire also causes an alarm However some systems may require a closed circuit alarm condition In that case then use the opposite terminal AL1 or AL2 from the ones shown N C contacts 036 0 N O contacts 036 00 During normal operation or when power is OFF During normal operation When
126. port 2 Optional operator port Pulse train input 24 VDC 32 kHz max USB mini B port Z PC communication port USB power Self power C i Option port connector GND for analog signals 194 Control Logic Signal Specifications Section 4 3 4 3 Control Logic Signal Specifications The control logic connectors are located just behind the front housing cover The relay contacts are just to the left of the logic connectors Connector label ing is shown below Relay contacts E Short bar sp eo ea H o of t amema 12 n LIL IL JL ETL RS485 Pulse Pulse Analog Analog Logic Train Train comm h input output output output input Terminal Name Description Ratings 24 V for logic inputs 24 VDC 100 mA including DI 5mA each do not short to terminal L Intelligent input common Factory set Source type connecting P24 to 1 7 turns each input ON To change to sink type remove the short bar between PLC and L and connect it between P24 and L In this case connecting L to 1 7 makes each input ON Discrete logic inputs Voltage between each input and PLC Terminal 3 4 5 and 7 have dual ON voltage 18 V min function See following description OFF voltage 3 V max and related pages for the details Allowable max voltage 27 VDC Load current 5 mA at 24 V Safe stop input GS1 Functionality is based on IS013849
127. pulse ratio Creep speed Positioning range Overspeed error detection level Speed deviation error detection level Acceleration deceleration time input type Torque reference input selection Torque reference setting Torque bias mode Torque bias value Torque bias polarity selection Speed limit value in torque control forward Speed limit value in torque control reverse Speed torque control switching time Network comm Watchdog timer Operation setting at communica tions error Instance number Operation setting at idle mode detection Polarity setting for rotation speed Pulse train frequency scale Pulse train frequency filter time constant Pulse train frequency bias amount Pulse train frequency limit Pulse input lower cut Multi step position command 0 Multi step position command 1 Multi step position command 2 Multi step position command 3 Multi step position command 4 Multi step position command 5 Multi step position command 6 Multi step position command 7 Zero return mode Zero return direction selection Low speed zero return frequency High speed zero return frequency w w we x x x ww Kw KY x lt xisi x lt s x sIsisisisisisisisisisis s s 369 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry P Group Parameters Default Setting Name EU S
128. run DC Braking Frequency Detection You can instead set DC braking to operate during RUN mode only by setting ADS to Ge Frequency detection In this case DC braking operates when the output frequency comes down to the one you specified in A052 while the RUN command is still active Refer to the graphs figures below Running Freerun D gt lt gt External DB and Internal DC braking are invalid during the frequency detec tion mode F SET AGS F OUT FW ON F OUT DB DB DB DB Eample 1 Step change in F SET Example 2 Analog change in F SET A Caution Example 1 above left shows the performance with A05 i 02 with a step changing frequency reference In this case when the reference goes to 0 the inverter immediately starts DC braking because the set point drops below the value specified in A052 DC braking continues until the set point exceeds A052 There will be no DC braking at next downward transition because the FW input is OFF Example 2 above right shows a gradually changing frequency reference for example by analog input In this case there will be a DC braking period at starting because the frequency set point is lower than the value specified in AD52 Be careful to avoid specifying to long braking time or to high carrier frequency that can cause motor overheating If you use DC braking we recommend using a motor with a built in thermistor and wiring i
129. specification label located on the right side MEG No of the inverter C 2 1 Main Profile Parameters Note Mark v in b031 10 shows the accessible parameters when b031 is set 10 high level access F Group Parameters Default Setting User Name EU Setting Output frequency setting monitor Acceleration time 1 2nd Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 2nd Deceleration time 1 Operator rotation direction selection 357 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Section C 2 C 2 2 Standard Functions Note Mark v in b031 10 shows the accessible parameters when b031 is set 10 high level access A Group Parameters Default Setting User Name EU Setting Frequency reference selection Frequency reference selection 2nd motor Run command selection Run command selection 2nd motor Base frequency 2nd set base frequency Maximum frequency 2nd maximum frequency O OI selection O start frequency O end frequency O start ratio O end ratio O start selection O O2 Ol sampling Drive Programming EzSQ Selection Multi step speed selection Multi step speed reference 0 2nd multi step speed reference 0 Multi step speed reference 1 Multi step speed reference 2 Multi step speed reference 3 Multi step speed reference 4 Multi step speed reference 5 Multi step speed reference 6 Multi step speed reference 7 Multi step speed reference 8 Multi step speed
130. the MX2 IP54 mounting plate Connect the AC power supply voltage to the EMC filter Connect the three phase motor to the motor output terminals of the MX2 inverter To prevent electric shock be sure to ground the MX2 EMC filter the motor and the MX2 IP54 mounting plate Use a star ground single point arrenge ment and never daisy chain the grounds point to point Connect other wiring if applicable wiring for I O wiring for network communi cation Connect the chassis ground terminal of mounting plate to earth ground Not doing so might result in an electric shock Connect the chassis ground terminal of the MX2 EMC filter to earth ground Not doing so might result in an electric shock Note Check all wiring before turning inverter ON Not doing so might result in damaging the unit Note Use shielded cables to avoid electrical interference Not doing so might result in unexpected behaviour or the unit Wiring Access Holes Layout of cable access holes at the bottom of the MX2 IP54 mounting plate A blinding plug is used for POWER OUT I O and Communication IN OUT access holes Demmuncaion Cammuntatior oT Cable gland diameters for wiring access holes Housing Type Power IN OUT Communication IN OUT 43 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 Note Use IP54 or better cable glands to prevent moisture from entering the unit Not doing so might result in damaging the unit Note Use c
131. times the motor moment of Inertia 4 Two or more motors could not be driven with one inverter 5 Be careful not exceed the demagnetization current of the motor From functionality point of view several functions and parameters are not available when PM mode is selected next table show which ones Related Parameters PM mode Intelligent input terminalSET08 Non display Intelligent output terminalSETM60 Non display Torque monitor limit control C027 C028 Choices restriction d009 d010 d012 b040 b045 C054 C059 P033 P034 P036 P041 Non display Intelligent input terminal TL 40 TRQ1 41 TRQ2 42 ATR 52 Non display Intelligent output terminal OTQ 07 TRQ 10 Non display Encoder feedback P003 Choices restriction d008 d029 d030 H050 H051 P004 P011 P012 P015 P026 Non display P027 P060 P073 P075 P077 Intelligent input terminal PCLR 47 CP1 66 CP3 68 ORL 69 Non display ORG 70 SPD 73 EB 85 Intelligent outpu terminal DES 22 POK 23 Non display Jog A038 A039 Non display Intelligent input terminal JG 06 Non display IM control A041 A044 A046 A047 b100 b113 H002 H006 H020 H024 Non display H030 H034 A045 Non display A081 A083 A084 Non display Automatic energy saving drive A085 A086 Non display Restarting with active matching frequency b001 b008 b088 C103 Choices restriction b028 b030 Non display
132. to achieve better motor control performance Note that the parameter is indicative and no formula to calculate the suitable value Normally longer the motor cable bigger the set value Please adjust depending on your system 131 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 For 11 and 15 kW inverter it is not needed to set b033 B Function Defaults Description b033 Motor cable length parameter Setranges6toe0 7 o E 3 6 7 Run power ON warning time Inverter outputs the operation time over RNT or the plug in time over ONT signal when the time specified as the run power ON warning time b234 is exceeded B Function Defaults Description EU Units b034 Run time Power ON time Range is x 10 Hrs setting D Warning disabled I to 9999 10 99 990 hrs unit 10 1000 to 6553 100 000 655 350 hrs unit 100 1 Operation time over RNT signal To use this signal function assign function 11 RNT to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 12 CDe to COee or to the alarm relay output C026 Specify the run power ON warning time b034 2 Plug in time over ONT signal To use this signal function assign function 12 ONT to one of the intelligent output terminals 11 to 12 C02 to CUee or to the alarm relay output C026 Specify the run power ON warning time b034 3 6 8 Rotation restriction related parameters Rotation direction
133. to GND or sources current from a power source into the input Note that the sink source naming convention may be different in your particular country or industry In any case just follow the wiring diagrams in this section for your application The inverter has a short bar jumper for configuring the choice of sinking or sourcing inputs To access it you must remove the front cover of the inverter housing In the figure to the top right the short bar is shown as attached to the logic terminal block connector Origi nally is located as source type logic If you need to change to the sink type connection remove the short bar and connect it as shown in the figure at the bottom right Logic inputs PE PEEPLES Short bar O l Source logic connection PE ETE PEER ji E Short bar Sink logic connection Be sure to turn OFF power to the inverter before changing the short circuit bar position Otherwise damage to the inverter circuitry may occur PLC Terminal Wiring The PLC terminal Programma ble Logic Control terminal is named to include various devices that can connect to the inverter s logic inputs In the figure to the right note the PLC terminal and the short bar jumper Locating the short bar between PLC and L sets the input logic source type which is the default setting In this case you connect input terminal to P24 to make it active If instea
134. to Retry wait time reduce the motor cur rent When the motor current is less than b030 the inverter increases motor speed toward the set speed The inverter continues this retry process until the motor speed comes to the previous set speed Overload restriction be I b028 is not valid when active frequency matching is activated If the actual power failure time is longer than the b002 set value the inverter does not resume and the motor will coast to stop 121 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 122 Automatic restart retry related parameters B Function Retry selection Description Select inverter restart method Five option codes DO Trip Alarm 01 0 Hz start Oe f match Frequency matching start 03 f match Trip Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart Section 3 6 Defaults Allowable momentary power interruption time The amount of time a power input under voltage can occur without tripping the power failure alarm Range is 0 3 to 25 0 sec If under voltage exists longer than this time the inverter trips even if the restart mode is selected Retry wait time Time delay after under voltage condition goes away before the inverter runs motor again Range is 0 3 to 100 0 seconds Momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during stop selection Three option codes 00 OFF Disabled
135. to be transmitted contains O as the status of the coil outside the range e When the Read Coil Status command cannot be executed normally see the exception response 302 Network Protocol Reference Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Section B 3 Read Holding Register 03h This function reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive hold ing registers of specified register addresses An example follows below e Reading Trip monitor 1 factor and trip frequency current and voltage from an inverter having a slave address 1 e This example assumes the previous three trip factors are as follows MX2 d081 d081 d081 d081 Command factor frequency output current DC bus Voltage Register 0012h 0014h 0016h 0017h Number Trip factor Over Current 9 9Hz 3 0A 284V Query Response Field Name Example Field Name Example Hex Hex Slave address 1 1 Slave address 01 Function code 2 Function code 03 Register start 3 Data size in bytes 2 0C address 3 high order Register start 4 Register data 1 00 address 3 high order low order Number of holding 5 Register data 1 03 registers high order high order Number of holding 6 Register data 2 00 registers low order high order CRC 16 high order 7 Register data 2 00 low order CRC 16 low order 8 Register data 3 00 high order 9 Register data 3 63 low order 10 Register data
136. want to make the inverter execute Function codes available to the MX2 series are listed below Function Code Function Maximum data size Maximum number of data bytes available per elements available per message message Read Coil Status 32 coils in bits Read Holding Register 16 registers in bytes Write in Coil 1 coil in bits Write in Holding Register 1 register in bytes Loopback Test Write in Coils 32 coils in bits Write in Registers 16 registers in bytes Read Write Holding Registor 16 registers in bytes Error check Modbus RTU uses CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check for error checking e The CRC code is 16 bit data that is generated for 8 bit blocks of arbitrary length e The CRC code is generated by a generator polynomial CRC 16 X16 X15 X2 1 Header and trailer silent interval Latency is the time between the reception of a query from the master and transmission of a response from the inverter e 3 5 characters 24 bits are always required for latency time If the latency time shorter than 3 5 characters the inverter returns no response e The actual transmission latency time is the sum of silent interval 3 5 characters long C078 transmission latency time 299 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 B 3 3 Message Configuration Response Transmission time required A time period between reception of a query from the master and transmis sion of a respo
137. 0 01 Hz Acceleration stop time A070 0 to 600 0 1 sec PID selection A071 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 reverse output enabling PID P gain A072 0 to 2500 0 10 PID I gain A073 0 to 36000 0 1 sec PID D gain A074 0 to 10000 0 01 sec PID scale A075 1 to 9999 0 01 PID feedback selection A076 00 Ol 01 O 02 RS485 communica tion 03 pulse train frequency 10 operation function output Reverse PID function A077 00 disabling 01 enabling PID output limit function A078 0 to 1000 PID feedforward selection A079 00 disabled 01 O 02 Ol Reserved AVR selection A081 00 always on 01 always off 02 off during deceleration AVR voltage selection A082 200 V class 0 200 1 215 2 220 3 230 4 240 400 V class 5 380 6 400 7 415 8 440 9 460 10 480 AVR filter time constant 0 000 to 10 00 0 001 sec 126Ch AVR deceleration gain 50 to 200 11 126Dh Energy saving operation mode 00 normal operation 01 energy sav ing operation 126Eh Energy saving response accuracy adjustment 0 to 1000 0 1 126Fh to 1273h Reserved 1274h Acceleration time 2 A092 high A092 low 0 to 360000 0 01 sec Deceleration time 2 A093 high A093 low 0 to 360000 0 01
138. 0 to 1023 Pulse train input monitor 0 00 to 100 00 PID deviation monitor 327 68 to 327 67 9999 00 to 9999 00 PID output monitor 0 00 to 9999 00 if A071 01 9999 00 to 9999 00 if A071 02 323 ModBus Data Listing iv List of registers Register No 03h Function name Acceleration time 1 Function code F002 high F002 low Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 0 to 360000 Data resolution 0 01 sec 1106h Deceleration time 1 F003 high F003 low 0 to 360000 0 01 sec 1107h Operator rotation direction selection F004 00 forward rotation 01 reverse rotation 1108h to 1200h Unused v List of registers function modes Parameter group A Register Function name Frequency reference selection Function Inaccessible Monitoring and setting items 00 digital operator 01 terminal 02 operator 03 Modbus communica tion 04 option 06 pulse train fre quency 7 drive programming 10 operation function result Data resolution Run command selection 01 terminal 02 operator 03 Modbus communication 04 option Base frequency 300 to maximum frequency 0 1 Hz Maximum frequency 300 to 4000 0 1 Hz O OI selection 00 switches between O OI via terminal AT 02 switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 0
139. 000 0 001 Reserved Slip compensation P gain for V f control with FB 0 to 10000 Slip compensation gain for V f control with FB 0 to 10000 PM motor code selection 00 Standard motor parameter D2 Auto tuning parameter PM motor capacity 0 10 to 18 50 PM motor pole number selection 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 poles PM rated current 0 00 x Rated current to 1 60 x Rated current 0 01 A PM parameter R 0 001 to 65 535 Q 0 001 Q PM parameter Ld 0 01 to 655 35 mH 0 01 mH PM parameter Lq 0 01 to 655 35 mH 0 01 mH PM parameter Ke 0 0001 to 6 5535 Vp rad s 0 0001 Vp rad s 337 ModBus Data Listing Register No 1579h to 157Ah Function name PM parameter J Function code Monitoring and setting items 0 001 9999 000 kg m Section B 4 Data resolution 0 001 kg m 157Bh PM parameter R auto tuning data 0 001 to 65 535 Q 0 001 Q 157Ch PM parameter Ld auto tuning data 0 01 to 655 35 mH 0 01 mH 157Dh PM parameter Lq auto tuning data 0 01 to 655 35 mH 0 01 mH 1581h PM speed response 1 to 1000 1582h PM starting current 20 00 to 100 00 1583h PM starting time 0 01 to 60 00 s 0 01 s 1584h PM stabilization constant 0 to 120 1586h PM minimum frequency
140. 001h Transmission 01 03 60 00 00 01 9A 0A Reception 01 83 31 80 E4 Error 31h modbus mapping missmatch 353 ModBus mapping Section B 5 B 5 2 Big Little endian setup B 5 2 1 Functional outline It allows to change the message structure of the Modbus USB and Option communication B 5 2 2 Setting parameter P400 Big endian Little endian selection Func Code Name Settings EU Big Little endian 00 Big endian selection 01 Little endian 02 Special endian Example Word Data 0x0102 Double Word Data 0x01020304 Word Data Endian of Word Data No Bigendian Littleendian Special endian 1 01 02 01 2 02 01 02 Double Word Data Endian of Double Word Data Big endian Little endian Special endian Note The software tool will not operate if modified B 5 2 3 Coverage of endian Endian is applied only to the register data It is not applied to the coil and the register number etc B 5 2 4 Parameter enable P400 Changes on this parameter becomes effective at power ON or after a reset B 5 2 5 Communication command that can be used by this function The list of the communication that can use this function are shown below Modbus communication command RS485 USB Modbus function code Function name Read Holding Register Write Single Register Write Multiple Registers Read Write Multiple Registers 354 ModBus mapping B 5 2 6 Examples B 5 2 6 1
141. 02 general output 2 M03 general output 3 Reserved Reserved Reserved IRDY inverter ready FWR forward rotation RVR reverse rotation MJA major failure Data writing in progress CRC error Overrun Framing error Parity error Sum check error Reserved WCO window comparator O WCOI window comparator Ol Reserved OPDce option disconnection FREF FQ command source REF RUN command source SETM 2nd motor selected Reserved EDM Gate suppress monitor ON 0 OFF unused inaccessible D D DW D d D d D Dy ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF Writing in progress 0 Normal status Error detected 0 No error 2 Error detected 0 No error 2 Error detected 0 No error 2 Error detected 0 No error 2 Error detected 0 No error 2 D D D D D D d D D D S ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF Operator 0 Others Operator 0 Others 2nd motor selected 0 1st motor selected Z D3 Note 1 Normally this coil is turned on when the corresponding intelligent input termi nal on the control circuit terminal block is turned on or the coil itself is set to on In this regar
142. 022 A4030 USE 75 C Cu wire only or equivalent For models 3G3MX2 AB001 AB002 AB004 AB007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 and A4150 Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100k rms symmetrical amperes 240V maximum when protected by Class CC G J or R fuses or circuit breaker having an interrupting rating not les than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 240 volts maximum For 200V models Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100k rms symmetrical amperes 480V maximum when protected by Class CC G J or R fuses or circuit breaker having an interrupting rating not les than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 480 volts maximum For 400V models Be sure to ground the unit Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified personnel Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire Implement wiring after checking that the power supply is OFF Otherwise you may incur electric shock and or fire Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an inverter that is not mounted according to the instructions given in this manual Otherwise there is a dan ger of electric shock and or injury to personnel Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 N WARNING N WARNING IP54 Connect all wiring via wiring access holes in the botttom of
143. 07 3G3MX2 A2007 3G3MX2 A4022 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 A2015 3G3MX2 A4030 3G3MX2 AB022 3G3MX2 A2022 3G3MX2 A4040 3G3MX2 A2037 3G3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A4075 3G3MX2 A2075 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3MX2 A2110 3G3MX2 A4150 3G3MX2 A2150 Note O Need derating Need no derating Use the following derating curves to help determine the optimal carrier fre quency setting for your inverter and find the output current derating Be sure to use the proper curve for your particular MX2 inverter model number Legend for Graphs Ambient temperature 40 C max individual mounting See eae ie eee Ambient temperature 50 C max individual mounting Ambient temperature 40 C max side by side mounting Derating curves CT VT 100 100 80 80 of rated 60 60 output current 40 40 20 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16kH 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A2002 CT 1 6 A VT 1 9 A 2 0 740 C individual 40 C side by side 40 C individual 140 C side by side output current 0 2 4 6 8 1012 1416kH 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency Carrier frequency MX2 Inverter Specifications 3G3MX2 AB004 3 6 3 0 output current 2 0 3G3MX2 A2004 output current 2 0 3G3MX2 A4007 44 gt 4 0 output current 3G3MX2 A2037
144. 09 AM bias setting 0 v C111 Overload warning level 2 Rated current x C130 Output 11 ON delay 0 0 x C131 Output 11 OFF delay 0 0 x C132 Output 12 ON delay 0 0 x C133 Output 12 OFF delay 0 0 x C140 Relay output ON delay 0 0 x C141 Relay output OFF delay 0 0 x C142 Logic output signal 1 selection 1 00 x C143 Logic output signal 1 selection 2 00 x 366 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry C Group Parameters Default Setting Name Logic output signal 1 operator selection EU b031 10 Section C 2 User Setting Logic output signal 2 selection 1 Logic output signal 2 selection 2 Logic output signal 2 operator selection Logic output signal 3 selection 1 Logic output signal 3 selection 2 Logic output signal 3 operator selection Input terminal response time 1 Input terminal response time 2 Input terminal response time 3 Input terminal response time 4 Input terminal response time 5 Input terminal response time 6 Input terminal response time 7 C 2 5 Multi step speed position determination time o a Motor Constants Functions H Group Parameters Default Setting Name Auto tuning selection EU 00 x we we x x x ow x b031 10 User Setting Motor parameter selection 2nd motor parameter selection 00 00 Motor capacity selection 2nd motor capacity selection Spec
145. 1 Hz DC injection braking delay time A053 0 to 50 0 1 sec DC injection braking power A054 0 to 100 T DC injection braking time A055 0 to 600 0 1 sec DC injection braking method selection A056 00 edge operation 01 level operation Startup DC injection braking power A057 0 to 100 T Startup DC injection braking time A058 0 to 600 0 1 sec DC injection braking carrier frequency A059 20 to 150 0 1 kHz Reserved Frequency upper limit A061 high A061 low 0 or maximum frequency limit to max imum frequency 0 01 Hz 325 ModBus Data Listing Register Function name Frequency lower limit Function code A062 high A062 low Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 0 or maximum frequency limit to max imum frequency Data resolution 0 01 Hz Jump frequency 1 A063 high A063 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Jump frequency width 1 A064 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz Jump frequency 2 A065 high A065 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Jump frequency width 2 A066 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz Jump frequency 3 A067 high A067 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Jump frequency width 3 A068 0 to 1000 0 01 Hz Acceleration stop frequency A069 high A069 low 0 to 40000
146. 1 Quadrant specific setting mode b040 02 In this mode individual torque limit value to be applied to four quadrants i e forward powering reverse regeneration reverse powering and forward regen eration are set as the torque limits 1 to 4 b04 I to 6044 respectively 2 Terminal switching mode bO4G 0 In this mode the torque limit values set in the torque limits 1 to 4 b04 I to b044 are switched from one another according to the combination of the states of torque limit switch terminals 1 and 2 TRQ1 and TRQ2 assigned to intelligent input terminals A single selected torque limit is valid in all the oper ating states 3 Analog voltage input mode b040 0 e In this mode the torque limit value is set by a voltage applied to the control cir cuit terminal O The voltage range 0 to 10V corresponds to the torque limit value range 0 to 200 A single selected torque limit is valid in all the operat ing states If parameter 40 TL whether to enable torque limitation has been assigned to any intelligent input terminal the torque limit mode selected by the setting of b04 is enabled only when the TL terminal is turned ON When the TL ter minal is turned OFF torque limit settings are invalid and the maximum torque setting is applied as a torque limit It the TL function has not been assigned to the intelligent input terminal the torque limit mode selected by the setting of b040 is always enabled Each torque limit va
147. 1 Safe stop input GS2 See appendix for the details Motor thermistor input Connect motor thermistor between PTC and L terminal and assign 19 PTC to detect the motor temperature by tripping when exceeding 3 kOhm Set 19 in C005 Pulse train input B Input pulse 1 8 KHz max ON voltage 18 V min OFF voltage 3 V max Allowable max voltage 27 VDC Load current 5 mA at 24 V Pulse train input A Input pulse 32 kHz max Voltage between input and L ON voltage 4 V min OFF voltage 1 V max Allowable max voltage 27 VDC L upper row 1 GND for logic inputs Sum of input 1 7 currents return 11 EDM Discrete logic outputs 11 Open collector output Terminal 11 has dual function See Between each terminal and CM2 following description and related Allowable max voltage 27 V pages for the details Discrete logic outputs 12 Allowable max current 50 mA Voltage drop when ON 4 V max In case the EDM is selected the functionality is based on 1ISO13849 1 GND for logic output 100 mA 11 12 current return Analog voltage output 0 10 VDC 1 mA maximum 195 Control Logic Signal Specifications Section 4 3 Terminal Name Description Ratings Pulse train output Output pulse 32 kHz max Output voltage 10 VDC Allowable max current 2 mA L bottom row GND for analog signals Sum of Ol O and H currents return 2 Ol Analog current input 0 to 20 mA rang
148. 1 ModBus Coil List The following tables list the primary coils for the inverter interface to the net work The table legend is given below e Coil Number The network register address offset for the coil The coil data is a single bit binary value Name The functional name of the coil e R W The read only R or read write R W access permitted to the inverter data e Description The meaning of each of the states of the coils Coil No Setting unused Inaccessible Operation command Run 0 Stop valid when A002 03 Rotation direction command Reverse rotation 0 Forward rotation valid when A002 03 External trip EXT Trip Trip reset RS Reset Reserved Reserved Intelligent input terminal 1 Intelligent input terminal 2 Intelligent input terminal 3 Intelligent input terminal 4 Intelligent input terminal 5 Intelligent input terminal 6 Intelligent input terminal 7 Reserved Operation status Rotation direction Inverter ready Reserved RUN running FA1 constant speed reached FA2 set frequency overreached OL overload advance notice 1 OD output deviation for PID control AL alarm signal FA3 set frequency reached OTQ over torque Reserved UV undervoltage TRQ torque limited RNT operation time over ONT plug in time over THM thermal alarm signal Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved BRK brake release BER brake error ZS 0 Hz detect
149. 100 mA complies to either IEC6127 2 3 4 Example SOC http Avww socfuse com EQ series 250 VAC 100 mA UL SEMKO BSI littel http www littelfuse co jp 216 series 250 VAC 100 mA CCC UL CSA SEMKO CE VDE Any external signal voltage connected to the 3G3MX2 must be from a SELV Power By pressing the emergency stop button the current to GS1 and GS2 is shut off and the inverter output is shut off By this motor is free running This behaviour is according to the stop category 0 defined in EN60204 Note 1 Above is the example to use the intelligent input terminal with source logic When it is used with sink logic the wiring is to be modified Note 2 The wire for safety relay and emergency input signal are to be shielded coax ial cable for example RS174 U produced by LAPP by MIL C17 or KX2B by NF C 93 550 with diameter 2 9 mm with less than 2 meters Please be sure to ground the shielding Note 3 All the inductance related parts such as relay and contactor are required to contain the over voltage protection circuit 381 Wiring example Section E 6 A Caution Inverter doesn t block the current flowing into itself when it is not powered This may cause the closed circuit when two or more inverters are connected to common I O wiring as shown below to result in unexpected turning on the input This may lead to dangerous situation To avoid this closed circuit please put the diode rated 50 V 0 1 A in the path
150. 15 AX RC14000047 DE 3G3MX2 A4022 AX RC10100069 DE 3G3MX2 A4030 AX RC08250093 DE 3G3MX2 A4040 AX RC06400116 DE 3G3MX2 A4055 AX RC04410167 DE 3G3MX2 A4075 AX RC03350219 DE 3G3MX2 A4110 AX RC02330307 DE 3G3MX2 A4150 AX RC01750430 DE 5 3 Dynamic Braking 5 3 1 Introduction 262 The purpose of dynamic braking is to improve the ability of the inverter to stop decelerate the motor and load This becomes necessary when an application has some or all of the following characteristics e High load inertia compared to the available motor torque e The application requires frequent or sudden changes in speed e System losses are not great enough to slow the motor as needed When the inverter reduces its output frequency to decelerate the load the motor can temporarily become a generator This occurs when the motor rota tion frequency is higher than the inverter output frequency This condition can cause the inverter DC bus voltage to rise resulting in an over voltage trip In many applications the over voltage condition serves as a warning signal that we have exceeded the deceleration capabilities of the system The MX2 inverters have a built in braking chopper which sends the regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration to the optional braking resistor s external braking units may also be used if higher braking torques and or duty cycles are required The dynamic
151. 2 14kH Carrier frequency Carrier frequency 3G3MX2 A4150 CT 31 0 A VT 38 0 A 50 C individual output current 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kH 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14kH Carrier frequency Carrier frequency Ambient Temperature Derating Curves IP54 For 11 kW and 15 kW MX2 inverters the carrier frequency must be limited to 2 kHz maximum For all other MX2 inverter models the curves for individual mounting ambient temperature 40 C max are applicable 13 Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives Section 1 3 1 3 Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives 1 3 1 The Purpose of Motor Speed Control for Industry Omron inverters provide speed control for 3 phase AC induction motors You connect AC power to the inverter and connect the inverter to the motor Many applications benefit from a motor with variable speed in several ways e Energy savings HVAC e Need to coordinate speed with an adjacent process textile and printing presses e Need to control acceleration and deceleration torque e Sensitive loads elevators food processing pharmaceuticals 1 3 2 What is an Inverter The term inverter and variable frequency drive are related and somewhat interchangeable An electronic motor drive for an AC motor can control the motor s speed by varying the frequency of the power sent to the motor An inverter in general is a device that converts DC power to AC po
152. 2 3 3 Installation Removal Method of the Terminal Block Cover 2 3 3 1 Removal method Loosen the screw s 1 or 2 While pressing the bottom of the locations securing the terminal block cover in the direction terminal block cover of the arrow pull the terminal block cover downward to remove While pressing here in the direction of the arrow pull the terminal block cover downward to remove The terminal block cover is secured with one screw at the bottom right for 3 0 kW and smaller models or with two screws on both sides for 3 7 kW and larger models The optional board cover is affixed with screws onto the terminal block cover but it is not affixed onto the main unit Accordingly the terminal block cover can be removed without removing the optional board cover 2 3 3 2 Installation method Follow the removal procedure in reverse Set the top side of the terminal block cover onto the main unit and push in the cover until you hear a click sound E E Optional board cover Terminal block cover
153. 3 switches between Ol FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 1206h to 120Ah Reserved 120Bh O start frequency A011 high A011 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz O end frequency A012 high A012 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz O start ratio A013 0 to O end ratio T O end ratio A014 O start ratio to 100 T O start selection A015 00 start FQ 01 0 Hz O O2 Ol sampling A016 1 to 30 or 31 500 ms filter 0 1 Hz with hysteresis Drive Programming EzSQ selection A017 00 disable 01 PRG start 02 always ON Reserved Multi step speed selection A019 00 binary 01 bit Multi step speed reference 0 A020 high A020 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 1 A021 high A021 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 2 A022 high A022 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 3 A023 high 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 4 A024 high A024 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 5 A025 high A025 low 0 or start frequency
154. 3 Compare Data comparison display 04 Basic Basic display 05 Monitor User parameters 1 to 32 Set range no doD I P 183 136 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 12 Automatic User Parameter Registration The automatic user parameter setting function allows you to make the inverter automatically record changed function codes in UOU to U032 You can use the stored function codes as a history of data change To enable this function select D P enabling automatic user parameter setting for the b039 When any data is changed and key is pressed the function code will be stored in UOD to U03 sequentially The latest data is in UOU I and the oldest one is in U03e Stored function codes in UDD I to UG3e are not duplicated If duplicated func tion code is changed old existing function code is deleted If number of changed function code exceeds 32 the oldest one in UOJ is deleted B Function Defaults Description EU Units User parameter automatic Two option codes setting function selection 00 OFF Disabled D1 ON Enabled User parameters 1 to 32 Set range no dOO I P 183 3 6 13 Torque Limit Function Torque limit function allows you to limit the motor output when 03 SLV is set for the V F characteristics set at parameter A044 You can select one of the fol lowing modes with the torque limit selection b040
155. 3 V Cnst RUN Starting voltage of non stop Setting of DC bus voltage to start function at momentary power controlled decel operation interruption Range is 0 0 to 1000 0 Stop deceleration level of non Setting the OV LAD stop level of stop function at momentary controlled decel operation power interruption Range is 0 0 to 1000 0 Deceleration time of non stop Range is 0 01 to 3600 00 function at momentary power interruption Deceleration starting width of Setting of initial freq drop non stop function at momen Range is 0 00 to 10 00 Hz tary power interruption 1 Value is double for 400V type inverter 140 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 15 Window Comparator Analog disconnection The window comparator function outputs signals when the values of analog inputs O and OI are within the maximum and minimum limits specified for the window comparator You can monitor analog inputs with reference to arbitrary levels to find input terminal disconnection and other errors You can specify a hysteresis width for the maximum limit and minimum limit levels of the window comparator You can also specify limit levels and a hys teresis width individually for analog inputs O and Ol You can fix the analog input data to be applied to an arbitrary value when WCO or WCOI is output For this purpose specify a desired value as the operation level at O OI disconnection b010 b07 1 b012
156. 35mH Depends on the motor capacity H Group Motor Constants Functions Section 3 8 H Function Defaults Description Motor parameter lo 0 01 655 35A auto tuning data Depends on the motor 2nd motor parameter lo capacity auto tuning data Motor parameter J 0 001 9999 000 kgm auto tuning data Depends on the motor 2nd motor parameter J capacity auto tuning data Slip compensation P gain for 0 00 10 00 0 2 V f control with FB Slip compensation gain for V f 0 1000 2 control with FB 3 8 1 Motor Constants Selection Adjust the motor constant settings to the motor to be driven by the inverter When using a single inverter to drive multiple motors in the control mode based on VC VP or free V F characteristics calculate the total capacity of the motors and specify a value close to the total capacity for the motor capacity selection HO03 H203 When the automatic torque boost function is used the motor constant settings that do not match with the motor may result in a reduced motor torque or unstable motor operation You can select the motor constants that are used when the control mode is the sensorless vector control hereafter SLV from the following three types 1 Motor constants of standard induction motor When H002 Hede 00 motor constants in HO20 Hee0 to HOC4 HecY are tak en The initial values in HO20 He20 to HO24 Heey are stan
157. 3G3MX2 A2 models e Three phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz 0 4 kW 15 kW for 3G3MX2 A4 models A Caution Be sure not to power a three phase only inverter with single phase power Otherwise there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of fire 49 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 50 Z Caution Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals Other wise there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury and or fire MX2 Inverter Output to Motor Power Input ood WOO A Caution Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main power supply Adjustable frequency inverter with integrated CE filters and shielded screened motor cables have a higher leakage current toward earth GND Especially at the moment of switching ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupters Because of the rectifier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch off function through small amounts of DC current Please observe the following e Use only short time invariant and pulse current sensitive ground fault interrupters with higher trigger current e Other components should be secured with separate ground fault inter rupters e Ground fault interrupters in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an absolute protection against electric shock A Caution Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the m
158. 3MX2 AB002 AB004 A2002 A2004 A2007 A4022 A4030 A4040 A4055 A4075 45 USE 60 C Cu wire only or equivalent For models 3G3MX2 A4004 A4007 ANO AA OVS 22 seeds Siete ETEEN E ET 45 Open Type EquipMment ccccecccccecseesseceecsenceeeeesecaeeesseeaeeesseseneeeeesenaees 46 Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100k rms symmetrical amperes 240V maximum when protected by Class CC G J or R fuses or circuit breaker having an interrupting rating not les than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 240 volts maximum For 200V models 005 42 Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100k rms symmetrical amperes 480V maximum when protected by Class CC G J or R fuses or circuit breaker having an interrupting rating not les than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 480 volts maximum For 400V models 0 5 42 Be sure to ground the unit Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and OMICS iaaa aaea a aaraa a a a Sn aa aa leapeed eebawedka teach 42 Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified personnel Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire ssssessessrissseerrsssesrrrsssrerrsssreens 42 Implement wiring after checking that the power supply is OFF Otherwise you may incur electric shock and or fire eee eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42 Do not connect wiring to an in
159. 3rd digit will be blinking 4th digit will be blinking Use up down keys to Use up down keys to Use up down keys to Use up down keys to change the value of the change the value ofthe change the value of the change the value of the digit digit digit digit Note When pressing with cursor on the highest digit the cursor will jump to the lowest digit A and B in above figure Note When pressing up key and down key at the same time in single digit edit mode the single digit edit mode is disabled and goes back to normal mode 67 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 2 5 7 Powerup Test Observations and Summary 68 Step 7 Note Reading this section will help you make some useful observations when first running the motor Error Codes If the inverter displays an error code format is E xx see Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions on page 273 to interpret and clear the error Acceleration and Deceleration The MX2 inverter has programmable acceleration and deceleration value The test procedure left these at the default value 10 seconds You can observe this by setting the frequency FB0 I at about half speed before running the motor Then press RUN and the motor will take 5 seconds to reach a steady speed Press the STOP key to see a 5 second deceleration to a STOP State of Inverter at Stop If you adjust the motor s speed to zero the motor will slow to a near stop and the inverter tur
160. 4 DI Reduced torque O 1I Reduced torque Oe Free V f Oe Free V f 03 SLV HD mode HD mode b049 01 ND mode b049 00 b049 01 d060 1 C b049 00 1 v b171 03 init Permanent magnet i mode d060 P i Permanent magnet mode 151 B Group Fine Tuning Functions 3 6 25 Password Function The MX2 inverter has password function to prevent from changing parameters Set 1234 in b 190 Set password 637 read only or to hide a Section 3 6 part of parameters There are two passwords for b037 Function Code Display Restriction and b03 Software Lock corresponding to pass word A and If password password B is forgotten there is no way to delete password Please be careful to set password Overview of password function Example of password A accessible impossible to change 6037 Accessible In this mode the password protection is enabled and parameter b031 cannot be changed Target of password Function Code Display Restriction b0J password A Set 0000 in b 190 Delete password Password authenticated b 190 234 accessible e b 19 I 234 impossible to change Cycle the power or no key bU37 Accessible operation for approx 10 min In this mode password protection is temporary disabled however the password is not deleted Set i234 in b 9 e Funct
161. 4 6 13 Running Time and Power On Time Over Signal The inverter outputs the operation time expiration signal and power on time expiration signal To enable this function assign 11 RNT and or 2 ONT to intelligent out put terminals Terminal Symbol Function Name RUN time over Description Accumulated operation time of the inverter exceeds the set value of b034 OFF Accumulated operation time of the inverter does not exceed the set value of b034 Power ON ON time over Accumulated power on time of the inverter exceeds the set value of 6034 OFF Accumulated power on time of the inverter does not exceed the set value of b034 Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings b034 Notes e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 236 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 14 Thermal Warning You can configure this function so that the inverter outputs a warning signal before the electronic thermal protection operates against motor overheat You can also set the threshold level to output a warning signal with the electronic thermal warning level setting C06 1 To output the warning signal assign function 13 THM to one of the intelli gent output terminals 11 to
162. 5 118 000000000000000 000000000000000 0000000000000QQ0 0000000000000000 S 00000000000000000 00000000000000000 000000 U Power Type gt ss a E 3 phase 200 V 3G3MX2 A2037 140 128 170 5 55 3 phase 400 V 3G3MX2 A4040 36 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 W 2 6 122 A Q acu Sc Sc Ss Sic oc aoc 1c cc SS fee ccs I N Acs cc e oc Sc cc Sc Cec aac ac Ss cc acs oc o L6 x 6 QOQ _ Q y O ee Tw mr TOT m 3 phase 200 V 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 3 phase 400 V 3G3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A4075 37 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 38 160 oon o O Ww Power Type Wmm H mm D mm D1 mm 3 phase 200 V 3G3MX2 A2110 2
163. 75 130 anae 22 2022 B022 REM00K4035 IE 35 180 phase 4 0 2040 REMOO0K6035 IE 35 100 5 5 2055 20 REM00K9020 IE 20 150 7 5 2075 17 REM01K9017 IE 17 110 11 2110 REM02K1017 IE 17 75 15 2150 10 REM03K5010 IE 10 95 0 55 4004 200 1 4007 7 180 REMO0K1400 IE 400 500 1 5 4015 REM00K2200 IE 200 190 2 2 4022 200 400 V REM00K5120 IE 120 three 3 0 4030 100 160 phase 4 0 4040 REMO0K6100 IE 100 140 5 5 4055 REM00K9070 IE 70 150 7 5 4075 70 REM01K9070 IE 70 110 11 4110 REM02K1070 IE 70 75 15 4150 35 REM03K5035 IE 35 110 265 Dynamic Braking Section 5 3 266 SECTION 6 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 6 1 Troubleshooting 6 1 1 Safety Messages Please read the following safety messages before troubleshooting or perform ing maintenance on the inverter and motor system N WARNING Wait at least ten 10 minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before performing maintenance or an inspection Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock N WARNING Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance inspection and part replacement Before starting to work remove any metallic objects from your person wristwatch bracelet etc Be sure to use tools with insu lated handles Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or injury to personnel N WARNING Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads wires for cooling fan and logic P C b
164. 96 175 97 3 phase 400 V 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3MX2 A4150 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 Power Type Wimm H mm D mm D1 mm 39 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 179 5 Paien 169 5 igure in Al 150 A Omron lt Xl a g N o fd ly 274 292 7 Power Type Single phase 200 V 3G3MX2 DB001 E 3G3MX2 DB002 E 3G3MX2 DB004 E 3 phase 200 V 3G3MX2 D2001 E 3G3MX2 D2002 E 3G3MX2 D2004 E 3G3MX2 D2007 E 309 5 399 5 Figure 2 Al 279 5 Fa i 12 5 482 8 462 33 OOM OO 98 9 317 7 Power Type Single phase 200 V 3G3MX2 DB001 EC 3G3MX2 DB002 EC 3G3MX2 DB004 EC 3G3MX2 DB007 EC 3G3MX2 DB015 EC 3G3MX2 DB022 EC 3 phase 200 V 3G3MX2 D2001 EC 3G3MX2 D2002 EC 3G3MX2 D2004 EC 3G3MX2 D2007 EC 3G3MX2 D2015 EC 3G3MX2 D2022 EC 3G3MX2 D2037 EC J E p5 i 63 5 a 40 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 3 phase 400 V 325 295 627 04 607 3G3MX2 D4004 EC 3G3MX2 D4007 EC 3G3MX2 D4015
165. AC 3G3MX2 A4004 A4007 A4015 AX RAI07700050 DE 3G3MX2 A4022 A4030 A4040 AX RAI03500100 DE 3G3MX2 A4055 A4075 AX RAI01300170 DE 3G3MX2 A4110 A4150 AX RAI00740335 DE 257 Component Descriptions 5 2 2 AC Reactors Output Side This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor caused by the inverter s switching waveforms by smoothing the waveforms to approximate commer cial power quality It is also useful to reduce the reflected voltage wave phe nomenon when wiring from the inverter to the motor is more than 10 m in length Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for installation instructions Section 5 2 258 Voltage Reference A ee F ae 1 SAN A jer aa AX RAO11500026 DE 70 52 1 78 0 4 2 6 11 50 AX RAOQ07600042 DE 120 120 80 55 0 75 4 2 7 60 AX RAOQ04100075 DE 80 62 235 1 5 7 5 4 10 AX RAOQ03000105 DE 2 2 10 5 3 00 200 V AX RAO01830160 DE 190 55 3 7 16 0 1 83 AX RAO01 150220 DE 85 55 5 5 22 0 1 15 AX RAOQ00950320 DE 180 140 6 6 5 7 5 32 0 0 95 AX RAQ00630430 DE 95 205 65 91 11 43 0 0 63 AX RAQ00490640 DE 15 64 0 0 49 AX RAO16300038 DE 70 52 1 78 1 5 3 8 16 30 AX RAOQ11800053 DE 120 80 120 80 5 5 235 2 2 5 3 11 80 AX RAOQ07300080 DE 62 4 0 8 0 7 30 400 V AX RAO04600110 DE 85 190 5 5 5 5 11 0 4 60 A
166. AIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regu lations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other appli cation or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the prod ucts o Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interfer ence or conditions or uses not described in this manual o Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations o Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK
167. Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine be sure to design the machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel N WARNING If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time the inverter may restart operating after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active If a restart may pose danger to personnel so be sure to use a lock out circuit so that it will not restart after power recovery Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel N WARNING The Stop Key is effective only when the stop function is enabled Be sure to enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel N WARNING During a trip event if the alarm reset is applied and the Run command is pres ent the inverter will automatically restart Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after verifying the Run command is OFF Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel N WARNING Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any conduc tive object into it Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire Z N WARNING If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active the motor will automatically start and injury may result Before turning ON the power con firm that the RUN command is not present N WARNING When the Stop key function is disabled pressing the Stop key does not stop the inverter
168. Big endian B 5 2 6 2 Little endian Section B 5 A013 Register number 120Fh Value 33 21h F002 Register number 1103h Value 360000 57E40h 1 Read 0x03 Object register 120Fh A013 Transmission 01 03 12 OE 00 01 EO B1 Reception 01 03 02 00 21 78 5C 2 Read 0x03 Object register 1103h F002 Transmission 01 03 11 02 00 02 60 F7 Reception 01 03 04 00 05 7E 40 CA 62 3 Write 0x06 Object register 120Fh A013 Write data 100 64h Transmission 01 06 12 OE 00 64 EC 9A Reception 01 06 12 OE 00 64 EC 9A 4 Write 0x10 Object register 1103h F002 Write data 74565 12345h Transmission 01 10 11 02 00 02 04 00 01 23 45 3B 25 Reception 01 10 11 02 00 02 E5 34 A013 Register number 120Fh Value 33 21h F002 Register number 1103h Value 360000 57E40h 1 Read 0x03 Object register 120Fh A013 Transmission 01 03 12 OE 00 01 EO B1 Reception 01 03 02 21 00 AO 14 2 Read 0x03 Object register 1103h F002 Transmission 01 03 11 02 00 02 60 F7 Reception 01 03 04 40 7E 05 00 8C BB 3 Write 0x06 Object register 120Fh A013 Write data 100 64h Transmission 01 06 12 OE 64 00 C7 B1 Reception 01 06 12 OE 64 00 C7 B1 4 Write 0x10 Object register 1103h F002 Write data 74565 12345h Transmission 01 10 11 02 00 02 04 45 23 01 00 57 70 Reception 01 10 11 02 00 02 E5 34 355 ModBus mapping B 5 2 6 3 356 Special endian Section B 5 A013
169. Cat No 1570 E2 02B MX2 Born to drive machines Model 3G3MX2 200 V Class Three Phase Input 0 1 to 15 kW 200 V Class Single Phase Input 0 1 to 2 2 kW 400 V Class Three Phase Input 0 4 to 15 kW USER S MANUAL 2 N Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed pre cautions can result in injury to people or damage to property OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product OMRON 2013 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assu
170. Caution A Caution A Caution Before continuing please read the following Caution messages The heat sink fins will have a high temperature Be careful not to touch them Otherwise there is the danger of getting burned The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the inverter Otherwise it may cause injury to per sonnel If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting 50 Hz 60 Hz be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequen cies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage 191 Introduction Section 4 1 4 1 2 Warning Messages for Operating Procedures N WARNING Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case While the inverter is energized be sure not to open the front case Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock Z N WARNING Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock Z N WARNING While the inverter is energized be sure not to touch the inverter terminals even when the motor is stopped Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock N WARNING If the retry mode is selected the motor may suddenly restart after a trip stop
171. D I through 987 configure the terminals 1 through 7 respectively The value of these particular parameters is not a scalar value but it is a discrete number that selects one option from many available options For example if you set function COD 00 you have assigned option BO For ward Run to terminal 1 The option codes and the specifics of how each one works are in Chap 4 C Function Defaults Description EU Units Multi function input 2 selection Multi function input 3 selection Multi function input 4 selection Multi function input 5 selection Multi function input 6 selection Multi function input 7 selection 153 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 The input logic conversion is programmable for each of the seven inputs default to normally open active high but you can select normally closed active low in order to invert the sense of the logic C Function Defaults Description Multi function input 1 operation Select logic conversion two selection option codes Multi function input 2 operation 00 NO selection at NC Multi function input 3 operation selection Multi function input 4 operation selection Multi function input 5 operation selection Multi function input 6 operation selection Multi function input 7 operation selection Note An
172. Depend on RUN command FW or RV 183 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 184 Note 3 Note 4 For rotating coordinate system if 0 I is set in P0175 the rotation direction of shorter routing is selected In this case set the number of pulse for one rota tion in position O PU6Y This value must be positive number ae Command 6000 P075 00 PO60 8000 2000 6000 Current position P075 01 0 8000 When 0 l is set in P0715 POY should be set to 00 or D In the simple positioning mode the inverter runs the motor until the machine reaches the target position according to the following settings and then stops the motor with DC braking lt 1 gt Position setting lt 2 gt Speed setting frequency setting lt 3 gt Acceleration and deceleration time DC braking state is held until RUN command is turned off RUN command Output freq Set speed EATE IET A POK output signal If the position value specified by the position setting is small the inverter decelerates the motor for positioning before the speed reaches Creep speed P015 LLL Position Creep pulse ratio P014 e In simple positioning mode the frequency and acceleration deceleration are according to current settings as same as normal operation Depending on DC braking and creep speed setting positioning may go off the point If the position value specified by the position setting is small the inverter may
173. EC 3G3MX2 D4022 EC 3G3MX2 D4030 EC 3G3MX2 D4040 EC Figure 3 12 5 il 299 5 3 phase 200 V Figure 3 3G3MX2 D2055 EC 3G3MX2 D2075 EC 3 phase 400 V 379 69 349 710 35 689 85 Oo 0o 3G3MX2 D4055 EC 3G3MX2 D4075 EC Figure 4 11 5 3 phase 200 V 329 7 3G3MX2 D2110 EC 3G3MX2 D2150 EC 3 phase 400 V 3G3MX2 D4110 EC 3G3MX2 D4150 EC 41 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 3 5 Prepare for Wiring 42 Step 1 Step 2 N WARNING Z N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N HIGH VOLTAGE N HIGH VOLTAGE N HIGH VOLTAGE N HIGH VOLTAGE IP20 Before proceeding to the wiring section Ventilation holes top it s a good time to temporarily covers the inverter s ventilation openings Paper and masking tape are all that is needed This will prevent harmful debris such as wire clippings and metal shavings from entering the inverter during installation VUND A ANN VA wanna A Ventilation holes both sides It is very important to perform the wiring steps carefully and correctly Before proceeding please study the caution and warning message herebelow USE 60 75 C Cu wire only or equivalent For models 3G3MX2 A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 AB015 AB022 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4
174. Error SP PV For cooling loops an increase in energy into the process results in a decreasing PV In this case the Loop Error SP PV Use A017 to configure the error term SP calculation calculation PV from process with positive correlation PV from process with negative correlation PV PID deviation output If PID deviation exceeds the value in C044 output signal configured as 04 OD is activated PID feedback comparison output If PID feedback is below Feedback Low Limit 053 and the inverter is in RUN mode the output turns ON it remains active until feedback gets over the PID High Limit COS2 or inverter pass to Stop mode PID feedback cetera Nf Noe N ee COS PID FBV output high limit a 40 Geer Aire semen nme a ee C0534 PID FBV output low limit Time FW input FBV output oN ON PID scaling When PID scale parameter A075 is set following variables are scaled monitored variable x A015 112 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 3 5 9 PID Sleep Function The inverter shuts off the output when the PID output becomes less than the specified value A 156 in case of PID is set enabled or shuts off when the fre quency command becomes less than the specified value in case of PID is set disabled And if the PID output or frequency command exceeds the specified value A 156 for a specified period A 151 inver
175. Hz Braking Without resistor 100 lt 50 Hz lt 50 Hz 50 lt 60 Hz lt 60 Hz With resistor 150 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Weight kg 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 2 Ib 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 6 Three phase 200V class Specifications 3G3MXz2 inverters 200 V models A2037 A2075 Applica kW VT 5 5 7 5 11 15 ble motor CT 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 size 2 HP VT 7 5 10 15 20 CT 5 7 5 10 15 Rated 200 V VT 6 7 10 3 13 8 19 3 WAY CT 6 0 8 6 11 4 16 2 240 V VT 8 1 12 4 16 6 23 2 CT 7 2 10 3 13 7 19 5 Loss at 100 load 154 229 313 458 Efficiency at rated load 96 96 96 96 Rated input voltage Single phase 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V proportional to input voltage Rated output current VT 19 6 30 0 40 0 56 0 A CT 17 5 25 0 33 0 47 0 Starting torque 6 200 at 0 5 Hz Braking Without resistor 100 lt 50 Hz 50 lt 60 Hz With resistor 150 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Weight 2 0 3 3 3 4 5 1 4 4 7 3 7 5 11 2 MX2 Inverter Specifications Section 1 2 Item Three phase 400V class Specifications 3G3MX2 inverters 400 V models A4004 Applica kW VT 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 0 ble motor CT 0 4 1 5 2 2 size 2 HP VT 1 2 3 4 CT 1 2 1 2 3 Rat
176. I6 3 I is a special value It configures the inverter to use a movable deadband feature Initially the inverter uses the 500 ms of filter time con stant Then the deadband is employed for each subsequent average of 16 samples The deadband works by ignoring small fluctuations in each new average less than 0 1 Hz change When a 30 sample average exceeds this deadband then the inverter applies that average to the out put frequency reference and it also becomes the new deadband compar ison point for subsequent sample averages The example graph below shoes a typical analog input waveform The filter removes the noise spikes When a speed change such as level increase 95 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 occurs the filter naturally has a delayed response Due to the deadband fea ture AD 16 3 I the final output changes only when the 30 sample average moves past the deadband threshold A Tip The deadband feature is useful in applications that requires a very stable out put frequency but use an analog input for the speed reference Example appli cation A grinding machine uses a remote potmeter for operator speed input After a setting change the grinder maintains a very stable speed to deliver a uniform finished surface AO 16 Hz Small step change Output freq reference a Threshold exceeded peegugneememeesnncemnsemssnanaas 0 1 0 1 ppuepemenen nnn ee tee ee 0 2 New deadband 16 sample avg 0 imag
177. Inverter is not driving the motor in reverse direction Fatal fault signal Inverter is tripping with major failure Inverter is normal or is not tripping with major failure Window comparator O Analog voltage input value is inside of the window comparator Analog voltage input value is outside of the window comparator Window comparator Ol Analog current input value is inside of the window comparator Analog current input value is outside of the window comparator Frequency command source Frequency command is given from the operator Frequency command is not given from the operator Run command source Run command is given from the operator Run command is not given from the operator 2nd motor Selection 2nd motor is being selected 21d motor is not being selected STO Safe Torque Off Performace Monitor Output terminal 11 only STO is being performed STO is not being performed Option board output output terminal for option card output terminal for option card Not used 163 Section 3 7 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 3 7 4 Low Load Detection Parameters The following parameters work in con junction with the intelligent output func tion when configured The output mode parameter C038 sets the mode of the detection at which the low load detection signal LOC turns ON Two kinds of modes can be sel
178. L S curve ratio 2 during Range is 0 to 50 deceleration Acceleration deceleration pattern summary Setting 00 D3 oy Curve Linear Inverse U curve EL S curve R097 Freq Freq Freq Accel pattern A098 Decel pattern t t t t t Remarks Standard pattern Effective for prevent Effective for the tension control of winding Effective for lift appli ing the collapse of machine to prevent cutting the object to be cation because of cargo carried by lift wound for example the shock less start or conveyor for and stop example A 13 I Curve constant swelling A0971 03 Inverse U curve 0 t Large A131 value will result in a big swelling A 132 is the same concept as above 117 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 A IS0 A 153 Curvature of EL S curve When using EL S curve pattern you can set the curvatures individually for acceleration and deceleration If all the curvatures are set to 50 the EL S curve pattern will be equivalent to the S curve pattern 5 Curvature for Q l F150 deceleration 1 Curvature for acceleration 2 SAA Curvature for acceleration 1 RIS Curvature for 1 133 deceleration 2 0 t For use of EL S curve be sure to use select multi speed as frequency source to avoid nuisance change of frequency during acceleration and deceleration 3 5 14 Additional Analog I
179. Logic output signal 1 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 OPO no Logical output signal 1 operator selection 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR Logic output signal 2 selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 OPO no Logic output signal 2 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 OPO no Logical output signal 2 operator selection 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR Logic output signal 3 selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 OPO no Logic output signal 3 selection 2 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 OPO no 335 ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 Register Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Data No resolution 149Ah Logical output signal 3 operator 00 AND 01 OR 02 XOR selection 149Bhto Reserved 14A3h 14A4h Input terminal response time 1 0 to 200 14A5h Input terminal response time 2 0 to 200 14A6h Input terminal response time 3 0 to 200 14A7h Input terminal response time 4 0 to 200 14A8h Input terminal response time 5 0 to 200 14A9h Input terminal response time 6 0 to 200 14AAh Input terminal response time 7 0 to 200 14ABh to Reserved 14ACh 14ADh Multi step speed position 0 to 200 determination time 14A4h to unused Inaccessible 1500h
180. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock 1 Loosen the three screws that hold the front cover 2 Pull the bottom of the front cover for about 5 cm 3 Move the front cover upwards to remove Only authorized people should be allowed to open the cover Do not touch the cover during the power supply and for some time after the power shutdown Doing so might result in a moderate burn Mounting MX2 IP54 Mounting Plate All housings use for M6 mounting screws Be sure to use lock washers or other means to ensure screws do not loosen due to a vibration 2 3 2 Installation Environment clearance LLDD LLL LL LL LLL LLL LLLA L fo mm or more Provide sufficient space so that the top and bottom wiring ducts etc will not obstruct the flows of cooling air Air flow Inverter 1m mm or more Make sure the ambient temperature remains within the rated range 10 to 50 C Take note that if the ambient temperature reaches or exceeds 40 C the carrier frequency and output current must be derated check derating tables per each inverter model in Derating Curves on page 9 If the Inverter is used in an environment exceeding the allowable operating temperature range the product life of the Inverter specifically the capacitor will be shortened Measure and check the temperature a
181. Ol input active range start ratio Ol input active range end ratio Ol input start frequency enable Acceleration curve parameter Deceleration curve parameter Operation frequency input A setting Operation frequency input B setting Operator selection Frequency addition amount Frequency addition direction EL S curve ratio 1 during acceleration w w x x x x x x ww we KY Kw KY x EL S curve ratio 2 during acceleration EL S curve ratio 1 during deceleration EL S curve ratio 2 during deceleration Deceleration hold frequency Deceleration hold time PID sleep function action threshold PID sleep function action delay time VR input active range start frequency VR input active range end frequency VR input active range start current VR input active range end voltage 360 VR input start frequency enable Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Section C 2 C 2 3 Fine Tuning Functions B Group Parameters Default Setting b031 10 User Name EU Setting Retry selection Allowable momentary power inter ruption time Retry wait time Momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during stop selection Momentary power interruption retry time selection Frequency matching lower limit frequency setting Trip retry selection 00 Overvoltage overcurrent retry time 3 selection Trip retry
182. Overcurrent suppression b027 Non display Reduced voltage start b036 Non display Reverse run protection b046 Non display Brake control b120 b127 Non display Intelligent input terminal BOK 44 Non display Intelligent output terminal BRK 19 BER 20 Non display Offline auto tuning H001 Choices restriction Dual Rating b049 Non display Commercial power source switching Intelligent input terminal CS14 Non display LAD cancellation 178 Intelligent output terminal LAC46 Non display P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 3 9 P Group Other Parameters P group parameters are for other functionality such as option error encoder pulse train input settings torque command positioning command Drive Programming and communication CompoNet DeviceNet EtherCAT Profi Bus CAN Open related 3 9 1 Option Card Error You can select how the inverter reacts when an error results from a built in option card P Function Defaults Description Operation selection at option 1 Two option codes error D0 Trip D 1 Continues operation 3 9 2 Encoder Pulse Train Input Related Settings You can achieve speed control or simple positioning control by using pulse train input Following table shows the related parameters of those function Please refer to SECTION 4 Operations and Monitoring on page 191 for the detailed description P Fun
183. P034 0 to 200 Reserved Torque bias mode P036 00 none 01 digital operator 05 option 1 Torque bias value P037 200 to 200 T Torque bias polarity selection P038 00 signed 01 depends on the run direction Speed limit value in torque control forward P039 high P039 low 0 to 12000 0 01 Hz Speed limit value in torque control reverse P040 high P040 low 0 to 12000 0 01 Hz Speed torque control switching time P041 0 to 1000 Reserved Network comm Watchdog timer 0 to 9999 0 01 sec Operation setting at communica tions error 00 trip 01 trip after deceleration stop 02 ignore 03 free RUN 04 deceleration stop Instance number 0 20 Reserved Operation setting at idle mode detection 00 trip 01 trip after deceleration stop 02 ignore 03 free RUN 04 deceleration stop Polarity setting for rotation speed 2 4 6 8 10 1 2 1 4 16 1 8 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 Reserved Pulse train frequency scale 10 to 320 input frequency correspond ing to the allowable maximum fre quency 0 1 kHz Pulse train frequency filter time constant 1 to 200 0 01 sec 339 ModBus Data Listing Register Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Section B 4 Data code resolution
184. Parameters bO b022 and b023 If Overload Restriction is not enabled then the current limit used is 150 of the inverter s rated output current The deceleration time is controlled so that the output current is maintained below 150 of the inverter s rated current and the DC bus voltage is main tained below the OV Trip level 400 V or 800 V Note If the load exceeds the rating of the inverter the acceleration time may be increased Note If using a motor with a capacity that is one size smaller than the inverter rat ing enable the Overload Restriction function bf2 and set the Overload Restriction Level b022 to 1 5 times the motor nameplate current Note Be aware that the acceleration and deceleration times will vary depending on the actual load conditions during each individual operation of the inverter Note When analog input is a source of frequency command be sure to set analog filter AD 16 3 500 ms Otherwise there can be the case that this energy sav ing function doesn t work well 114 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 3 5 12 Second Acceleration and Deceleration Functions The MX2 inverter features two stage acceleration and deceleration ramps This gives flexibility in the profile shape You can specify the frequency transi tion point the point at which the standard acceleration F002 or deceleration F003 changes to the second acceleration A092 or deceleration A093 Or you can use inte
185. Pulse Train Input Operation The MX2 inverter is capable of accepting pulse train input signals that are used for frequency command process variable feedback for PID control and simple positioning The dedicated terminal is called EA and EB Termi nal EA is a dedicated terminal and the terminal EB is an intelligent termi nal that has to be changed by a parameter setting li pm T Ips ah st sr EE wR am ay eee ee ae a mas ced S nm aS mS ey a a mB eS er cep eat j mP RS485 comm Logic input Isnlzlelslal salola prell Relay contact lt an N JA Short bar Sey se kolea u ofo famem 12 14 CTTI ez arzlar ALO N all l F Kam RS485 Pulse Pulse Analog Analog Logic comm Train Train output output output input Description Ratings Pulse train input A For frequency command 32 kHz max Common is L EB Pulse train input B 27 VDC max Input terminal 7 Set 007 to BS For frequency command 2 kHz max Common is PLC 1 Frequency Command by pulse train input 251 Analog Output Operation Section 4 8 When using this mode you should set AGG to 06 In this case the frequency is detected by input capture and calculated based on the ratio of designated max frequency under 32 kHz Only an input terminal EA will be used in this case 2 Using for process variable of PID control You can use the pulse train input for process variable feedbac
186. S2 circuits are working properly If for any reason only one channel is opened the drive output is stopped but the EDM output is not activated In this case the Safe Disable input wiring must be checked Safety function EDM function switch switch OFF 0 ON oon ON normal EDM E conocoocay THER 379 Activation Section E 4 E 4 Activation Turning on the safety switch automatically assign the GS1 input and GS2 input automatically To assign EDM external device monitor output please turn the EDM function switch on EDM output is automatically assigned on intelligent output terminal 11 When safety switch or EDM switch is turned off the intelligent input and output terminal assigned on will be set as no function and contact will remain normally off Always use both inputs to disable the drive If for any reason only one channel is opened the drive output is stopped but the EDM output is not activated In this case the Safe Disable input wiring must be checked E 5 Installation According to the safety standard listed above please install referring to the example Please be sure to use the both GS1 and GS2 and construct the system that GS1 and GS2 are both turned off when safety input is given to the inverter Z Caution Be sure to carry out the prooftest when installation is ready before operation When the Gate Suppress function is utilized connect the drive to a safety certified interrupting devic
187. Stop Commands When you input the Run command via the terminal FW the inverter exe cutes the Forward Run command high or Stop command low When you input the Run command via the terminal RV the inverter executes the Reverse Run command high or Stop command low Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Forward Inverter is in Run Mode motor runs Run Stop forward Inverter is in Stop Mode motor stops Reverse Inverter is in Run Mode motor runs Run Stop reverse Inverter is in Stop Mode motor stops Valid for inputs C00 CO07 Example default input configura Required settings AQ0 0 tion shown see page 153 Notes RV FW e When the Forward Run and Reverse Run P7fofs fa s 2 i fu Fef commands are active at the same time the inverter enters the Stop Mode When a terminal associated with either FW or RV function is configured for normally See I O specs on page 195 closed the motor starts rotation when that terminal is disconnected or otherwise has no input voltage Note The parameter F004 Keypad Run Key Routing determines whether the single Run key issues a Run FWD command or Run REV command However it has no effect on the FW and RV input terminal operation Z N WARNING If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active the motor starts rotation and is dangerous Before turning power ON confirm that the Run command is n
188. TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM ii PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or estab lish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing pur poses even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in deter mining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty
189. Tel 31 0 23 568 13 00 Fax 31 0 23 568 13 88 industrial omron eu Austria el 43 0 2236 377 800 industrial omron at Belgium 32 0 2 466 24 80 industrial omron be o Czech Republic 420 234 602 602 dustrial omron cz o 5 Denmark el 45 43 44 00 11 industrial omron dk Finland 358 0 207 464 200 industrial omron fi o France 33 0 1 56 63 70 00 industrial omron fr o Germany el 49 0 2173 6800 0 industrial omron de Hungary 36 0 1399 30 50 industrial omron hu o Italy el 39 02 32 681 industrial omron it South Africa el 27 0 11 579 2600 industrial omron eu Note Specifications subject to change without notice Cat No 1570 E2 02B OMRON Netherlands Tel 31 0 23 568 11 00 industrial omron nl Norway Tel 47 0 22 65 75 00 industrial omron no Poland Tel 48 22 458 66 66 industrial omron pl Portugal Tel 351 21 942 94 00 industrial omron pt Russia Tel 7 495 648 94 50 industrial omron ru Spain Tel 34 902 100 221 industrial omron es Sweden Tel 46 0 8 632 35 00 industrial omron se Switzerland Tel 41 0 41 748 13 13 industrial omron ch Turkey Tel 90 212 467 30 00 industrial omron com tr United Kingdom Tel 44 0 870 752 08 61 industrial omron co uk
190. The ability of a controller to execute a procedure that interacts with a load to determine the proper coefficients to use in the control algorithm Auto tuning is a common feature of process controllers with PID loops Omron inverters feature auto tuning to determine motor parameters for optimal commutation Auto tuning is available as a special command from a digital operator panel See also Digital Operator Panel The power input frequency for which an AC induction motor is designed to operate Most motors will specify a 50 to 60 Hz value The OmronOmron inverters have a programmable base frequency so you must ensure that parameter matches the attached motor The term base frequency helps differ entiate it from the carrier frequency See also Carrier Frequency and Fre quency Setting An energy absorbing resistor that dissipates energy from a decelerating load Load inertia causes the motor to act as a generator during deceleration For the MX2 inverter models the braking unit and braking resistor are optional external components See also Four quadrant Operation and Dynamic Brak ing The torque a motor must produce to overcome the static friction of a load in order to start the load moving The frequency of the constant periodic switching waveform that the inverter modulates to generate the AC output to the motor See also PWM A regulatory agency for governing the performance of electronic products in Europe Drive installations des
191. The motor should start turning Dt OD gi o Ne Press the STOP key to stop the motor rotation 66 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 2 5 6 Single Digit Edit Mode If a target function code or data is far from current data using the single digit edit mode makes it quicker Pressing the up key and down key at the same time leads you to go into the digit to digit changing mode While in Single digit edit mode single digit is blinking Move cursor to right or set the func code data lowest digit only CD Move cursor to left Vv WA Vv m Fa 1st digit will be 2nd digit will be 3rd digit will be Ath digit will be blinking blinking Use up down blinking Use up down blinking Use up down Use up down keys to keys to change the keys to change the keys to change the change the value of the value of the digit value of the digit value of the digit digit If not existing codes are selected the data sill not move to the function code but blinking digit will move again to the left end digit 50 00 Al Col ve p5 v a v B Be v 8 lt 50 00 50 00 50 00 gt 50 00 El E ih A v N A v WA yvy N A WA Vv 7 000 TH 1st digit will be blinking 2nd digit will be blinking
192. Use a momentary contact for Start and Stop Use a selector switch such as SPST for the Forward Reverse input Be sure to set the operation command selection A002 0 for input terminal control of motor If you have a motor control interface that needs logic level control rather than momentary pulse control use the FW and RV inputs instead Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name 3 wire start Start motor rotation on momentary contact uses acceleration profile No change to motor operation 3 wire stop No change to motor operation Stop motor rotation on momentary contact use deceleration profile 3 wire Select reverse direction of rotation forward reverse Select forward direction of rotation Valid for inputs C00 C007 Required settings A00 c 0 Notes The STP logic is inverted Normally the switch will be closed so you open the switch to stop In this way a broken wire causes the motor to stop automatically safe design When you configure the inverter for 3 wire interface control the dedicated FW ter minal is automatically disabled The RV intelligent terminal assignment is also dis abled The diagram below shows the use of 3 wire control STA Start Motor is an edge sensitive input an OFF to ON transition gives the Start command The control of direction is level sensitive and the direction may be changed at any time STP Stop Motor is also a
193. W O to 10000 0 01 0007h Reserved R to 0010h 318 ModBus Data Listing Function name Fault frequency monitor Function Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 0 to 65535 Data resolution 1 time Fault monitor 1 factor Fault monitor 1 inverter status Fault monitor 1 frequency high Fault monitor 1 frequency low Fault monitor 1 voltage Fault monitor 1 running time high Fault monitor 1 running time low Fault monitor 1 current Fault monitor 1 power on time high Fault monitor 1 power on time low See the list of inverter trip factors below See the list of inverter trip factors below 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Output current at tripping 0 07 A DC input voltage at tripping 1 V Cumulative running time at tripping 1 h Cumulative power on time at tripping Th Fault monitor 2 factor Fault monitor 2 inverter status Fault monitor 2 frequency high Fault monitor 2 frequency low Fault monitor 2 voltage Fault monitor 2 running time high Fault monitor 2 running time low Fault monitor 2 current Fault monitor 2 power on time high Fault monitor 2 power on time low See the list of inverter trip factors below See the list of inverter trip factors below
194. X RAQ03600160 DE 180 140 55 6 6 5 7 5 16 0 3 60 AX RAO02500220 DE 95 205 9 1 11 22 0 2 50 AX RAO02000320 DE 105 85 11 7 15 32 0 2 00 Voltage Inverter model DC reactor model 1 phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2 AB001 AB002 AB004 AX RAO11500026 DE 3G3MX2 AB007 AX RAO07600042 DE 3G3MX2 AB015 AX RAO04100075 DE 3G3MX2 AB022 AX RAO03000105 DE 3 phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2 A2001 A2002 A2004 AX RAO11500026 DE 3G3MX2 A2007 AX RAO07600042 DE 3G3MX2 A2015 AX RAO04100075 DE 3G3MX2 A2022 AX RAO03000105 DE 3G3MX2 A2037 AX RAO01830160 DE 3G3MX2 A2055 AX RAO01150220 DE 3G3MX2 A2075 AX RAO00950320 DE 3G3MX2 A2110 AX RAO00630430 DE 3G3MX2 A2150 AX RAOQ00490640 DE Component Descriptions Section 5 2 Voltage Inverter model DC reactor model 3G3MX2 A4004 A4007 A4015 AX RAO16300038 DE 3G3MX2 A4022 AX RAO11800053 DE 3G3MX2 A4030 A4040 AX RAO07300080 DE 3 phase 400 VAC 3G3MX2 A4055 AX RAO04600110 DE 3G3MX2 A4075 AX RAOQ03600160 DE 3G3MX2 A4110 AX RAO02500220 DE 3G3MX2 A4150 AX RAO02000320 DE 5 2 3 Zero phase Reactor RF Noise Filter The zero phase reactor helps reduce radi ated noise from the inverter wiring It can be used on the input or output side of the inverter The example zero phase reactor shown to the right comes with a mounting bracket The wiring must go throug
195. _ 0 40000 0 01 Hz 12Cih threshold A156 low 12C2h_ PID sleep function action delay A157 R W 0 255 0 1 sec time 12C3hto Reserved 12C5h 12C6h VR input active range start A161 high R W 0 40000 0 01 Hz 12C7h frequency A161 low 12C8h VR input active range end A162 high R W 0 40000 0 01 Hz 12C9h frequency A162 low 12CAh VR input active range start A163 R W 0 100 1 current 12CBh__ VR input active range end volt A164 R W 0 100 1 age 12CCh_ VR input start frequency enable A165 R W 00 start FQ 01 0 Hz 12CDh unused Inaccessible to 1300h 327 ModBus Data Listing Parameter group B Register Function name Retry selection Function Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 00 trip 01 0 Hz start 02 frequency matching start 03 trip after frequency matching deceleration stop 04 active frequency matching restart Data resolution Allowable momentary power interruption time 3 to 250 0 1 sec Retry wait time b003 3 to 1000 0 1 sec Momentary power interruption undervoltage trip during stop selection b004 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 dis abling during stopping and decelerating to stop Momentary power interruption retry time selection b005 00 16 times 01 no limit Reserved Frequency matching lower limit frequency setting b007 high
196. a PM parameter Lq 0 01 to 655 35 mH auto tuning data PM speed response 1 to 1000 PM starting current 20 00 to 100 00 PM starting time 0 01 to 60 00 s PM stabilization parameter 0 to 120 PM minimum frequency 0 0 to 25 5 PM No Load current 0 00 to 100 00 PM starting method og Normal D1 IMPE PM IMPE OV wait 0 to 255 PM IMPE detect wait 0 to 255 PM IMPE detect 0 to 255 PM IMPE voltage gain 0 to 200 x lt P NESE SENN Some parameters default setting also change when PM motor is selected This table shows this parameters and the new default setting New default setting Overcurrent suppression function 00 OFF Carrier frequency 10 KHz Automatic carrier reduction 00 OFF 177 H Group Motor Constants Functions Section 3 8 Permanent Magnet motor limitations Function 2nd control When using a Permanent Magnet motor some limitations should be consid ered regarding application and functionallity point of view From application point of view take this limitations in consideration 1 Use always on reduced torque applications with a starting torque less than 50 2 MX2 in PM mode is not suitable for use in constant torque application where rapid acceleration deceleration and low speed operation is need Never use for transportation machine and specially for vertical loads such elevators 3 Drive is able to control up to 50
197. able glands of right size to prevent moisture from entering the unit Not doing so might result in damaging the unit Note Use EMC cable gland for shielded motor wiring or use the cable bracket supplied with the MX2 IP54 housing Not doing so might result in unexpected behaviour of the unit due to electrical interference i gt 7 Ay J Note Moisture can enter the enclosure when the blinding plug is removed Do not remove the blinding plug when the wiring access hole is not used Not doing so might result in damaging the unit 44 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 3 6 Determining Wire and Fuse Sizes The maximum motor currents in your application determines the recom mended wore size The following table gives the wire size in AWG The Power Lines column applies to the inverter input power output wires to the motor the earth ground connection and any other components shown in the Basic System Description on page 28 The Signal Lines column applies to any wire connecting to the two green connectors just inside the front cover Motor Output panel Inverter Model 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 AB004 Power Lines AWG16 1 3 mm 75 C only 3G3MX2 AB007 AWG12 3 3 mm2 75 C only 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 AB022 AWG10 5 3 mm 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 3G3MX2 A2007 AWG16 1 3 mm 3G3MX2 A2015 AWG14 2
198. ain power supply to the inverter Otherwise there is the danger of fire Z Caution For motor leads ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic con tactors be sure to size these components properly each must have the capacity for rated current and voltage Otherwise there is the danger of fire Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 3 12 Wire the Inverter Output to Motor Step 4 The process of motor selection is beyond the scope of this manual However it must be an AC induction motor with three phases It should also come with a chassis ground lug If the motor does not have three power input leads stop the installation and verify the motor type Other guidelines for wiring the motor include e Use an inverter grade motor for maximum motor life 1600 V insulation e For standard motors use the AC reactor accessory if the wiring between the inverter and motor exceeds 10 meters in length Simply connect the motor to the terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 as shown in page 46 to page 49 This is a good time to connect the chassis ground lug on the drive as well The motor chassis ground must also connect to the same point Use a star ground single point arrangement and never daisy chain the grounds point to point e Check the mechanical integrity of each wire crimp and terminal connec tion e Replace the housing partition that covers access to the power connec tions Special care to be taken when motor
199. alue to the EEPROM Using the Keypad Devices Section 3 2 3 2 2 Operational Modes The RUN and PRG LEDs tell just part of the story Run Mode and Program oar Modes are independent modes not opposite modes In the state diagram to the right Run alternates with Stop and Program Mode alternates with Monitor Mode This is a very important ability for it shows that a technician can approach a running machine and change some parameters without shut ting down the machine The occurrence of a fault during opera tion will cause the inverter to enter Trip Mode as shown An event such as an output overload will cause the inverter to exit the Run Mode and turn OFF its output to the motor In the Trip Mode any request to run the motor is ignored You must clear the error by pressing the Stop Reset switch See 6 2 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions on page 273 3 2 3 Run Mode Edit The inverter can be in Run Mode inverter output is controlling motor and still allow you to edit certain parameters This is useful in applications that must run continuously you need some inverter parameter adjustment The parameter tables in this chapter have a column titled Run Mode Edit An Ex mark x means the param eter cannot be edited a Check mark means the parameter can be edited The Soft lock selection parameter 6031 determines when the Run Mode access permission is in effect and access permission in other conditions
200. am ming IRDY inverter ready FWR forward operation RVR reverse oper ation MJA major failure WCO window comparator O WCOI window comparator Ol FREF frequency command source REF run command source SETM second motor in operation EDM STO safe torque off performance monitor OP option control signal NO no function Monitor output analog Output freq output current output torque output voltage input power thermal load ratio LAD freq heat sink temperature general output Drive Programming Pulse train output 0 10 Vdc 32 kHz max PWM output Output freq output current output torque output voltage input power thermal load ratio LAD freq heat sink temperature general output Drive Programming OP option control signal Pulse train output Output frequency output current pulse train input monitor Alarm output contact ON for inverter alarm 1c contacts both normally open or closed available Alarm output contact ON for inverter alarm 1c contacts both normally open or closed available Other functions Free V f manual automatic torque boost output voltage gain adjustment AVR function reduced voltage start motor data selection auto tuning motor stabilization control reverse running protection simple position con trol simple torque control torque limiting automatic carrier frequency reduction energy saving operation PID function non stop
201. ameter 1 to 30000 0 1 sec Overload limit selection 2 00 disabling 01 enabling during acceleration and constant speed opera tion 02 enabling during constant speed operation 03 enabling during acceleration and constant speed opera tion speed increase at regeneration Overload limit level 2 0 32 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current 0 1 Overload limit parameter 2 1 to 30000 0 1 sec Overcurrent suppression function 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 enable with reduced voltage Active frequency matching restart level 0 32 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current 0 1 328 Active frequency matching restart parameter 1 to 30000 0 1 sec ModBus Data Listing Function name Function Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items Data 131Fh code resolution Starting frequency at active b030 R W 00 frequency at the last shutoff 01 frequency matching restart maximum frequency 02 set fre quency 1320h Soft lock selection b031 R W 00 disabling change of data other than b031 when SFT is on 01 disabling change of data other than b031 and fre quency settings when SFT is on 02 dis abling change of data other than b031 03 disabling change of data other than b031 and frequency settings 10 e
202. ameter U 31 P131 R W 0 to 65535 1 1686h to Reserved 168Dh 168Eh EZCOM number of data P140 R W 1to5 168Fh EzCOM destination 1 address P141 R W 1 to 247 1690h EzCOM destination 1 register P142 R W 0000 to FFFF 1691h EzCOM source 1 register P143 R W 0000 to FFFF 1692h EzCOM destination 2 address P144 R W 1 to 247 1693h EzCOM destination 2 register P145 R W 0000 to FFFF 1694h EzCOM source 2 register P146 R W 0000 to FFFF 1695h EzCOM destination 3 address P147 R W 1 to 247 1696h EzCOM destination 3 register P148 R W 0000 to FFFF 1697h EzCOM source 3 register P149 R W 0000 to FFFF 1698h EzCOM destination 4 address P150 R W 1 to 247 1699h EZCOM destination 4 register P151 R W 0000 to FFFF 169Ah EZCOM source 4 register P152 R W 0000 to FFFF 169Bh EzCOM destination 5 address P153 R W 1 to 247 169Ch EzCOM destination 5 register P154 R W 0000 to FFFF 169Dh EzCOM source 5 register P155 R W 0000 to FFFF 169Eh 1 Reserved 6Ath 16A2h Option I F cmd W register 1 P160 R W 0000 to FFFF 16A3h Option I F cmd W register 2 P161 R W 0000 to FFFF 16A4h Option I F cmd W register 3 P162 R W 0000 to FFFF 16A5h Option I F cmd W register 4 P163 R W 0000 to FFFF 16A6h Option I F cmd W register 5 P164 R W 0000 to FFFF 16A7h Option I F cmd W register 6 P165 R W 0000 to FFFF 7 16A8h Option I F cmd W register 7 P166 R W 0000 to FFFF 16AQ9h Option I F cmd W registe
203. ance 10 k Ohms 4 to 20 mA input impedance 100 Ohms Potentiometer 1 k to 2 k Ohms 2 W Via network RS485 ModBus RTU other network option FWD REV run Operator panel Run Stop Forward Reverse run change by command External signal Forward run stop Reverse run stop Via network RS485 ModBus RTU other network option Intelligent input terminal Seven terminals sink source changeable by a short bar 68 functions assignable FW forward run command RV reverse run command CF1 CF4 multi stage speed setting JG jog commana DB external braking SET set second motor 2CH 2 stage accel decel command FRS free run stop commana EXT external trip USP startup function CS commercial power switchover SFT soft lock AT analog input selection RS reset PTC thermistor thermal protection STA start STP stop F R forward reverse PID PID disable PIDC PID reset UP remote control up func tion DWN remote control down function UDC remote control data clear OPE operator control SF1 SF7 multi stage speed setting bit operation OLR overload restriction TL torque limit enable TRQ1 torque limit changeover1 TRQ2 torque limit changeover2 BOK Brak ing confirmation LAC LAD cancellation PCLR position deviation clear ADD add frequency enable F TM force terminal mode ATR permis sion of torque command input KHC Cumulative power c
204. and analog outputs shown in the table below C Function Description Defaults C02 Multi function output terminal 48 programmable functions avail x 00 RUN 11 selection able for logic discrete outputs O22 Multi function output terminal _ See next section x 01 FA1 12 selection C026 Relay output AL2 AL1 48 programmable functions avail x 05 AL 158 function selection able for logic discrete outputs see next section C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions C Function EO terminal selection Description 13 programmable functions 00 Output FQ Output frequency D I Output Output current Oe Output TRQ Output torque 03 Pulse FQ Digital output frequency 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate 07 LAD FQ LAD frequency Pulse Digital current monitor Heatsink tmp Fin temperature YAO Drive Programming out put Pulse input Option Section 3 7 Defaults 07 LAD FQ AM selection 11 programmable functions 00 Output FQ Output frequency D I Output Output current Oe Output TRQ Output torque 03 Pulse FQ Digital output frequency 04 Output V Output voltage 05 Power 06 Thermal Thermal load rate LAD FQ LAD frequency Heatsink tmp Fin temperature Output TRQ sign Outpu
205. and on terminals L Ol current input and the fre quency output range is 0 0 to 200 0 Thermistor adjustment Scale factor of PTC input Range is 0 0 to 200 0 Note When you restore factory default settings the values will change to those listed above Be sure to manually reconfigure the values for your application if needed after restoring factory defaults 3 7 8 Miscellaneous Functions The following table contains miscellaneous functions not in other function groups C Function Defaults Description Debug mode selection Use 00 Do not change UP DWN selection Controls speed setpoint for the inverter after power cycle Two option codes D0 Not save Do not store the frequency data D 1 Save Store the frequency data Reset selection Determines response to Reset input RS Four option codes 00 ON RESET Trip reset at power on D 1 OFF RESET Trip reset when the power is OFF Oe ON in Trip Enabled only during trip Reset when the power is ON D3 Trip RESET Trip reset only 168 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions C Function Reset frequency matching selection Description Determines the restart mode after reset is given three option codes 00 0 Hz start D I f match Frequency matching start Oe Actv f match Active Frequency Matching restart Section 3 7 Defaults UP DWN
206. and source setting A002 If the forward operation FW and reverse operation RV are given at the same time the inverter stops the motor operation Forward operation command a Reverse operation awm a eT oT o Starting contact signal FR i i Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Starting ON Either FW or RV is given or no contact operation command is given signal OFF Both FW and RV is given at the same time Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings 245 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 25 Fin Overheat Warning The inverter monitors the temperature of its internal heatsink and gives out the heat sink overheat warning signal OHF when the temperature exceeds the overheat warning level C064 Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Fin over ON heat warn ing OFF Description Heat sink temperature exceeds the C064 set level Heat sink temperature does not exceed the C64 set level Valid for inputs Required settings 4 6 26 Light Load Detection Signal The low load detection signal output indicates the general status of the inverter output current When the output current becomes less than the value specified by 039 the LOC output turns ON 11 12 ALO AL2 COBY Terminal Symbol Function Name Light load detection signal ON Description When the output current b
207. annot be changed when terminal SFT is ON Lock Data other than b031 cannot be changed Only FQ Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter cannot be changed RUN chg mode Data other than parameters changeable during operation cannot be changed See Appendix C on page 357 for the accessible parameters in this mode Note To disable parameter editing when using b031 lock modes QU and JZ assign the SFT function to one of the intelligent input terminals Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Software The keypad and remote program Lock ming devices are prevented from changing parameters The parameters may be edited and stored Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings 603 I excluded from lock When the terminal SFT is turned ON the data of all the parameters and functions except the output frequency depending on the setting of b03 is locked prohibited from editing When the data is locked the keypad keys cannot edit inverter parameters To edit parameters again turn OFF the SFT terminal input 3 6 6 Motor Cable Length Parameter To achieve higher motor control performance the MX2 inverter has the Motor Cable Length Parameter setting b033 Normally there is no need to adjust this parameter however in case of long motor cable and or shielded cable where there is a comparatively higher earth capacitance set this parameter higher
208. appear on the display automatically when a fault causes the inverter to trip The following table lists the cause associated with the error Cause s Over current event while at The inverter output was short circuited or the constant speed motor shaft is locked or has a heavy load Over current event during These conditions cause excessive current for deceleration the inverter so the inverter output is turned OFF Over current event during The dual vol tore wired il Acceleration e dual voltage motor is wired incorrectly Over current event during other conditions Motor overload protection When a motor overload is detected by the electronic thermal function the inverter trips and turns OFF its output Check that the thermal model is properly set in parameter b0 Il 60 13 b9 I0 b9 I1 and b9 Ie Check if the application can accept softer accel eration rates to minimize peak currents F0D2 Fede A09e Ac9e Check if motor parameters are not correctly set HOZD to HO34 or HOS depending in motor control method AQYY ACY Braking resistor overload When the BRD operation rate exceeds the set protection ting of b090 this protective function shuts off the inverter output and displays the error code Over voltage protection When the DC bus voltage exceeds a threshold due to regenerative energy from the motor EEPROM error When the built in EEPROM memory has prob lems due to noise or excessive temper
209. arameter U 12 P112 R W 0 to 65535 1 1673h Drive Program parameter U 13 P113 R W 0 to 65535 1 1674h Drive Program parameter U 14 P114 R W_ 0 to 65535 1 1675h Drive Program parameter U 15 P115 R W 0 to 65535 1 1676h Drive Program parameter U 16 P116 R W 0 to 65535 1 1677h Drive Program parameter U 17 P117 R W_ 0 to 65535 1 340 ModBus Data Listing Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Section B 4 Data code resolution 1678h Drive Program parameter U 18 P118 R W 0 to 65535 1 1679h Drive Program parameter U 19 P119 R W 0 to 65535 1 167Ah Drive Program parameter U 20 P120 R W 0 to 65535 1 167Bh Drive Program parameter U 21 P121 R W 0 to 65535 1 167Ch Drive Program parameter U 22 P122 R W 0 to 65535 1 167Dh Drive Program parameter U 23 P123 R W 0 to 65535 1 167Eh Drive Program parameter U 24 P124 R W 0 to 65535 1 167Fh Drive Program parameter U 25 P125 R W 0 to 65535 1 1680h Drive Program parameter U 26 P126 R W 0 to 65535 1 1681h Drive Program parameter U 27 P127 R W 0 to 65535 1 1682h Drive Program parameter U 28 P128 R W 0 to 65535 1 1683h Drive Program parameter U 29 P129 R W 0 to 65535 1 1684h Drive Program parameter U 30 P130 R W 0 to 65535 1 1685h Drive Program par
210. are described below Usage For heavy load with high torque required at start acceleration or deceleration Elevators cranes conveyers etc 1 0 A 8 phase 200 V 0 1 kW 150 60 sec For normal load without high torque required fans pumps air conditionings 1 2 A 3 phase 200 V 0 1 kW 120 60 sec Applications Rated current example Overload current Initial values of HD and ND are different shown as below table Be sure to note that when the dual rate selection b049 is changed those initial values are also changed except H003 H203 Even if currently set value is within the range of both HD and ND data is initialized when b049 is changed V f characteristics selection 00 Const torque 01 Reduced torque 02 Free V F 03 SLV initial data 00 Const tq 00 Const torque 01 Reduced torque 02 Free V F initial data 00 Const tq DC injection braking power 0 to 100 50 0 to 70 50 Startup DC injection braking power 0 to 100 0 0 to 70 0 DC injection braking carrier frequency 2 0 to 15 0 kHz 5 0 kHz 2 0 to 10 0 kHz 2 0 kHz Overload limit level 0 32 x Rated cur rent to 3 20 x Rated Overload limit level 2 current 1 50 x Rated current A 0 38 x Rated cur rent to 2 85 x Rated current 1 20 x Rated current A Carrier frequency 2 0 to 15 0 kHz 10 0 kHz 2 0 to 10
211. arrier frequency reduction selection b089 Carrier freq 5 When the output current 15kHz increases to 60 72 84 ices or 96 of the rated current this function reduces the car kHz rier frequency to 12 9 6 or Skliz 3 kHz respectively This func tion restores the original carrier 3kHz frequency when the output a i i i decreases to 5 lower than each reduction start level The rate of carrier frequency reduction is 2 kHz per second The maximum limit of carrier ai 100 84 96 Output current 60 72 frequency change by this function is the value specified for the carrier frequency setting b083 the minimum limit is 3 kHz If 3 kHz or less freq has been specified for 6083 this function is disabled regardless of the setting of b089 Remark Above graph is for schematic concept and the profile is a subject to change reflecting the temperature test B Function Defaults Carrier frequency Description Units Sets the PWM carrier internal switching frequency range is 2 0 to 15 0 kHz Automatic carrier reduction Three option codes D0 OFF Disabled D1 ON Current Oe ON heatsink 143 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 19 Miscellaneous Settings The miscellaneous settings include scaling factors initialization modes and others This section covers some of the most important settings you may need to configure Start frequenc
212. artup selection Display selection Initial screen selection User parameter automatic setting function selection ce x x x x lt s lt x Torque limit selection Torque limit 1 Four quadrant mode forward power running Torque limit 2 Four quadrant mode reverse regeneration Torque limit 3 Four quadrant mode reverse power running Torque limit 4 Four quadrant mode forward regeneration Torque LADSTOP selection Reverse rotation prevention selec tion Dual rate selection Selection of non stop function at momentary power interruption Starting voltage of non stop function at momentary power interruption 220 440 Stop deceleration level of non stop function at momentary power interruption 360 720 Deceleration time of non stop function at momentary power interruption 1 00 Deceleration starting width of non stop function at momentary power interruption 0 00 Window comparator O upper limit level Window comparator O lower limit level Window comparator O hysteresis width Window comparator Ol upper limit level Window comparator Ol lower limit level Window comparator Ol hysteresis width Analog operation level at O disconnection Analog operation level at Ol disconnection Ambient temperature Integrated power clear Integrated power display gain 362 Starting frequency
213. as a range of 0 00 to 25 00 PID I gain Integral time constant has a range of 0 0 to 3600 0 seconds PID D gain Derivative time constant has a range of 0 00 to 100 00 seconds PID scale Process Variable PV scale fac tor multiplier range of 0 01 to 99 99 PID feedback selection 00 OF 01 0 Oe ModBus RS485 03 Pulse Pulse train frequency ID Math Operation function output Reverse PID function Two option codes 00 OFF Deviation Target value Feedback value 01 ON Deviation Feedback value Target value PID output limit function Sets the limit of PID output as per cent of full scale range is 0 0 to 100 0 PID feed forward selection Selects source of feed forward gain option codes 00 Disabled 01 0 Oc Ol 109 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 A Function Defaults Description A i56 PID sleep function action Sets the threshold for the action x 10 00 Hz threshold set range 0 00 400 00 Hz AS PID sleep function action delay Sets the delay time for the action x 10 0 sec time set range 0 0 25 5 sec Note The setting A073 for the integrator is the integrator s time constant Ti not the gain The integrator gain Ki 1 Ti When you set A013 0 the integrator is dis abled In standard operation the inverter uses a reference source selected by parameter Aad for the output frequency which may
214. as described below Z Caution If the protection diodes used when the units are in wired parallel are only single diodes then their condition would be checked as part of the proof test In case of Source logic Short Power ON Power ON Inserting diode gt Short Power OFF Switch Switch OFF OFF In case of Sink logic c gt Le Switch OFF OFF The current loop cause turn the input The current loop is to be prevented by ON even the switch is off when diode is inserting diode instead of short bar not inserted 382 Components to be combined E 7 Components to be combined Followings are the example of the safety devices to be combined 301 Norms to comply ISO13849 2 cat4 SIL3 Section E 7 Certification date 06 06 2007 GS226 T15 RC IEC61508 SIL1 3 04 11 2004 SCPU01 V1 IEC61508 SIL3 27 09 2006 The configuration of and components used in any circuit other than an appropiately pre approved safety module that interfaces with the 3G3MX2 GS1 GS2 and EDM ports must be at least equivalent to CAT 3 PLd under ISO 13849 1 2006 in order to be able to claim an overall CAT 3 PLd for the 3G3MX2 and external circuit combination The EMI level that the external module has been assessed to must be at least equivalent to that of Appendix E IEC 62061 E 8 Periodical check Proof test Proof test is essential to be able to reveal any dangerous undetected failures after a perio
215. as well It is the responsibility of the user to choose a useful and safe software lock setting for the inverter operating conditions and personnel Please refer to 3 6 5 Soft ware Lock Mode on page 130 for more information 3 2 4 Control Algorithms The motor control program in the Inverter Control Algorithms MX2 inverter has two sinusoidal sn PWM switching algorithms The intent is that you select the best constant torque ENG algorithm for the motor and load characteristics of your application Both algorithms generate the fre quency output in a unique way Once configured the algorithm is the basis for other parameter settings as well see 3 5 4 Torque Control Algo rithms on page 101 Therefore choose the best algorithm early in your application design process V F control variable 1 7 torque Sensorless vector Control SLV 71 Using the Keypad Devices Section 3 2 3 2 5 Dual Rate Selection The MX2 series inverter has Dual Rate so that it can work in two different types of load condition Constant torque application and Variable torque appli cation Select parameter b049 depending on your application Defaults A Function Func Name Description Code Dual rate selection Two options select codes 00 CT Constant torque HD 01 VT Variable torque ND When changed the rated output current and related items are changed auto matically Differences between HD and ND
216. ase frequency Set range 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 Brake release current 0 0 to 3 20 x Rated current Rated current Brake input frequency Set range 0 00 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 When position control is used the brake sequence doesn t follow exactly the parameter set and brake is just applied when the positioning finish 149 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 22 DC Bus AVR Automatic Voltage Regulation for Deceleration Settings This function is to achieve DC bus voltage stable DC bus voltage in case of deceleration DC bus volt Threshold voltage to start DC bus AVR b 13 1 age rises due to regeneration during deceleration When this function is activated b 130 0 I or Oe inverter con trols the deceleration time so that the DC bus voltage notto Freq go up to the overvoltage trip level and leads to the trip less operation during deceler ation Please note that the actual deceleration time can be lon a ee l ormal us ger in this case operation B Function Defaults Description EU Units Overvoltage protection func OFF Disabled tion selection during decelera V cnst DC voltage kept tion constant Accel Acceleration enabled Overvoltage protection level DC bus voltage of suppression during deceleration Range is 200 V class 330 to 395 400 V class 660 to 790 Overvoltage protection Accel rate when b 130 02 parameter Set range
217. asionally need to use a different source leaving the standard settings in A00 1 AGQe The inverter has other control sources that can temporarily override the parameter A00 setting forcing a different output frequency source The fol lowing table lists all frequency source setting methods and their relative prior ity 1 is the highest priority Priority A001 Frequency Source Setting Method Refer to page CF1 to CF4 Multi speed terminals OPE Operator Control intelligent input F TM intelligent input AT terminal A001 Frequency source setting The inverter also has other control sources that can temporarily override the parameter ADO setting forcing a different Run command source The follow ing table lists all Run command setting methods and their relative priority 1 is the highest priority Priority A002 Run Command Setting Method Refer to page OPE Operator Control intelligent input F TM intelligent input A002 Run command source setting The figure below shows the correlation diagram of all frequency source setting methods and their relative priority 91 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 Multi speed inputs CF1 4 SF1 7 Multi step speed ON Frequency A021 A035 o 0 setting OFF e a e a SE i e oa AT HAT selection i terminal A005 OFF i 0 terminal is active Analog voltage in
218. ast 6 errors Error records are saved in the EEPROM when the power is turned off The record of the latest error is displayed under Fault Monitor 1 d081 Display 1 Cause of trip One of E01 to E83 is displayed 2 Output frequency Hz at the time of tripping 3 Output current A at the time of tripping If the inverter is currently stopped E 1 the monitor value may become zero 4 P N DC voltage V in the main circuit at the time of tripping If tripping occurs due to ground fault at power on the monitor value may become zero 5 Total inverter RUN time h before the trip 6 Total inverter power ON time h before the trip 1 Trip factor 2 Frequency 3 Current 4 DC voltage 5 Total 6 Total T z A A RUN time A ON time d081 e gt E07 2 gt 60 00 4 00 400 2 15 _18 y y v a ee is shown if no trip has occurred 3 3 28 Warning Monitor d090 If the set data is inconsistent with other data a warning is displayed While a warning is present the Program LED PRG indicator remains lit until the data is corrected 3 3 29 DC Voltage Monitor d102 The inverter P N DC voltage DC voltage between the inverter terminals P 2 and N is displayed During operation the monitor value changes depending on the actual DC voltage of the inverter Parameter Default
219. at zero frequency Braking resistor overload protection Starting Overvoltage protection DC braking EEPROM error Overload restricted Undervoltage protection Current detection error CPU error External trip USP error Ground fault protection Input overvoltage protection Inverter thermal trip CPU error Main circuit error Q lo Q D Q le oN D CO NI or AJ JOJ N CO N or BR WS N oO o o k N wo EA A y oa ine arg N N ine o wo oO Driver error wo ol Thermistor error wo O Braking error Safe Stop Low speed overload protection Operator connection Modbus communication error Easy sequence error invalid instruction Easy sequence error invalid nesting count Easy sequence execution error 1 45 Easy sequence user trip 0 to 9 50 to 59 Option error 0 to 9 60 to 69 Encoder disconnection 80 Excessive speed 81 Position control range trip 83 o N w A N a A oo aN iN 321 ModBus Data Listing iii List of registers monitoring Register Function name Output frequency monitor Function code d001 high d001 low Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 0 to 40000 Data resolution 0 01 Hz Output current monitor d002 0 to 999900 0 07 A Rotation direction
220. ata it is read as sign less data Example External register signed sign having Internal register signed sign having After an upper lower limit check data writes minus data as it is The sign having data is read 348 ModBus mapping Section B 5 B 5 1 2 5 P221 P230 Modbus register scaling 1 to 10 Scaling data B 5 1 3 Error code Func Code Name Seitings Pee to Modbus register scaling 0 001 to 65 535 1 aaa Pe30 1 to 10 Scale the data when reading or writing an external register to an internal one A calculation result is restricted to the following range Signed 32768 to 32767 Unsigned 0 to 65535 These new error codes has been added No Cede Explanation 31h Modbus mapping missmatch 2 32h Access to a duplication register No Internal register External register Result 0000h Initial value 0001h to FFFFh 0001h to FFFFh 0000h Initial value 0001h to FFFFh 0001h to FFFFh B 5 1 3 1 Register allocation combination checks When two or more internal registers in which values differ are in the same external register both are considered incorrect In the same way two or more internal registers couldn t be allocated to one external register B 5 1 3 2 Overlapped external register When an external register and retry a existing register overlap access to the register is not available Moreover when the overlapping existing register is a
221. ata is not acceptable The data to be written in a holding register is outside the inverter e The specified functions are not available to the inverter e Function to change the content of a register that cannot be changed while the inverter is in service Function to submit an ENTER command during running UV Function to write in a register during tripping UV Function to write in a read only register or coil 310 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 B 3 5 Store New Register Data ENTER Command After being written in a selected holding register by the Write in Holding Regis ter command 06h or in selected holding registers by the Write in Holding Registers command 10h new data is temporary and still outside the storage element of the inverter If power to the inverter is shut off this new data is lost and the previous data returns The ENTER command is used to store this new data in the storage element of the inverter Follow the instructions below to submit the ENTER command Submitting an ENTER Command e Write any data in all memory of a holding register at 0900h by the Write in Holding Register command 06h Note The ENTER command takes much time to run You can check its progress by monitoring the Data Writing signal of a coil at 0049h Note The service life of the storage element of the inverter is limited to about 100 000 write operations Frequent use of the ENTER command may sh
222. ater than 50 mA use the inverter output to drive a small relay Be sure to use a diode across the coil of the relay as shown reverse biased in order to suppress the turn off spike or use a solid state relay Logic output 225 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 3 226 Internal Relay Output The inverter has an internal relay output 9 nnn with normally open and normally closed contacts Type 1 form C The output sig nal that controls the relay is configurable the Alarm Signal is the default setting Thus the terminals are labeled ALO AL1 AL2 as shown to the right How ever you can assign any one of the nine intelligent outputs to the relay For wiring purposes the general terminal functions are e ALO Common contact AL1 Normally open contact e AL2 Normally closed contact The relay itself can be configured as normally open or closed Parameter C036 Alarm Relay Active State is the setting This setting determines whether or not the relay coil is energized when its output signal is OFF e 036 00 Normally open relay coil is de energized when output signal is OFF e 036 0 Normally closed relay coil is energized when the output sig nal is OFF Since the relay already has normally inv rter logit open AL1 and normally closed AL2 circuit board contacts the purpose of the ability to invert the relay coil s active state may
223. ation Note When using the Multi speed Select settings CF1 to CF4 do not display parameter F00 or change the value of F001 while the inverter is in Run Mode motor running If it is necessary to check the value of F001 during Run Mode please monitor d0 instead of FOO There are two ways to program the speeds into the registers A020 to A035 1 Standard keypad programming 2 Programming using the CF switches Set the speed following these steps a Turn the Run command OFF Stop Mode b Turn inputs ON to select desired Multi speed Display the value of Fad on the digital operator A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 c Set the desired output frequency by pressing the A and keys d Press the key once to store the set frequency When this occurs FDO indicates the output frequency of Multi speed n e Press the key once to confirm that the indication is the same as the set frequency f Repeat operations in 2 a to 2 e to set the frequency of other Multi speeds Digital Input configuration for bit operation Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name SF1 SF2 Multistage ON Makes multistage speed by combi Speed Bit nation of the inputs Operation OFF Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings FOD AGO 1 02 AD20 to A035 Notes When programming the multi speed settings be sure to press the key eac
224. ation target Select initialized parameters four option codes data OO ALL D1 Exp COM TERM Oe Onlu U D3 All exp U bO8S Initialization Select initial data for initialization parameter selection 99 JPN O EUR b 180 Initialize trigger This is to perform initialization by parameter input with bO84 6085 and b094 Two option codes 00 No action D I Initialize Data of b084 is not saved in EEPROM to avoid unintentional initializing 279 Maintenance and Inspection 6 4 Maintenance and Inspection 6 4 1 Item Inspected Ambient environment Overall Check for Extreme tempera tures amp humidity Daily and Yearly Inspection Chart Inspection Cycle Daily Year Inspection Method Thermometer hygrometer Section 6 4 Criteria Ambient temperature between 10 to 50 C Humidity 90 or less non condensing Major devices Abnormal noise amp vib Visual and aural Stable environment for electronic controls Power supply voltage Voltage tolerance Digital volt meter measure between inverter terminals L1 L2 L3 200 V class 50 60 Hz 200 to 240 V 15 10 400 V class 50 60 Hz 380 to 460 V 15 10 Ground Insulation Main circuit Adequate resistance Refer to P6 16 5 MQ or greater Mounting No loose screws Torque wrench M3 5 1 0 Nm M4 1 4 Nm M5 3 0 M6 3 9 to 5 1 Nm M8 5 9 to 8 8 Nm Compon
225. ations with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequen cies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage And Or injury 0 eececeeee ence ce eeeenneeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaees 56 Check the following before and during the Powerup test Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage e Is the shorting bar between the 1 and terminals installed DO NOT power or operate the inverter if the jumper is removed e Is the direction of the motor rotation correct e Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration e Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected e Were there any abnormal motor vibration or NOISE cceeeeeeeeeeees 57 Warnings for Operations and Monitoring Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case While the inverter is energized be sure not to open the front case Otherwise there is the danger of electric SHOCK 0 eeeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaas 192 N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING Z N WARNING N WARNING Z N WARNING Z N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING A Caution Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual 3 Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands Otherwise there is the danger of electric SHOCK usssssssessssssrrsssserrsssrirnssstirnsnstinnnnsrennnns nnn 192 While t
226. ator as the source of the RUN command A002 02 Set the motor base frequency A003 and AVR voltage of the motor A082 Set the motor current for proper thermal protection bD I2 5 Set the number of poles for the motor H004 The following series of programming tables are designed for successive use Each table uses the previous table s final state as the starting point There fore start with the first and continue programming until the last one If you get lost or concerned that some of the other parameters setting may be incorrect refer to Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 279 Prepare to Edit Parameters This sequence begins with powering ON the inverter then it shows how to navigate to the A Group parameters for subse quent settings You can also refer to the Keypad Navigation Map on page 60 for orientation throughout the steps PON Display Func Parameter Turn ON the inverter Inverter output frequency displayed OHz in stop mode Press the key d group selected Press the ca key 2 times g A group selected 1 Select the digital operator for Speed Command The inverter output frequency can be set from several sources including an analog input mem ory setting or the network for example The powerup test uses the keypad as the speed control source for your convenience Note that the default setting depends on the country Action Di
227. ature the inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the motor 273 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions 274 Under voltage error Section 6 2 Cause s A decrease of internal DC bus voltage below a threshold results in a control circuit fault This condition can also generate excessive motor heat or cause low torque The inverter trips and turns OFF its output Current detection error If an error occurs in the internal current detec tion system the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code CPU error A malfunction in the built in CPU has occurred so the inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the motor External trip A signal on an intelligent input terminal configured as EXT has occurred The inverter trips and turns OFF the output to the motor USP When the Unattended Start Protection USP is enabled an error occurred when power is applied while a Run signal is present The inverter trips and does not go into Run Mode until the error is cleared Ground fault The inverter is protected by the detection of ground faults between the inverter output and the motor upon during powerup tests This feature protects the inverter and does not pro tect humans Input over voltage The inverter tests for input over voltage after the inverter has been in Stop Mode for 100 sec onds If an over voltage condition exists the inverter enters
228. be a fixed value F00 a variable set by the front panel potentiometer or value from an analog input voltage or current To enable PID operation set AG 1 0 I This causes the inverter to calculate the target freq or setpoint A calculated target frequency can have a lot of advantages It lets the inverter adjust the motor speed to optimize some other process of interest potentially saving energy as well Refer to the figure below The motor acts upon the external process To control that external process the inverter must monitor the process variable This requires wiring a sensor to either the analog input terminal O voltage or terminal Ol current Error PID Freq External ca peed Co es Process Variable PV Sensor Sensor When enabled the PID loop calculates the ideal output frequency to minimize the loop error This means we no longer command the inverter to run at a par ticular frequency but we specify the ideal value for the process variable That ideal value is called the setpoint and is specified in the units of the external process variable For a pump application it may be gallons minute or it could be air velocity or temperature for an HVAC unit Parameter A075 is a scale fac tor that relates the external process variable units to motor frequency The fig ure below is a more detailed diagram of the function The PID Disable function temporarily suspends PID loop execution via an intelligent input term
229. be a master or a slave e A master inverter is able to write data to any holding register of desig nated slave inverter The max number of holding register is up to 5 After writing data completed a master inverter will be shift to the next inverter Admin inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter 1 2 3 4 fa Master inverter Writing data to slaves by a master 1 Command to change a master inverter Note 1 Writing data to slaves by a master 2 Command to change a master inverter Writing data to slaves by a master 3 Command to change a master inverter Writing data to slaves by a master 4 Note 1 The command to change a master is issued by an admin inverter automati cally which users do not have to take care Note 2 The command to change a master from 01 to 02 is issued after the data is sent from master inverter 01 to slave and communication wait time C078 passed Note 3 Administrator inverter issues the next command to change a master after the data from master inverters is sent and communication wait time C078 passed In case the data from master inverter cannot be received within the communication error timeout C077 then the inverter timeouts and the behaves according to the communication error selection Network Protocol Reference Func code Note 4 Section B 3 Please set the communication error timeout as it is valid CO77 0 01 99 99 If it is disabled CO77 0 0
230. bination of inputs Range is 0 to 200 x10 ms 96 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 There are two ways for speed selection that are binary operation and bit operation For binary operation Ad 19 00 you can select 16 speeds by combination of 4 digital inputs And for bit operation AO 19 0 I you can select 8 speeds by using 7 digital inputs Please refer to the following figures for detailed explana tion Binary operation 1 ON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 oO oO oO of O CO a0 0 Note When choosing a subset of speeds to use always start at the top of the table and with the least significant bit CF 1 CF2 etc The example with eight speeds in the figure below shows how input switches configured for CF1 CF3 functions can change the motor speed in real time Note Speed 0 depends on Add parameter value Bit operation 1 ON X regardless the condition ON or OFF O X X lt XxX x oO O O XxX x x oO o lolo x x x o olololo xlxlo ololololo l xlo ololololoj o lo 97 A Group Standard Functions 98 O OA0 0 0 O O O Section 3 5 The example with eight speeds in the figure below shows how input switches configured fo
231. ble as indicated below Description C 106 AM gain setting 50 200 100 C 109 AM bias setting 0 100 0 Analog Output Operation Section 4 8 The graph below shows the effect of the gain and offset setting To calibrate the AM output for your application analog meter follow the steps below 1 Run the motor at the full scale speed or most common operating speed a If the analog meter represents output frequency adjust offset C 109 first and then use 106 to set the voltage for full scale output b If AM represents motor current adjust offset 109 first and then use C 106 to set the voltage for full scale output Remember to leave room at the upper end of the range for increased current when the motor is under heavier loads AM output offset adjustment AM output gain adjustment AM output AM output hs ne Ci09 0 10 7 P Parallel movement 0 Full scale FS 0 Full scale FS 1 2 FS Hz orA 1 2 FS Hz or A Note As mentioned above first adjust the offset and then adjust the gain Other wise the required performance cannot be obtained because of the parallel movement of the offset adjustment 253 Analog Output Operation Section 4 8 254 5 1 Introduction 5 1 1 Introduction From power supply Breaker MCCB or O IGF AC reactor Input choke Inverter RF noise filter choke AC reactor Output choke Thermal switch SECTION 5 Inverter
232. braking resistor serves as a load develop ing heat to stop the motor just as brakes on an automobile develop heat dur ing braking The braking resistor is the main component of a braking resistor assembly it includes a fuse and a thermal relay for safety And switching circuit and power resistor are the main components of the dynamic braking unit that includes a fuse and thermally activated alarm relay for safety However be careful to avoid overheating its resistor The fuse and thermal relay are safeguards for extreme conditions but the inverter can maintain braking usage in a safe zone Dynamic Braking Section 5 3 5 3 2 Dynamic Braking Usage The inverter controls braking via a Dynamic braking duty cycle method percent of the time braking is ON versus total time Parameter 5257 sets the dynamic braking usage ratio In the graph to the right the example shows three uses of dynamic brak ing in a 100 second period The inverter calculates the average per centage usage in that time T The percentage of usage is propor tional to the heat dissipated If T is greater than the 4 97 parameter t setting the inverter enters the trip b255 T mode and turns off the frequency output Please note the following e When 4252 is set for 0 dynamic braking is not performed e When the T value exceeds the limit set by 4792 dynamic braking ends e When mounting an external dynamic braking unit set the usage ratio 4092 to 2 4 an
233. c connector wiring in addition to basic power and motor wiring converted in Chapter 2 The goal of this chapter is to help you determine the proper connections for the various terminals shown below for your application needs Breaker MCCB or GFI 2 f PD 1 DC reactor Intelligent inputs optional 7 terminals Forward NOTE n gt D For the wiring of intellige 1 0 and analog inputs Input circuits l 3 phase or i I i 1 phase per _o O i i l l l inverter model N A lt vu N A Brake Braking resistor unit optional optional f I2 aH AH LH HEHH Tar be sure to use twisted O O pair shielded cable Attach the shielded wire O O for each signal to its respective common O O14 terminal at the inverter end only O O Input impedance of each intelligent input is O O Relay contacts type 1 Form C ALO 5 configurable as discrete input or thermistor input oH 4 7 kQ al Open collector output O OH 7 EB Output circuit Freq arrival signal Thermistor ial Short bar PLC Source type 12 Freq Meter Termination resistor 200 Q Common for logic outputs Change by slide switch 4 L K i GND for logic inputs 2 I RS485 I Serial communication transceiver O port O RS485 ModBus L RS485 transceiver L USB transceiver L Option port controller L gt ID ID transceiyp L RJ45
234. caling 1 000 P211 Format Unsigned 2 P202 External register 6002h P302 Internal register 1216h A020 HIGH P222 Scaling 1 000 P212 Format Unsigned 3 P203 External register 6003h P303 Internal register 1217h A020 LOW P223 Scaling 1 000 P213 Format Unsigned 4 P204 External register 6004h P304 Internal register 12FFh P224 Scaling 1 000 P214 Format Unsigned 352 ModBus mapping Section B 5 1 Read 0x03 Object register External register 1 6001h Transmission 01 03 60 00 00 01 9A 0A Reception 01 83 31 80 E4 Error 31h modbus mapping missmatch 2 Read 0x03 Object register External register 2 6002h Transmission 01 03 60 01 00 01 CBCA Reception 01 83 31 80 E4 Error 31h modbus mapping missmatch 3 Read 0x03 Object register External register 3 6003h Transmission 01 03 60 02 00 01 3B CA Reception 01 83 31 80 E4 Error 31h modbus mapping missmatch 4 Read 0x03 Object register External register 4 6004h Transmission 01 03 60 03 00 01 6A 0A Reception 01 83 31 80 E4 Error 31h modbus mapping missmatch B 5 1 4 6 When external register is not correct 1 P201 External register 6001h P301 Internal register 120Fh A013 P221 Scaling 1 000 P211 Format Unsigned 2 P202 External register 6001h P302 Internal register 1210h A014 P222 Scaling 1 000 P212 Format Unsigned 1 Read 0x03 Object register External register 6
235. cceleration or decel ramps when output to motor is OFF or during accel or decel before the respective thresholds are crossed Set frequency only when output to motor is at the set frequency 2 when output to motor is OFF or in any acceleration or deceleration ramp Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings C042 C043 C045 C046 Notes e For most applications you will need to use only one type of frequency arrival outputs see examples However it is possible assign both output terminals to output functions FA1 and FA2 e For each frequency arrival threshold the output anticipates the threshold turns ON early by 1 5 Hz e The output turns OFF as the output frequency moves away from the threshold delayed by 0 5 Hz e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 229 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 Frequency arrival output FA1 uses the standard output frequency parameter F001 as the threshold for switching In the figure to the right Frequency Arrival FA1 turns ON when the output frequency gets within Fon Hz below or Fon Hz above the target constant frequency where Fon is 1 of the set maximum frequency and Foff is 2 of the set maximum frequency This provides hysteresis that prevents output chatter near th
236. ce logic of intelligent input terminals Sink or source logic is switched by a short bar as below eT i rol Hell Short bar 4 3 3 Wire size for control and relay terminals Use wires within the specifications listed below For safe wiring and reliability it is recommended to use ferrules but if solid or stranded wire is used strip ping length should be 8 mm Sink logic 2 7 tear a Short bar Control logic terminal Relay output terminal 0 2 to 1 5 AWG 24 to 16 Solid mm AWG Section 4 3 Control logic terminal 8mm Ferrule mm AWG 0 25 to 0 75 AWG 24 to 18 Relay terminal 4 3 4 Recommended ferrule For safe wiring and reliability it is recommended to use following ferrules Note 1 Wire size mm AWG 0 2 to 1 5 AWG 24 to 16 Model name of ferrule 1 0 25 to 0 75 AWG 24 to 18 0 25 24 Al 0 25 8YE 0 34 22 Al 0 34 8TQ 0 5 20 Al 0 5 8WH 0 75 18 Al 0 75 8GY Phoenix contact Crimping pliers CRIPMFOX UD 6 4 or CRIMPFOX ZA 3 197 Intelligent Terminal Listing Section 4 4 4 3 5 How to connect 1 Push down the cable in the input Cable is connected 2 To remove the wire push down the orange actuating lever by a slotted screwdriver width 2 5 mm max Then pull out the cable while pressing the screwdriver N ay ot Push down the Cable is Push the orange t cable in the input connect
237. celerate the motor in the system and the commercial power supply to drive the motor for constant speed operation To use this function assign parameter 14 CS to one of the intelligent input terminal 1 to 7 C00 to 007 When the CS is turned OFF with an operation command is being given the inverter waits for the retry wait time before motor starts b003 adjusts the output frequency to the speed of the free running motor and then accelerates the motor with the adjusted frequency Mechanically interlock the MC3 and MC2 contacts with each other Otherwise you may damage the drive If the earth leakage breaker ELB trips because of a ground ELBC NFB MCI THRY fault the commercial l SO SD SO power will be disabled _ 5s 6 eco fa Therefore contact a S0 cd 00 backup power supply ee from the commercial RW eoo power line circuit csY O0 ELBC to your sys tem if needed 209 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 Use weak current type relays for FWY RVY and CSY The figures below show the sequence and timing of operations for reference Switching from inverter to commercial power Switching from commercial power to inverter Co w Q Duration of the interlock of wee ON G ON lei MC2 and MCS 05 tots rs o E w mi o Inverter i j Inverter output freq Operon Jo output freq 05 tors s noth wait time b
238. cessible Overload warning level 2 2nd motor 0 to 2000 0 1 Unused Inaccessible 2nd motor parameter selection 00 standard motor parameter 02 auto tuning parameter 2nd motor capacity selection 00 0 1kW 15 18 5kW 2nd motor pole number selection 2 4 6 8 10 12 1 4 1 6 1 8 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 2nd speed response 1 to 1000 2nd stabilization parameter 0 to 255 Reserved Reserved 2nd motor parameter R1 H220 high 1 to 65535 0 001 O Reserved 2nd motor parameter R2 H221 high 1 to 65535 0 001 O Reserved 2nd motor parameter L H222 high 1 to 65535 0 01 mH Reserved 2nd motor parameter lo H223 high 1 to 65535 0 01 A 2nd motor parameter J H224 high 1 to 9999000 0 001 Reserved H224 low 2nd motor parameter R1 auto tuning data H230 high 1 to 65530 0 001 O Reserved 345 ModBus Data Listing Register No Function name 2nd motor parameter R2 auto tuning data Function code H231 high Monitoring and setting items 1 to 65530 Section B 4 Data resolution 0 001 O Reserved 2nd motor parameter L auto tuning data H232 high 1 to 65530 0 01 mH Reserved 2nd motor parameter lo auto tuning data H233 high 1 to 65530
239. check the motor and machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequen cies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage and or injury Powerup Test Section 2 4 Z Caution Check the following before and during the Powerup test Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage e Is the shorting bar between the 1 and terminals installed DO NOT power or operate the inverter if the jumper is removed e Is the direction of the motor rotation correct e Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration e Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected e Were there any abnormal motor vibration or noise 2 4 3 Powering the Inverter If you have followed all the steps cautions and warnings up to this point you re ready to apply power After doing so the following events should occur e The POWER LED will illuminate e The numeric 7 segment LEDs will display a test pattern then stop at 0 0 e The Hz LED will be ON If the motor starts running unexpectedly or any other problem occurs press the STOP key Only if necessary should you remove power to the inverter as a remedy Note If the inverter has been previously powered and programmed the LEDs other than the POWER LED may illuminate differently than as indicated above If necessary you can initialize all parameters to the factory default settings See Restoring Fac
240. clear mode Freq set value when UDC signal is given to the input terminal two option codes D0 0 Hz D 1 Pow ON data 1 Not only for Up Down function it also save the content of F001 when the reference is give by digital operator Z Caution Do not change the debug mode for safety reasons Otherwise unexpected performances may occur 3 7 9 Analog Output Calibration Related Functions These functions are for adjustment of analog output FM and AM The outputs are adjusted at factory before the shipment and therefore basically no need to adjust at the customer But in case you need to change the gain depending on your system i e analog meter specification you can use these functions for the adjustment C Function EO gain setting Description Set range is 50 to 200 Defaults AM gain setting Set range is 50 to 200 AM bias setting Set range is 0 to 100 169 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 3 7 10 Output Logic and Timing Logic Output Function The inverter has a built in logic output feature Select any two operands out of all intelligent output options and their operator out of AND OR or XOR exclusive OR The terminal symbol for the new out put is LOG Use CO2 I CO22 or CO26 to route the logical result to terminal 11 12 or the relay terminals LOG1 LOG3 no OPO cannot be the oper and Intellig
241. coded speed select Bit 7 logical 1 Bit encoded speed select Bit 7 logical 0 Overload limit switching Perform overload restriction Normal operation C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 Input Function Summary Table Terminal Symbol Option Code Function Name Torque limit enabled Description Setting of b04T is enabled Max torque is limited with 200 Torque limit switching 1 Torque limit switching 2 Torque limit related parameters of Powering regen and FW RV modes are selected by the combinations of these inputs Brake confirmation Brake confirmation signal received Brake confirmation signal not received LAD cancel Set ramp times are ignored Inverter output immedi ately follows the freq command Accel and or decel is according to the set ramp time Position deviation clear Clear the position deviation data Maintain the position deviation data Frequency addition Adds the A 145 add frequency value to the output frequency Does not add the A 45 value to the output frequency Forced terminal block Force inverter to use input terminals for output fre quency and Run command sources Source of output frequency set by ADO I and source of Run command set by ADU is used Torque command input permission Torque control command input is enabled Torque control command input is
242. command selection A902 AcQe to 03 command selection AGGe Acae Incorrect setting of Frequency ref Set frequency reference selection ADO 1 AcO to erence selection A00 I A20 1 03 Incorrect setting of com speed Check communication speed AD 1 Incorrect setting or duplication of Check Modbus address A072 Modbus address Incorrect setting of com parity Check communication parity A074 Incorrect setting of com stop bit Check communication stop bit A075 Incorrect wiring Check communication wiring at SP SN terminals 22 When inverter starts ECB Earth leakage Circuit Breaker trips Possible Cause s Corrective Action Leak current of inverter is Reduce carrier frequency AG83 EXCESSIVE Increase current sensor level of ECB or replace ECB with another one having higher current sensor level 23 PM troubleshooting information Operation status Symptom Adjustment method Adjustment item Starting Trouble is caused when Enable to the initial magnet position estimation H123 reverse run function Generate out of step Increase the starting current H117 Generate overcurrent trip Increase the starting time H118 Need for early starting Enable to the initial magnet position estimation H118 H123 function and reduce the starting time Running under minimum Motor runs unsteadily Increase the starting current H117 frequency H121 Running around m
243. communica tions must use the listed range for network data The inverter automatically divides received values by the appropriate factor in order to establish the dec imal point for internal use Likewise the network host computer must apply the same factor when it needs to work in engineering units However when sending data to the inverter the network host computer must scale values to the integer range listed for network communications e Resolution This is the quantity represented by the LSB of the network value in engineering units When the network data range is greater than the inverter s internal data range this 1 bit resolution will be fractional Register Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Data No code resolution 0000h unused aa Inaccessible 0001h Output frequency F001 high R W 0 to 40000 valid when A001 03 0 01 Hz 0002h setting monitor F001 low R W 0003h Inverter status A R 0 Initial status 6 DC braking 2 Stopping 7 Retrying 3 Running 8 Tripping 4 Free run stop 9 Undervoltage UV 5 Jogging 0004h Inverter status B R 0 Stopping 1 Running 2 Tripping 0005h Inverter status C S R 0 6 Reverse rotation 1 Stopping 7 Switching from fwd 2 Decelerating to rev rotation 3 Constant speed opera 8 Switching from rev tion to fwd rotation 4 Accelerating 9 Starting fwd 5 Forward rotation 10 Starting rev 0006h PID feedback R
244. completed within the set time a timeout occurs t3 in the above figure and the operation specified by Operation Selection on Communication Error C076 takes place If the Management Inverter is the master the master switching command is sent after an elapse of the silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 following the sending of data by the Master Inverter t1 in the above figure If an Inverter other than the Management Inverter is the master the mas ter switching command is sent after an elapse of the silent interval Com munication Wait Time C078 following the receiving of data from the Master Inverter t2 in the above figure If O1 Always started is selected for Co inverter Communication Start Selection the Management Inverter starts sending the moment the power is turned on Accordingly any delay in the power on timing of the other Inverter prevents normal communication and the Management Inverter experiences a communication timeout If Always started is selected confirm starting of all other Inverters and then start the Management Inverter at the end Do not set O8FFh EEPROM write or 0901h EEPROM write mode selec tion in the recipient register If any one of C096 to C100 is changed the change will not be reflected until the power is reconnected or a reset is performed by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning it OFF 315 ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 B 4 ModBus Data Listing B 4
245. confirmation signal BOK has been assigned to an in telligent input terminal that is when 44 is specified for one of COG l to C007 the inverter waits for the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b 24 without accelerating the motor after receiving the brake release signal If the inverter does not receive the braking confirmation signal within the braking confirmation time b 24 it trips with the braking error signal BER 147 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 148 output When the braking confirmation signal BOK has not been as signed to any intelligent input terminal the Brake Wait Time for Confirma tion b 24 is invalid In such cases the inverter proceeds to the operation described in item 4 after the output of the brake release signal 4 After the input of the braking confirmation signal or the output of the brake release signal when the BOK signal function is disabled the inverter waits for the Brake Wait Time for Acceleration Cb Ieg and then starts ac celerating the motor up to the set frequency 5 When the operation command is turned off the inverter decelerates the motor down to the braking frequency b 27 and then turns off the brake release signal BRK Output freq Brake release freq b 125 pa ica i lt gt Brake confirmation signal 1 Time to reach Brake release freq 2 Brake Wait Time for Release b i2 i 3 Brake Wait T
246. cs selection 2nd V f characteristics selec tion Description Four available V f curves DO VC Constant torque 01 VP Reduced torque Oe Free V F 03 SLV Sensorless vector control Defaults Output voltage gain Output voltage gain 2nd motor Sets voltage gain of the inverter range is 20 to 100 Automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain 2nd automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain Sets voltage compensation gain under automatic torque boost range is 0 to 255 Automatic torque boost slip compensation gain 2nd automatic torque boost slip compensation gain Sets slip compensation gain under automatic torque boost range is 0 to 255 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 3 5 5 DC Braking DB Settings FW Normal DC braking performance The DC braking feature can pro vide additional stopping torque when compared to a normal decel 4 eration to a stop DC braking is particularly useful at low speeds when normal deceleration torque is minimal When you set ADS to 0 Enable during stop and the RUN command FW RV signal turns OFF the inverter injects a DC voltage into the motor windings during deceleration below a frequency you can specify A052 The braking power A054 and duration A055 can both be set You can option ally specify a wait time before DC braking A053 during which the motor will free
247. ction Defaults Description EA terminal selection Three option codes D0 FQ set D I Encoder FB D2 EZSQ Pulse train input mode for Four option codes feedback 00 Single ph D 1 2 ph 1 Oe 2 ph 2 03 Single Dir Sets the pulse number ppr of the encoder set range is 32 1024 pulses Two option codes 00 OFF Oe ON Encoder pulses Simple positioning selection Creep pulse ratio 0 0 to 400 0 Creep speed Set range is start frequency b082 10 00 Hz Overspeed error detection level Set range is 0 0 150 0 Speed deviation error detection level Set range is 0 00 120 00 Hz 179 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 3 9 3 Speed control Related Settings Set 15 in C027 and GQ in P0O3 then output frequency is controlled by single phase pulse train input to EA terminal P Function Defaults Description Pulse train frequency scale Sets the pulse numbers at max frequency set range is 1 0 32 0 kHz Pulse train frequency filter time Set range is 0 01 2 00 sec constant Pulse train frequency bias Set range is 100 100 amount Pulse train frequency limit Set range is 0 100 Pulse input lower cut 0 01 to 20 00 The P059 parameter works as a cut frequency for the pulse input so all the fre quencies below it will be considered as zero The percentage value is based on the maximum frequency on
248. current at tripping 0 01 A DC input voltage at tripping 1 V Cumulative running time at tripping 1 h Cumulative power on time at tripping Th Fault monitor 5 factor Fault monitor 5 inverter status Fault monitor 5 frequency high Fault monitor 5 frequency low Fault monitor 5 voltage Fault monitor 5 running time high Fault monitor 5 running time low Fault monitor 5 current Fault monitor 5 power on time high Fault monitor 5 power on time low See the list of inverter trip factors below See the list of inverter trip factors below 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Output current at tripping 0 01 A DC input voltage at tripping TV Cumulative running time at tripping 1 h Cumulative power on time at tripping 1 h 319 ModBus Data Listing Register Function name Fault monitor 6 factor Fault monitor 6 inverter status Fault monitor 6 frequency high Fault monitor 6 frequency low Fault monitor 6 voltage 004Ah Fault monitor 6 running time high 004Bh Fault monitor 6 running time low 004Ch Fault monitor 6 current Fault monitor 6 power on time high Function Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items See the list of inverter trip factors below Data resoluti
249. d Motor speed Motor speed FRS FRS O O FW RV FW RV Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Free run Causes output to turn OFF stop allowing motor to free run coast to stop Output operates normally so controlled deceleration and stops motor Valid for inputs C00 CO07 Required settings b003 bOBB CO I 1to C0 N Notes e When you want the FRS terminal to be active low normally closed logic change the setting CO 1I to CO N that corresponds to the input CO0 to C007 that is assigned the FRS function 207 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 4 External Trip When the terminal EXT is turned ON the inverter enters the trip state indi cates error code E Ie and stops the output This is a general purpose interrupt type feature and the meaning of the error depends on what you connect to the EXT terminal Even if the EXT input is turned OFF the inverter remains in the trip state You must reset the inverter or cycle power to clear the error returning the inverter to the Stop Mode In the graph below the EXT input turns ON during normal Run Mode opera tion The inverter lets the motor free run to a stop and the alarm output turns ON immediately When the operator initiates a Reset command the alarm and error are cleared When the Reset is turned OFF the motor begins rota tion since the Run command is already active EXT t
250. d setting a small value will cause the inverter to perform full voltage starting and to easily trip because of over current B Function Defaults Description Reduced voltage startup Set range D Reduced voltage selection startup time small to 235 Reduced voltage startup time large Output freq Start freq bO82 Output voltage 1 1 1 1 m a6 Reduced voltage start EA b036 O0 Di 3 6 10 Display related parameters Function code display restriction b037 The function code display restriction allows you to arbitrarily switch the display mode or the display content on the integrated operator B Function Defaults Description EU Units Display selection Seven option codes DO All Complete display DI Utilized Individual display of functions Oe User User setting 03 Compare Data comparison display 04 Basic Basic display 05 Monitor 1 Function specific display mode b037 0 1 133 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 If a specific function has not been selected the monitor does not show the parameters concerning the specific function Following table lists the details of display conditions Displayed conditions Displayed func codes when condition fulfilled C001 C007 08 F202 F203 A201 to A204 A220 A244 A245 A261 A262 A281 A282 A292 to A296 b212 b213 b221 to b223 C241 H202 to H204 H206 D
251. d the operation of the intelligent input terminal has priority over the operation of the coil If disconnection of the communication train has disabled the master system from turning off the coil turn the corresponding intelligent input terminal on the control circuit block on and off This operation turns off the coil Note2 Communication error data is retained until an error reset command is input The data can be reset during the inverter operation 317 ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 B 4 2 ModBus Holding Registers The following tables list the holding registers for the inverter interface to the network The table legend is given below e Function Code The inverter s reference code for the parameter or func tion Same as inverter keypad display e Name The standard functional name of the parameter or function for the inverter R W The read only R or read write access R W permitted to the data in the inverter e Description How the parameter or setting works Same as Chapter 3 description e Reg The network register address offset for the value Some values have a high byte and low byte address e Range The numerical range for the network value that is sent and or received Z Tip The network values are binary integers Since these values cannot have an embedded decimal point for many parameters it represents the actual value in engineering units multiplied by a factor of 10 or 100 Network
252. d limit selection bee Overload limit selection 2nd motor Description Select the operation mode during overload conditions four options option codes 00 OFF Disabled D1 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Oe ON Cnst Enabled in constant speed operation D3 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Accelerates during regeneration EU DI Units DI bOee Overload limit level beee Overload limit level 2nd motor Sets the level of overload restric tion between 20 and 200 of the rated current of the inverter setting resolution is 1 of rated current 0 32 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current current Amps Amps b023 Overload limit parameter bees Overload limit parameter 2nd motor Sets the deceleration rate when inverter detects overload range is 0 1 to 3000 0 resolution 0 1 1 0 Sec 1 0 Sec bOe4 Overload limit selection 2 Select the operation mode during overload conditions four options option codes 00 OFF Disabled D1 ON Acc Cnst Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation O2 ON Cnst Enabled in constant speed operation D3 ON A C R Enabled in acceleration constant speed operation Accelerates during regeneration a bOeS Overload limit level 2 Sets the level of overload restric tion between 20 and 200 of the rated current of the
253. d machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequen cies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment damage Set the AVR Voltage Setting The inverter has an Automatic Voltage Regula tion AVR function It adjusts the output voltage to match the motor s name plate voltage rating The AVR smoothes out fluctuation in the input power source but note that it does not boost the voltage in the event of a brown out Use the AVR setting AG82 that most closely matches the one for your motor e 200 V class 200 215 220 230 240 VAC e 400 V class 380 400 415 440 460 480 VAC 63 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 To set the motor voltage follow the steps on the following table Action Display Func Parameter Starting point Base frequency setting Press the A key and hold until gt AVR voltage select Press the D Default value for AVR voltage 200 V class 230 VAC 400 V class 400 VAC HFE 460 VAC HFU Set to your motor specs your display may be different Press the 9 r Stores parameter returns to AOB Press the key to select 4 Set the Motor Current The inverter has thermal overload protection that is designed to protect the inverter and motor from overheating due to an excessive load The inverter s uses the moto
254. d of time in this case 1 year Carrying out this proof test at least one a year is the condition to comply the 1S013849 1 PLd e To activate give current to GS1 and GS2 simultaneously and separately to see output is allowed and EDM is conducting Status Terminal Current OFF Current ON Current OFF Current ON Current OFF Current OFF Current ON Current ON Conducted Not conducted Not conducted Not conducted Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Allowed e To activate give current to both GS1 and GS2 to see output is allowed and EDM is not conducting eTo activate give current to GS1 not to activate GS2 and see output is forbidden and EDM is not conducting eTo activate give current to GS2 not to activate GS1 and see output is forbidden and EDM is not conducting eTo desactivate interrupt current to both GS1 and GS2 to see output is forbidden and EDM is conducting Be sure to carry out the proof test when installation is ready before operation A Caution If the protection diodes used when the units are in wired parallel are only single diodes then their condition would be checked as part of the proof test Check to reconfirm the diodes are not damaged when proof test is done 383 Precautions Section E 9 E 9 Precautions A Caution To assure that the Safe Disable function appropiately fulfills the safety requirements of the application a throughout r
255. d remove the external resistors e The cable from the external resistor to the inverter must not exceed 5 m length e The individual wires from the resistor to the inverter must not be bundled together Output freq t 1 1 1 1 1 1 St he h a Tc 100s Regen 263 Dynamic Braking Section 5 3 5 3 3 Braking Resistor Selection Tables The MX2 series inverters have integrated braking units chopper Stopping torque is available by adding external resistors The required braking torque depends on your particular application Next table helps you to choose the right resistor for 3 and 10 braking duty applications ocasional braking To achieve higher duty cycles external braking units separate chopper with higher capacity are required Check with your supplier AX REMOOK1200 Fig 1 Fig 2 Fig 3 rf Fig 4 5 A Dimensions mm Weight Type Fig L H M l T kg AX REM00K1400 IE AX REM00K2070 IE AX REM00K2120 IE 105 oA ve AX REM00K2200 IE AX REM00K4075 IE 27 36 AX REM00K4035 IE 200 189 0 425 AX REM00K4030 IE AX REM00K5120 IE 260 249 0 58 AX REM00K6100 IE 320 309 0 73 AX REM00K6035 IE AX REM00K9070 IE AX REM00K9020 IE 2 200 62 100 74 1 41 AX REM00K9017 IE AX REM01K9070 IE AX REM01K9017 IE i e Z 2 f AX REM02K1070 IE AX REM02K1017 IE 4 sa 100 240 210 AX REM03K5035 IE 365 350 8
256. d you locate the short bar between PLC and P24 the input logic will be sink type In this case you connect the input terminal to L to make it active The wiring diagram on the Short bar for source logic Short bar for sink logic MX2 inverter circuits Logic GND following pages show the four combinations of using sourcing or sinking inputs and using the internal or an external DC supply 201 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 The two diagrams below input wiring circuits using the inverter s internal 24 V supply Each diagram shows the connection for simple switches or for a field device with transistor outputs Note that in the lower diagram it is nec essary to connect terminal L only when using the field device with transis tors Be sure to use the correct connection of the short bar shown for each wiring diagram Sinking Inputs Internal Supply Short bar PLC P24 position Field device GND Open collector outputs NPN transistors Sourcing Inputs Internal Supply Short bar PLC L position Common to Field device P24 to PNP bias circuits GND PNP transistor sousing outputs 202 Short bar Input circuits Input switches Short bar Input switches Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 The two diagrams below show input wiring circuits using an external supply If using the Sinking Inputs External Supply in b
257. dard motor s val ues 2 Motor constants obtained by off line auto tuning When HOG2 Hede 02 motor constants in HO3D He30 to HO34 He34 are tak en which are obtained by off line auto tuning 3 Arbitrarily set motor constants In above 1 and 2 cases motor constants can be adjusted manually Ac cording to value of HOG e Hefe change motor constants in H eG Hee0 to HO24 Heey or HO30 HeI0 to HO34 HE3S4 if necessary 1 Convert the inertia J to the motor shaft value Bigger J value will result in a quicker in motor response and quicker in torque increase Smaller J value will result in the opposite way 2 In the SLV modes inverter may give out reverse to given operation com mand in the low speed range as a nature of those controls In case there is a specific inconvenience for example reverse rotation damages the machine enable the reverse run protection b046 173 H Group Motor Constants Functions Section 3 8 3 8 2 Sensorless Vector Control This sensorless vector control enables the inverter to accurately operate the motor with a high starting torque even at low speed It estimates and controls the motor speed and output torque based on the inverter output voltage out put current and the set motor constants on the inverter To use this function specify 03 for the V F characteristic curve selection A04H4 A244 In prior to use this function be sure to make optimum setting of the motor con stants which
258. dards Industry uses these to evaluate or compare the performance of devices made by various manufacturers to a known standard A common logic type discrete output that uses an NPN transistor that acts as a switch to a power supply common usually ground The transistor s collector is open for external connection not connected internally Thus the output sinks external load current to ground A ratio that expresses a phase difference timing offset between current and voltage supplied by a power source to a load A perfect power factor 1 0 no phase offset Power factors less than one cause some energy loss in power transmission wiring Source to load 291 Glossary Section A 1 PID Loop Process Variable PWM Reactance Rectifier Regenerative Braking Regulation Reverse Torque Rotor Saturation Voltage Sensorless Vector Control Setpoint SP Single phase power 292 Proportional Integral Derivative A mathematical model used for process control A process controller maintains a process variable PV at a setpoint SP by using its PID algorithm to compensate for dynamic conditions and vary its output to drive the PV toward the desired value For variable fre quency drives the process variable is the motor speed See also Error A physical property of a process that is of interest because it affects the qual ity of the primary task accomplished by the process For an industrial oven temp
259. dards p cipes oroa cereo trop E E E big alel ee 20 SECTION 2 Inverter Mounting and Installation eeseossssesscsscssesesescsseseseseseeoe 21 Orientation to Inverter Featiresin retes ks dees teehee aT EA ER AA E E A pane E EEE Se Re ee 21 Basic System Description st cove hate the seine Ba EEE E EE Sieh wey see begs hee bbe 28 Step by Step Basic Installation 0 eneen rerne eere ereere ereer 29 POW6rUp Testis 23tes Be Ra Ca eR eh ire ee elise Sane a Gali baw e Sa OS 25 RS 56 Using the Front Panel Ke ypadk paeis pana ove eae Hl Boe ead BGs BRIS TRAE ASTER NS MERE K ARENAN 58 SECTION 3 Configuring Drive Parameters 0 ccc cece cc cece cece cece cece eens ee eeeees 69 Choosing a Programming Device 0 0 eect eee e eee nee es 69 Using the Keypad Devices si ceia Sle RaSh ao 3 SARS S ER eae aes REN ake eee ates 70 D Group Monitoring Functions 0 0 cee eee e eben teen nee 74 F Group Main Profile Parameters 01 0 eee e cence eere 89 A Group Standard Functions mesate de iri e ce ee eee n ete eee e rene renee 90 BY Group Fine Tuning Functions isesi ck ee a eee ob Sad Sek spies esis eek Reb kd pase wets 121 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 00 cee rererere rreren ereere 153 H Group Motor Constants Functions 0 2 0 cece e ene e eens 172 P Group Other Parameters erisir Seated ea ae ewe sane tee Ged ae Ween Se ao be Gran 179 SECTION 4
260. decelerate the motor for positioning before its speed reaches the speed setting In simple positioning mode the rotation direction setting FW or RV of the operation command is ignored The operation command simply functions as the signal to run or stop the motor The motor runs in the forward direc tion when the value of target position minus current position is posi tive or in the reverse position when the value is negative The position at power up is home position Position data 0 If power is removed current position data is lost except when current position save at power off function is selected setting P081 1 that allows to keep the latest position before the power off When the operation command is turned on with 0 specified as the posi tion setting positioning is completed with DC braking without running the motor P Group Other Parameters f1 Hz F001 Hz Current position Position ref POK Section 3 9 e Specify 03 only to reset a trip for reset mode selection C 102 If a value other than 03 is specified to i02 the current position counter will be cleared when the inverter reset terminal or reset key is turned on Be sure to specify 03 for reset mode selection C 92 if you intend to use the value of the current position counter for operation after recovering the inverter from tripping by turning on the reset terminal or reset key If the PCLR funct
261. detail 3 Data comparison display mode b037 03 The monitor displays only the parameters that have been changed from the factory settings All monitoring indications dxxx and code FOGO I b 190 b 19 I are always displayed 4 Basic display mode b031 04 The monitor displays basic parameters The monitor display is the factory setting The following table lists the parameters that can be displayed in basic display mode Code displayed d00 d 104 Monitoring indication Foo Output frequency setting Fgae Acceleration time 1 F003 Deceleration time 1 134 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 Code displayed Keypad Run key routing Frequency source Run command source Base frequency Maximum frequency AT selection Multi speed frequency 0 Multi speed frequency 1 Multi speed frequency 2 Multi speed frequency 3 V F characteristic curve selection V F gain Energy saving operation mode Restart mode on power failure under volt trip Allowable undervoltage power failure time Restart mode on over volt over curnt trip Retry wait time on over volt over curnt trip Function code display restriction Carrier frequency Initialization mode parameters or trip history Decel overvoltage suppression enable Decel overvoltage suppression level Initialization trigger Password A setting Password A for authentication Output 11 function Output 12 function Alarm relay active sta
262. dex to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual 3 xiv A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution N HIGH VOLTAGE A Caution N HIGH VOLTAGE Z N WARNING N WARNING Z N WARNING A Caution A Caution The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the inverter Otherwise it may cause injury to per SOMO EA APAE A T T E 191 If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting 50Hz 60Hz be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with the respective manufacturer Only operate the motor at elevated frequen cies after getting their approval Otherwise there is the danger of equipment GAMAGS ea dl ax ee Aa iaiet ees chee eae al bee eect has Saya st decent tie hee 191 It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your application exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection point supM Stew Gcehauenh att ge heey a a het afer ceavancndecu auiee E 193 Be sure to turn OFF power to the inverter before changing the short circuit bar position to change SR SK Otherwise damage to the inverter circuitry may OCCU ton ba aaa heave et anes ee ede ee hh 201 Be careful not to turn PID clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the inverter is in Run mode output to motor is ON Otherwise this could cause the motor
263. disabled Integrated power clear Clear watt hour data No action Drive Programming input 1 General purpose input 1 is made ON under Drive Programming General purpose input 1 is made OFF under Drive Programming Drive Programming input 2 General purpose input 2 is made ON under Drive Programming General purpose input 2 is made OFF under Drive Programming Drive Programming input 3 General purpose input 3 is made ON under Drive Programming General purpose input 3 is made OFF under Drive Programming Drive Programming input 4 General purpose input 4 is made ON under Drive Programming General purpose input 4 is made OFF under Drive Programming Drive Programming input 5 General purpose input 5 is made ON under Drive Programming General purpose input 5 is made OFF under Drive Programming Drive Programming input 6 General purpose input 6 is made ON under Drive Programming General purpose input 6 is made OFF under Drive Programming Drive Programming input 7 General purpose input 7 is made ON under Drive Programming General purpose input 7 is made OFF under Drive Programming 157 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 Input Function Summary Table Terminal Symbol Option Code Function Name Analog command held Description Analog command is held Analog com
264. double word parameter access of the register used as a pair is also forbidden Example External register 1216 overlaps with higher rank of existing register 1216h A020 Internal register 1201h existing register 1201h A001 Address 1216h will be associated with two parameters A020 and A001 As this is not possible only the modbus mapping setting is used and it means that neither lower or higher rank of A020 could be accessed B 5 1 3 3 Internal register setup Is not possible to use a double word or a none existing register as internal reg ister 349 ModBus mapping Section B 5 B 5 1 4 Examples B 5 1 4 1 When an external register doesn t overlap with an existing register P201 External register 4001h P301 Internal register 120Fh A013 P221 Scaling 1 000 P211 Format Unsigned A013 value 33 21h 1 Read 0x03 Object register External register 4001h Modbus command use register number 1 Transmission 01 03 40 00 00 01 91 CA Reception 01 03 02 00 21 78 5C 2 Read 0x03 Object register Internal register 120Fh Transmission 01 03 12 OE 00 01 EO B1 Reception 01 03 02 00 21 78 5C 3 Write 0x06 Object register External register 4001h Transmission 01 06 40 00 00 30 9C 1E Reception 01 06 40 00 00 30 9C 1E 4 Read 0x03 Object register Internal register 120Fh Transmission 01 03 12 OE 00 01 EO B1 Reception 01 03 02 00 30 B8 50 B 5 1 4 2 When external register
265. dress 5 e This example uses change data 500 1F4h to set 50 Hz as the data resolution of the register 1029h holding the first Multi speed O A020 is 0 1 Hz Query Response Field Name Slave address 1 Example Hex Field Name Slave address Example Hex Function code Function code Register start address 2 high order Register start address 2 high order Register start address 2 low order Register start address 2 low order Change data high order Change data high order Change data low order Change data low order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 low order CRC 16 low order Note 1 No response is made for a broadcasting query Note 2 The PDU Register Number are addressed starting at zero Therefore register numbered 1029h are addressed as 1028h Register address value trans mitted on Modbus line is 1 less than the Register Number When writing in a selected holding register fails see the exception response 305 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 Loopback Test 08h This function checks a master slave transmission using any test data An example follows e Send test data to an inverter having slave address 1 and receiving the test data from the inverter as a loopback test Query Response Field Name Example Field Name Example Hex Hex Sla
266. drives again However when the inverter was in auto tuning state retrying operation decreases the accuracy and the inverter makes the transition to the trip state The Bracking resistor overload BRD is disabled However BRD operates according to ED and doesn t detect BRD overload trip Moreover beacuse the EXT trip is disabled on the IO signal the protection by opening EXT circuit with the temperature relay built in BRD resistance is invalid The Safety function has priority over the Unprotected Operation mode function The display shows Unprotected Inverter Operation status LED Digital Operator 7 seg LED displays 7 SEGMENT FONT when changing to Unprotected Inverter Operation mode and PRG LED blinks This mode is canceled by pressing any key but the PRG LED blink is not cancelled During Unprotected Inverter Operation mode d090 Warning monitor displays UIO However when changing to Unprotected Inverter Operation mode and a warning occurs the warning code is displayed in d090 Warning monitor LCD Digital Operator The WARNING mode display will appear automatically when changing to Unprotected Inverter Operation mode and displays the next screen Moreover WARNING LED and orange backlight turns on WARNING M1 STOP ALL UIO mode Press Any Key This mode is cancelled by pressing any key but the WARNING LED and the orange backlight lighting are not cancelled During Un
267. ds of the application For a particular inverter motor and load there will be a range of practically achievable accelerations and deceler ations Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives Section 1 3 1 3 8 Velocity Profiles Note The MX2 inverter is capable of speed sophisticated speed control A Set speed graphical representation of that capability will help you understand and configure the associated param 0 eters This manual makes use of the Velocity Profile velocity profile graph used in indus try shown at right In the example acceleration is a ramp to a set speed and deceleration is a decline to a stop Acceleration and deceleration set tings specify the time required to go from a stop to maximum frequency or vise versa The resulting slope speed change divided by time is the acceleration or deceleration An 0 increase in output frequency uses the acceleration slope while a k Acceleration t decrease uses the deceleration slope The accel or decel time a par ticular speed change depends on the starting and ending frequencies However the slope is constant corresponding to the full scale accel or decel time setting For example the full scale acceleration setting time may be 10 seconds the time required to go from 0 to 60 Hz The MX2 inverter can store up to 16 speed Maximum speed Speed time setting preset speeds And it can apply Speed 2 separate acceleration and
268. e 20 mA nominal input impedance 100 Q Analog voltage input 0 to 10 VDC range 10 VDC nominal input impedance 10 KQ 10 V analog reference 10 VDC nominal Allowable max current 7 mA Serial communication terminal For RS485 Modbus communication Max speed 115 2 kbps Built in Terminal Resistor 200 Q Slide switch selection Relay common contact Max contact capacity Relay contact normally open AL1 ALO 4 3 1 196 Relay contact normally closed 250 VAC 2 A resistance 0 2 A induction AL2 AL0 250 VAC 1 A resistance 0 2 A induction Contact min capacity 100 VAC 10 mA 5VDC 100 mA In combination with Pulse train input A it is used to check direction below 1 8 kHz Note 1 The two terminals L are electrically connected together inside the inverter Note 2 We recommend using L logic GND to the right for logic input circuits and L analog GND to the left for analog I O circuits Note 3 Default relay N O N C configuration is reversed See 4 5 11 Forced Operator on page 214 Wiring sample of control logic terminal source logic Short bar source logic B STe e Tt ae BA GSH BAB dl Variable resistor for freq setting 1 KQ 2 KQ Freq meter Note If relay is connected to intelligent output install a diode across the relay coil reverse biased in order to suppress the turn off spike Control Logic Signal Specifications 4 3 2 Sink sour
269. e threshold value The hysteresis effect causes the output to turn ON slightly early as the speed approaches the threshold Then the turn OFF point is slightly delayed Note the active low nature of the signal due to the open collector output Frequency arrival output FA2 FA4 Output works the same way it just uses two Pa separate thresholds as shown in the TE figure to the right These provide for separate acceleration and decelera 243 045 tion thresholds to provide more flexi FAI signal Fon 1 of max frequency Foff 2 of max frequency bility than for FA1 FA2 FA4 uses 0 C042 C045 during acceleration for the FA2 FA4 ON threshold and 043 c046 during signal deceleration for the OFF threshold Fon 1 of max frequency This signal also is active low Having Foff 2 of max frequency different accel and decel thresholds provides an asymmetrical output func tion However you can use equal ON and OFF thresholds if desired Frequency arrival output FA3 FA5 Output works also the same way only differ freq soei thresholds ence is arriving at set frequency coyey co4s Co43 C046 0 FA3 FA5 signal Fon 1 of max frequency Foff 2 of max frequency 230 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 7 Overload Advance Notice Signal When the output current exceeds Output a pr
270. e below This information is useful in sizing spade lug or ring lug connectors for wire terminations Z Caution Tighten the screws with the specified torque in the table below Check for any loosening of screws Otherwise there is the danger of fire Screw Width mm Tightening Diameter Torque N m 3G3MX2 AB001 AB002 AB004 3G3MX2 A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 3G3MX2 AB007 AB015 AB022 3G3MX2 A2015 A2022 A2037 3G3MX2 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4030 A4040 3G3MX2 A2055 A2075 3 0 3G3MX2 A4055 A4075 3G3MX2 A2110 3 9 to 5 1 3G3MX2 A4110 A4150 3G3MX2 A2150 5 9 to 8 8 2 3 8 Inverter Supply Input R L1 S L2 T L3 Step 3 In this step you will connect wiring to the input of the inverter First you must determine whether the inverter model you have required three phase power only with terminals R L1 S L2 and T L3 or single phase power only with terminals L1 and N Refer to the specifications label on the side of the inverter for the acceptable power source types 2 3 8 1 Earth leakage circuit breaker Use an earth leakage breaker for circuit wiring protection between the power supply and the main power supply terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 An earth leakage breaker may malfunction at high frequencies as those gen erated by an inverter Use an earth leakage breaker with a large high fre quency sensitive current rating When sensitivity of 30mA or even les
271. e inverter output frequency these parameters adjust the starting and ending ranges of POT as well as the output frequency range Related characteristic diagrams are located in Analog Input Settings in this chapter Analog sampling setting is the value specified in AQ 16 A Function Defaults Description VR input active range start The output frequency correspond frequency ing to the analog input range start ing point range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz VR input active range end The output frequency correspond frequency ing to the current input range end ing point range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz VR input active range start The starting point offset for the current POT range range is 0 to 100 VR input active range end The ending point offset for the voltage POT range range is 0 to 100 VR input start frequency Two options select codes enable 00 Start FQ 01 0 Hz 120 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 B Group Fine Tuning Functions The B Group of functions and parameters adjust some of the more subtle but useful aspects of motor control and system configuration 3 6 1 Automatic Restart Mode The restart mode determines how the inverter will resume operation after a fault causes a trip event The five options provide advantages for your applica tions Frequency matching allows the inverter to read the motor speed by vir tue of its res
272. e not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any conduc tive object into it Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or fire 192 If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active the motor will automatically start and injury may result Before turning ON the power con firm that the RUN command is not present cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 When the Stop key function is disabled pressing the Stop key does not stop the inverter nor will it reset a trip alarm 2 0 cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Be sure to provide a separate hard wired emergency stop switch when the Application Warrants itene erigat gers tev beseetase aa e a eaae aa ae EEA AAA 192 If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active the motor starts rotation and is dangerous Before turning power ON confirm that the Run command is not active sssssssssrrsesssrrnesrsrrnesrttnnesrnnnnnstnnnneesnnnneennnnnne 205 After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs the motor will restart suddenly if the Run command is already active Be sure to set the alarm reset after verifying that the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnelles aa a Atte a AE NA 210 Cautions for Operations and Monitoring The heat sink fins will have a high temperature Be careful not to touch them Otherwise there is the danger of getting burned cescceeeeteeeeteeeees 56 xiii In
273. e program Initialization parameter 00 JPN selection O01 EUR STOP key selection Select whether the STOP RESET key on the keypad is enabled three option codes 00 ON Enabled O1 OFF Disabled De Only RESET Disabled only during stop Usage rate of regenerative Selects the rate of use in of braking function the regenerative braking resistor per 100 sec intervals range is 0 0 to 10 0 0 Function disabled Cooling fan control Selects when the fan is ON during inverter operation three options 00 Alws ON Always ON D1 ONin RUN ON during RUN Oe ON by temp 144 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 B Function Defaults Description EU Units Clear elapsed time of cooling Two option codes fan oo OFF Oo CLR Initialization target data Select initialized parameters four option codes oo ALL D1 Exp COM TERM Oe Only U 03 All exp U Regenerative braking function Three option codes operation selection 00 OFF Disabled D1 RUN ON Enabled Disabled during stop De Alws ON Enabled Enabled during stop Regenerative braking function Range is 360 720 ON level 330 to 380 V 200 V class 660 to 760 V 400 V class BRD resistor Ohmic value of the braking resis tor connected to the drive 100 0 to 600 0 Q Data Read Write selection Controls the Read and Write pro tection D0 R W OK Read Write Ok OG Protected
274. e pulse train input monitor terminal EA is always valid independently of any parameter setting This monitor shows the value after full scale conver sion and filter processing but before bias addition Parameter No Function name Data Default setting Unit d133 Pulse train input monitor 0 00 to 100 00 86 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 3 3 34 PID Deviation Monitor d153 It displays the PID deviation into d153 monitor It only operates when PID function is effective A071 01 or 02 aries Function name Data Sing Unit d153 PID deviation monitor 9999 00 to 9999 00 s A071 PID selection 00 OFF Disabled 00 01 ON Enabled 02 ON Reverse output enabled A075 PID scale 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 d153 PID deviation x PID scale A075 The display by digital operator is shown below Display Data 999 to 100 9999 00 to 1000 00 999 to 100 999 99 to 100 00 99 9 to 10 0 99 99 to 10 00 9 99 to 99 99 9 99 to 99 99 100 0 to 999 9 100 00 to 999 99 1000 to 9999 1000 00 to 9999 00 3 3 35 PID Output Monitor d155 It displays the scaled PID output into d155 monitor It is enabled only when PID function is effective A071 01 or 02 Parameter A Default i No Function name Data setting Unit d155 PID output monitor 0 00 to 9999 00 A071
275. e set threshold for the deviation signal Analog O disconnec tion detection When the O input value lt b070 setting signal loss detected When no signal loss is detected Analog Ol disconnec tion detection When the Ol input value lt b0 I setting signal loss detected When no signal loss is detected PID FB status output Transitions to ON when the inverter is in RUN Mode and the PID Process Variable PV is less than the Feedback Low Limit C053 Transitions to OFF when the PID Process Variable PV exceeds the PID High Limit C052 and transi tions to OFF when the inverter goes from Run Mode to Stop Mode Network error When the communications watchdog timer period specified by 077 has time out When the communications watchdog timer is satis fied by regular communications activity Logic operation output 1 When the Boolean operation specified by C 143 has a logical 1 result When the Boolean operation specified by 143 has a logical O result Logic operation output 2 When the Boolean operation specified by 46 has a logical 1 result When the Boolean operation specified by E 46 has a logical O result Logic operation output 3 When the Boolean operation specified by E 149 has a logical 1 result When the Boolean operation specified by E 149 has a logical O result Capacitor life warning signal Lifeti
276. e setting 3 3 18 Fin Temperature Monitor d018 Displays the temperature of the cooling fin inside the inverter Parameter i Default No Function name Data setting Unit d018 Fin temperature monitor 20 0 to 150 0 C 3 3 19 Life Assessment Monitor d022 The LED lighting position indicates the status of life assessment signal The following two items can be monitored 1 Main circuit board capacitor service life 2 Cooling fan life 5888 4 1 o gt 82 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 The capacitor service life is calculated every 10 minutes If the inverter is turned on off frequently within this interval the capacitor service life cannot be correctly diagnosed The cooling fan life assessment function is not available for 1 phase 200V class motors of 0 4 kW max and 3 phase 200V class motors of 0 75 kW max beacuse these motors are not equipped with a cooling fan 3 3 20 Position Command Monitor d029 Position commands can be monitored during simple position control Parameter x Default x No Function name Data setting Unit d029 Position command Displays the position monitor command 268435455 to 268435455 3 3 21 Current Position Monitor d030 The position feedback d030 monitor always is monitored when parameter P003 01 encoder feedback independently of parameter P012 setting Mon itor d030 is cleared even with P012 00 simp
277. e specification P072 HIGH R W 0 to 268435455 1 1653h forward P072 LOW R W 1654h Position range specification P073 HIGH R W_ 268435455 to 0 1 1655h reverse P073 LOW R W 1656h Reserved 1657h Positioning mode P075 R W 00 Limit 01 No limit 1658h Reserved 1659h Encoder disconnection timeout P077 R W Oto 100 0 1 sec 165Ahto Reserved z i 165Bh 165Ch Position restarting range P080 R W 0 to 10000 pulses 165Dh Save position at power off P081 R W 00 OFF 01 ON 165Eh Curnt pos at poff P082 R W 268435455 to 268435455 1 165Fh Reserved T 1660h Preset position data P083 R W 268435455 to 268435455 1 1661h to Reserved 1665h 1666h Drive Program parameter U 00 P100 R W 0 to 65535 1 1667h Drive Program parameter U 01 P101 R W 0 to 65535 1 1668h Drive Program parameter U 02 P102 R W 0 to 65535 1 1669h Drive Program parameter U 03 P103 R W 0 to 65535 1 166Ah Drive Program parameter U 04 P104 R W_ 0 to 65535 1 166Bh Drive Program parameter U 05 P105 R W 0 to 65535 1 166Ch Drive Program parameter U 06 P106 R W 0 to 65535 1 166Dh Drive Program parameter U 07 P107 R W_ 0 to 65535 1 166Eh Drive Program parameter U 08 P108 R W_ 0 to 65535 1 166Fh Drive Program parameter U 09 P109 R W 0 to 65535 1 1670h Drive Program parameter U 10 P110 R W 0 to 65535 1 1671h Drive Program parameter U 11 P111 R W 0 to 65535 1 1672h Drive Program p
278. e utilizing EDM output signal to reconfirm both safety inputs GS1 and GS2 Function code Multi function input 3 and 4 GS1 Safety input 1 selection Description GS2 Safety input 2 Multi function input 3 and 4 NC Normally Closed NC Normally Closed operation selection Multi function output EDM External Device Monitor 2 terminal 11 selection Multi function output NO Normally Open 2 terminal 11 contact selection GS input mode No trip Trip 3 4 Note 1 They are automatically set when safety switch is turned ON cannot be changed Note 2 Those are automatically assigned when EDM switch is turned ON cannot be changed Note 3 Inverter trips with E37 When competing with external trip E12 E37 has priority Note 4 While the drive is the trip status E37 and either GS1 or GS2 is activated on the safety by is not guaranteed 380 Wiring example Section E 6 E 6 Wiring example Safety Switch Example emergency button When the Gate Suppress function is utilized connect the drive to a safety certified interrupting device utilizing EDM output signal to reconfirm both safety inputs GS1 and GS2 Reset Switch EDM feedback input A2 14 push 24 Safety Unit Standard IEC61508 1SO13849 certified Specifications of the fuse The arch extinguish fuse with rated voltage 250 VAC rated current
279. ea that may not be obvious to first time users of the product Hazardous High Voltage N HIGH VOLTAGE Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are connected to hazard ous line voltages When servicing drives and electronic controllers there may be exposed components with housing or protrusions at or above line potential Extreme care should be taken to protect against shock Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only one hand when checking components Always work with another person in case an emer gency occurs Disconnect power before checking controllers or performing maintenance Be sure equipment is properly grounded Wear safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or rotating machinery Caution when using Safe Stop Function When using Safe Stop function make sure to check whether the safe stop function properly works when installation before starting operation Please carefully refer to Appendix E Safety ISO 13849 1 on page 379 General Precautions Read These First 2 2 General Precautions Read These First N WARNING N WARNING Z N WARNING N WARNING Z N WARNING A Caution A Caution A Caution N HIGH VOLTAGE N WARNING This equipment must be installed adjusted and serviced by qualified electri cal maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved Failure to observe this precaution may res
280. ecomes less than the value specified by C039 OFF When the output current is more than the value specified by C039 Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings C036 C039 4 6 27 Drive Programming Output 1 to 3 The functions are for Drive Programming Refer to a manual of Drive Programming for detailed description Terminal Symbol MO2 MO3 Function Name Drive pro gramming output 1 Drive pro gramming output 2 Drive pro gramming output 3 Description Each general output is turned on Each general output is turned off Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings Notes e Refer to a manual of Drive Programming for detailed explanation 246 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 28 Operation Ready Signal The inverter outputs the inverter ready signal IRDY when it is ready for oper ation i e when it can receive an operational commana Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Operation ON The inverter is ready to accept the ready signal operation command OFF The inverter is not ready to accept the operation command Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings C038 C039 Notes e The inverter can recognize only the operation command if given while the IRDY signal is given out If the IRDY signal is not given out check whether the input power s
281. econd version New functionality and IP54 models January 2013 xxiii Revision History xxiv SECTION 1 Getting Started 1 1 Introduction 1 1 1 Main Features Congratulation on your purchase of an MX2 Series Omron inverter This inverter drive features state of the art circuitry and components to provide high performance The housing footprint is exceptionally small given the size of the corresponding motor The Omron MX2 product line includes more than a dozen inverter models to cover motor sizes from 1 8 horsepower to 20 horsepower in either 240 VAC or 480 VAC power input versions The main features are e 200 V and 400 V class 0 1 to 15 kW inverters having dual rating e Drive programming function integrated e Built in RS485 MODBUS RTU as standard other FieldBus optional e New current suppressing function e Sixteen programmable speed levels e PID control adjusts motor speed automatically to maintain a process vari able value e Password protection to avoid unexpected parameter change Additionally the products produced in November 09 or later includes these new features e Permanent magnet motor control e 5 line LCD support with Read and Write capability Copy function and Real Time Clock Trip History The design in Omron inverters overcomes many of the traditional trade offs between speed torque and efficiency The performance characteristics are e High starting torque of 200 at 0 5 Hz e Continuous ope
282. ected The detection level parameter 039 is to set the level of the low load This function is for generating an early warning logic output without causing either a trip event or a restriction of the Output current LOC output 1 Pow motor current those effects are available on other functions C Function Description Light load signal output mode Two option codes 0a ACC DEC CST Enabled during acceleration decelera tion constant speed D 1 Const Enabled only during constant speed Defaults current 3 7 5 Output Function Adjustment Parameters Overload Warning Output The fol lowing parameters work in conjunction with the intelligent output function when configured The overload level parameter CO4 I sets the motor cur rent level at which the overload signal OL turns ON The range of setting is from 0 to 200 of the rated current for the inverter This function is for gen erating an early warning logic output without causing either a trip event or a restriction of the motor current those effects are available on other functions Frequency Arrival Output The fre quency arrival signal FA1 or FA2 is intended to indicate when the inverter output has reached arrived at the tar get frequency You can adjust the timing of the leading and trailing edges of the signal via two parameters specified to acceleration ad deceleration ramps C042 and C043
283. ection 4 4 Input Function Summary Table Symbol Code Function Name Page Set frequency exceeded 2 Set frequency only 2 Overload warning 2 Analog O disconnection detection Analog Ol disconnection detection PID FB status output Network error Logic operation output 1 to 3 Capacitor life warning signal Cooling fan life warning signal Starting contact signal Fin overheat warning Light load detection signal Drive programming output 1 to 3 Operation ready signal Forward run signal Reverse run signal Fatal fault signal Window comparator O Window comparator Ol Frequency Command Source Run Command Source 2nd motor in operation STO Safe Torque Off Performance Monitor Output terminal 11 only Option board output Not used 200 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 4 5 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 are identical programmable inputs for general use The input circuits can use the inverter s internal isolated 24 V field supply or an external power supply This section describes input circuits operation and how to connect them properly to switches or transistor outputs A Caution on field devices Section 4 5 The MX2 inverter features selectable sinking or sourcing inputs These terms refer to the connection to the external switching device it either sinks current from the input
284. ection C 2 User Setting P072 Position range specification for 268435455 v ward P073 Position range specification 268435455 v reverse P075 Positioning mode 00 v P077 Encoder disconnection timeout 1 0 v P080 Position restarting range 0 x P081 Save position at power off 00 x P082 Curnt pos at poff 0 v P083 Preset position data 268435455 to v 268435455 P100 Drive Program parameter U 00 0 v P101 Drive Program parameter U 01 0 y P102 Drive Program parameter U 02 0 v P103 Drive Program parameter U 03 0 v P104 Drive Program parameter U 04 0 y P105 Drive Program parameter U 05 0 v P106 Drive Program parameter U 06 0 v P107 Drive Program parameter U 07 0 v P108 Drive Program parameter U 08 0 v P109 Drive Program parameter U 09 0 v P110 Drive Program parameter U 10 0 v P111 Drive Program parameter U 11 0 v P112 Drive Program parameter U 12 0 v P113 Drive Program parameter U 13 0 v P114 Drive Program parameter U 14 0 y P115 Drive Program parameter U 15 0 v P116 Drive Program parameter U 16 0 v P117 Drive Program parameter U 17 0 y P118 Drive Program parameter U 18 0 v P119 Drive Program parameter U 19 0 v P120 Drive Program parameter U 20 0 v P121 Drive Program parameter U 21 0 v P122 Drive Program parameter U 22 0 v P123 Drive Program parameter U 23 0 v P124 Drive P
285. ection opposite to motor shaft rotation As such reverse torque is a decelerating force on the motor and its external load The windings of a motor that rotate being physically coupled to the motor shaft See also Stator For a transistor semiconductor device it is in saturation when an increase in input current no longer results in an increase in the output current The satura tion voltage is the voltage drop across the device The ideal saturation voltage is zero A technique used in some variable frequency drives featured in some other Omron inverter model families to rotate the force vector in the motor without the use of a shaft position sensor angular Benefits include an increase in torque at the lowest speed and the cost savings from the lack of a shaft posi tion sensor The setpoint is the desired value of a process variable of interest See also Process Variable PV and PID Loop An AC power source consisting of Hot and Neutral wires An Earth Ground connection usually accompanies them In theory the voltage potential on Neutral stays at or near Earth Ground while Hot varies sinusoidally above and below Neutral This power source is named Single Phase to differentiate it from three phase power sources Some Omron inverters can accept single phase input power but they all output three phase power to the motor See also Three phase Glossary Section A 1 Slip Squirrel Cage Stator Tachometer Thermal Swi
286. ed 380 V VT 1 3 2 6 3 5 4 5 WAY CT 1 1 2 2 3 1 3 6 480 V VT 1 7 3 4 4 4 5 7 CT 1 4 2 8 3 9 4 5 Loss at 100 load 35 56 96 116 Efficiency at rated load 92 93 94 95 Rated input voltage Three phase 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 Three phase 380 to 480 V proportional to input voltage Rated output current VT 2 1 4 1 5 4 6 9 A CT 1 8 3 4 4 8 5 5 Starting torque 6 200 at 0 5 Hz Braking Without resistor 100 lt 50 Hz lt 50 Hz 50 lt 60 Hz lt 60 Hz With resistor 150 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Weight 1 5 1 6 1 8 1 9 3 3 3 5 4 0 4 2 Three phase 400V class Specifications 3G3MX2 inverters 400 V models A4055 A4075 A4110 Applica kW VT 7 5 11 15 ble motor CT 5 5 7 5 11 size 2 HP VT 10 15 20 CT 7 5 10 15 Rated 380 V VT 11 5 15 1 20 4 25 0 WAY CT 9 7 11 8 15 7 20 4 480 V VT 14 5 19 1 25 7 31 5 CT 12 3 14 9 19 9 25 7 Loss at 100 load 229 296 411 528 Efficiency at rated load 96 96 2 96 4 96 6 Rated input voltage Three phase 380 V 15 to 480 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 Three phase 380 to 480 V proportional to input voltage Rated output current VT 17 5 23 0 31 0 38 0 A CT 14 8 18 0 24 0 31 0 Starting torque 6 200 at 0 5 Hz Braking Without resistor 100 lt 50 Hz 50 lt 60 Hz With resistor 150
287. ed function output 24 EzSQ Drive Programming 25 O input 26 Ol input 27 O Ol Run source monitor 1 Terminal 2 Operator 3 Modbus network 4 Option Fault frequency monitor 0 to 65535 Fault monitor 1 Latest Fault monitor 2 Fault monitor 3 Fault monitor 4 Fault monitor 5 Fault monitor 6 Error code condition of occurrence Output frequency Hz Output current A Internal DC voltage V RUN time h ON time h Warning monitor Warning code 0 to 385 DC voltage monitor Voltage of inverter internal DC bus Range is 0 0 to 999 9 75 D Group Monitoring Functions 3 3 1 76 D Function Regenerative braking load rate monitor Description Usage ratio of integrated brake chopper range is 0 0 100 0 Section 3 3 Electronic thermal monitor Accumulated value of electronic thermal detection range is from 0 0 100 0 Analog input O monitor 0 to 1023 Analog input OI monitor 0 to 1023 Pulse train input monitor 0 00 to 100 00 PID deviation monitor Insertion point PID deviation 327 68 to 327 67 9999 00 to 9999 00 PID output monitor 0 00 to 9999 00 if A071 01 9999 00 to 9999 00 if A071 02 Trip Event and History Monitoring The trip event and history monitoring feature lets you cycle through related information using the keypad See 6 2 Monito
288. ed limit value in torque control RV H002 H202 Motor parameter selection Speed torque control switching time H005 H205 Speed response When ND is selected following functions are not displayed in intelligent termi nals Intelligent input terminals Intelligent output terminals Torque limit enabled Overtorque Torque limit switching 1 Torque limit Torque limit switching 2 Torque command input permission 73 D Group Monitoring Functions 3 3 74 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 You can access important parameter values with the D Group monitoring functions whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode After selecting the function code number for the parameter you want to monitor press the Function key once to show the value on the display In functions d005 and d006 the intelligent terminals use individual segments of the display to show ON OFF status If the inverter display is set to monitor a parameter and powerdown occurs the inverter stores the present monitor function setting For your convenience the display automatically returns to the previously monitored parameter upon the next powerup Output frequency monitor D Function Description Real time display of output frequency to motor from 0 00 to 400 00 Hz If b 163 is set high output frequency FUG I can be changed by up down key with d001 monitorin
289. ed with screwdriver 1 remove the cable 4 4 Intelligent Terminal Listing 4 4 1 Intelligent Inputs Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent input material in this chapter Input Function Summary Table Code Function Name Forward Run Stop Reverse Run Stop Multi step speed setting binary 1 Multi step speed setting binary 2 Multi step speed setting binary 3 Multi step speed setting binary 4 Jogging External DC injection braking Set 2nd control 2 step acceleration deceleration Free run stop External trip Unattended start protection Commercial switch Soft lock Analog input switching Reset PTC thermistor Thermal Protection 3 wire start 3 wire stop 3 wire forward reverse PID enabled disabled PID integral reset UP DWN function accelerated UP DWN function decelerated UP DWN function data clear Forced operator Multi step speed setting bit 1 to 7 198 Intelligent Terminal Listing Section 4 4 Input Function Summary Table Code Function Name Page OLR 39 Overload limit switching 128 TL 40 Torque limit enabled 137 215 TRQ1 41 Torque limit switching 1 137 215 TRQ2 42 Torque limit switching 2 137 215 BOK 44 Brake confirmation 147 215 LAC 46 LAD cancel 216 PCLR 47 Position deviation clear 157 ADD 50 Frequency addition 217 F TM 51 Forced te
290. ef Specify a constant to scale the ficient displayed frequency for d007 mon itor range is 0 01 to 99 99 Display ex operator connected When an external operator is con nected via RS 422 port the built in display is locked and shows only one d parameter configured in dO0 d060 15t parameter of Dual Monitor Set any two d parameters in 21d parameter of Dual Monitor b 160 and b 16 then they can be monitored in d050 The two parameters are switched by up down keys Set range d00 d030 Freq set in monitoring Two option codes 00 OFF DI ON Auto return initial display 10 min after the last key opera tion display returns to the initial parameter set by 6038 Two option codes D0 OFF DI ON Ex operator com Loss action Five option codes D0 Trip DI Decel Trip Qe Ignore 03 Free RUN 04 Decel Stop Note Ifthe power is off with displaying O00 after the set b038 comes when power is on again 3 6 11 User Parameter Registration Parameter group U is the user parameter Any function code can be register on these 32 parameters When display mode is set to be user parameter b031 Oe then U00 Ito UO3e and dOd FOD I b037 are displayed B Function Defaults Description EU Units Display selection Seven option codes 00 All Complete display D1 Utilized Individual display of functions Qe User User setting 0
291. egister 0000 to FFFF Multi function input 1 selection 81 Which parameters to be set ALL Set all inverters in the network A Set admin inverter address 1 only B Set all inverters except admin inverter gt Z Z Z Z Z zZ zZ zZ zZ zZ zZ zZ zZ zZ zZ zZ gt Sl Sl Sl Slo 485 start EZCOM M Set master inverters configured in C098 to C099 of admin inverter Note 5 Note 6 Address of Administrative inverter is to be set 01 CO72 01 When selection of operation after communication error is set other than ignoring errors CO076 02 EZCOM function is interrupted in case of com 313 Network Protocol Reference 314 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 Note 11 Note 12 Note Section B 3 munication timeout on administrative inverter In this case please power off on or reset on off RES terminal to recover If EZCOM starting trigger is set as input terminal C100 00 be sure to con figure 81 in one of input terminals If EZCOM starting trigger is set as always C100 01 administrative inverter starts to send the data immediately after power on In case the establishment of the inverter to be assigned as master of delays and fail to receive the com mand to change the master the data cannot be sent from master and admin istrative inverter time outs When C100 01 selected please be sure to power up the administrative inverter at last after reconfirming the estab
292. egister 9 Option I F cmd R register 10 Profibus node address Profibus clear mode Profibus Map selection CompoNet node address DeviceNet node address ML2 frame length ML2 node address Serial comms mode Modbus external register 1 Modbus external register 2 Modbus external register 3 Modbus external register 4 Modbus external register 5 Modbus external register 6 Modbus external register 7 Modbus external register 8 Modbus external register 9 Modbus external register 10 Modbus register format 1 Modbus register format 2 AP NY SSPE NE NY RP YP YP YP PE PE RET RT RENT NERY SY NY SY SPST SE SESE ANAS SY SS SETS 371 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Section C 2 P Group Parameters Default Setting User Name EU Setting Modbus register format 3 Modbus register format 4 Modbus register format 5 Modbus register format 6 Modbus register format 7 Modbus register format 8 Modbus register format 9 Modbus register format 10 Modbus register scaling 1 Modbus register scaling 2 Modbus register scaling 3 Modbus register scaling 4 Modbus register scaling 5 Modbus register scaling 6 Modbus register scaling 7 Modbus register scaling 8 Modbus register scaling 9 Modbus register scaling 10 Modbus internal register 1 Modbus internal register 2 Modbus internal register 3 Modbu
293. elow wiring diagram be sure to remove the short bar and use a diode with the external supply This will prevent a power supply contention in case the short bar is accidentally placed in the incorrect position For the Sourcing Inputs External Supply please connect the short bar as drawn in the diagram below Sinking Inputs External Supply Short bar Removed Field device Input Circuits Input switches Note If the external power supply to GND is optionally Open collector outputs connected to L then install the above diode NPN transistors Sourcing Inputs External Supply Short bar PLC L Short bar PNP transistor sourcing outputs Field device Circuits GND 203 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 204 The power to the inverter control part can be supplied externally as shown below Except driving motor it is possible read and write the parameters by keypad and via communication even the drive itself is not powered By having ability inverter doesn t block the current flowing into itself when it is not powered This may cause the closed circuit when two or more inverters are connected to common I O wiring as shown below to result in unexpected turning the on the input To avoid this closed circuit please put the diode rated 50 V 0 1 A in the path as described below Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 1 Forward Run Stop and Reverse Run
294. ent 10 to 50 C Storage 20 to 65 C Note Some types requires special derating depending on installation con ditions and carrier frequency selected Refer to 1 2 4 Derating Curves for more information Humidity 20 to 90 humidity non condensing Vibration 5 9m s 0 6G 10 to 55 Hz Location Altitude 1 000m or less indoors no corrosive gasses or dust Coating color Black Options Remote operator unit cables for the units braking unit braking resistor AC reactor DC reactor EMC filter fieldbus MX2 Inverter Specifications Section 1 2 1 2 3 Signal Ratings Detailed ratings are in Signal Contact Ratings Built in power for inputs 24V DC 100 mA maximum Discrete logic inputs 27 VDC maximum Discrete logic outputs 50 mA maximum ON state current 27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage Analog output 10bit O to 10 VDC 1 mA Analog input current 4 to 19 6 mA range 20 mA nominal Analog input voltage 0 to 9 8 VDC range 10 VDC nominal input impedance 10 k 10 V analog reference 10 VDC nominal 10 mA maximum Alarm relay contacts 250 VAC 2 5 A R load max 0 2 A I load P F 0 4 max 100 VAC 10 mA min 30 VDC 3 0 A R load max 0 7 A I load P F 0 4 max 5 VDC 100 mA min 1 2 4 Derating Curves The maximum available inverter current output is limited by the carrier fre quency and ambient temperature Choosing a higher carri
295. ent outputs used as internal inputs E Melo M C HB RUN FA1 FA2 i OL OD AL Dc Operand A E I44 C a VE 50 FaR l EDM c RUN FA1 FA2 OL OD AL Dc Operand B EDM The following table shows all four possible input combinations with each of the three available logic operations Operand Operator A OR C Function Defaults Description Logic output signal 1 selection All the programmable functions 1 available for logic discrete out Logic output signal 1 selection ia except LOG1 to LOG3 OPO 2 Logic output signal 1 operator Applies a logic function to calcu selection late LOG output state Three options 00 AND D I OR Oe XOR Logic output signal 2 selection All the programmable functions 1 available for logic discrete out puts except LOG1 to LOG3 OPO no Logic output signal 2 selection 2 Logic output signal 2 operator Applies a logic function to calcu selection late LOG output state Three options 00 AND D I OR Oe XOR 170 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 C Function Defaults Description Logic output signal 3 selection All the programmable functions 1 available for logic discrete out puts except LOG1 to LOG3 OPO no Logic output signal 3 selection 2 Logic output signal 3 operator App
296. ents Overheating Thermal trip events No trip events IGBT Resistance value Refer to P6 17 Terminal block Secure connections Visual No abnormalities Smoothing capacitors Leaking swelling Visual No abnormalities Relay s Chattering Aural Single click when switching ON or OFF Resistors Cracks or discoloring Visual Check Ohms of optional braking res Control Function circuit Voltage balance between phases Measure voltage between U V W Difference must be 2 or less Protection circuit e g Input Ex trip signal and check inverter behavior and alarm signal Functions properly Overall No odor discolor ing corrosion Visual No abnormalities Capacitor Leaking swelling Visual Undistorted appearance Cooling Cooling fan Noise Power down manually rotate Rotation must be smooth Dust Visual Vacuum to clean Mounting Visual Mounted firmly Heat sink Dust Visual Vacuum to clean LEDs Display Legibility Visual All LED segments work Note 1 The life of a capacitor is affected by the ambient temperature See page 286 Note 2 Designed life of a cooling fan is 10 years However it is affected by the ambi ent temperature and other environmental conditions Note 3 The inverter must be cleaned periodically If dust accumulates on the fan and
297. ep Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 3 15 Name of Parts Inside the Terminal Block Cover Modbus RTU Termination resistor selector switch Safety function selector switch Factory default Disable Enable Factory default O USB connector mini B Connector for optional board EB Connector for Digital Operator RJ45 A PRG am A sori N RON LAS Jlneser m EDM function selector switch D XN J Multi function contact terminal block LA P1 terminal EDM output H sad A ae an Factory default ie TOTO a A Intatalalalalntatar FL GISIGIEIBIEISISISISIGN PEBEEEEEEEE Control circuit terminal block A oe Ol Control circuit terminal block B CHARGE indicator QO Qeoe Main circuit terminal block IA IN 6 ale Name Description Modbus RTU Termination resistor selector switch Use this Terminal Resistor selector switch for RS 485 terminals on the control circuit terminal block When this switch is turned ON the internal 200 Q Resistor is connected Safety function selec tor switch Tu
298. er frequency tends to decrease audible noise but it also increases the internal heating of the inverter thus decreasing derating the maximum current output capability Ambient temperature is the temperature just outside the inverter housing such as inside the control cabinet where the inverter is mounted A higher ambient temperature decreases derates the inverter s maximum current output capacity An inverter up to 4 0 KW may be mounted individually in an enclosure or side by side with other inverter s as shown below Side by side mounting causes greater derating than mounting inverters separately Graphs for either mount ing methods are included in this section Refer to nstallation Environment clearance on page 31 for minimum clearance dimensions for both mounting configurations Individual mounting Side by side mounting Enclosure Enclosure MX2 Inverter Specifications Section 1 2 10 The following table shows which models need derating 1 ph Derating 3 ph Derating 3 ph Derating 200V class 200V class 400V class 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 AB004 3G3MX2 A2004 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 AB0
299. er tables throughout this chapter each of which includes a column titled Run Mode Edit as shown to the right The marks Check v or Ex under the Run Mode Edit column title indicate whether access applies to each parameter as defined in the table below In some lock modes you can edit only F001 and the Multi speed parameter group that includes A020 A220 AGe I A035 and A038 Jog However it does not include AG 19 Multi speed operation selection The editing access to b03 I itself is unique and is specified in the right most two columns below SFT Standard FDO and Intelligent Parameters Multi Speed Input Stop and Run Run mode edit access x Run mode edit access ON x ignored x ignored x ignored High level access Since the software lock function b03 I is always accessible this feature is not the same as password protection used in other industrial control devices So if you want to use password function use parameter b037 together with the b03 See section 4 104 for detailed explanation of the password function B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 B Function Defaults Description EU Units Soft lock selection Prevents parameter changes in five options option codes 00 Lock SFT Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON D1 Only FQ SFT Data other than b031 and the specified frequency parameter c
300. er that was installed 1 Service in the following cases even within the warranty period shall be charged to the purchaser a Malfunction or damage caused by mis operation or modification or im proper repair b Malfunction or damage caused by a drop after purchase and transpor tation c Malfunction or damage caused by fire earthquake flood lightening abnormal input voltage contamination or other natural disasters 2 When service is required for the product at your work site all expenses as sociated with field repair shall be charged to the purchaser 3 Always keep this manual handy please do not lose it Please contact your Omron distributor to purchase replacement or additional manuals 287 Warranty Section 6 5 288 A 1 Glossary Ambient Temperature Arrival Frequency Auto tuning Base Frequency Braking Resistor Break away Torque Carrier Frequency CE Choke DC Braking Deadband Appendix A Glossary and Bibliography The air temperature in the chamber containing a powered electronic unit A unit s heat sinks rely on a lower ambient temperature in order to dissipate heat away from sensitive electronics The arrival frequency refers to the set output frequency of the inverter for the constant speed setting The arrival frequency feature turns on an output when the inverter reaches the set constant speed The inverter has various arrival frequencies and pulsed or latched logic options
301. erature is the process variable See also PID Loop and Error Pulse width modulation A type of AC adjustable frequency drive that accom plishes frequency and voltage control at the output section inverter of the drive The drive output voltage waveform is at a constant amplitude and by chopping the waveform pulsewidth modulating the average voltage is controlled The chopping frequency is sometimes called the Carrier Fre quency The impedance of inductors and capacitors has two components The resis tive part is constant while the reactive part changes with applied frequency These devices have a complex impedance complex number where the resistance is the real part and the reactance is the imaginary part An electronic device made of one or more diodes that converts AC power into DC power Rectifiers are usually used in combination with capacitors to filter smooth the rectified waveform to closely approximate a pure DC voltage source A particular method of generating reverse torque to a motor an inverter will switch internally to allow the motor to become a generator and will either store the energy internally deliver the braking energy back to the main power input or dissipate it with a resistor The quality of control applied to maintain a parameter of interest at a desired value Usually expressed as a percent from the nominal motor regulation usually refers to its shaft speed The torque applied in the dir
302. erminal Motor revolution speed RS terminal Alarm output terminal Run command FW RV Terminal Function Description Symbol Name External trip When assigned input transitions OFF to ON inverter latches trip event and displays E Ie No trip event for ON to OFF any recorded trip events remain in history until Reset Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings none Notes If the USP Unattended Start Protection feature is in use the inverter will not automatically restart after canceling the EXT trip event In that case it must receive either another Run command OFF to ON transition a keypad Reset command or an RS intelligent terminal input signal 4 5 5 Unattended Start Protection 208 If the Run command is already set when power is turned ON the inverter starts running immediately after powerup The Unattended Start Protection USP function prevents that automatic startup so that the inverter will not run without outside intervention When USP is active and you need to reset an alarm and resume running either turn the Run command OFF or perform a reset operation by the terminal RS input or the keypad Stop reset key In the figure below the USP feature is enabled When the inverter power turns ON the motor does not start even though the Run command is already active Instead it enters the USP trip state and displays E 13 error code This requires outside intervention t
303. ers are interconnected with a short bus b A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus c An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable you MUST install an input side AC reactor of 3 at a voltage drop at rated current with respect to the supply voltage on the power supply side Also where the effects of an indirect lightening strike are possible install a lightening conductor SUPPRESSION FOR NOISE INTERFERENCE FROM INVERTER The inverter uses many semiconductor switching elements such as transis tors and IGBTs Thus a radio receiver or measuring instrument located near the inverter is susceptible to noise interference To protect the instruments from erroneous operation due to noise interfer ence they should be used well away from the inverter It is also effective to shield the whole inverter structure The addition of an EMI filter on the input side of the inverter also reduces the effect of noise from the commercial power line on external devices Note that the external dispersion of noise from the power line can be mini mized by connecting an EMI filter on the primary side of the inverter EMI Filter Inverter Inverter 2 frame Conduit or shielded cable to be grounded Completely ground the 4 3 ge Remote enclosure panel metal Operator screen etc with as short gt
304. eset value the OL terminal current Threshold signal turns ON The parameter a4 Hei aaa Power running C041 and C111 sets the overload faye i Regeneration threshold Two thresholds can be eg Ne set The overload detection circuit operates during powered motor OLY OL2 1 operation and during regenerative signal g braking The output circuits use open collector transistors and are active low Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Overload when output current is more than warning the set threshold for the overload signal OFF when output current is less than the set threshold for the overload signal Overload ON Same as above warning 2 OFF Same as above Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings C04 1 C111 Notes The default value is 100 To change the level from the default set CO4 overload level and or 111 overload level 2 The accuracy of this function is the same as the function of the output current mon itor on the FM terminal see Analog Output Operation on page 252 The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 231 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 8 Excessive PID deviation The PID loop error is defined as the sp pv Process variable magnitude absolute value o
305. etermination time deteriorates the input terminal response Determination time C 169 0 Position Geet Determination time command 1 165 specified CP3 re ON Determination time C 169 Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name CP1 CP3 Position Multistage position is defined by command combination of the inputs selection 1 to 3 Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings P060 P067 221 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 25 Limit signal of homing Trigger signal of zero return These functions are used for homing performance One of three types of homing operations can be selected by homing mode selection P068 When a homing operation ends the current position counter is cleared to 0 Use homing direction selection P069 to select the direction of homing operation If homing operation is not performed position control is performed based on the assumption that the motor position detected at power on is the origin lt 1 gt Low speed homing P059 0 1 ORG ON i Low speed homing P070 3 Output freq Origin Position lt 2 gt High speed homing PO58 0 1 freq P0 1 Output i 2 i High speed homing 3 Origin Low speed homing P00 222 4 Position 4 3 The inverter accelerates the motor for the specified ramp time to the low speed homing It run
306. ety precautions such as stopping peripheral devices e If the clock command is used in Drive Programming an unexpected operation may occur due to weak battery Take measures such as detecting a weak battery by a check that the clock data returns to the initial setting and stopping the inverter UL Cautions Warnings and Instructions 6 or programs When the LCD Digital Operator is removed or disconnected Drive Programming is in a waiting status by the clock command Maintenance and Inspection e Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance inspection or parts replacement The capacitor service life is influenced by the ambient temperature Refer to Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve described in the manual When a capacitor reaches the end of its service life and does not work as the product you need to replace the capacitor e When disposing of LCD digital operators and wasted batteries follow the applica ble ordinances of your local government When disposing of the battery insulate it using tape 5 Ua ts AE The following display must be indicated when products using lithium primary batteries with more than 6 ppb of perchlorate are transport to or through the State of California USA Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www disc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The 3G3AX OP05 has the lithium primary battery with more than 6 ppb of perchlorate Label or mark the above display on the e
307. evel of bG5 I the inverter decreases the output frequency by the amount set in b054 During this interval the DC bus voltage rises due to regener ation so does not reach the UV level The inverter then continues deceleration according to the value set in b053 If the DC bus voltage rises up to the set value of b05e the inverter stops deceleration to avoid OV tripping During this interval the DC bus voltage decreases again due to lack of in put power When the DC bus voltage comes down to the set value of bD5 1 the inverter starts deceleration according to the set value of b053 again This process will be repeated as needed until the motor is brought to a stop Note If the DC bus voltage comes down to the UV level during this operation the inverter trips with under voltage and motor will free run coast to a stop Note If the set value of b052 lt b05 then the inverter internally swaps the b05 and B051 values However the displayed values are not changed 139 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 Note This function cannot be interrupted until it is completed So if the power is restored during this operation wait until the operation is done motor stops and then give the run command B Function Defaults Description EU Units Selection of non stop function Four option codes at momentary power 00 OFF Disabled interruption 01 ON Enabled Qe V Cnst STOP Enabled deceleration stop 0
308. f the dif Sr aoa aaa ea haa E ference between the Setpoint target ean value and the Process Variable k0 actual value When the error magni tude exceeds the preset value for C044 the OD terminal signal turns 1 ignal ON Refer to PID Loop Operation on 0 z page 109 Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name D4 OD Excessive ON when PID error is more than the set PID threshold for the deviation signal deviation OFF when PID error is less than the set threshold for the deviation signal Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings C044 Notes The default difference value is set to 3 To change this value change parameter C044 deviation level e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 232 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 9 Alarm Output The inverter alarm signal is active when a fault has occurred and it is in the Trip Mode refer to the diagram at right When the fault is cleared the alarm signal becomes inactive We must make a distinction between the alarm signal AL and the alarm relay contacts ALO AL1 and AL2 The signal AL is a logic function which you can assign to the open collector output terminals 11 12 or the relay outputs The most
309. fines whether the inverter es ay re outputs 0 Hz or the A 10 l specified fre f Input scale quency when the analog input value is less than the A 103 setting When the input voltage is greater than the A 104 ending value the inverter outputs the ending frequency specified by A fe Adjusting VR L characteristics This is used when an optional operator is used Refer to parameters A 16 A 165 for the details A Function Defaults Description O OI selection Three options select codes 00 O Ol Switches between O OI via terminal AT Oe O VR Switches between O FREQ adjuster via terminal AT 03 Ol VR Switches between OI FREQ adjuster via terminal AT Enabled only when 3G3AX OP01 is used O start frequency The output frequency corre sponding to the analog input range starting point range is 0 00 to 400 0 O end frequency The output frequency corre sponding to the analog input range ending point range is 0 0 to 400 0 O start ratio The starting point offset for the active analog input range range is 0 to 100 O end ratio The ending point offset for the active analog input range range is 0 to 100 94 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 A Function Defaults Description Ag 15 O start selection Two options select codes x 01 00 Start FQ 01 0 Hz AD 16 O O2 Ol sampling Range n 1 to 31 x 18 Spl 1 to 30
310. freq 1 to freq 3 Free V f frequency 1 0 to Free setting V F freq 2 Hz Free V f voltage 7 0 0 to 800 0 V Setting of the out Free V f vol put voltage at each ree V f voltage 6 breakpoint of the Free V f voltage 5 V F characteristic Free V f voltage 4 curve Free V f voltage 3 Free V f voltage 2 Free V f voltage 1 1 Even if the voltage higher than input is set as a free setting V F voltage 1 to 7 the inverter output voltage cannot exceed the inverter input voltage or that specified by the AVR voltage selection Carefully note that selecting an inappropriate control system V F characteristics may result in overcurrent during motor acceleration or deceleration or vibration of the motor or other machine driven by the inverter Manual Torque Boost The Constant and Variable Torque algorithms feature an adjustable torque boost curve When the motor 5 voltage load has a lot of inertia or boost starting friction you may 100 A082 need to increase the low 0 frequency starting torque characteristics by boost ing the voltage above the normal V f ratio shown at right The function attempts to compensate for volt age drop in the motor primary winding in the low speed range The boost is applied from zero to the base frequency You set the breakpoint of the boost point A on the graph by using parameters A042 and A043 The manual boost is calculated as an addition to the standa
311. g Output current monitor Filtered display of output current to motor range is 0 00 to 9999 00 Rotation direction monitor Three different indications Fld Forward SEOP Stop rEu Reverse PID feedback value monitor Displays the scaled PID process variable feedback value A075 is scale factor 0 00 to 999000 0 Multi function input monitor Displays the state of the intelligent input termi nals gng Z Terminal numbers Multi function output monitor Displays the state of the intelligent output ter minals Relay 12 11 Output frequency monitor Displays the output frequency scaled by the constant in b086 Decimal point indicates range 0 00 to 40000 0 Real frequency monitor Displays the actual frequency range is 400 00 to 400 00 Torque reference monitor Displays the torque command range is 200 to 200 Torque bias monitor Displays the torque bias value range is 200 to 200 Output torque monitor Displays the output torque range is 200 to 200 Output voltage monitor Voltage of output to motor Range is 0 0 to 600 0 Input power monitor Displays the input power range is 0 0 to 100 0 Integrated power monitor Displays watt hour of the inverter range is 0 0 to 9999000 0 Total RUN time Displays total time the inverter has been in RUN mode in hours Range is 0 to 9999 1000 to 9999 100 to
312. g 02 enable without DC injection Brake wait time for release 0 to 500 0 01 sec Brake wait time for acceleration 0 to 500 0 01 sec Brake wait time for stopping 0 to 500 0 01 sec Brake wait time for confirmation 0 to 500 0 01 sec Brake release frequency 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Brake release current 0 0 to 3 20 x Rated current 0 1 Braking input frequency 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Reserved Reserved 1385h Overvoltage protection function 00 disabling 01 enabling 0 selection during deceleration enabling with acceleration 1386h Overvoltage protection level dur 200 V class 330 to 390 V 1 V ing deceleration 400 V class 660 to 780 V 1387h Overvoltage protection 10 to 3000 0 01 sec parameter 1388h Overvoltage protection pro 0 to 500 0 01 portional gain setting 1389h Overvoltage protection integral 0 to 1500 0 1 sec time setting 138Ahto Reserved 1393h 1394h GS input mode 00 no trip 01 trip 1395h to Reserved 1399h 139Ah Display ex operator connected 001 to 060 139Bhto Reserved 13A2h 13A3h 1st parameter of Dual Monitor 001 to 030 13A4h 2nd parameter of Dual Monitor 001 to 030 13A5h Reserved 13A6h Freq set in monitoring 00 disabling 01 enabling 13A7h Auto return initial display 00 disabling 01 enabling 13A8h Ex Operator com loss action 00 trip 01 decel trip 02 ignore 03 Free RUN 04 decel stop 13A9h Data Read Write selection 00 Read Write OK 01 Pro
313. gee e o j 1 1a Stage 1 FW Events 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 t The terminal FBV configuration table is on the following page Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 21 Network Error Terminal Function Description Symbol Name PID FB e Transitions to ON when the status inverter is in RUN Mode and the output PID Process Variable PV is less than the Feedback Low Limit 053 Transitions to OFF when the PID Feedback Value PV exceeds the PID High Limit C052 Transitions to OFF when the inverter goes from Run Mode to Stop Mode Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings AQ16 C052 C053 Notes e The FBV is designed for implementing two stage control The PV high limit and PV low limit parameters 052 and 053 do not function as process alarm thresh olds Terminal FBV does not provide a PID alarm function The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor This signal function is enabled only when ModBus RTU has been selected for the communication If a reception timeout occurs the inverter continues to output the communication line disconnection signal until it receives the next data Specify the limit time for reception timeout by setting the communication trip time 077 External control equipment
314. ght load detection level C039 R W 0 0 to 3 20 x Rated current 0 1 1428h Overload warning signal output C040 R W 00 output during acceleration decelera mode tion and constant speed operation 01 output only during constant speed operation 1429h Overload warning level C041 R W 0 1 to 3 20 x Rated current 0 1 142Ah Arrival frequency during C042 high R W 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 142Bh _ acceleration C042 low R W 142Ch Arrival frequency during C043 high R W 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 142Dh deceleration C043 low R W 142Eh PID deviation excessive level C044 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 142Fh Arrival frequency during C045 high R W_ O to 40000 0 01 Hz 1430h _ acceleration 2 C045 low R W 1431h Arrival frequency during C046 high R W _ O to 40000 0 01 Hz 1432h deceleration 2 C046 low R W 1433h Pulse train input scale C047 R W 0 01 99 99 conversion for EO output 1434h to Reserved 1437h 1438h PID FB upper limit C052 R W O to 1000 0 1 1439h PID FB lower limit C053 R W 0 to 1000 0 1 143Ah Over torque under torque selection C054 R W 00 Over torque 01 under torque 143Bh Overtorque level forward power C055 R W 0 to 200 1 running 143Ch Overtorque level reverse regen C056 R W 0 to 200 1 eration 143Dh Overtorque level reverse power C057 R W 0 to 200 1 running 143Eh Overtorque level forward regen C058 R W 0 to 200 1 eration 143Fh Signal
315. gister scaling 4 0 001 to 65 535 16E1h Modbus register scaling 5 0 001 to 65 535 16E2h Modbus register scaling 6 0 001 to 65 535 16E3h Modbus register scaling 7 0 001 to 65 535 16E4h Modbus register scaling 8 0 001 to 65 535 16E5h Modbus register scaling 9 0 001 to 65 535 16E6h Modbus register scaling 10 0 001 to 65 535 16E7h Modbus internal register 1 0000 to FFFF 16E8h Modbus internal register 2 0000 to FFFF 16E9h Modbus internal register 3 0000 to FFFF 16EAh Modbus internal register 4 0000 to FFFF 16EBh Modbus internal register 5 0000 to FFFF 16ECh Modbus internal register 6 0000 to FFFF 16EDh Modbus internal register 7 0000 to FFFF 16EEh Modbus internal register 8 0000 to FFFF 16EFh Modbus internal register 9 0000 to FFFF 16FOh 342 Modbus internal register 10 0000 to FFFF ModBus Data Listing Function name Big Little endian selection Function Monitoring and setting items 00 Big endian 01 Little endian 02 Special endian Section B 4 Data resolution Unused Coil data 1 21 coil number 0010h 215 coil number 001Fh Coil data 2 21 coil number 0020h 215 coil number 002Fh Coil data 3 21 coil number 0030h 215 coil number 003Fh Coil data 4 21 coil number 0030h 215 coil numbe
316. gram LED This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter editing Program Mode It is OFF when the parameter display is monitor ing data Monitor Mode Run Key Enable LED This LED is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key OFF when the Run key is disabled Run Key Press this key to run the motor the Run Enable LED must be ON first Parameter F004 Keypad Run Key Routing determines whether the Run key generates a Run FWD or Run REV command Stop Reset Key Press this key to stop the motor when it is running uses the programmed deceleration rate This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped Parameter Display A 4 digit 7 segment display for parameters and function codes Display Units Hertz Amperes One of these LEDs will be ON to indi cate the units associated with the parameter display Power LED This is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON Alarm LED ON when an inverter trip is active alarm relay contact will be closed Cycle Key This key is used to escape from the current situation Up Down keys Use these keys alternatively to move up or down the lists of parameter and functions shown in the display and increment decre ment values Set key This key is used to navigate through the lists of parameters and functions for setting and monitoring parameter values When the unit is in Program Mode and you have edited a parameter value press the Set key to write the new v
317. h time and then set the next multi speed setting Note that when the key is not pressed no data will be set e When a multi speed setting more than 50Hz 60 Hz is to be set it is necessary to program the maximum frequency ADOH high enough to allow that speed Jog Frequency The jog speed setting is used whenever the Jog command is active The jog speed setting range is arbitrarily limited to 9 99 Hz to pro vide safety during manual operation The acceleration to the jog frequency is 99 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 instantaneous but you can choose from six modes for the best method for stopping the jog operation A Function Defaults Description Jogging frequency Defines limited speed for jog range is from start frequency to 9 99 Hz Jogging stop selection Define how end of jog stops the motor six options 00 FRS Free running on jogging stop Disabled in operation D 1 DEC Deceleration stop on jogging stop Disabled in operation DB DC injection braking on jogging stop Disabled in operation FRS RUN Free running on jogging stop Disabled in operation DEC RUN Deceleration stop on jogging stop Enabled in operation DB RUN DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation With options 0 1 and 2 on parameter A039 the JOG command is not accepted if the inverter is already running so is necessary to activate the JG termi
318. h motor rotation HOD I 02 Motor rotates according to a special operation pattern while auto tuning How ever the torque during auto tuning is not sufficient which may cause a prob lem in the load for example a lift may slide down See below instruction 8 d When using auto tuning function follow the instructions below 1 When using a motor which constants are unknown execute offline auto tuning to obtain the constants 2 When the motor constant selection HO02 H202 is standard motor 01 the initial values in HO2D H220 to HO24 Heec4 are standard motor s values 3 The motor constant data is corresponding to one phase of Y star connec tion for 50 Hz 4 Set base frequency A003 and AVR voltage AUGE2 according to the motor specifications If the motor voltage is other than the alternatives set V f gain AQYS according to below formula motor voltage AG82 x output voltage gain ABYS motor rated voltage 5 Proper motor constants are obtained only when the same size or one size lower motor is used If other size of motor is connected proper values may not be obtained or auto tuning operation may not be completed In this case press STOP RESET key then error code will be displayed 6 Be sure to disable DC braking setting AGS I 00 and simple positioning se lection PO I 00 otherwise motor constants are not measured properly 7 Be sure to deactivate ATR terminal 52 Enable torque cmd in
319. h the opening to reduce the RF component of the electrical noise Loop the wires three times four turns to attain the full RF filter ing effect For larger wire sizes place multi ple zero phase reactors up to four side by side for a greater filtering effect W ra ED Reference ane Star L Te ee Y ed Description AX FER2102 RE 21 85 22 46 70 0 1 For 2 2 kW motors or below AX FER2515 RE 25 105 25 62 90 5 0 2 For 15 kW motors or below AX FER5045 RE 50 150 50 110 125 30 0 7 For 45 kW motors or below 5 2 4 EMC Filter N WARNING The EMC filter reduces the conducted noise on the power supply wiring gen erated by the inverter Connect the EMC filter to the inverter primary input side Filter is required for compliance to the EMC Class A directive Europe and C TICK Australia See D 1 CE EMC Installation Guidelines on page 373 The EMC filter has high internal leakage current from power wiring to the chassis Therefore connect the chassis ground of the EMC filter before making the power connections to avoid danger of shock or injury Rasmi footprint filters H Os gt output eres 259 Component Descriptions Section 5 2
320. he inverter is energized be sure not to touch the inverter terminals even when the motor is stopped Otherwise there is the danger of electric SHOCK iniedi aiae idara Fait hae aa ae ee eee es 192 If the retry mode is selected the motor may suddenly restart after a trip stop Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine be sure to design the machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts Otherwise it may cause injury to personnel cccseeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeeee 192 If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time the inverter may restart operating after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active If a restart may pose danger to personnel so be sure to use a lock out circuit so that it will not restart after power recovery Otherwise it may cause muyto personnel cise wale hi ae a ei 192 The Stop Key is effective only when the stop function is enabled Be sure to enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop Otherwise it may Cause injury to personnel cceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeeeeeseneenneaaeeeeeeeeess 192 WARNING During a trip event if the alarm reset is applied and the Run com mand is present the inverter will automatically restart Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after verifying the Run command is OFF Otherwise it may Cause injury to personnel cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeencnneeeeeeeeess 192 Be sur
321. he inverter s serial port at inverter powerup e When external keypad is connected the inverter keypad will also display error codes for inverter trip events Use the Stop key or inverter Reset function to clear the error Refer to 6 2 2 Error Codes on page 273 to interpret the error codes e The Stop key can be disabled if you prefer by using function b087 88 F Group Main Profile Parameters Section 3 4 3 4 F Group Main Profile Parameters The basic frequency speed Output profile is defined by parameters frequency Fogg contained in the F Group as shown to the right The set run ning frequency is in Hz but acceleration and deceleration are specified in the time dura tion of the ramp from zero to maximum frequency or from maximum frequency to zero The motor direction parameter determines whether the keypad Run key produces a FWD or REV command This parame ter does not affect the intelligent terminal FW and REV functions which you configure separately Acceleration 1 and Deceleration 1 are the standard default accel and decel values for the main profile Accel and decel values for an alternative profile are specified by using parameters Ax92 through Ax93 The operator rotation direc tion selection F004 determines the direction of rotation as commanded only from the keypad This setting applies to any motor profile 1st or 2nd in use at t particular time Actual accel time F Fu
322. he wiring to the power supply and motor is correct 2 Demonstrate that the inverter and motor are generally compatible 3 Get an introduction to the use of the built in operator keypad The powerup test gives you an important starting to ensure a safe and suc cessful application of the Omron inverter We highly recommend performing this test before proceeding to the other chapters in this manual 2 4 2 Pre test and Operational Precautions 56 A Caution A Caution A Caution The following instructions apply to the powerup test or to any time the inverter is powered and operating Please study the following instructions and mes sages before proceeding with the powerup test 1 The power supply must have fusing suitable for the load Check the fuse size chart presented in Step 5 if necessary 2 Be sure you have access to a disconnect switch for the drive input power if necessary However do not turn OFF power during inverter operation un less it is an emergency The heat sink fins will have a high temperature Be careful not to touch them Otherwise there is the danger of getting burned The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high speed Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before operating the inverter Otherwise there is the danger of injury If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard default setting 50 Hz 60 Hz be sure to
323. heat sink it can cause overheating of the inverter 280 Maintenance and Inspection 6 4 2 Megger test Section 6 4 The megger is a piece of test equipment that uses a high voltage to determine if an insulation degradation has occurred For inverters it is important that the power terminals be isolated from the Earth GND terminal via the proper amount of insulation The circuit diagram below shows the inverter wiring for performing the megger test Just follow the steps to perform the test 1 Remove power from the inverter and wait at least 5 minutes before pro ceeding Open the front housing panel to access the power wiring Remove all wires to terminals R S T PD 1 P N U V and W Most importantly the input power and motor wires will be disconnected from the inverter Use a bare wire and short terminals R S T PD 1 P N U V and W together as shown in the diagram Connect the megger to the inverter Earth GND and to the shorted power terminals as shown Then perform the megger test at 500 VDC and verify 5 MQ or greater resistance Add test jumper wire Disconnect power source Disconnect motor wires K Megger 500 VDC 6 After completing the test disconnect the megger from the inverter 7 Reconnect the original wires to terminals R S T PD 1 P N U V and W Z Caution Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such as intelligen
324. hen clear Integrated power display gain Set range is 1 1000 142 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 18 Carrier frequency PWM related Note Note Carrier frequency adjustment b083 The internal switching frequency of the inverter circuitry also called the chopper frequency It is called the carrier frequency because the lower AC power frequency of the inverter rides the carrier The faint high pitched sound you hear when the inverter is in Run Mode is characteristic of switching power supplies in general The carrier fre quency is adjustable from 2 0kHz to 15kHz The audible sound decreases at the higher frequencies but RFI noise and leakage current may be increased Refer to the specification derating curves in Chapter 1 to determine the maxi mum allowable carrier frequency setting for your particular inverter and envi ronmental conditions Refer also to b089 for automatic carrier frequency reduction The carrier frequency setting must stay within specified limits for inverter motor applications that must comply with particular regulatory agencies For example European CE approved application requires the carrier to be 3 kHz or less Automatic carrier frequency reduction b089 The automatic carrier fre quency reduction automatically reduces the carrier frequency according to the increase in output current To enable this function specify 0 P for automatic c
325. hen torque control is selected for sensorless vector control Torque control becomes active when 52 ATR is allocated to a multi function input terminal and the ATR terminal is turned ON Parameter A Default No Function name Data setting Unit d009 Torque reference 200 to 200 monitor Related functions A044 C001 to C007 P033 P034 3 3 11 Torque Bias Monitor d010 During sensorless vector control the currently set torque bias amount is displayed Parameter A Default No Function name Data setting Unit d010 Torque bias monitor 200 to 200 Related functions A044 P036 P037 P038 3 3 12 Output Torque Monitor d012 Displays an estimated value of the inverter s output torque Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit d012 Output torque monitor 200 to 200 Related functions A044 A244 Note The power running direction is positive and regeneration direction is negative during forward rotation while the power running direction is negative and regeneration direction is positive during reverse rotation This display is shown only when the sensorless vector control is selected If any other control mode is selected the correct value is not displayed 80 D Group Monitoring Functions 3 3 13 Output Voltage Monitor d013 Section 3 3 Displays the output voltage of the inverter Parameter
326. ial acceleration 1 and deceleration 1 values Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings A092 A093 A094 00 Notes Function A094 selects the method for second stage acceleration It must be set 00 to select the input terminal method in order for the 2CH terminal assignment to operate Standard acceleration and decel eration is linear The inverter CPU can also calculate an S curve acceleration or deceleration curve as shown This profile is useful for favoring the load characteristics in particular applications Curve settings for acceleration and deceleration are indepenently selected To enable the S curve use function A097 acceleration and A098 deceleration A Function D0 Linear 01 S curve Oe U curve 03 inv U curve 04 EL S curve Description Set the characteristic curve of Acc1 and Acc2 five options Output frequency Target freq Accel curve selection 116 Deceleration curve selection as above A097 Set the characteristic curve of Dec1 and Dec2 options are same A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 A Function Defaults Description Acceleration curve parameter Range is 01 to 10 Deceleration curve parameter Range is 01 to 10 EL S curve ratio 1 during Range is 0 to 50 acceleration EL S curve ratio 2 during Range is 0 to 50 acceleration EL S curve ratio 1 during Range is 0 to 50 deceleration E
327. icroprocessors and digital signal pro cessors DSPs it is possible to control the speed and torque of AC induction motors with unprecedented accuracy The MX2 utilizes these devices to per form complex mathematical calculations required to achieve superior perfor mance You can choose various torque curves to fit the needs of your application Constant torque applies the same torque level across the fre quency speed range Variable torque also called reduced torque lowers the torque delivered at mid level frequencies A torque boost setting will add addi tional torque in the lower half of the frequency range for the constant and vari able torque curves With the free setting torque curve feature you can specify a series of data points that will define a custom torque curve to fit your appli cation 1 3 4 Inverter Input and Three phase Power Tip The Omron MX2 Series of inverters includes two sub groups the 200 V class and the 400V class inverters The drive described in this manual may be used in either the United States or Europe although the exact voltage level for com mercial power may be slightly different from country to country Accordingly a 200 V class inverter requires nominal 200 to 240 VAC and 400 V class inverter requires from 380 to 480 VAC The 200 V class inverters MX2 B accept single phase 200 V class input volt age those MX2 2 three phase power only All 400 V class inverters require three phase power supply
328. idual magnetic flux and restart the output at the corresponding frequency The inverter can attempt a restart a certain number of times depending on the particular trip event e Over current trip restart up to 3 times e Over voltage trip restart up to 3 times When the inverter reaches the maximum number of restarts 3 you must power cycle the inverter to reset its operation Other parameters specify the allowable under voltage level and the delay time before restarting The proper settings depend on the typical fault conditions for your application the necessity of restarting the process in unattended situ ations and whether restarting is always say If the actual power Power failure lt allowable power fail failure time is shorter time b022 Inverter resumes than the bOO set value inverter Input resumes from the set power r frequency in bd 11 The resumption mode Nnverter is called active fre Output uenc matching Restart level of active pem a o inverter e Mot eieteeneee esac NO 4 eg matching i LEE forms reduced volt 010 i age start to avoid Poo i yo over current trip a If the motor current Motor LAY exceeds the b030 set rotation Free running value during this period the inverter decelerates accord current lt gt Power fail b029 m u Allowable power Deceleration rate of active fail time ing to the b029 set E edy matching value and helps
329. ie ee Ee Ae 2 ee 284 Maintenance and Inspection Section 6 4 6 4 5 Inverter Output Voltage Measurement Techniques Taking voltage measurements around drives equipment requires the right equipment and a safe approach You are working with high voltages and high frequency switching waveforms that are not pure sinusoids Digital voltmeters will not usually produce reliable readings for these waveforms And it is usu ally risky to connect high voltage signals to oscilloscopes The inverter output semiconductors have some leakage and no load measurements produce misleading results So we highly recommend using the following circuits to measure voltage for performing the equipment inspections Voltage measurement with load Voltage measurement without load L1 R d L1 R A o U T1 L2 S L Inverter L2 S L Inverter d WT2 L3 T L3 T 45 C W T3 5 kQ Additional resistor _ am A 220kQ AT dy A 220k 1 fy Es 2W eg Je MU V Class Diode Voltmeter V Class Diode Voltmeter Bridge Bridge 300 V range 200 V Class 600 V 300 V range 0 01 A min 100 V 600 V range 400 C Class 100 V 600 V range 0 1 A min N HIGH VOLTAGE Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals when working with the inverters and taking measurements Be sure to place the measure
330. ified by the capacity of each inverter model x x x x x Motor pole number selection 2nd motor pole number selection 4 4 Speed response 2nd speed response 100 100 Stabilization parameter 2nd stabilization parameter 100 100 Motor parameter R1 2nd motor parameter R1 Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter R2 2nd motor parameter R2 Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter L 2nd motor parameter L Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter lo 2nd motor parameter lo Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter J 2nd motor parameter J Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter R1 auto tuning data 2nd motor parameter R1 auto tuning data Depends on the motor capacity x x x x xix xix xix is lt lt six x 367 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry H Group Parameters Default Setting Name Motor parameter R2 auto tuning data 2nd motor parameter R2 auto tuning data EU Depends on the motor capacity b031 10 User Setting Section C 2 Motor parameter L auto tuning data 2nd motor parameter L auto tuning data Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter lo auto tuning data 2nd motor parameter lo auto tuning data Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter J auto tuning data 2nd motor parameter J auto tuning data Depends on the motor capacity
331. igh order write 3 low order Number of holding CRC 16 low order registers to write high order Number of holding registers to write low order Byte number to write 2 Change data 1 high order Change data 1 low order Change data 2 high order Change data 2 low order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 low order Note 1 Register address value transmitted on Modbus line is 1 less than the Regis ter Number When writing in selected holding registers fails see the exception response 309 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 Exception Response When sending a query excluding a broadcasting query to an inverter the master always requests a response from the inverter Usually the inverter returns a response according to the query However when finding an error in the query the inverter returns an exception response The exception response consists of the fields shown below Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 The content of each field is explained below The function code of the excep tion response is the sum of the function code of the query and 80h The exception code indicates the factor of the exception response Function Code Exception Response Exception Code Description The specified function is not supported The specified function is not found The format of the specified d
332. igned to have CE approval must have particular filter s installed in the application An inductor that is tuned to react at radio frequencies is called a choke since it attenuates chokes frequencies above a particular threshold Tuning is often accomplished by using a movable magnetic core In variable frequency drive systems a choke positioned around high current wiring can help attenu ate harmful harmonics and protect equipment See also Harmonics The inverter DC braking feature stops the AC commutation to the motor and sends a DC current through the motor windings in order to stop the motor Also called DC injection braking it has little effect at high speed and is used as the motor is nearing a stop In a control system the range of input change for which there is no percepti ble change in the output In PID loops the error term may have a dead band associated with it Deadband may or may not be desirable it depends on the needs of the application 289 Glossary Section A 1 Digital Operator Panel Diode Duty Cycle Dynamic Braking Error EMI Four quadrant operation Free run Stop Frequency Setting Harmonics Horsepower 290 For Omron inverters digital operator panel DOP refers first to the operator keypad on the front panel of the inverter It also includes hand held remote keypads which connect to the inverter via a cable Finally the DOP Profes sional is a PC based s
333. ime for Confirmation b 24 4 Brake Wait Time for Acceleration b 22 5 Time to decelerate down to Braking freq 6 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b 2 7 Brake Wait Time for Stopping b 123 6 When the braking confirmation signal BOK has been assigned to an in telligent input terminal that is when 44 is specified for one of COG I to CO01 the inverter waits after turning off the brake release signal until the braking confirmation is turned off at least for the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b i24 without decelerating the motor If the braking confir mation signal is not turned off within the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b 124 the inverter trips with the braking error signal BER output When the braking confirmation signal BOK has not been assigned to any intel ligent input terminal the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation b ic is invalid In such cases the inverter proceeds to the operation described in item 7 after the brake release signal is turned off 7 After the braking confirmation signal or the brake release signal when the BOK signal function is disabled is turned off the inverter waits for the Brake Wait Time for Stopping b 23 and then starts decelerating the mo tor down to 0 Hz Note The above timing chart shows the operation on the assumption that the brak ing confirmation signal 44 BOK is assigned to one of the terminal 1 to 7 COD 007 If the BOK signa
334. in 2nd motor 33 H223 2nd motor parameter lo Ae46 2nd automatic torque boost voltage 34 H 2nd motor parameter J compensation gain A24 2nd automatic torque boost slip 35 He30 2nd motor parameter R1 auto tuning data compensation gain Aeb i 2nd frequency upper limit 36 H23 2nd motor parameter R2 auto tuning data Aebe 2nd frequency lower limit 37 He3e 2nd motor parameter L auto tuning data Ace AVR selection 2nd motor 38 H233 2nd motor parameter lo auto tuning data ABe AVR voltage selection 2nd motor 39 H234 2nd motor parameter J auto tuning data Aege 2nd acceleration time 2 A93 2nd deceleration time 2 A94 Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile 2nd motor ON Description 2 4 motor parameter sets are selected OFF 1st motor parameter sets are selected Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings 4 6 34 STO Safe Torque Off Performance Monitor This signal is specific for Safe Stop function Terminal Symbol Function Name STO Safe Torque Off Performan ce Monitor Output terminal 11 only Description 249 Analog Input Operation Option Terminal Function State Code Symbol Name Valid for inputs Required settings 4 7 Analog Input Operation Note 250 The MX2 inverters provide for analog input to command the inverter frequency output value The analog input terminal grou
335. inal It overrides the parameter A07 PID Enable to stop PID execution and return to normal motor frequency output characteristics The use of PID Disable on an intelligent input terminal is optional Of course any use of the PID loop control requires setting PID Enable function A07 1 0 The PID Clear function forces the PID loop integrator sum 0 So when you turn ON an intelligent input configured as PIDC the integrator sum is reset to zero This is useful when switching from manual control to PID loop control and the motor is stopped 110 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 Setpoint Standard setting Target Scale factor Scale factor Frequency ot Fag AA Reciprocal source select Multi speed ADD setting reoi Frequency i gain setting ay Process variable Feedback Analog input scaling 01 V I select 7 AT Mc e Scale factor Monitor 0 ol Current PID V I input select Z Caution Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the inverter is in Run Mode output to motor is ON Otherwise this could cause the motor to decelerate rapidly resulting in a trip Terminal Function Description Symbol Name PID Disable Disables PID loop execution Allows PID loop execution PID Clear Force the value of the integrator to zero No change in PID loop execution Valid for inputs C00 1 C007 Required set
336. increase b134 and retry the auto tuning 12 To execute auto tuning be sure to set the output frequency FQd I larger than starting frequency bOB2 regardless with or without rotation Off line auto tuning procedure with motor rotation Step 1 Set motor size and motor poles Motor poles Step 2 Set base freq and Step 3 Enable auto tuning AVR voltage AVR voltage Result is displayed Completed Failed Auto tuning starts Step 4 Start the inverter according to RUN cmd source Step 5 Clear display by STOP key STOP ESET b When RUN cmd is given the motor runs according to following steps 1 1st AC excitation no rotation 2 2nd AC excitation no rotation 3 1st DC excitation no rotation Step 6 Activate motor constant by H002 m gt 2 I I Note 1 5 SLV operation X of base freq I 4 V f operation 80 of base freq 6 2nd DC excitation no rotation lt 7 Displays the result Note 1 When no rotation setting HDO 0 1 4 and 5 are skipped Note 2 After auto tuning is completed be sure to set 02 in H002 H202 otherwise measured data is not effective Note 3 Speed X of above 5 depends on accel deceleration time T Larger time of accel or deceleration time 0 lt T lt 50 s X 40 50 lt T lt 100 5 X 20 100 lt T s X 10 Note 4 If auto tuning is failed try to execute again 176 H Gro
337. ing error Auto tuning fails Note Reset is not allowed in 10 second after trip Note When error E08 E14 and E30 occur reset operation by RS terminal or STOP RESET key is not accepted In this case reset by cycling power If still same error occurs perform initialization 6 2 3 Parameter Warning Codes If set parameter is conflicted to other parameters warning code is displayed as follows Warning code Frequency upper limit AUB 1 Warning conditions Maximum Frequency A004 Frequency lower limit A062 Maximum Frequency A004 Output frequency setting monitor FQd 1 Multi step speed reference 0 A020 Maximum Frequency A004 Output frequency setting FOO 1 Multi step speed reference 0 AD20 Frequency upper limit ADE 1 Frequency lower limit AG62 Output frequency setting Fd 1 Multi step speed reference 0 Age Starting frequency b08e Frequency upper limit AUB 1 Starting frequency b08e Frequency lower limit A062 Starting frequency b08e Output frequency setting Fd 1 Multi step speed reference 0 AD20 Starting frequency bU8e Multi step speed reference 1 to 15 Ae I A035 276 Starting frequency bU8e Jogging frequency A038 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions Warning code Section 6 2 Warning conditions Output frequency setting FOO 1 Multi step speed reference 0 ADZO
338. ing of input terminal 5 005 DC24V is supplied 18 Unstable output frequency Possible Cause s Corrective Action Improper parameters Set output frequency slightly smaller or bigger value than power source frequency Change motor stabilization parameter HO06 H203 Load variation is excessive Change motor and inverter to one size bigger Power voltage variation is excessive Check power source 271 Troubleshooting Section 6 1 19 Output torque is not sufficient Possible Cause s Corrective Action Improper parameters Increase manual torque boost A042 A242 A043 Acceleration A243 Reduce AVR filter time constant A083 Change V f characteristics selection AD44 A244 to SLV Change torque boost selection AD4 I A24 1 to automatic Improper parameters Increase deceleration time F003 F203 A093 Deceleration R293 Disable AVR selection ADB I A28 1 Install dynamic braking resistor or regenerative braking unit 20 If cable to operator is disconnected inveter will trip or stop Possible Cause s Corrective Action Improper setting of b 1565 Set ex operator com loss action b 165 to Oe 21 No response over Modbus communication Possible Cause s Corrective Action New parameter is not updated If CO7 1 C074 or 0715 is changed cycle power or reset inverter by turning RS terminal ON and OFF Incorrect setting of RUN Set RUN
339. ing or decelerating the motor This function operates with every acceleration and deceleration pattern regardless the acceleration and deceleration curve selection A097 and A098 Instead of setting A069 A070 A 154 and A 155 acceleration and deceleration can be held by intelligent input configured as 83 HLD Output frequency HLD input A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 A Function Defaults Description Acceleration stop frequency Sets the frequency to hold accel eration range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Acceleration stop time Sets the duration of acceleration hold range is 0 0 to 60 0 seconds Deceleration hold frequency Sets the frequency to hold decel eration range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Deceleration hold time Sets the duration of deceleration hold range is 0 0 to 60 0 seconds 3 5 7 PID Control When enabled the built in PID loop calculates an ideal inverter output value to cause a loop feedback process variable PV to move closer in value to the set point SP The frequency command serves as the SP The PID loop algo rithm will read the analog input for the process variable you specify the cur rent or voltage input and calculate the output A Function Defaults Description PID selection Enables PID function three option codes 00 OFF Disabled D 1 ON Enabled Oe ON Reverse output enabled PID P gain Proportional gain h
340. ini Motor generates an impact Adjust the speed response H116 mum frequency H121 Generate overcurrent trip Adjust the minimum frequency when a load H121 change 272 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions Section 6 2 Operation status Symptom Adjustment method Adjustment item Runing over minimum Motor generate a hunting Adjust the speed response frequency H121 Reduce the stabilization constant When value is too small you may not be able to obtain motor torque and motor will generate inpact or overcurrent trip near H121 Increase the no load current 6 2 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions 6 2 1 Fault Detection and Clearing The microprocessor in the inverter detects a variety of fault conditions and captures the event recording it in a history table The inverter output turns OFF or trips similar to the way a circuit breaker trips due to an over current condition Most faults occur when the motor is running refer to the diagram to the right However the inverter could have an internal fault and trip in Stop Mode In either case you can clear the fault by pressing the Stop Reset key Addi tionally you can clear the inverter s cumulative trip history by performing the procedure 6 3 Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 279 setting b084 00 will clear the trip history but leave inverter settings intact 6 2 2 Error Codes An error code will
341. input active high or active low 154 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 Input Function Summary Table This table shows all intelligent input func tions at a glance Detailed description of these functions related parameters and settings and example wiring diagrams are in 4 5 Using Intelligent Input Terminals on page 201 Input Function Summary Table Terminal Symbol Option Code Function Name Forward Run Stop Description Inverter is in Run Mode motor runs forward Inverter is in Stop Mode motor stops Reverse Run Stop Inverter is in Run Mode motor runs reverse Inverter is in Stop Mode motor stops Multi step speed setting binary 1 Binary encoded speed select Bit 0 logical 1 Binary encoded speed select Bit 0 logical 0 Multi step speed setting binary 2 Binary encoded speed select Bit 1 logical 1 Binary encoded speed select Bit 1 logical 0 Multi step speed setting binary 3 Binary encoded speed select Bit 2 logical 1 Binary encoded speed select Bit 2 logical 0 Multi step speed setting binary 4 Binary encoded speed select Bit 3 logical 1 Binary encoded speed select Bit 3 logical 0 Jogging Inverter is in Run Mode output to motor runs at jog parameter frequency Inverter is in Stop Mode External DC injection braking DC braking will be applied during deceleration DC braking will not be
342. input terminal configured for option code 18 RS Reset command cannot be configured for normally closed operation C Function Defaults Description Input terminal response time 1 Sets response time of each input Input terminal response time 2 terminal set range Input terminal response time 3 Onan x 2 ms Input terminal response time 4 Input terminal response time 5 Input terminal response time 6 Input terminal response time 7 Note This response time is disregarded when power on or reset For example when the power is up when FW terminal is on then the operation starts regardless this response time as soon as the internal reset process is com pleted 3 7 2 Intelligent Input Terminal Overview Each of the seven intelligent terminals may be assigned any of the options in the following table When you program one of the option codes for terminal assignments C00 I to 007 the respective terminal assumes the function role of that option code The terminal functions have a symbol or abbreviation that we use to label a terminal using that function For example the Forward Run command is FW The physical label on the terminal block connector is sim ply 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 However schematic examples in this manual also use the terminal symbol such as FW to show the assigned option The option codes for CD I Ito COM determines the active state of the logical
343. interference may occur output filter on nearby equipment such as a radio receiver This magnetic choke filter helps reduce very high frequency radi ated noise can also be used on input RF noise filter choke Output side This reactor in its standard type only L AC reactor AC Reactor inductor prevents the high voltage Output choke ringing of PWM modulation to reach the motor compensating for the capacity of the motor cables specially with long lengths For more effective and expensive options like sinus filter targetting net work like waveforms or dV dt filters please check with your dealer Thermal switch Note Note that some components are required for regulatory agency compliance see SECTION 5 Inverter System Accessories and Appendix D CE EMC Installation Guidelines 28 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 N WARNING In the cases below involving a general purpose inverter a large peak current can flow on the power supply side sometimes destroying the converter mod ule 1 The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3 or higher 2 The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity or the power supply capacity is 500k VA or more 3 Abrupt power supply changes are expected due to conditions such as a Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus b A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus c An
344. inverter setting resolution is 1 of rated current 0 32 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current Rated curr x 1 5 bOc6 Overload limit parameter 2 Sets the deceleration rate when inverter detects overload range is 0 1 to 3000 0 resolution 0 1 1 0 sec b027 Overcurrent suppression function Two option codes 00 OFF Disabled D1 ON Enabled Oe ON Enabled with reduced voltage oo This digital input allows you to change the parameter sets of overload restric tion Please refer to chapter 3 for the detailed description of the overload restriction function 129 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Overload Parameter sets b0 4 b025 b026 restriction are enabled source O Parameter sets bO b022 b023 changeover are enabled Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings b I b026 3 6 5 Software Lock Mode 130 Note The software lock function keeps personnel from accidentally changing parameters in the inverter memory Use b03 I to select from various protection levels The table below lists all combinations of b0J option codes and the ON OFF state of the SFT input Each Check VY or Ex indicates whether the corresponding parameter s can be edited The Standard Parameters column below shows access in permitted for some lock modes These refer to the paramet
345. ion Code Display Restriction Function and Software Lock Function codes are changed Function description Applied parameters for setting password Depending on the value in 6037 a part of function b 190 619 not displayed Displayed parameters can be Software Lock b03 I password B 152 ters can n data are d How to Depending on the value in 683 all or a part of parame b 192 b 193 ot be changed All the function codes and isplayed Set Password 1 Set parameter b037 and or b031 depending on your demand 2 Set password in b190 and or b192 0000 is not available 3 Passwo VW 1 l v x Dot indicates that t i password is set Cursor to left Cursor to right rd has been set and locked Parameter 6037 and or b83 cannot be changed How to authenticate the Password For a person who knows the password unlock protection as follows 1 Set password in b191 and or b193 2 If entered password is matched Jood Good is displayed for 1 second and pas key ope sword protection is unlocked temporary If cycling the power or no ration is pressed during 10 minutes the password protection is en abled again automatically If entered passord doesn t mach Err Error is displayed and protection is not unlocked C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 How to change Password 1 Make password authentication as above 2 Set new passw
346. ion Section 2 3 2 3 16 Uncover the Inverter Vents Step 5 After mounting and wiring the inverter remove any covers from the inverter hous ing This includes material over the side ven tilation ports Ventilation holes top Z N WARNING Make sure the input power to the inverter is OFF If the drive has been powered leave it OFF for ten minutes before continuing ay Ventilation holes both sides 55 Powerup Test Section 2 4 2 4 Powerup Test 2 4 1 Step 6 After wiring the inverter and motor you re ready to do a powerup test The procedure that follows is designed for the first time use of the drive Please verify the following conditions before conducting the powerup test e You have followed all the steps in this chapter up to this step e The inverter is new and is securely mounted to a non flammable vertical surface e The inverter is connected to a power source and a motor e No additional wiring of the inverter connectors or terminals has been done e The power supply is reliable and the motor is a known working unit and the motor nameplate ratings match the inverter ratings e The motor is securely mounted and is not connected to any load Goals for the Powerup Test If there are any exceptions to the above conditions at this step please take a moment to take any measures necessary to reach this basic starting point The specific goals of this powerup test are 1 Verify that t
347. ion integral time 1 0 setting GS input mode 00 Display ex operator connected w e x we Xe Kw x w w we x x x x x x x x x wT x ww x ww ww KY x x x 363 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry B Group Parameters Default Setting Name 1st parameter of Dual Monitor 2nd parameter of Dual Monitor EU Xx xX Section C 2 User Setting Freq set in monitoring Auto return initial display Ex Operator com Loss action Data Read Write selection Inverter mode selection Initialize trigger Password A setting Password A for authentication Password B setting Password B for authentication E thermal Dec Mode E thermal Dec Time E thermal Dec TimeCnst x x x x x x x x x x x Sx 364 E thermal AccmGain Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry C 2 4 Intelligent Terminal Functions C Group Parameters Default Setting Name Multi function input 1 selection EU 00 b031 10 Section C 2 User Setting Multi function input 2 selection 01 Multi function input 3 selection 12 Multi function input 4 selection 18 Multi function input 5 selection 02 Multi function input 6 selection 03 Multi fu
348. ion is assigned to a input terminal turning it on to clear the current position counter But note that the internal position deviation counter is also cleared at the same time In simple positioning mode ATR terminal is invalid Torque control does not work If current position is out of the set range inverter will be tripped E83 and coasting status If position error becomes bigger than the value on P080 the inverter will return automatically to set point while the Run signal keeps On This func tion is disable when P080 is set to 0 In case this function is used please remember to set P080 gt P017 Both P017 and P080 are handle as edge counts so is necessary to divide by 4 to transform into encoder pulses If P080 parameter is not O when the condition Position error gt P080 is true the inverter cancel DB and restart position management To avoid repetition of a stop and the restarting of the position manage ment please set parameter P080 so that condition P080 gt P017 is true a ee 185 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 3 9 6 Multistage position switching function CP1 CP2 CP3 When functions 66 CP1 to 68 CP3 are assigned to input terminal 1 to 7 C00 to C001 you can select multistage positions 0 to 7 Preset position data 0 to 7 in POSO to P0671 If no assignment is set in terminals position com mand will be position 0 P06 Data or data range De
349. ion signal DSE speed deviation maximum POK positioning completed FA4 set frequency overreached 2 FA5 set frequency reached 2 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 I Run 0 Stop interlocked to d003 Reverse rotation 0 Forward rotation interlocked to d003 Ready 0 Not ready DB BD Running 0 Not Running ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF D D D d d D D D OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF D D D DD D D D d d d D 316 ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 Setting OL2 overload notice advance 2 1 ON 0 OFF Odc Analog O disconnection detec 1 ON 0 OFF tion OlDc Analog Ol disconnection detec 1 ON 0 OFF tion Reserved Reserved FBV PID feedback comparison NDc communication train disconnec tion LOG1 logical operation result 1 LOG2 logical operation result 2 LOG3 logical operation result 3 Reserved Reserved Reserved WAC capacitor life warning WAF cooling fan speed drop FR starting contact signal OHF heat sink overheat warning LOC low current indication signal M01 general output 1 M
350. ip Note Safety Messages For the best results with the MX2 Series inverter carefully read this manual and all of the warning labels attached to the inverter before installing and operating it and follow the instructions exactly Keep this manual handy for quick reference Definitions and Symbols A safety instruction message includes a Safety Alert Symbol and a signal word or phrase such as WARNING or CAUTION Each signal word has the following meaning This symbol indicates high voltage related warnings It calls your attention to items or operations that could be dangerous to you and other persons operat ing this equipment Read the message and follow the instructions carefully indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided may result in serious injury or death or minor or moderate injury Additionally there may be significant property damage Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or in severe property damage Indicates a step in a series of action steps required to accomplish a goal The number of the step will be contained in the step symbol Notes indicates an area or subject of special merit emphasizing either the product s capability or common errors in operation or maintenance Tips give a special instruction that can save time or provide other benefits while installing or using the product The tip calls attention to an id
351. is disconnected an encoder connection error is detected the encoder fails or an encoder that does not support line driver output is used the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right Excessive speed If the motor speed rises to maximum frequency R0D4 x overspeed error detection level POC6 or more the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code shown on the right Positioning range error If current position exceeds the position range specification PO12 P013 the inverter will shut off its output and display the error code E37 X only can be reset by digital input 18 RS 275 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions Error Code Section 6 2 Descriptions RS input is ON or STOP RESET key is pressed Undervoltage If input voltage is under the allowed level inverter shuts off output and wait with this indi cation Waiting to restart This indication is displayed after tripping before restarting Restricted oper ation command Commanded Rotation direction limit selection is restricted in b035 Trip history initializing Trip history is being initialized No data Trip monitor No trip waning data exists Blinking Communication error Communication between inverter and digital operator fails Auto tuning completed Auto tuning is completed properly Auto tun
352. isk assessment for the whole safety system has to be carried out A Caution The Safe Disable function does not cut the power supply to the drive and does not provide electrical isolation Before any installation or maintenance work is done the drives power supply must be switched off and place a tag lock out Z Caution The writing distance for Safe Disable inputs should be shorter than 30 m Z Caution The time from opening the Safe Disable input until the drive output is switched off is less than 10 ms 384 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Section E 10 E 10 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY omRon EC Declaration of Conformity We hereby declare that the following products are in conformity with the requirements of the following EC Directive Product Inverter Type IGIMX2 series Refer to appending types list Title and No of Directive EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC These products are designed and manufactured in accordance with the following standards EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN61800 3 2004 Conducted Radiated ENG61 800 3 2004 EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN6 1800 3 2004 ESD ENG1 800 3 2004 EN6 1000 4 2 1995 A 1 1998 A2 2001 RF EM Ficld ENGI 800 3 2004 EN6 1000 4 3 2006 A 1 2008 Conducted RF common mode EN6 1 800 3 2004 EN6 1000 4 6 2007 Fast Transient EN61 800 3 2004 EN6 1000 4 4 2004 Surge Power ports EN6 1800 3 2004 EN6 1000 4 5S 2006 Voltage Dips and short
353. it may cause injury to personnel Be sure to install the inverter in a well ventilated room that does not have direct exposure to sunlight a tendency for high temperature high humidity or dew condensation high levels of dust corrosive gas explosive gas inflamma ble gas grinding fluid mist salt damage etc Otherwise there is the danger of fire IP20 Install the Inverter vertically on a wall Install the Inverter on a nonflammable wall surface material like metal Other installations are not possible due to heat convection design of the inverter is vertical N amp AS SSN L SRL IP54 Installation Steps 1 Choose installation location 2 Check housing dimensions for footprint and mounting hole locations 3 Remove the front cover 4 Mount the mounting plate of the MX2 IP54 housing 5 Connect all wiring 6 Check your installation 7 Attach the front cover Installation Locations Note Do not store or use the MX2 IP54 housing in locations subject to con densation Doing so can result in damaging the unit Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 N WARNING A Caution A Caution Mounting Orientation and Spacing Always install the housing in an upright position Leave 10 cm space above and below the housing for proper cooling Leave 10 cm space to the left and to the right for replacement of the dust filter Removing the Front Cover Turn off the power supply before removing the cover
354. ject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to exposure to combustibles e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Transporting Installation and Wiring e Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction e Do not hold by the front cover and terminal block cover but hold by the fins during transportation e Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input output termi nals Doing so may result in damage to the product e Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body e Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals e Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations Not doing so may result in damage to the product Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong magnetic fields Locations close to power lines Operation and Adjustment e Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before opera tion because the inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high Provide a separate holding brake if necessary If the Drive Programming stops during multi function output the output status is held Take saf
355. just a few specific parameters This chapter will explain the purpose of each set of parameters and help you choose the ones that are important to your application If you are developing a new application for the inverter and a motor finding the right parameters to change is mostly an exercise in optimization There fore it is okay to begin running the motor with a loosely tuned system By making specific individual changes and observing their effects you can achieve a finely tuned system Introduction of Inverter Programming The front panel keypad is the first and best way to get to know the inverter s capabilities Every function or programmable parameter is accessible from the keypad 69 Using the Keypad Devices Section 3 2 3 2 Using the Keypad Devices 3 2 1 70 The MX2 Series inverter front keypad contains all the elements for both moni toring and programming parameters The keypad layout is pictured below All other programming devices for the inverter have a similar key arrangement and function Display Units Hertz Amperes LEDs Run LED Power LED Alarm LED Parameter Display Program LED Run key Enable LED Run key USB port Mini B connector Remote operator CYCLE key Connector RJ45 Up Down keys Set key Stop Reset key Key and Indicator Legend e Run LED ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is develop ing torque Run Mode and OFF when the inverter output is OFF Stop Mode Pro
356. k of PID control In this case you need to set A076 to 03 Only EA input terminal is to be used 3 Simple positioning by pulse train input This is to use the pulse train input like an encoder signal You can select three types of operation 4 8 Analog Output Operation 252 In inverter applications it is useful to monitor the inverter operation from a remote location or from the front panel of an inverter enclosure In some cases this requires only a panel mounted volt meter In other cases a controller such as a PLC may provide the inverter s frequency command and require inverter feedback data such as output frequency or output current to confirm actual oper See ation The analog output terminal AM serves these purposes The inverter provides an analog voltage output on terminal AM with terminal L as analog GND reference The AM can output inverter frequency or cur rent output value Note that the voltage range is 0 to 10 V positive going only regardless of forward or reverse motor rotation Use C028 to configure terminal AM as indicated below Analog Voltage Output 10 VDC full scale 1 mA max O specs on page 195 Description Output frequency Output current Output torque Output voltage Power Thermal load rate LAD frequency Fin temperature Output torque lt signed gt YA1 Drive Programming Option The AM signal offset and gain are adjusta
357. k 115 2 k bps User selectable Xx Communication mode Asynchronous Character code Binary LSB placement Transmits LSB first Electrical interface RS 485 differential transceiver Data bits 8 bit ModBus RTU mode Parity None even odd Stop bits 1 or 2 bits Startup convention One way start from host device x s lt lt wl wf xix x Wait time for response 0 to 1000 msec Connections Station address numbers from 1 to 247 Connector Terminal connector Error check Overrun Framing block check code CRC 16 or horizontal parity Cable length 500m maximum The network diagram below shows a series of inverters communicating with a host computer Each inverter must have a unique address from 1 to 247 on the network In a typical application a host computer or controller is the mas ter and each of the inverter s or other devices is a slave CA 1 2 i 247 295 Connecting the Inverter to ModBus Section B 2 B 2 Connecting the Inverter to ModBus Modbus connector is in control terminal block as below Note that RJ45 con nector RS 422 is used for external operator only Dip switch for termination resistor RS 422 Operator Bea JG Gc ES SiG Moaba g eal er er Le QOS External device ie i iy SP_ SN SP_ SN Lse sn SN MX2 No 2 MX2 No 3 MX2 No n 2000
358. l C043 ramps When output to motor is OFF or at a level below the set frequency Overload warning When output current is more than the set threshold CO4 1 for the overload signal When output current is less than the set threshold for the deviation signal Excessive PID deviation When PID error is more than the set threshold for the deviation signal When PID error is less than the set threshold for the deviation signal Alarm output When an alarm signal has occurred and has not been cleared When no alarm has occurred since the last cleaning of alarm s Set frequency only arrival signal When output to motor is at the set frequency during accel C042 and decel 043 When output to motor is OFF or is not at a level of the set frequency Overtorque Estimated motor torque exceeds the specified level Estimated motor torque is lower than the specified level Signal during undervoltage Inverter is in Undervoltage Inverter is not in Undervoltage Torque limit Torque limit function is executing Torque limit function is not executing RUN time over Total running time of the inverter exceeds the speci fied value Total running time of the inverter does not exceed the specified value Power ON time over Total power ON time of the inverter exceeds the specified value Total power ON time of the inverter does not exceed the specified va
359. l SLV control Free V F Control The free V F setting function allows you to set an arbitrary V F characteristics by specifying the voltages and frequencies b 00 b 13 for the seven points on the V F characteristic curve The free V F frequencies 1 to 7 set by this function must always be in the col lating sequence of 1 lt 2 lt 3 lt 4 lt 5 lt 6 lt 7 Since all the free V F frequencies are set to 0 Hz as default factory setting specify their arbitrary values being set with free setting V F frequency 7 The inverter does not operate the free V F characteristics with the factory setting Enabling the free V F characteristics setting function disables the torque boost selection A04 i AcY i base frequency setting A003 A203 and maximum fre 101 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 quency setting A004 A204 automatically The inverter regard the value of free setting V F frequency 7 b 112 as the maximum frequency Output voltage V V7 b HJ peaa Output freq Hz 0 Fi P B M 5 FO F b 100 b 102 b 104 b 106 b 108 b 1 10 b 1 12 Remarks Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 Hz Setting of the out Free V f frequency 6 Free setting V F freq 5 to freq 7 cause A e Free V f frequency 5 Free setting V F freq 4 to freq 6 V F characteristic Free V f frequency 4 Free setting V F freq 3 to freq 5 curve Free V f frequency 3 Free setting V F freq 2 to freq 4 Free V f frequency 2 Free setting V F
360. l mode Valid for inputs C00 Co07 Required settings Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name STO1 Safety STO2 related Sst signals SS2 Refer to Safety in Appendix Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Refer to Drive Programming section 223 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 4 5 29 Retain output frequency Section 4 5 This function allows you to retain output frequency Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Retain output frequency Description Valid for inputs Coo i coo7 Required settings 4 5 30 Permission of Run command This function allows you to accept run command Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Permission Description Run command can be accepted of Run command Run command is ignored Valid for inputs Coo i coo7 Required settings 4 5 31 Rotation direction detection Input terminal 7 is for inputting B pulse which is used for detecting the rotation direction Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Rotation Description direction detection Valid for inputs cool Required settings Notes EB input terminal is dedicated terminal 7 e Maximum allowable input frequency is 2kHz 4 5 32 Display limitation This function is to show only the conte
361. l when it is an inverter you can still adjust the output frequency to vary the boost it pro vides Refer to the example diagram below Its two stages of control are defined as follows e Stage 1 Inverter 1 operating in PID loop mode with motor driving a fan e Stage 2 Inverter 2 operating as an ON OFF controller with motor driv ing a fan Stage 1 provides the ventilation needs in a building most of the time On some days there is a change in the building s air volume because large ware house doors are open In that situation Stage 1 alone cannot maintain the desired air flow PV sags under SP Inverter 1 senses the low PV and its PID Second Stage Output at FBV terminal turns ON This gives a Run FWD command to Inverter 2 to provide the additional air flow Fan 1 Air flow Sensor Fan 2 a Stage 1 Stage 2 Inverter 1 Inverter 2 ki U V W gt U V W gt 0 or Ol nll eur age Outpu FBV oon FW Process Variable 241 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 242 To use the PID Second Stage Output feature you will need to choose upper and lower limits for the PV via C053 and C052 respectively As the timing dia gram below shows these are the thresholds Stage 1 inverter uses to turn ON or OFF Stage 2 inverter via the FBV output The vertical axis units are perce
362. l S5 and a digital signal is input 78 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 3 3 7 Multi function Output Monitor d006 The LED lighting position indicates the output status of the multi function output terminals The output status of the built in CPU is indicated This is not the status of the control circuit terminal This does not depend on the NO NC contact setting Example Multi function output terminals P2 P1 EDM ON Relay output terminal MA OFF Display CD Q Q Qo pu O im Gy Dp orr l Turned OFF 44 4 MA P2 P1 OFF ON ON 3 3 8 Output Frequency Monitor After Conversion d007 Displays a conversion value based on the coefficient set in Frequency Con version Coefficient b086 This monitor is used to change the unit of displayed data e g motor rpm Display of the Output Frequency Monitor d007 Output Frequency Moni tor d001 x Frequency Conversion Coefficient b086 Example Displaying rpm of 4 pole motor Motor rom N min 1 120 x f Hz P pole f Hz x 30 As such when b086 30 0 a motor rpm of 1800 60 x 30 0 is displayed at 60 Hz Parameter P Default No Function name Data setting Unit d007 Output frequency 0 00 to 40000 00 monitor after conversion b086 Frequency conversion 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 coefficient Set in increments of 0 01 d007 d001 x b086 b163 d001 d007 00 OFF 00 Freq set in monitoring 01 ON
363. l is not assigned to any terminal the Brake Wait Time for Acceleration b Ile begins when the brake release signal is turned on and the Brake Wait Time for Stopping b 23 begins when the brake release signal is turned off B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 When using the brake control function assign the following signal functions to intelligent input and output terminals as needed 1 To input a signal indicating that the brake is released from the external brake to the inverter assign the braking confirmation signal 44 BOK to one of the terminal 1 7 C00 f007 2 Assign the brake release signal 19 BRK which is a brake releasing com mand to one of the output terminal 11 12 C02 I C022 To output a signal when braking is abnormal assign the brake error signal 20 BER to an output terminal When using the brake control function you are recommended to select the sensorless vector control A044 03 that ensures a high torque performance B Function Defaults Description EU Units Brake control selection Two option codes 00 OFF Disabled D1 ON Enabled with DC injec tion D2 ON Enabled without DC injection Brake wait time for release Set range 0 00 to 5 00 sec 0 00 Brake wait time for Set range 0 00 to 5 00 sec 0 00 acceleration Brake wait time for stopping Set range 0 00 to 5 00 sec 0 00 Brake wait time for Set range 0 00 to 5 00 sec 0 00 confirmation Brake rele
364. l other devices that a signal loss has occurred Voltage signal loss at O terminal Parameter b082 is the Start Frequency Adjustment It sets the beginning minimum output frequency when the speed reference source is greater than zero If the analog input at terminal O is less than the Start Frequency the inverter turns ON the Dc output to indi cate a signal loss condition Current signal loss at Ol terminal The Ol terminal accepts a 4 mA to 20 mA signal with 4 mA representing the beginning of the input range If the input current falls below 4 mA the inverter applies a threshold to detect signal loss Note that a signal loss is not an inverter trip event When the analog input value is again above the b082 value the Dc output turns OFF There is no error condition to clear Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Analog O ON when signal loss is detected on O disconnec input tion detec OFF when no signal loss is detected on tion O input Analog Ol ON when signal loss is detected on Ol disconnec input tion detec OFF when no signal loss is detected on tion Ol input Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings ADO 0 b08e Notes e The Dc output can indicate an analog signal disconnect when the inverter is in Stop Mode as well as Run Mode e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negati
365. le positioning deactivated when PCLR is set to ON The rest of digital inputs related with positioning are not effective when P012 00 Parameter Function name Data Default Unit No setting d030 Current position monitor Displays the position command 268435455 to 268435455 3 3 22 Dual Monitor d050 Desired two monitor items can be set and monitored by switching the item using the Increment Decrement keys Set the parameter numbers to be monitored in b160 and b161 Example To monitor d001 set 001 in b160 b161 Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit d050 Dual monitor The two items set in b160 and b161 are monitored b160 1st parameter of Dual 001 to 030 001 Monitor Corresponding to d001 to b161 2nd parameter of Dual 0030 002 Monitor Fault Monitor parameters d081 to d086 are excluded Data of monitor d050 30 00 target 1 set in b160 Data of monitor target 2 set in b161 When d001 d007 Freq set in monitoring b163 is set to 01 Enabled the output frequencies in d001 and d007 can be changed using the Increment Decrement keys during operation It cannot be changed if d001 and d007 are monitored using d050 83 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 3 3 23 Inverter Mode d060 Displays the current inverter mode The inverter mode is changed using b171 Parameter Default No setting gnit Functio
366. lear MI1 MI7 general purpose inputs for Drive Programming AHD analog command hold CP1 CP3 multistage position switches ORL limit signal of zero return ORG trigger signal of zero return SPD speed position change over GS1 GS2 STO inputs safety related signals 485 Starting commu nication signal PRG executing Drive Programming HLD retain output frequency ROK permission of run command EB rotation direction detection of B phase DISP display limitation NO no function PSET preset position MX2 Inverter Specifications Section 1 2 Item General Specifications Output signal Intelligent output terminal 48 functions assignable RUN run signal FA1 FA5 frequency arrival signal OL OL2 overload advance notice signal OD PID deviation error signal AL alarm signal OTQ over under torque threshold UV under voltage TRQ torque limit signal RNT run time expired ONT power ON time expired THM ther mal warning BRK brake release BER brake error ZS OHz detection DSE speed deviation excessive POK positioning completion ODc analog voltage input disconnection OIDc analog current input discon nection FBV PID second stage output NDc network disconnect detec tion LOG1 LOG3 Logic output signals WAC capacitor life warning WAF cooling fan warning FR starting contact OHF heat sink overheat warning LOC Low load MO1 MO3 general outputs for Drive Progr
367. lectrical system See also Choke A unit of physical measure to quantify the amount of work done per unit of time You can directly convert between horsepower and Watts as measure ments of power Glossary Section A 1 IGBT Inertia Intelligent Terminal Inverter Isolation Transformer Jogging Operation Jump Frequency Line Reactor Momentum Multi speed Operation Motor Load NEC NEMA Open collector Outputs Power Factor Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor IGBT A semiconductor transistor capable of conducting very large currents when in saturation and capable of withstanding very high voltages when it is OFF This high power bipolar tran sistor is the type used in Omron inverters The natural resistance a stationary object to being moved by an external force See also Momentum A configurable input or output logic function on the Omron inverters Each ter minal may be assigned one of several functions A device that electronically changes DC to AC current through an alternating process of switching the input to the output inverted and non inverted It con tains three inverter circuits to generate 3 phase output to the motor A transformer with 1 1 voltage ratio that provides electrical isolation between its primary and secondary windings These are typically used on the power input side of the device to be protected An isolation transformer can protect equipment from a ground fault or other ma
368. lects the inverter algorithm for generating the V F control constant torque V F VC frequency output as shown in the VIF control gi AOA diagram to the right A244 for 2nd venele N7 tove O motor The factory default is 08 con a D 6 gt stant torque Teevi O i i inti Sensorless vector a4 Output Review the following description to Control SLV p help you choose the best torque con trol algorithm for your application The built in V f curves are oriented toward developing constant torque or vari able torque characteristics see graphs below You can select either constant torque or reduced torque V f control Constant and Variable Reduced V Ag44 gg Constant torque Torque The graph at right shows the constant torque characteristic from 0 Hz to the base frequency A003 The voltage remains constant for out put frequencies higher than the base frequency The graph above right shows the variable reduced torque curve which has a constant torque charac V A044 01 Variable torque teristic from 0 Hz to 10 of the base frequency This helps to achieve higher torque at low speed with reduced torque curve at higher Base Max freq freq speeds Sensorless Vector Control You 0 A 10 Base Base Max can achieve high torque performance freq freq freq 200 torque at 0 5 Hz of output fre quency without motor speed feedback encoder feedback which is so called sensorless vector contro
369. lfunction of nearby equipment as well as attenuate harmful harmonics and transients on the input power Usually done manually a jog command from an operator s panel requests the motor drive system to run indefinitely in a particular direction until the machine operator ends the jog operation A jump frequency is a point on the inverter output frequency range that you want the inverter to skip around This feature may be used to avoid a resonant frequency and you can program up to three jump frequencies in the inverter A three phase inductor generally installed in the AC input circuit of an inverter to minimize harmonics and to limit short circuit current The physical property of a body in motion that causes it to remain in motion In the case of motors the rotor and attached load are rotating and possesses angular momentum The ability of a motor drive to store preset discrete speed levels for the motor and control motor speed according to the currently selected speed preset The Omron inverters have 16 preset speeds In motor terminology motor load consists of the inertia of the physical mass that is moved by the motor and the related friction from guiding mechanisms See also Inertia The National Electric Code is a regulatory document that governs electrical power and device wiring and installation in the United States The National Electric Manufacturer s Association NEMA Codes are a pub lished series of device ratings stan
370. lies a logic function to calcu selection late LOG output state Three options oo AND D I OR Oe XOR 3 7 11 Other Functions C Function aes Description C 169 Multi step speed position Set range is 0 to 200 x 10ms determination time To avoid the miss input of the multi speed due to the time rug waiting time to fix the multi speed can be set by C 169 When input is detected data is fixed after the time defined with C 169 171 H Group Motor Constants Functions 3 8 172 H Group Motor Constants Functions Section 3 8 The H Group parameters configure the inverter for the motor characteristics You must manually set HD03 and H 04 values to match the motor Parameter HQ06 is factory set If you want to reset the parameters to the factory default settings use the procedure in 6 3 Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 279 Use A044 to select the torque control algorithm as shown in the diagram Please refer to 3 8 3 Auto tuning Function on page 175 for detailed explana tion of the auto tuning H Function Auto tuning selection Description Option codes DD OFF Disabled D 1 ON STOP Oe ON Rotation Defaults Motor parameter selection 2nd motor parameter selection Option codes 00 Standard motor parameter D2 Auto tuning parameter 00 00 Motor capacity selection 2nd motor capacity selec
371. lishment of inverters other than administrative inverters Although slave addresses are set in a master inverter data is sent as broad cast address 00 If a slave inverter receives data to another slave it will be ignored As EzCOM source and destination register please set the number minus one from the value listed in the table in modbus data listing Just 0901h should be mention If above parameter is changed the inverter power must be rebooted in order to activate new parameters Instead of rebooting turning ON OFF of reset ter minal works as same Basic function in case the number of data is 1 P140 1 e A master inverter sends data in holding register P143 of the master to a slave inverter of address P141 and overwrites on holding register P142 e A master inverter is changed to the next inverter and repeats same pro cedure according to setting of new master inverter Inverter Inverter Communication Operation 1 The Master Inverter sends data to each slave inverter according to the items set in the Master Inverter 2 The Management Inverter sends a master switching command and the Master Inverter changes 3 The next Master Inverter sends data to each slave inverter in the same manner as in 1st point 4 The 2nd and the 3st points are repeated Since the Inverter communication is performed in the form of broadcasting station number 00 all communication data are sent to all stations Accord ingly
372. lligent input 2CH to trigger this transition These profile options are also available for the second motor settings Select a transition method via A094 as depicted below Be careful not to confuse the second acceleration deceleration settings with settings for the second motor AOS4 00 Transition via 2CH input AGS4 01 Transition via freq level Output Output frequency frequency Accel 2 decel 2 IOC eeeeeeeeeeeeeeegpKcceenenene Frequency A095 Transition rere points 2CH input A Function Defaults Description Acceleration time 2 0 00 to 3600 00 2nd acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 2nd deceleration time 2 Select method to switch to Three options for switching from Acc2 Dec2 profile 1st to 2nd accel decel Select method to switch to 00 2CH Terminal Switched via Acc2 Dec2 profile 2nd motor multi function input 09 D 1 Preset FQ Switched by setting Oe FWD REV Enabled only when switching forward reverse Acc1 to Acc2 frequency Output frequency at which Accel1 transition point switches to Accel2 range is 0 00 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency to 400 00 Hz transition point 2nd motor Dec1 to Dec2 frequency Output frequency at which Decel1 transition point switches to Decel2 range is 0 00 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency to 400 00 Hz transition point 2nd motor Note For A095 and A096 and for 2nd motor settings if you set a
373. llows the constant V f curve until it reaches the full scale output voltage at the base frequency This initial straight line is the constant torque part of the operating characteristic The horizontal line over to the maximum frequency serves to let the motor run faster but at a reduced torque This is the constant power operating range If you want the motor to output constant torque over its entire operating range limited to the motor nameplate voltage and frequency rating then set the base frequency and maximum frequency equal as shown below right Base Maximum Base Frequency Frequency Frequency Maximum Frequency Note The 2nd motor settings in the table in this chapter store an alternate set of parameters for a second motor The inverter can use the 1st set or 2nd set of parameters to generate the output frequency to the motor See Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors on page 172 A Function Defaults Description Base frequency Settable from 30 Hz to the maximum frequency A004 2nd set base frequency Settable from 30 Hz to the 2 maximum frequency A204 Maximum frequency Settable from the base frequency to 400 Hz 2nd maximum frequency Settable from the 2 base frequency to 400 Hz 3 5 2 Analog Input Settings The inverter has the capability to accept an external analog input that can command the output frequency to the motor Voltage input 0 10 V and cur rent inpu
374. low involving a general purpose inverter a large peak current may flow on the power supply side sometimes destroying the converter mod UIG E E EE Mes ect Zeces nce doaass cea e Ta Mac cogs EE T T cee terme aeieze 29 1 The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3 or higher 2 The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter ca pacity or the power supply capacity is 500kVA or more a Abrupt power supply changes are expected due to the conditions such as b Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus c A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus d An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes Be sure to install the unit on flame resistant material such as a steel plate Otherwise there is the danger Of fire cccccssccceeessseeeeeeeesneeeeesennteeeeeeaes 29 Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter Otherwise there is the danger Of fire oo eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 29 Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter hous ing such as wire clippings spatter from welding metal shavings dust etc Otherwise there is the danger Of fire ccccsscccecessneeeeeeessneeeeeeenneeeeeeeaas 30 Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according to the specifications in the text Chapter 1 Specifications Tables Otherwise
375. lue Thermal warning Accumulated thermal count exceeds the CQ6 I set value Accumulated thermal count does not exceed the C061 set value Brake release Output for brake release No action for brake Brake error Brake error has occurred Brake performance is normal 161 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 162 Section 3 7 Output Function Summary Table Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name 0 Hz signal Description Output frequency falls below the threshold specified in C063 Output frequency is higher than the threshold speci fied in C063 Excessive speed deviation Deviation of speed command and actual speed exceeds the specified value P021 Deviation of speed command and actual speed does not exceed the specified value P8217 Position ready Positioning is completed Positioning is not completed Set frequency exceeded 2 When output to motor is at or above the set freq even if in accel C045 or decel C046 ramps When output to motor is OFF or at a level below the set frequency Set frequency only 2 When output to motor is at the set frequency during accel C045 and decel 046 When output to motor is OFF or is not at a level of the set frequency Overload warning 2 When output current is more than the set threshold C 111 for the overload signal When output current is less than th
376. lue used for this function is expressed as a ratio of the maximum torque generated when the inverter outputs its maximum current on the assumption that the maximum torque is 200 Note that each torque limit value does not represent an absolute value of torque The actual output torque varies depending on the motor 137 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 It the torque limited signal function TRQ is assigned to an intelligent output terminal the TRQ signal will turn ON when the torque limit function operates 100 torque is referred to inverter rated current Absolute torque value is up the motor to be combined B Function Defaults Description EU Units Torque limit selection Four option codes 09 4 quadrant Four quadrant separate setting D1 TRQ input Terminal switch Oe O input Analog input 03 Option 1 Torque limit 1 fwd power Torque limit level in forward powering quadrant range is 0 to 200 no disabled Torque limit 2 rev regen Torque limit level in reverse regen quadrant range is 0 to 200 no disabled Torque limit 3 rev power Torque limit level in reverse powering quadrant range is 0 to 200 no disabled Torque limit 4 fwd regen Torque limit level in forward regen quadrant range is 0 to 200 no disabled Torque LADSTOP selection Two option codes 00 OFF Disabled D1 ON Enabled When 00 is specified for the Torque to
377. mand is not held Position command selection 1 Position command selection 2 Position command selection 3 Multistage position commands are set according to the combination of these switches Zero return limit signal Limit signal of homing is ON Limit signal of homing is OFF Zero return startup signal Starts homing operation No action Speed position switching Speed control mode Position control mode GS1 input GS2 input EN60204 1 related signals Signal input of Safe torque off function Start EZCOM Starts EZCOM No execution Drive Programming start Executing Drive Programming No execution Retain output frequency Retain the current output frequency No retention Permission of Run command Run command permitted Run command is not permitted Rotation direction detection C007 only Forward rotation Reverse rotation Display limitation Only a parameter configured in b038 is shown All the monitors can be shown Unprotected inverter operation mode Unprotected inverter operation mode is enabled Unprotected inverter operation mode is disabled Preset position P083 value is set to current position 3 7 3 Output Terminal Configuration No allocation input ignored input ignored The inverter provides configuration for logic discrete
378. me of internal capacitor has expired Lifetime of internal capacitor has not expired Cooling fan life warning signal Lifetime of cooling fan has expired Lifetime of cooling fan has not expired C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Section 3 7 Output Function Summary Table Option Code Terminal Symbol Function Name Starting contact signal Description Either FW or RV command is given to the inverter No FW or RV command is given to the inverter or both are given to the inverter Fin overheat warning Temperature of the heat sink exceeds a specified value C064 Temperature of the heat sink does not exceed a specified value C064 Light load detection signal Motor current is less than the specified value 039 Motor current is not less than the specified value 039 Drive Programming output 1 General output 1 is ON General output 1 is OFF Drive Programming output 2 General output 2 is ON General output 2 is OFF Drive Programming output 3 General output 3 is ON General output 3 is OFF Operation ready signal Inverter can receive a run command Inverter cannot receive a run command Forward run signal Inverter is driving the motor in forward direction Inverter is not driving the motor in forward direction Reverse run signal Inverter is driving the motor in reverse direction
379. ment cir cuitry components above in an insulated housing before using them 285 Maintenance and Inspection Section 6 4 6 4 6 Capacitor Life Curves The DC bus inside the inverter uses a large capacitor as shown in the dia gram below The capacitor handles high voltage and current as it smoothes the power for use by the inverter So any degradation of the capacitor will affect the performance of the inverter Variable frequency Drive Power Input Converter Internal Inverter DC Bus Capacitor life is reduced in higher ambient temperatures as the graph below demonstrates Under the condition of average ambient temperature 40 C 80 load 24 hours operation the lifetime is 10 years Be sure to keep the ambient temperature at acceptable levels and perform maintenance inspec tions on the fan heat sink and other components If the inverter is installed on a cabinet the ambient temperature is the temperature inside the cabinet Capacitor Life Curve Operation 24 hours day 80 load 1 Operation 24 hours day 100 load Ambient 50 temperature C 40 30 20 10 Years 286 Warranty Section 6 5 6 5 Warranty 6 5 1 Warranty Terms The warranty period under normal installation and handling conditions is two 2 years from the date of manufacture or one 1 year from the date of instal lation whichever occurs first The warranty shall cover the repair or replace ment at Omron s sole discretion of ONLY the invert
380. mes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALY SIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REP
381. meter No d015 Function name Data Unit Integrated power monitor T100 to r999 Displayed in increments of the setting unit 1 000 kW x b079 b078 Integrated power clear 00 Normal 00 01 Perform integrated power clear 01 is reset to 00 after the clear b079 Integrated power display 1 to 1000 gain C001 to C007 Multi function input 1 to 7 selection 53 KHC integrated power clear 81 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 3 3 16 Total RUN Time d016 Displays the total RUN time of the inverter This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off Parameter 5 Default No Function name Data setting Unit d016 Total RUN time 0 0 to 9 999 h Displays in increments of 1 hour 1 000 to 9 999 Displays in increments of 10 hours T 100 to T999 Displayed in increments of 1 000 hours Note Initialization will not clear the setting 3 3 17 Power ON Time Monitor d017 Displays the total power ON time of the inverter This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off Parameter A Default No Function name Data setting Unit d017 Power ON time monitor 0 0 to 9 999 h Displays in increments of 1 hour 1 000 to 9 999 Displays in increments of 10 hours T 100 to T999 Displayed in increments of 1 000 hours Note Initialization will not clear th
382. mm 3G3MX2 A4022 3G3MX2 A4030 1 4 AWG14 2 1mm 3G3MX2 A4040 1 4 AWG12 3 3mm 3G3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A4075 3 0 AWG10 5 3mm 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3MX2 A4150 5 9 to 8 8 AWG6 13mm xxi Fuse Sizes 7 xxii Fuse Sizes The inverter shall be connected with a UL Listed Cartridge Nonrenewable fuse rated 600Vac with the current ratings as shown in the table below Inverter Model 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 AB004 3G3MX2 AB007 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 AB022 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 3G3MX2 A2007 3G3MX2 A2015 3G3MX2 A2022 3G3MX2 A2037 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 3G3MX2 A2110 3G3MX2 A2150 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 3G3MX2 A4022 3G3MX2 A4030 3G3MX2 A4040 3G3MX2 A4055 3G3MX2 A4075 3G3MX2 A4110 3G3MX2 A4150 Class J 10A AIC 200kA 15A AIC 200kA 20A AIC 200kA 30A AIC 200kA 10A AIC 200kA 15A AIC 200kA 20A AIC 200kA 30A AIC 200kA 40A AIC 200kA 80A AIC 200kA 10A AIC 200kA 15A AIC 200kA 20A AIC 200kA 30A AIC 200kA 40A AIC 200kA Revision History 8 8 Revision History A manual revision history appears as a suffix to the catalogue number located at the lower left of the front and back covers Cat No I570 E2 02 Revision code 2009 First version S
383. monitor d003 0 Stopping 1 Forward rotation 2 Reverse rotation 0 1 Hz PID feedback value monitor d004 high d004 low 0 to 1000000 0 1 Multi function input monitor d005 2 0 Terminal 1 to 2 6 Terminal 7 Multi function output monitor d006 2 0 Terminal 11 to 2 1 Terminal 12 2 2 Relay Terminal Output frequency monitor after conversion d007 high d007 low D 0 to 4000000 0 01 Real frequency monitor d008 high d008 low 40000 to 40000 0 01 Hz Torque reference monitor d009 200 to 200 T Torque bias monitor d010 200 to 200 T Reserved Output torque monitor d012 200 to 200 T Output voltage monitor d013 0 to 6000 0 1 V Input power monitor d014 0 to 1000 0 1 kW Watt hour monitor d015 high d015 low D D D D d D d D 0 to 9999000 0 1 Total RUN time d016 high 0 to 999900 1 h Power ON time monitor d017 high d016 low d017 low 0 to 999900 1 h Fin temperature monitor d018 200 to 1500 101Ah to 101Ch Reserved 0 1 PC 101Dh Life assessment monitor d022 2 0 Capacitor on main circuit board 2 1 cooling fan 101Eh Program counter d023 0 1024 101Fh Program number d024 0 9999 1020h 1 025h Reser
384. motor constant J from the set HO24 Hee4 value Low frequency Motor rotation is unstable Increase the speed response factor HO24 Hee4 operation Increase the motor constant J from the set HO0S HeOS value Note Note 1 When driving a motor of which the capacity is one class lower than the inverter adjust the torque limit b04 I to b044 so that the value a calcu lated by the expression below does not exceed 200 Otherwise the motor may not be burnt a torque limit x inverter capacity motor capacity Example When the inverter capacity is 0 75 kW and the motor capacity is 0 4 kW the torque limit value is calculated as follows based on the assump tion that the value should be 200 Torque limit b04 I to b044 a X motor capacity inverter capacity 2 0 x 0 4kW 0 75kW 106 174 H Group Motor Constants Functions Section 3 8 3 8 3 Auto tuning Function The MX2 inverter has auto tuning function to get suitable motor control perfor mance by measuring the motor constants automatically Auto tuning is effec tive only for sensorless vector control Auto tuning with motor stop HOD I 0 Motor does not rotate while auto tuning If rotating motor could give harm to your application use this mode But the motor constant I0 no load current and J inertia are not measured and remain unchanged 10 can be monitored in 50Hz of V f operation Auto tuning wit
385. motor speed exceeds Pde Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings POC Notes e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 4 6 18 Position Ready Inverter gives out the positioning signal when positioning performance is done To use this function assign 23 POK to one of the intelligent output termi nals Refer to chapter 4 for the details of the performance Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Position ON ready Description Positioning performance is com pleted OFF Positioning performance is not completed Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings PQ 103 P0 15 Notes e The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 239 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 19 Analog Input Disconnection Detection 240 This feature is useful when the inverter receives a speed reference from an external device Upon input signal loss at either the O or Ol terminal the inverter normally just decelerates the motor to a stop However the inverter can use the intelligent output terminal Dc to signa
386. n 14 CS commercial power source enable 15 SFT software lock 16 AT analog input voltage current select 18 RS reset 20 STA starting by 3 wire input 21 STP stopping by 3 wire input 22 F R for ward reverse switching by 3 wire input 23 PID PID disable 24 PIDC PID reset 27 UP remote control UP func tion 28 DWN remote control DOWN function 29 UDC remote control data clearing 31 OPE forcible operation 32 SF1 multispeed bit 1 33 SF2 multi speed bit 2 34 SF3 multispeed bit 3 35 SF4 multispeed bit 4 36 SF5 multi speed bit 5 37 SF6 multispeed bit 6 38 SF7 multispeed bit 7 39 OLR over 7 load restriction selection 40 TL torque limit enable 41 TRQ1 torque limit selection bit 1 42 TRQ2 torque limit selection bit 2 44 BOK braking confir mation 46 LAC LAD cancellation 47 PCLR clearance of position devia tion 50 ADD trigger for frequency addi tion A145 51 F TM forcible terminal operation 52 ATR permission of torque command input 53 KHC cumulative power clearance 56 MI1 general pur pose input 1 57 MI2 general purpose input 2 58 MI3 general purpose input 3 59 MI4 general purpose input 4 60 MI5 general purpose input 5 61 MI6 general purpose input 6 62 MI7 gen eral purpose input 7 65 AHD analog command holding 66 CP1 multistage position settings selection 1 67 CP2 multistage positio
387. n a compact package See also IGBT and Saturation Voltage An event that causes the inverter to stop operation is called a trip event as in tripping a circuit breaker The inverter keeps a history log of trip events They also require an action to clear A measure of the internal power loss of a component the difference between the power it consumes and what its output delivers An inverter s watt loss is the input power minus the power delivered to the motor The watt loss is typi cally highest when an inverter is delivering its maximum output Therefore watt loss is usually specified for a particular output level Inverter watt loss specifications are important when designing enclosures 293 Bibliography Section A 2 A 2 Bibliography Title Author and Publisher Variable Speed Drive Fundamentals 2nd Ed Phipps Clarence A The Fairmont Press Inc Prentice Hall Inc 1997 Electronic Variable Speed Drives Brumbach Michael E Delmar Publishers 1997 ISBN 0 8273 6937 9 294 B 1 Introduction Appendix B ModBus Network Communications MX2 Series inverters have built in RS 485 serial communications featuring the ModBus RTU protocol The inverters can connect directly to existing fac tory networks or work with new networked applications without any extra interface equipment The specifications are in the following table Transmission speed Specifications 2400 4800 9600 19 2 k 38 4 k 57 6 k 76 8
388. n name Data d060 Inverter mode l C IM induction motor heavy load mode l V IM induction motor light load mode PM Permanent magnet motor control 3 3 24 Frequency Source Monitor d062 It displays the frequency source considering the A001 A201 19124 motor setting Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit d062 Frequency source 0 Operator z monitor 1 to 15 Multi speed freq 1 to 15 16 Jog frequency 18 Modbus network 19 Option 21 Potentiometer 22 Pulse train 23 Calculated function output 24 EzSQ Drive Programming 25 O input 26 Ol input 27 O Ol 3 3 25 Run Command Source Monitor d063 It displays the RUN command source considering the A002 A202 1S 2 4 motor setting PAR Function name Data ane Unit d063 Run source monitor 1 Terminal 2 Operator 3 Modbus Network 4 Option 84 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 3 3 26 Fault Frequency Monitor d080 Displays the number of times the inverter has tripped This number is saved in the EEPROM when the power is turned off Parameter A Default No Function name Data setting Unit d080 Fault frequency monitor 0 to 9999 Time 1 000 to 6 553 Displayed in increments of 10 3 3 27 Fault Monitors 1 to 6 d081 to d086 Displays the records of the l
389. n settings selection 2 68 CP3 multistage position settings selection 3 69 ORL Zero return limit function 70 ORG Zero return trigger function 73 SPD speed position switching 77 GS1 safety input 1 78 GS2 safety input 2 81 485 EZCOM 82 PRG executing Drive Programming 83 HLD retain output frequency 84 ROK permission of run command 85 EB Rotation direction detection for V f with ENC 86 DISP Display limitation 90 UIO Unprotected inverter operation 91 PSET preset position 255 no Data resolution 1408h to 140Ah Reserved Inaccessible 140Bh Multi function input 1 operation selection 00 NO 01 NC 140Ch Multi function input 2 operation selection 00 NO 01 NC 140Dh 332 Multi function input 3 operation selection 00 NO 01 NC ModBus Data Listing Function name Multi function input 4 operation selection Function Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 00 NO 01 NC Data resolution Multi function input 5 operation selection 00 NO 01 NC Multi function input 6 operation selection 00 NO 01 NC Multi function input 7 operation selection 00 NO 01 NC Reserved Inaccessible Multi function output terminal 11 selection Multi function output terminal 12 selection Reserved Relay output AL2 AL1 func tion selection 00 RUN r
390. n the inverter capacity the power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more e If abrupt power supply changes are expected Examples of these situations include 1 Several inverters are connected in parallel sharing the same power bus 2 A thyristor converter and an inverter are connected in parallel sharing the same power bus 3 An installed phase advance power factor correction capacitor opens and closes Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable you MUST install an input side AC reactor of 3 at a voltage drop at rated current with respect to the supply voltage on the power supply side Also where the effects of an indirect lightning strike are possible install a lightning conductor Example calculation Vrs 205 V Vez 203 V Vrp 197 V where VRS is R S line voltage VST is S T line voltage VTR is T R line volt age Unbalance factor of voltage Max line voltage min Mean Line voltage Meanline voltage 100 Ves Wis Vn Vm K 205 202 y 52400 a e100 1 5 as Me Way 202 3 Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for installa tion instructions Fig 1 Fig 2 m C j la eoobco m f a ee p 256 Component Descriptions Fig 1 single phase input AC reactor Section 5 2
391. nabling data changes during operation 1321h Reserved 1322h Motor cable length parameter b033 R W 5 to 20 1323h RUN time Power ON time setting b034 high R W O to 65535 1 10h 1324h b034 low R W 1325h Rotation direction limit selection b035 R W 00 Forward and Reverse are enabled 01 Enable for forward only 02 Enable for reverse only 1326h Reduced voltage startup b036 R W 0 minimum reduced voltage start time selection to 255 maximum reduced voltage start time 1327h Display selection b037 R W 00 complete display 01 function spe cific display 02 user setting 03 data comparison display 04 basicdisplay 05 monitor display 1328h Initial screen selection b038 R W 000 202 1329h User parameter automatic b039 R W 00 disabling 01 enabling setting function selection 132Ah Torque limit selection b040 R W 00 quadrant specific setting 01 switching by terminal 02 analog input 03 option 1 132Bh Torque limit 1 fwd power in b041 R W 0 to 200 no 1 4 quadrant mode 132Ch Torque limit 2 rev regen in b042 R W 0 to 200 no 1 4 quadrant mode 132Dh Torque limit 3 rev power in b043 R W 0 to 200 no 1 4 quadrant mode 132Eh Torque limit 4 fwd regen in b044 R W 0 to 200 no 1 4 quadrant mode 132Fh Torque LADSTOP selection b045 R W 00 disabling 01 enabling 1330h Reverse rotation prevention b046 R W 00 disabling 01 enabling selec
392. nal before the FW or REV commands For jogging operation turn JG termi nal ON at first and then turn FW or RV terminal on FW When jogging stop mode A039 02 or m 05 DC braking data is needed During jogging operation frequency can be set with output frequency set ting F001 Jogging does not use an acceleration ramp so we recommend setting the jogging frequency A038 to 5 Hz or less to prevent tripping To enable the Run key on the digital operator for jog input set the value 01 terminal mode in A002 Run command source JG Motor Speed Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Jogging Inverter is in Run Mode output to motor runs at jog parameter frequency Inverter is in Stop Mode 100 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 Option Terminal Function State Description Code Symbol Name Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Example requires input configura Required settings AQ02 0 AN38 gt B082 tion see page 153 AN38 gt 0 A039 Notes e No jogging operation is performed when the set value of jogging frequency A038 is smaller than the start frequency 6082 or the value is 0 Hz See I O specs on page 195 e Be sure to stop the motor when switching the function JG ON or OFF 3 5 4 Torque Control Algorithms The inverter generates the motor out Inverter Torque Control Algorithms put according to the V f algorithm selected Parameter A044 se
393. nction Defaults Description Output frequency setting monitor Standard default target fre quency that determines con stant motor speed range is 0 0 start frequency to maximum frequency A004 Acceleration time 1 0 00 to 3600 00 2nd acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 2nd deceleration time 1 Operator rotation direction Two options select codes selection 00 Forward 01 Reverse The lower limit of the acceleration deceleration time F002 F003 has been changed to 0 00s With this setting the inverter will operate automatically like if the LAC digital input was trigger from a digital input This means that refer ence speed is directly applied to the output without any ramp as soon as the FW RV commands are activated In the same way 0 Hz will be applied directly on the output when the FW RV command is turned off Acceleration and deceleration can be set via Drive Programming as well via the following parameter Run Mode Func Description eae ae ce ean kua P03 Acceleration Deceleration time Two options select codes input type 00 Via Digital Operator 03 Via Drive Programming 89 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 3 5 A Group Standard Functions 90 The inverter provides flexibility in how you control Run Stop operation and set the output frequency motor speed It has other control sources that can override the A00 1 AQde settings
394. nction input 7 selection 06 Multi function input 1 operation selection 00 x we x x x KY KY x Multi function input 2 operation selection 00 Multi function input 3 operation selection 00 Multi function input 4 operation selection 00 Multi function input 5 operation selection 00 Multi function input 6 operation selection 00 Multi function input 7 operation selection 00 Multi function output terminal 11 selection 00 Multi function output terminal 12 selection 01 Relay output AL2 AL1 function selection 05 EO terminal selection 07 AM selection 00 Digital current monitor reference value Rated current Multi function output terminal 11 contact selection 00 Multi function output terminal 12 contact selection 00 Relay output AL2 AL1 contact selection 01 Light load signal output mode 01 Light load detection level Rated current Overload warning signal output mode 01 Overload warning level Overload warning level 2nd motor Rated current Rated current Arrival frequency during acceleration 0 00 Arrival frequency during deceleration 0 00 PID deviation excessive level Arrival frequency during acceleration 2 Arrival frequency during deceleration 2 365 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Section C 2
395. ngle coil Coil status changes are as follows Data Coil Status Note 1 Note 2 304 OFF to ON ON to OFF Change data high order FFh 00h Change data low order 00h 00h An example follows note that to command the inverter set AO02 03 e Sending a RUN command to an inverter having slave address 8 e This example writes in coil number 1 Query Field Name Slave address 1 Response Example Hex Field Name Example Hex Slave address Function code Function code Coil start address 2 high order Coil start address 2 high order Coil start address 2 low order Coil start address 2 low order Change data high order Change data high order Change data low order Change data low order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 low order CRC 16 low order No response is made for a broadcasting query The PDU Coils are addressed starting at zero Therefore coils numbered 1 31 are addressed as 0 30 Coil address value transmitted on Modbus line is 1 less than the Coil Number When writing in a selected coil fails see the exception response Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 Write in Holding Register 06h This function writes data in a specified holding register An example follows e Write 50 Hz as the first Multi speed O A020 in an inverter having slave ad
396. not be obvious It allows you to determine whether or not an inverter power loss causes the relay to change state The Relay shown with inverter default relay configuration is the Alarm power ON Alarm Signal OFF Signal 026 05 as shown to the right And C036 0 sets the relay to normally closed relay coil normally energized The reason for this is that a typical sys tem design will require an inverter power loss to assert an alarm signal to external devices The relay can be used for other intelli inverter toaic gent output signals such as the Run circuit board Signal set O26 00 For these remain ing output signal types the relay coil typ ically must NOT change state upon inverter power loss set 036 00 The figure to the right shows the relay set Relay shown with inverter tings for the Run Signal output power ON Run Signal OFF If you assign the relay an output signal other than the Alarm Signal the inverter can still have an Alarm Signal output In this case you can assign it to terminal 11 providing an open collector output Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 4 Output Signal ON OFF Delay Function Intelligent outputs including terminals 11 and the output relay have configu rable signal transition delays Each output can delay either the OFF to ON or ON to OF F transitions or both Signal transition delays are variable from 0 1 to 100 0 seconds This feature
397. nput Settings Input Range Settings The parameters in the following table adjust the input characteristics of the analog current input When using the inputs to command the inverter output frequency these parameters adjust the starting and ending ranges for the current as well as the output frequency range Related charac teristic diagrams are located in 3 5 2 Analog Input Settings on page 93 Analog sampling setting is the value specified in AQ 16 A Function Defaults Description Aid Ol input active range start The output frequency correspond x 0 00 Hz frequency ing to the analog input range start ing point range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Aide Ol input active range end The output frequency correspond x 0 00 Hz frequency ing to the current input range end ing point range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz A 103 Ol input active range start ratio The starting point offset for the x 20 current input range range is 0 to Ol end ratio Ai04 Ol input active range end ratio The ending point offset for the x 100 current input range range is Ol start ratio to 100 A105 Ol input start frequency enable Two options select codes x 00 00 Start FQ Use Ol start frequency A101 O1 0 Hz Refer to parameter Ad to AG IS for analog voltage input 118 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 Analog Input Calculate Function The inverter can mathematically combine
398. nput power is disconnected before performing maintenance This equipment has high leakage current and must be permanently fixed hard wire to earth ground via two independent cables vii General Precautions Read These First 2 viii N WARNING A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution Note Rotating shafts and above ground electrical potentials can be hazardous Therefore make sure that all electrical work conform to the National Electrical Codes and local regulations Installation alignment and maintenance must be performed only by qualified personnel a Class motor must be connected to earth ground via low resistive path lt 0 1 b Any motor used must be of a suitable rating c Motors may have hazardous moving path In this event suitable protec tion must be provided Alarm connection may contain hazardous live voltage even when inverter is disconnected When removing the front cover for maintenance or inspection confirm that incoming power for alarm connection is completely disconnected Hazardous main terminals for any interconnection motor contact breaker filter etc must be inaccessible in the final installation The equipment is intended for installation in a cabinet The end application must be in accordance with BS EN60204 1 Refer to the section Choosing a Mounting Location on page 29 The diagram dimensions are to be suitably amended for your application
399. ns the outputs OFF The high per formance MX2 can rotate at a very slow speed with high torque output but not zero must use servo systems with position feedback for that feature This characteristic means you must use a mechanical brake for some applications Interpreting the Display First refer to the output frequency display read out The maximum frequency setting parameter A044 defaults to 50 Hz or 60 Hz Europe and United States respectively for your application Example Suppose a 4 pole motor is rated for 60 Hz operation so the inverter is configured to output 60 Hz at full scale Use the following formula to calcu late the rpm Frequency x 60 Frequency x 120 _ 60x120 Pairs of poles of poles 4 Speed in RPM 1800 RPM The theoretical speed for the motor is 1800 rom speed of torque vector rotation However the motor cannot generate torque unless its shaft turns at a slightly different speed This difference is called slip So it s common to see a rated speed of approximately 1750 rpm on a 60 Hz 4 pole motor Using a tachometer to measure shaft speed you can see the difference between the inverter output frequency and the actual motor speed The slip increases slightly as the motor s load increases This is why the inverter output value is called frequency since it is not exactly equal to motor speed Run Stop Versus Monitor Program Modes The Run LED on the inverter is ON in Run Mode and OFF in Stop
400. nse from the inverter is the sum of the silent interval 3 5 characters long C078 transmission latency time e The master must provide a time period of the silent interval 3 5 charac ters long or longer before sending another query to an inverter after receiving a response from the inverter Normal response e When receiving a query that contains a function code of Loopback 08h the inverter returns a response of the same content of the query e When receiving a query that contains a function code of Write in Register or Coil 05h O6h OFh or 10h the inverter directly returns the query as a response e When receiving a query that contains a function code of Read Register or Coil 01h or O3h the inverter returns as a response the read data together with the same slave address and function code as those of the query Response when an error occurs e When finding any error in a query except for a transmission error the inverter returns an exception response without executing anything e You can check the error by the function code in the response The function code of the exception response is the sum of the function code of the query and 80h e The content of the error is known from the exception code Field Configuration Slave address Function code Exception code CRC 16 Exception Code Description The specified function is not supported The specified function is not found The format of the specified
401. nt for the PID setpoint and for the upper and lower limits The output frequency in Hz is superimposed onto the same diagram When the system control begins the following events occur in sequence in the timing diagram 1 2 FBV to Stage 2 FW Stage 1 inverter turns ON via the FW Run command Stage 1 inverter turns ON the FBV output because the PV is below the PV low limit 053 So Stage 2 is assisting in loop error correction from the beginning The PV rises and eventually exceeds the PV high limit 052e Stage 1 in verter then turns OFF the FBV output to Stage 2 since the boost is no longer needed When the PV begins decreasing only Stage 1 is operating and it is in the linear control range This region is where a properly configured system will operate most often The PV continues to decrease until it crosses under the PV low limit ap parent external process disturbance Stage 1 inverter turns ON the FBV output and Stage 2 inverter is assisting again After the PV rises above the PV low limit the FW Run command to Stage 1 inverter turns OFF as in a system shutdown Stage 1 inverter enters Stop Mode and automatically turns OFF the FBV output which causes Stage 2 inverter to also stop Hz Output frequency PID feedback PV PV high limit cose b Se re ee E eee PID setpoint SP ce ae DE Pa a EEE x oe PV low limit 053 4 N
402. nts of dQd display Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Display limitation Description Valid for inputs Coo 1 C007 Required settings 4 5 33 Preset position PQ083 value is set to current position Option Terminal Code Symbol Function Name Preset position Description Valid for inputs Coo i coo Required settings 224 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 Using Intelligent Output Terminals The intelligent output terminals are programmable in a similar way to the intel ligent input terminals The inverter has several output functions that you can assign individually to two physical logic outputs One of the outputs is an open collector transistor and the other output is the alarm relay form C nor mally open and normally closed contacts The relay is assigned the alarm function by default but you can assign it to any of the functions that the open collector output uses 4 6 1 Sinking Outputs Open Collector The open collector transistor output can handle up to 50 mA We highly recommend that you use an external power source as shown at the right It must be capable of providing at least 50 mA to drive the output at full load To drive loads that require more than 50 mA use external relay circuits as shown below right Logic output common 4 6 2 Sinking Outputs Open Collector If you need output current gre
403. o reset the alarm by turning OFF the Run com Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 mand per this example or applying a reset Then the Run command can turn ON again and start the inverter output Run command FW RV USP terminal Alarm output terminal Inverter output frequency Inverter power supply Alarm cleared command Events Eid Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Unattended On powerup the inverter will not Start resume a Run command Protection On powerup the inverter will resume a Run command that was active before power loss Valid for inputs C00 Co07 Required settings none Notes e Note that when a USP error occurs and it is canceled by a reset from a RS termi nal input the inverter restarts running immediately Even when the trip state is canceled by turning the terminal RS ON and OFF after an under voltage protection E09 occurs the USP function will be performed When the running command is active immediately after the power is turned ON a USP error will occur When this function is used wait for at least 3 seconds after the powerup to generate a Run command 4 5 6 Commercial switch The commercial power source switching function allows you to switch the power supply between the inverter and commercial power supply to your system of which the load causes a considerable moment of inertia You can use the inverter to accelerate and de
404. oard Otherwise there is a danger of fire due to wire breakage and or injury to personnel 6 1 2 General Precautions and Notes e Always keep the unit clean so that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the inverter e Take special care in regard to breaking wires or making connection mis takes e Firmly connect terminals and connectors e Keep electronic equipment away from moisture and oil Dust steel filings and other foreign matter can damage insulation causing unexpected accidents so take special care 6 1 3 Inspection Items This chapter provides instructions or checklists for these inspection items e Daily inspection e Periodical inspection approximately once a year e Insulation resistance Megger test approximately once two years 267 Troubleshooting Section 6 1 6 1 4 Troubleshooting Tips 268 The table below lists typical symptoms and the corresponding solution s 1 Inverter does not power up Possible Cause s Corrective Action Power cable is incorrectly wired Check input wiring Short bar or DCL between P and PD is disconnected Install short bar or DCL between P and PD terminal Power cable is broken 2 Motor does not start Check input wiring Possible Cause s Corrective Action Incorrect RUN command source is selected Check RUN command selection AQQe2 for correct source Ex Terminal digital input 01 Operator RUN key 02 Incorrect
405. ode selection 00 Do not change Reserved Communication selection 00 Modbus RTU 01 EzCOM 02 EzCOM lt administrator gt Reserved EzCOM start adr of master EzCOM end adr of master 8 EzCOM starting trigger UP DWN selection 1 1 00 00 not storing the frequency data 8 485 input 01 Always ON 01 storing the frequency data Reset selection 00 trip reset at power on 01 trip reset when the power is OFF 02 enabled only during trip 03 trip reset only Restart frequency matching selection 00 0 Hz start 01 frequency matching start 02 active frequency matching restart UP DWN clear mode 00 OHz 01 Pow ON data EO gain setting 50 to 200 TA AM gain setting 50 to 200 T Reserved Inaccessible T AM bias setting 0 to 100 T Reserved T Overload warning level 2 0 0 to 3 20 x Rated current 0 1 Reserved Output 11 ON delay 0 to 1000 0 1 sec Output 11 OFF delay 0 to 1000 0 1 sec Output 12 ON delay 0 to 1000 0 1 sec Output 12 OFF delay 0 to 1000 0 1 sec Reserved Relay output ON delay 0 to 1000 0 1 sec Relay output OFF delay 0 to 1000 0 1 sec Logic output signal 1 selection 1 Same as the settings of C021 to C026 except those of LOG1 to LOG6 OPO no
406. oe ee eee 0 1 aa a a Analog input o increase given Noise spikes 3 5 3 Multi speed and Jog Frequency Setting Multi speed The MX2 inverter has the capability to store and output up to 16 preset frequencies to the motor A020 to AQIS As in traditional motion ter minology we call this multi speed profile capability These preset frequencies are selected by means of digital inputs to the inverter The inverter applies the current acceleration or deceleration setting to change from the current output frequency to the new one The first multi speed setting is duplicated for the second motor settings the remaining 15 multi speeds apply only to the first motor A Function Defaults Description Multi step speed selection Select codes 00 Binary operation 16 speeds selectable with 4 terminals D I Bit operation 8 speeds selectable with 7 terminals Multi step speed reference 0 Defines the first speed of a multi speed profile range is 0 00 start frequency to 400Hz Adco Speed 0 1st motor 2nd multi step speed reference 0 Defines the first speed of a multi speed profile or a 2 motor range is 0 00 start frequency to 400Hz Aeeo Speed 0 2nd motor Multi step speed reference 1 to 15 Defines 15 more speeds range is 0 00 start frequency to 400 Hz Ade Speed 1 AGIS Speed15 Ade AQIS Multi step speed position Masks the transition time when determination time changing the com
407. of view even conducted emission and radiated emission passed without the input choke 376 Omron EMC Recommendations Section D 2 D 2 Omron EMC Recommendations N WARNING This equipment should be installed adjusted and serviced by qualified personal familiar with construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and conditions 1 The power supply to MX2 inverters must meet these specifications e Voltage fluctuation 10 or less e Voltage imbalance 3 or less e Frequency variation 4 or less e Voltage distortion THD 10 or less 2 Installation measure e Use a filter designed for MX2 inverter Refer to the instruction of the appli cable external EMC filter 3 Wiring e Shielded wire screened cable is required for motor wiring and the length must be 25 meter or less e If the motor cable length exceeds the value shown above use output choke to avoid unexpected problem due to the leakage current from the motor cable e Lowering carrier frequency will help to satisfy EMC requirements e Separate the power input and motor wiring from the signal process circuit wiring 4 Environmental conditions when using a filter follow these guidelines e Ambient temperature 10 to 40 C e Humidity 20 to 90 RH non condensing e Vibration 5 9 m sec2 0 6 G 10
408. oftware simulation of the keypad devices A semiconductor device that has a voltage current characteristic that allows current to flow only in one direction with negligible leakage current in the reverse direction See also Rectifier 1 The percent of time a square wave of fixed frequency is ON high versus OFF low 2 The ratio of operating time of a device such as a motor to its resting time This parameter usually is specified in association with the allowable ther mal rise for the device For the MX2 inverter models the braking unit and braking resistor are optional external components The dynamic braking feature shunts the motor gener ated EMF energy into a special braking resistor The added dissipation brak ing torque is effective at higher speeds having a reduced effect as the motor nears a stop In process control the error is the difference between the desired value or set point SP and the actual value of a the process variable PV See also Pro cess Variable and PID Loop Electromagnetic Interference In motor drive systems the switching of high currents and voltages creates the possibility of generating radiated electrical noise that may interfere with the operation of nearby sensitive electrical instru ments or devices Certain aspects of an installation such as long motor lead wire lengths tend to increase the chance of EMI Omron provides accessory filter components you can install to decrease the le
409. on See the list of inverter trip factors below 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Output current at tripping 0 01 A DC input voltage at tripping 1 V Cumulative running time at tripping 1 h Cumulative power on time at tripping 1 h 004Eh Warning monitor Warning code 0 to 385 004Fh to 006Ch reserved 006Dh to O8Efh reserved 0900h Writing to EEPROM 0 Motor constant recalculation 1 Save all data in EEPROM Other Motor constant recalculation and save all data in EEPROM Unused Inaccessible EEPROM write mode 0 invalid 1 valid 320 Unused Note 1 Note 2 Inaccessible Assume that the rated current of the inverter is 1000 value after the decimal point will be ignored Note 3 executed If a number not less than 1000 100 0 seconds is specified the second 0902h setting is referred for one time when following 06h command is ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 List of inverter trip factors Upper part of trip factor code Lower part of trip factor code indicating the factor indicating the inverter status Name Name No trip factor 0 Resetting Over current event while at constant speed Stopping Over current event during deceleration Decelerating Over current event during acceleration Constant speed operation Over current event during other conditions Accelerating Overload protection Operating
410. on A and deceleration could be repeated in very short cycle 278 Restoring Factory Default Settings Section 6 3 6 3 Restoring Factory Default Settings You can restore all inverter parameters to the original factory default settings according to area of use After initializing the inverter use the powerup test in Chapter 2 to get the motor running again If operation mode is changed inverter must be initialized to activate new mode To initialize the inverter fol low the steps below 1 Select initialization mode in b084 If b084 02 03 or OY select initialization target data in b094 If b084 02 03 or O4 select country code in 6085 Set 0 1 iN b 60 The following display appears for a few seconds and initialization is com pleted with d00 I displayed aP on Display during initialization Initialization of trip history Initialization mode Initialization for area A Initialization for area B N The left digit rotates during initialization gt d001 q Blinking alternately Operation HD mode mode after initialization ND mode Name Description bO8Y Initialization Select initialized data five option codes selection 00 no Clears the trip monitor DI Trip data Initializes data Oc Parameters Clears the trip monitor and initializes data D3 Trip Param Clears the trip monitor and parameters OY Trp Prm EzSQ Clears the trip monitor parameters and Drive program b094 Initializ
411. ons The resulting ener gy savings usually pays for the inverter in a relatively short time Q The term inverter is a little confusing since we also use drive and amplifier to describe the electronic unit that controls a motor What does inverter mean A The term inverter drive and amplifier are used somewhat interchange ably in industry Nowadays the term drive variable frequency drive vari able speed drive and inverter are generally used to describe electronic microprocessor based motor speed controllers In the past variable speed drive also referred to various mechanical means to vary speed Am plifier is a term almost exclusively used to describe drives for servo or step per motors Q Although the MX2 inverter is a variable speed drive can use it in a fixed speed application A Yes sometimes an inverter can be used simply as a soft start device providing controlled acceleration and deceleration to a fixed speed Other functions of the MX2 may be useful in such applications as well However using a variable speed drive can benefit many types of industrial and com mercial motor applications by providing controlled acceleration and decel eration high torque at low speeds and energy savings over alternative solutions Q Can use an inverter and AC induction motor in a positioning application A That depends on the required precision and the slowest speed the mo tor must turn
412. or Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenerative braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a sequence that enables the inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Transporting and Installation Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction e Do not hold by the terminal block cover but hold by the fins during trans portation e Do not connect any load other than a three phase inductive motor to the U V and W output terminals xi Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual 3 xii A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution N WARNING Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main power supply Adjustable frequency inverter with integrated CE filters and shielded screened motor cables have a higher leakage current toward earth GND Especially at the moment of switching ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupters Because of the rectifier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch off function through small amounts Of DC CUITENT arnari na E a S a 50 Please
413. or connected to terminal PTC 5 and L is more than 3 KQ 10 the inverter enters the Trip Mode turns OFF the output to the motor and indicates the trip status 35 Use this function to protect the motor from overheating Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Thermistor When a thermistor is connected to Thermal terminals 5 and L the inverter Protection checks for over temperature and will cause trip E35 and turn OFF the output to the motor An open circuit in the thermistor causes a trip and the inverter turns OFF the output Valid for inputs C00 I only Example requires input configura Required settings none tion see page 153 Notes ais e Be sure the thermistor is connected to termi nals 5 and L If the resistance is above the threshold the inverter will trip When the ro motor cools down enough the thermistor k resistance will change enough to permit you to clear the error Press the STOP Reset key to clear the error 211 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 9 Three wire Interface Operation 212 The 3 wire interface is an industry standard motor control interface This func tion uses two inputs for momentary contact start stop control and a third for selecting forward or reverse direction To implement the 3 wire interface assign 20 STA Start 2 STP Stop and 22 F R Forward Reverse to three of the intelligent input terminals
414. or operates normally UP DWN function decelerated Decelerates decreases output frequency motor from current frequency Output to motor operates normally UP DWN function data clear Clears the UP DWN frequency memory by forcing it to equal the set frequency parameter F001 Setting C I0 I must be set 00 to enable this function to work UP DWN frequency memory is not changed Forced operator Forces the source of the output frequency setting ADU and the source of the Run command AuGe to be from the digital operator Source of output frequency set by ADO I and source of Run command set by ADOL is used Multi step speed setting bit 1 Bit encoded speed select Bit 1 logical 1 Bit encoded speed select Bit 1 logical 0 Multi step speed setting bit 2 Bit encoded speed select Bit 2 logical 1 Bit encoded speed select Bit 2 logical 0 Multi step speed setting bit 3 Bit encoded speed select Bit 3 logical 1 Bit encoded speed select Bit 3 logical 0 Multi step speed setting bit 4 Bit encoded speed select Bit 4 logical 1 Bit encoded speed select Bit 4 logical 0 Multi step speed setting bit 5 Bit encoded speed select Bit 5 logical 1 Bit encoded speed select Bit 5 logical 0 Multi step speed setting bit 6 Bit encoded speed select Bit 6 logical 1 Bit encoded speed select Bit 6 logical 0 Multi step speed setting bit 7 Bit en
415. or solely via cable shield is not permitted as a protective conductor connection The filter must be solidly and permanently connected with the ground potential so as to preclude the danger of electric shock upon touching the filter if a fault occurs To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10 mm cross sectional area Connect a second grounding conductor using a separate grounding ter minal parallel to the protective conductor The cross section of each sin gle protective conductor terminal must be sized for the required nominal load 375 CE EMC Installation Guidelines Section D 1 D 1 2 Installation for MX2 series Model 3 ph 200 V class and 3 ph 400 V class are the same concept for the installation Power supply 1 ph 200 V The filter is a footprint type so it is located between the inverter and the metal plate Remove the insulation material coating of the earth contact portions so to obtain good grounding condition EMC filter Foot print th line is connected to the atsink of the inverter PE terminal for bigger models Shielded cable Metal plate earth Cable clamp Both earth portions of the shielded cable must be connected to the earth point by cable clamps Input choke or equipment to reduce harmonic current is necessary for CE marking IEC 61000 3 2 and IEC61000 3 4 from the harmonic current point
416. ord in b190 and or b192 e How to delete Password 1 Make password authentication 2 Set 0000 in b190 and or b192 3 Password has been deleted and all the password information is cleared 3 7 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions Note Note The seven input terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 can be configured for any of 72 different functions The next two tables show how to configure the seven terminals The inputs are logical in that they are either OFF or ON We define these states as OFF 0 and ON 1 The inverter comes with default options for the seven terminals These set tings are initially unique each one having its own setting Note that different selection on parameter b085 may result in different default settings You can use any option on any terminal and even use the same option twice to create a logical OR though usually not required Terminals 8 and 4 have the ability to be logical inputs and to be safety inputs in case of safe stop function is selected Terminal 5 has the ability to be a logical input and to be an analog input for a thermistor device when PTC function option code 19 is assigned to that ter minal 3 7 1 Input Terminal Configuration Multi function input 1 selection 0 to 91 no Functions and Options The function codes in the following table let you assign one of seventy two options to any of the seven logic inputs for the MX2 inverters The functions CO
417. orten its service life EEPROM Write Mode e If the holding register write command 06h etc is used to write 1 into the holding register for EEPROM write mode 0902h the EEPROM write mode is cancelled Difference between ENTER Command and EEPROM Write Mode Enter command EEPROM write mode Master 3G3MX2 Master 3G3MX2 902h 1 Write into RAM Parameter change Parameter change Write into RAM Parameter change EEPROM write mode Write into RAM enabled Parameter change Write into RAM and EEPROM changed data only Enter command Parameter change 900h 1 Write all data Write into RAM into EEPROM into O The EEPROM write mode remains effective only for one parameter change 311 Network Protocol Reference B 3 6 EZCOM Peer to Peer communication e Besides standard Modbus RTU communication slave MX2 supports Peer to Peer communication between multiple inverters e The max number of inverter in the network is up to 247 32 without 312 The max number of master inverter is 8 repeater Section B 3 e One administrator inverter is necessary in the network and the other inverters behave as master or slave e Be sure to set station No 1 as an administrator inverter which controls master inverter according to user setting The others will be slave invert ers An admin inverter is fixed but a master inverter always turns by rota tion For this reason an admin inverter can
418. ot active 205 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 4 5 2 Set Second Motor Special Set If you assign the SET function to an intelligent input terminal you can select between two sets of motor parameters The second parameters store an alter nate set of motor characteristics When the terminal SET is turned ON the inverter will use the second set of parameters to generate the frequency out put to the motor When changing the state of the SET input terminal the change will not take effect until the inverter is stopped 206 Section 4 5 When you turn ON the SET input the inverter operates per the second set of parameters When the terminal is turned OFF the output function returns to the original settings first set of motor parameters Refer to Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors on page 172 for details Parameters Parameters FO0e FeOe AQ93 Ae93 v F003 F203 v AD94 A294 v ADO 1I A20 v AD95 A295 v Agoe Aeoe v AD96 R296 v AQ03 Ae03 v bD Ie be Ie v AD04 A204 v b0 13 be 13 v AD2D A220 v bOe t bee v AOY AHI v E bO22 beee v AQYe AC42 v b0e3 bee3 v a AD43 A243 v COY 1 C24 1 v AD49 A244 v HO0e He0e v AD45 A245 v z H003 H203 v AQY6 ACHE v HO04 Heo4 v A047 A247 v HD05 He05 v ADE 1 A26 v HD06 H206 v AObe Acbe v 7 HOCO HOe4 Rog VABI v HeeO Heed y
419. output mode of Over C059 R W 00 output during acceleration decelera under torque tion and constant speed operation 01 output only during constant speed operation 1440h Reserved aa 1441h Thermal warning level C061 R W 0 to 100 1 1442h Reserved 1443h 0 Hz detection level C063 R W O to 10000 0 01 Hz 1444h Fin overheat warning level C064 R W 0 to 110 1 C 1445h to Reserved aa a 144Ah 144Bh Communication speed selection C071 R W 03 2400bps 04 4800bps Baud rate selection 05 9600bps 06 19 2kbps 07 38 4kbps 08 57 6kbps 09 76 8kbps 10 115 2kbps 144Ch Communication station No C072 R W 1 to 247 Selection 144Dh __ Reserved z 144Eh Communication parity selection C074 R W 00 no parity 01 even parity 02 odd parity 144Fh Communication stop bit C075 R W 1 1 bit 2 2 bits selection 334 ModBus Data Listing Function name Communication error selection Function Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 00 trip 01 tripping after deceleration stop 02 ignore 03 free run stop 04 deceleration stop Data resolution Communication error timeout 0 to 9999 0 01 sec Communication wait time 0 to 1000 1 msec Reserved O adjustment 0 to 2000 0 1 Ol adjustment 0 to 2000 0 1 Reserved Thermistor adjustment 0 to 2000 Reserved Debug m
420. p Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 4 Current limitation Related Functions 128 Overload Restriction b If Motor the inverters output current current Restriction area exceeds a preset current level you specify during acceleration or constant speed the overload restriction feature automatically reduces the output frequency during powering drive and can increase the speed during Output regeneration to restrict the over frequency load This feature does not gen erate an alarm or trip event You can instruct the inverter to apply overload restriction only during constant speed thus allowing higher currents for acceleration Or you may use the same threshold for both acceleration and constant speed You can specify two types of overload restriction operation by setting func tional items 602 I bOe 2 b023 and b0C4 b02S bOcb separately To switch between these two is done by assigning 39 OLR to an intelligent input ter minal and make it ON OFF When the inverter detects an overload it must decelerate the motor to reduce the current until it is less than the threshold You can choose the rate of decel eration that the inverter uses to lower the output current See ce is Onn OA NE Trip Suppression function moni Motor Approx 150 of the inverter tors the motor current and current rated current actively changes the output fre quency profile to maintain the motor current within the limits
421. p Trip after deceleration stop 02 Ignore 03 Free RUN Free run stop 04 Decel Stop Deceleration stop Communication error timeout Comm Watchdog timer period range is 0 00 to 99 99 sec Communication wait time Time the inverter waits after receiving a message before it transmits Range is 0 to 1000 ms Serial comms mode 00 Standard 01 Free mapping Modbus external register 1 to 10 Range is 0000h to FFFFh Modbus register format 1 to 10 00 Unsigned 01 Signed Modbus register scaling 1 to 10 Range is 0 001 to 65 535 Modbus internal register 1 to 10 Range is 0000h to FFFFh Big Little endian selection 00 Big endian 01 Little endian 02 Special endian Note When you change any of the parameters above the inverter power must be rebooted in order to activate new parameters Instead of rebooting turning ON OFF of reset terminal works as same 297 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 B 3 Network Protocol Reference B 3 1 Transmission procedure The transmission between the external control equipment and the inverter takes the procedure below Query External control equipment Response Inverter Latency time silent interval plus C078 setting Query A frame sent from the external control equipment to the inverter e Response A frame returned from inverter to the external control equip ment The inverter returns the response only after the inverte
422. p includes the L Ol O and H terminals on the control connector which provide for Voltage O or Current Ol input All analog input signals must use the analog ground L If you use either the voltage or current ana log input you must select one of them using the logic input terminal function AT analog type Refer to the table on next page show ing the activation of each analog input by combination of A005 set parameter and AT terminal condition The AT terminal function is covered in Analog Input Current Voltage Select in section 4 Remember that you must also set AGG O I to select analog input as the frequency source Section 4 7 Description Dedicated to terminal 11 f 1 Inverter output terminal circuit If no logic input terminal is configured for the AT function then inverter rec ognizes that AT OFF and MCU recognizes O Ol as analog input In case either O or Ol is to be refered please ground the other Using an external potentiometer is a com mon way to control the inverter output fre quency and a good way to learn how to use the analog inputs The potentiometer uses the built in 10 V reference H and the analog ground L for excitation and the voltage input O for the signal By default the AT terminal selects the voltage input when it is OFF Take care to use the proper resistance for the potentiometer which is 1 2 kQ 2 Watts Voltage Input The vol
423. p time and changes the output speed immediately according to the set speed Please refer to chapter 3 for the detailed description of the function Terminal Function Description Symbol Name LAD cancel Disabling the set ramp time and inverter output immediately follows the speed command Accelerates and decelerates according to the set ramp time Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings 4 5 17 Position Deviation Clear This function is for clearing the accumulated pulse numbers in case of posi tioning Please refer to chapter 3 for the detailed description of the function Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Position Clears the accumulated pulse deviation numbers clear Does not clear the pulse numbers Valid for inputs C00 1 C007 Required settings 216 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 18 Frequency Addition The inverter can add or subtract an offset value to the output frequency set ting which is specified by AGG will work with any of the five possible sources The ADD Frequency is a value you can store in parameter A 145 The ADD Fre quency is summed with or subtracted from the output frequency setting only when the ADD terminal is ON Function A H6 selects whether to add or sub tract By configuring an intelligent input as the ADD terminal your applica tion can selectively apply the fixed value in A145 to offse
424. peed operation For safety to personnel you must connect the motor chassis ground to the ground connection at the bottom of the inverter housing Notice the three connections to the motor do not include one marked Neutral or Return The motor represents a balanced Y impedance to the inverter so there is no need for a separate return In other words each of the three Hot connections serves also as a return for the other connections because of their phase relationship 15 Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives Section 1 3 The Omron inverter is a rugged and reliable device The intention is for the inverter to assume the role of controlling power to the motor during all normal operations Therefore this manual instructs you not to switch off power to the inverter while the motor is running unless it is an emergency stop Also do not install or use disconnect switches in the wiring from the inverter to the motor except thermal disconnect Of course safety related devices such as fuses must be in the design to break power during a malfunction as required by NEC and local codes 1 3 6 Intelligent Functions and Parameters 1 3 7 Braking 16 Much of this manual is devoted to describing how to use inverter functions and how to configure inverter parameters The inverter is micro processor controlled and has many independent functions The microprocessor has an on board EEPROM for parameter storage The in
425. play After using the keypad for parameter editing omron RUN PWR AN it s a good idea to switch the inverter from r s Program Mode to Monitor Mode The PRG PRG y LED will be OFF and the Hertz or Ampere a a eee sien the motor speed indirectly by viewing the inverter s out put frequency The output frequency must not be confused with base frequency 50 60 Hz of the motor or the carrier fre quency switching frequency of the inverter in the kHz range The monitoring functions are in the D list located near the top left of the Keypad Navigation Map on page 60 Output frequency speed set Resuming keypad operation from the previ ous table follow the steps below Action Display Func Parameter Starting point Hoo Motor poles parameter Press the c key four times F is selected Press the key Set frequency displayed 2 5 5 Running the Motor If you have programmed all the parameters up to this point you re ready to run the motor First review this checklist Verify the power LED is ON If not check the power connections Verify the Run Key Enable LED is ON If it is OFF check the ABDe setting Verify the PRG LED is OFF If it is ON review the instructions above Make sure the motor is disconnected from any mechanical load Now press the RUN key on the keypad The RUN LED will turn ON Press the A key for a few seconds
426. ple posi tioning function is enabled P012 02 the inverter turns Brake ON when position management was terminated At this time the inverter automatically ignores b127 and applies Creep sped setting P015 as Brake on frequency 188 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 In the case of the above the DB does not operate at the time of the position management end FW f S f1 Hz F001 Hz _ P015 instead of b127 P Not DB b125 p 3 i t b121 Current position Position ref POK BRK Mechanical brake 3 9 11 Drive Programming User Parameter Related Settings Please refer to SECTION 4 Operations and Monitoring on page 191 for the detailed description of the function P Function Defaults Func Description EU Code P 00 Drive Program parameter Each set range is 0 65535 U 00 to U 31 189 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 190 4 1 Introduction SECTION 4 Operations and Monitoring The previous material in Chapter 3 gave a reference listing of all the program mable functions of the inverter We suggest that you first scan through the list ing of inverter functions to fain a general familiarity This chapter will build on that knowledge in the following ways 1 Related functions Some parameters interact with or depend on the set tings in other functions This chapter lists required settings for a program mable function to se
427. positioning operation e If positioning command data is 0 at SPD turning OFF the inverter start deceleration immediately Depending on DC braking setting motor could be hunting e While SPD terminal is ON rotating direction depends on RUN command Be sure to check rotating direction after switching to positioning operation Output Frequency Start position counting Speed control Position control Time Target position SPD input ene Parameter nem Data C001 C007 Multi function input 1 to 73 SPD Speed position switching 7 selection 3 9 8 Homing function e Two different homing function are available by setting homing mode selec tion P0658 e When trigger signal of homing 10 ORG the inverter starts homing oper ation When homing is completed current position data is reset 0 e Direction of homing is specified in P69 e If homing is not operated position at power up is regarded as home posi tion 0 Data or data range Description Zero return mode o0 Low speed DI High speed 1 Zero return direction o0 FWD Forward side selection pi REV Reverse side Low speed zero return 0 00 to 10 00 Hz frequency High speed zero return 0 00 to 50 00 Hz frequency Multi function input 1 to 69 ORL Zero return limit 7 selection signal 10 ORG Zero return startup signal 187 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 1 Low speed homing P068 00
428. pprox 5 cm from the bottom center of the Inverter body Provide sufficient space around the Inverter because it can become very hot up to 150 C or so Or provide the right air ventilation forced cooling flow when designing the enclosure 31 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 1 phase 3 phase 200 V Inverter capacity kW Ventilation fan Ventilation fan le te lt Inverter Inverter Good example Bad example Keep the Inverter away from heating elements such as a Braking Resistor reactor etc Although side by side installation is possible The ambient temperature of the installation site must not exceed 40 C and the carrier frequency and output current must be derated if side by side installation is used For details check Derating Curves on page 9 Make sure that the humidity in the installation site is within the allowable oper ating range 20 to 90 RH as defined in the standard specifications Heat Radiation from Inverter Load with 100 loss W Efficiency at rated output 3 phase 400 V Inverter capacity kW Load with 100 loss W Efficiency at rated output Z Caution Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to 32 provide adequate ventilation Otherwise the inverter may overheat and cause equipment damage or fire Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3
429. protected Inverter Operation mode d090 Warning monitor displays UIO Moreover the WARNING mode screen displays the following screen 389 390 9 Unprotected Inverter Operation Mode Section F 1 WARNING M1 STOP ALL UIO mode However when changing to Unprotected Inverter Operation mode and a warning occurs the warning code is displayed in d090 Warning monitor The setting procedure for this function is as follows only via operator When UIO digital input is turned on if it is turned off before 60 sec the function is not applied and warranty is kept When UIO digital input is kept active for more than 60 sec the function is effective UIO status flag is enabled and inverter warranty is lost The UIO status history flag is permanently stored in the inverter and cannot be deleted 10 The Unprotected Inverter Operation mode is out of warranty 11 All of responsability of PS PL accident by this function is on the user side OMRON does not accept any liability in case the use of this function leads to the personal or material damage This function is designed in a way that it is not possible to enable inadvertently As well this manual does not contain enough information for enabling it reducing the risk of activation The aditional information for enabling this function has to be requested to OMRON representative OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands
430. pt softer accel eration time to minimize peak currents F002 F202 A092 A292 Motor parameters are forcing too high unneces sary current to the motor HD20 to HO34 or HOODS depending in motor control method A044 A244 If the inverter really can not deliver the current change inverter to a higher power Possible Cause s Corrective Action Short deceleration time Change deceleration time FO03 Fe03 A093 R293 Overvoltage protection function selection during deceleration b 130 is disabled 00 Enable overvoltage suppression b 130 0 1 02 In case the inverter trips due to over voltage despite over voltage suppression is enabled Overvoltage protection integral time setting b 134 or integral time b 135 Check overvoltage protection integral time setting b 134 and integral time b 135 Overvoltage protection level dur ing deceleration b 13 1 is high Set Overvoltage protection level during decelera tion b 13 1 lower 15 Thermal trip E21 Possible Cause s Corrective Action Heat sink is clog Clean the Heat sink 16 Drive Error E30 Possible Cause s Corrective Action Short circuit in output circuit Check the output cables Ground fault Check the output cables and motor Main circuit element damage 17 Thermistor error trip E35 Check the IGBT s Possible Cause s Corrective Action Thermistor is set to input 5 and Check sett
431. put other wise motor constants are not measured properly 8 If auto tuning with motor rotation HOO I 02 is used check the followings points a The motor rotates up to 80 of base frequency Check if it is no prob lem for the application b The motor should not be driven by any other external force c All the brakes should be released d During auto tuning insufficient torque may cause a problem in the load for example a lift may slide down In this case remove the motor from the machine or other load and perform auto tuning with the mo tor alone The measured inertia J is based on the motor alone To ap ply the data add the moment of inertia of the load machine to the measured J data after converting the moment of inertia to the motor shaft data e If the application is with limitation e g lift or boring machine the al lowable rotation limit may be exceeded in auto tuning and the ma chine may be damaged 9 Even when 0 I auto tuning without motor rotation is selected the motor could rotate slightly during auto tuning 175 H Group Motor Constants Functions Section 3 8 10 When performing the auto tuning with one lower size of motor enable the overload restriction function and set the overload restriction level to 150 of the rated current of the motor 11 When deceleration over voltage suppress integral time b 134 is small auto tuning may result in over voltage trip In this case
432. put O Analog current input Ol Remote operator POT VR Operator control EE ON 1 0 Frequency reference selection i Bnsennnnnnnnnnat A001 A201 aces 01 terminal mode Alnputselectfor Calculation calculate function symbol A141 7 A143 Se LITT i Blnputselectfor calculate function G Frequency calculate function Note 1 You can set the inverter output frequency with function F001 only when you have specified 02 for the frequency source setting A001 If the setting of function A001 is other than 02 function F001 operates as the frequency command monitoring function And by setting the frequency set in monitoring active b163 01 you can change the inverter output frequency with function d001 or d007 92 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 3 5 1 Basic Parameter Settings These settings affect the most fundamental behavior of the inverter the out puts to the motor The frequency of the inverter s AC output determines the motor speed You may select from three different sources for the reference speed During application development you may prefer using the potentiome ter but you may switch to an external source control terminal setting in the finished application for example The base frequency and maximum frequency settings interact according to the graph below left The inverter output operation fo
433. put frequency greater than zero Range is start frequency b082 to frequency upper limit AGB I R26 1 0 0 setting is disabled gt 0 0 setting is enabled 2nd frequency upper limit 2nd frequency lower limit 107 108 Jump frequency 1 to 3 Up to 3 output frequencies can be A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 Jump Frequencies Some motors or machines exhibit resonances at partic ular speed s which can be destructive for prolonged running at those speeds The inverter has up to three jump frequencies as shown in the graph The hysteresis around the jump frequencies causes the inverter output to skip around the sensitive frequency values Output frequency Aa aa att AQ6E AGS A053 Frequency command A Function Defaults Description defined for the output to jump past to avoid motor resonances center frequency Range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Output frequency Jump frequency width 1 to 3 Defines the distance from the cen ter frequency at which the jump around occurs Range is 0 00 to 10 00 Hz Acceleration stop Deceleration stop The acceleration stop and decelera tion stop frequency setting allows you to make the inverter wait upon starting the motor or upon decelerating the motor until the motor slip becomes less when the motor load causes a large moment of inertia Use this function if the inverter trips because of overcurrent when start
434. put frequency setting which is specified by AG I will work with any of the five possible sources The ADD Frequency is a value you can store in parameter AHS the ADD Frequency is summed with or subtracted from the output fre quency setting only when the ADD terminal is ON Function A 46 selects whether to add or subtract By configuring an intelligent input as the ADD ter minal your application can selectively apply the fixed value in A IHS to offset positively or negatively the inverter output frequency in real time 119 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 agg Frequency source setting Remote operator POT ey Control terminal 5 N Function FOD setting O ModBus network input O Calculate function output ye Option board 2 Output frequency setting A H6 ADD direction select ADD Intelligent input _ gt A Function Defaults Description Frequency addition amount An offset value that is applied to the output frequency when the ADD terminal is ON Range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Frequency addition direction Two options 00 ADD Add A145 value to out put frequency D 1 SUB Substract A145 value from output frequency Input Range Settings The parameters in the following table adjust the input characteristics of the VR POT meter on external operator input When using the inputs to command th
435. quency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Multi step speed reference 15 A035 high A032 high A035 low 0 or start frequency to maximum frequency 0 01 Hz Reserved Reserved Jogging frequency A038 0 0 Start frequency to 999 0 01 Hz Jogging stop selection A039 00 free running on jogging stop Dis abled in operation 01 deceleration stop on jogging stop Disabled in operation 02 DC injection braking on jogging stop Disabled in operation 03 free running on jogging stop Enabled in operation 04 deceleration stop on jogging stop Enabled in operation 05 DC injection braking on jogging stop Enabled in operation Reserved Torque boost selection 00 manual torque boost 01 automatic torque boost Manual torque boost voltage 0 to 200 0 1 Manual torque boost frequency 0 to 500 0 1 V F characteristics selection 00 VC 01 VP 02 free V f 03 sensorless vector control Output voltage gain 20 to 100 1 compensation gain Automatic torque boost voltage 0 to 255 T Automatic torque boost slip compensation gain 0 to 255 T Reserved DC injection braking enable A051 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 output freq A052 set value DC injection braking frequency A052 0 to 6000 0 0
436. r SF1 SF7 functions can change the motor speed in real time NOTE Speed 0 depends on Add parameter value Digital Input configuration for binary operation Terminal Function Name Symbol CF1 Multi speed Select Bit 0 LSB Description Bin encoded speed select Bit 0 logical 1 Bin encoded speed select Bit 0 logical 0 CF2 Multi speed Select Bit 1 Bin encoded speed select Bit 1 logical 1 Bin encoded speed select Bit 1 logical 0 CF3 Multi speed Select Bit 2 Bin encoded speed select Bit 2 logical 1 Bin encoded speed select Bit 2 logical 0 CF4 Multi speed Select Bit 3 MSB Bin encoded speed select Bit 3 logical 1 Bin encoded speed select Bit 3 logical 0 Valid for inputs COD 1 C007 Required settings Fd I AGO 0e ROZO to A035 When programming the multi speed settings be sure to press the key each time and then set the next multi speed set ting Note that when the key is not pressed no data will be set When a multi speed setting more than 50 Hz 60 Hz is to be set it is necessary to program the maximum frequency A004 high enough to allow that speed Example some CF inputs require input configuration some are default inputs CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1 See I O specs on page 9 and page 195 While using the multi speed capability you can monitor the present frequency with monitor function 40a during each segment of a multi speed oper
437. r 003Fh Coil data 5 21 coil number 0040h 215 coil number 004Fh reserved Unused Coil data 0 21 coil number 0001h 215 coil number OOOFh reserved note 2 Unused Inaccessible Note 1 Above register coil data 0 to 5 is consisted with 16 coil data EZCOM com munication inverter to inverter doesn t support coil but only register is sup porte in case of need to access coil please use above registers Note 2 Be sure not to write into above 1FO2h to 1F1Dh 343 ModBus vi List of registers 2nd control settings Register No Data Listing Function name 2nd acceleration time 1 Function code F202 high F202 low Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 1 to 360000 Data resolution 0 01 sec 2nd deceleration time 1 F203 high F203 low 1 to 360000 0 01 sec vii List o Register No unused Function name Frequency reference selection 2nd motor f registers function modes for the 2nd contr Function code ol setti Inaccessible ngs Monitoring and setting items 00 digital operator 01 terminal 02 operator 03 Modbus communica tion 04 option 06 pulse train fre quency 7 drive programming 10 operation function result Data resolution RUN command selection 2nd motor 01 terminal 02 operator 03 Modbus communication 04 option
438. r 8 P167 R W 0000 to FFFF 16AAh Option I F cmd W register 9 P168 R W 0000 to FFFF 16ABh Option I F cmd W register 10 P169 R W 0000 to FFFF 16ACh Option I F cmd R register 1 P170 R W 0000 to FFFF 16ADh_ Option I F cmd R register 2 P171 R W 0000 to FFFF 16AEh Option I F cmd R register 3 P172 R W _ 0000 to FFFF 16AFh Option I F cmd R register 4 P173 R W 0000 to FFFF 16BOh Option I F cmd R register 5 P174 R W 0000 to FFFF 16Bih Option I F cmd R register 6 P175 R W 0000 to FFFF 16B2h Option I F cmd R register 7 P176 R W 0000 to FFFF 16B3h Option I F cmd R register 8 P177 R W 0000 to FFFF 16B4h Option I F cmd R register 9 P178 R W 0000 to FFFF 7 16B5h Option I F cmd R register 10 P179 R W 0000 to FFFF 16B6h Profibus node address P180 R W 0 to 125 16B7h Profibus clear mode P181 R W 00 clear 01 last value 16B8h Profibus map selection P182 R W 00 PPO 01 Convertional 02 Flexible mode 16B9hto Reserved 16BAh 16BBh CANopen node address P185 R W 0 to 127 341 ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 Register Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Data resolution CAN open communication speed 5 250kbps 6 500kbps 7 800kbps 8 1Mbps 16BDh to 16BFh Unused 16COh CompoNet node address 16C2h DeviceNet node address 16C3h to 16C7h Unused 16C8h Serial comms mode 00 Standard 01
439. r cable the metal PG screw connection the terminal box and the motor housing If necessary carefully remove paint between conducting surfaces Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through installation cables Separate interfering cables with 0 25 m minimum from cables susceptible to interference A particularly critical point is laying parallel cables over longer distances If two cables intersect one crosses over the other the interference is smallest if they intersect at an angle of 90 Cables suscep tible to interference should therefore only intersect motor cables interme diate circuit cables or the wiring of a rheostat at right angles and never be laid parallel to them over longer distances CE EMC Installation Guidelines Section D 1 7 Minimize the distance between an interference source and an interference sink interference threatened device thereby decreasing the effect of the emitted interference on the interference sink e You should use only interference free devices and maintain a minimum distance of 0 25 m from the adjustable frequency inverter 8 Follow safety measures in the filter installation e If using external EMC filter ensure that the ground terminal PE of the fil ter is properly connected to the ground terminal of the adjustable fre quency inverter An HF ground connection via metal contact between the housings of the filter and the adjustable frequency inverter
440. r now But a system can also have a variety of additional components Some can be for noise suppression while others may enhance the inverter s braking perfor mance The figure and table below show a system with all the optional com ponents you might need in your finished application Breaker A molded case circuit breaker MCCB i disconnect ground fault interrupter GFI or a fused Breaker disconnect device NOTE The installer MCCB or must refer to the local country norms of GFI application to ensure safety and compli ance Input side This is useful in reducing low frequency AC Reactor harmonics distortion induced on the power supply lines and as consequence improve the power factor WARNING Some applications must use an input side AC Reactor to prevent inverter damage See Warning on next page From power supply AC reactor Input choke EMC filter for CE appli cations see Appendix D Reduces the conducted high frequency noise on the power supply wiring between the inverter and the power dis tribution system Connect to the inverter primary input side DC link Reduce harmonics generated by the choke inverter motor driving section by smoothing the current demand of the capacitors Braking Used to disipate regenerative energy Resistor from the motor that is accumulated into the DC bus charging the capacitors and increasing the voltage Radio noise Electrical noise
441. r receives a query from the external control equipment and does not output the response positively Each frame is formatted with commands as follows Header silent interval Slave address Function code Data Error check Trailer silent interval B 3 2 Message Configuration Query Slave address e This is a number of 1 to 32 assigned to each inverter slave Only the inverter having the address given as a slave address in the query can receive the query e When slave address 0 is specified the query can be addressed to all inverters simultaneously Broadcasting e In broadcasting you cannot call and loop back data e Slave Address 1 247 in Modbus specification When master address the slave 250 254 broadcast toward specific slave address Slave doesn t answer back And this function is valid for the write command 05h 06h OFh 10h Broadcast to Slave address 01 to 09 Broadcast to Slave address 10 to 19 Broadcast to Slave address 20 to 29 Broadcast to Slave address 30 to 39 Broadcast to Slave address 40 to 247 298 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 Data A function command is set here The data format used in the MX2 series is corresponding to the Modbus data format below Name of Data Coil Binary data that can be referenced and changed 1 bit long Holding Register 16 bit data that can be referenced and changed Function code Specify a function you
442. r s current rating to calculate the time based heating effect This protection depends on using correct current rating for your motor The level of electronic thermal setting parameter b0 Ie is adjustable from 20 to 100 of the inverter s rated current A proper con figuration will also help prevent unnecessary inverter trip events Read the motor s current rating on its manufacturer s nameplate Then follow the steps below to configure the inverter s overload protection setting Action Display Func Parameter Starting point AVR voltage select Press the GC key First B Group parameter selected Press the A key and hold until gt b0 Level of electronic thermal setting Press the key Default value will be 100 of inverter rated current Set to your motor specs your display may be different Stores parameter returns to bd I2 Press the xz key to select Press the key 64 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 5 Set the Number of Motor Poles The motor s internal winding arrange ment determines its number of magnetic poles The specification label on the motor usually indicates the number of poles For proper operation verify the parameter setting matches the motor poles Many industrial motors have four poles corresponding to the default setting in the inverter HO04 Follow the steps
443. rameter A131 R W 01 small curve to 10 large curve 12A6h Deceleration curve parameter A132 R W 01 small curve to 10 large curve 12A7h to Reserved 12AEh 12AFh Operation frequency input A A141 R W 00 digital operator 01 freq adjuster setting 02 input O 03 input Ol 04 R8485 communication 05 option 1 06 Option 2 07 pulse train frequency 12B0h Operation frequency input B A142 R W 00 digital operator 01 freq adjuster setting 02 input O 03 input Ol 04 R8485 communication 05 option 1 06 Option 2 07 pulse train frequency 12B1h Operator selection A143 R W 00 addition A B 01 subtraction A B 02 multiplication A x B 12B2h Reserved om 12B3h Frequency addition amount A145 high R W 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz 12B4h A145 low R W 12B5h Frequency addition direction A146 R W 00 frequency command A145 01 frequency command A145 12B6hto Reserved 12B8h 12B9h EL S curve ratio 1 during A150 R W l0 to 50 1 acceleration 12BAh EL S curve ratio 2 during A151 R W 0 to 50 1 acceleration 12BBh_ EL S curve ratio 1 during A152 R W 0 to 50 1 deceleration 12BCh_ EL S curve ratio 2 during A153 R W 0 to 50 1 deceleration 12BDh Deceleration hold frequency A154 high R W 0 40000 0 01 Hz 12BEh A154 low 12BFh Deceleration hold time A155 R W 0 600 0 1 sec 12COh PID sleep function action A156 high R W
444. ration at 100 torque within a 1 10 speed range 6 60 Hz 5 50 Hz without motor derating e Fan has ON OFF selection to provide longer life for cooling fan A full line of accessories from Omron is available to complete your motor application e Integrated USB port for PC communication e Digital remote operator keypad e Integrated brake chopper e EMC filter footprint type C1 optional Introduction Section 1 1 1 1 2 Inverter Specification Label The Omron MX2 inverters have product labels located on the right side of the housing as pictured below Be sure to verify that the specifications on the labels match your power source and application safety requirements omron 3G3MX2 A4015 E INVERTER NE 18153 020 INPUT SOH2 60H2 V 1Ph A 50Hz 60Hz 380 480 V 3Ph 5952A OUTPUT 0 1 1000H 2 380 480V 3Ph 5 4 4 8A The model number for a specific inverter contains useful information about its operating characteristics Refer to the model number legend below DE ABOO02 E MxX2 es L C IP54 ready for customization E Europe standard Max co motor output D IPS Includes Class 2 EMC filter Voltage B Single phase 200 VAC 002 2 Three phase 200 VAC 4 Three phase 400 VAC 150 15 0 kW MX2 Inverter Specifications Section 1 2 1 2 MX2 Inverter Specifications 1 2 1 Model specific tables for 200 V and 400 V class inverters The following tables are specific to MX2 inverters for the 200 V and 400 V cla
445. rd V f curve Be aware that running the motor at a low speed for a long time can cause motor overheating This is particularly true when manual torque boost is ON or if the motor relies on a built in fan for cooling A043 3 102 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 Voltage gain Using parameter TUE A045 you can modify the voltage V gain of the inverter see graph at 100 right This is specified as a percent age of the full scale output voltage The gain can be set from 20 to 100 It should be adjusted in accor dance with the motor specifications Gain can be changed even during operation in V f mode and while stopped in SLV mode After the setting is done please be sure to reset terminal RS on off to recalculate the motor constant Refrain from change the setting value suddenly within 10 Inverter may overvoltage trip due to the rapid change of output voltage Voltage compensation gain and slip compensation gain Using parame ters A046 and A047 you can obtain better performance under automatic torque boost mode A04 1 0 i See following table for the concept of adjustment including other parameters fbase fmax Symptom Adjustment Adjust item Motor torque is not enough Increase the voltage setting for manual AQYe Ac4e at low speed The motor _ torque boost step by step does not rotate at low Increase the voltage compensation gain A046 A246 speed for automatic torque boost
446. re has ended If there is a possibility that such an occurrence may harm humans then install an electromagnetic contactor Mgo on the power supply side so that the circuit does not allow automatic restarting after the power supply recovers If the optional remote operator is used and the retry function has been selected this will also cause automatic restarting when a Run command is active So please be careful MOTOR TERMINAL SURGE VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FILTER For the 400 V CLASS In a system using an inverter with the voltage control PWM system a voltage surge caused by the cable constants such as the cable length especially when the distance between the motor and the inverter is 10m or more and cabling method may occur at the motor terminals A dedicated filter of the 400 V class for suppressing this voltage surge is available Be sure to install a filter in this situation General Warnings and Cautions 4 A Caution A Caution A Caution EFFECTS OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ON INVERTER In the case below involving a general purpose inverter a large peak current can flow on the power supply side sometimes destroying the converter mod ule 1 The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3 or higher 2 the power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter ca pacity or the power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more 3 Abrupt power supply changes are expected due to conditions such as a Several invert
447. reference 9 Multi step speed reference 10 Multi step speed reference 11 Multi step speed reference 12 Multi step speed reference 13 Multi step speed reference 14 Multi step speed reference 15 Jogging frequency Jogging stop selection Torque boost selection 2nd torque boost selection Manual torque boost voltage 2nd manual torque boost voltage Manual torque boost frequency 2nd manual torque boost frequency V f characteristics selection 2nd V f characteristics selection w w x x x x ww mw UK Kw UK x x X KIS NTN NY B SST SESSI SISI NNN SY NY MY SENN 358 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Section C 2 A Group Parameters Default Setting User Name EU Setting Output voltage gain Output voltage gain 2nd motor Automatic torque boost voltage com pensation gain 2nd automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain Automatic torque boost slip compensation gain 2nd automatic torque boost slip compensation gain DC injection braking selection DC injection braking frequency DC injection braking delay time DC injection braking power DC injection braking time DC injection braking method selection Startup DC injection braking power Startup DC injection braking time DC injection braking carrier frequency Frequency upper limit 2nd frequency upper limit Frequency
448. rence 0 AccQ 277 Monitoring Trip Events History amp Conditions Section 6 2 6 2 4 Trip History and Inverter Status We recommend that you first find the cause of the fault before clearing it When a fault occurs the inverter stores important performance data at the moment of the fault To access the data use the monitor function dxxx and select d08 I details about the present fault The previous 5 faults are stored in d08e to dO86 Each error shifts dQ d085 to d08e d086 and writes the new error to doB The following Monitor Menu map shows how to access the error codes When fault s exist you can review their details by first selecting the proper function dB I is the most recent and d0B amp 6 is the oldest Trip history 1 Latest Trip history 6 U Ld Oe ie j Inverter status i Trip cause aAA eens at trip point Putco Vo F S Vv Power up or initial processing m mm Ez l Output frequency i Stop CV Deceleration Hz Z Constant speed Output current j p i 4y l Acceleration OHz command and RUN Z H 7 1 m DC bus voltage 264 0 Starting LV V i of 7 DC braking F 4 o Elapsed RUN time Overload restriction i A A 3 EEEE SON BOS res f Y y Note Indicated inverter status could i be different from actual inverter behavior f i g When PID operation or frequenc Elapsed l e g pe quency ane e j given by analog signal although it seems constant speed accelerati
449. rent Electronic thermal characteris Select from three curves option o0 tics selection codes 2nd electronic thermal charac 00 Reduced TRQ Reduced o0 teristics selection torque characteristics D I Const TRQ Constant torque characteristics D2 Free set Free setting Free setting electronic thermal Range is 0 00 to b017 frequency 1 Free setting electronic thermal Range is 0 00 to rated current current 1 Free setting electronic thermal Range is 0 00 to b019 frequency 2 123 B Group Fine Tuning Functions B Function Free setting electronic thermal current 2 Description Range is 0 00 to rated current Section 3 6 Defaults Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 Range is 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Free setting electronic thermal current 3 Range is 0 to rated current E thermal Dec Mode 00 Off 01 Fixed Linear 02 LinDec Time 03 DecTimeCnst E thermal Dec Time 0 10 to 100000 00 E thermal Dec TimeCnst 0 10 to 100000 00 E thermal AccmGain 1 0 to 200 0 N WARNING When parameter bD Ie level of electronic thermal setting is set to motor FLA rating Full Load Ampere nameplate rating the inverter provides solid state motor overload protection at 115 of motor FLA or equivalent If parameter b0 ie exceeds the motor FLA rating the motor may overheat and be dam aged Parame
450. restriction b035 The rotation direction restriction func tion allows you to restrict the direction of the motor rotation This function is effective regardless of the specification of operation command input device e g control terminal or integrated operator If an operation command to drive the motor in a restricted direction is given the inverter display shows OO00 Reverse run protection b046 The reverse run protection function is effec tive when 03 sensorless vector control is specified for the V F characteristic selection A044 For control reasons especially during motor operation at low speed the inverter may output a frequency that instructs the motor to rotate in the direction opposite to that specified by the operation command B Function Defaults Description EU Units Rotation direction limit Three option codes selection 00 Free Forward and Reverse are enabled D1 FWD Only Forward is enabled Oe REV Only Reverse is enabled Reverse rotation prevention Two option codes selection 00 OFF Disabled D1 ON Enabled 132 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 9 Reduced voltage start The reduced voltage start function enables you to make the inverter increase the output voltage gradually when starting the motor Set a small value for the reduced voltage start selection b036 if you intend to increase the start torque On the other han
451. ring Trip Events History amp Con ditions on page 273 for more details D Function Fault frequency monitor Description Number of trip events Range is 0 to 65530 events Fault monitor 1 Latest Fault monitor 2 Fault monitor 3 Fault monitor 4 Fault monitor 5 Fault monitor 6 Displays trip event information e Error code e Output frequency at trip point Motor current at trip point DC bus voltage at trip point e Cumulative inverter operation time at trip point Cumulative power ON time at trip point Warning monitor Displays the warning code 0 to 385 D Group Monitoring Functions Section 3 3 3 3 2 Output Frequency Monitor d001 Displays the output frequency of the inverter During stop 0 00 is displayed The monitor LED indicator Hz is lit while the d001 setting is displayed Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit d001 Output frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz monitor b163 d001 d007 00 OFF 00 Freq set in monitoring 01 ON Related functions A001 F001 e If Frequency Reference Selection is set to Digital Operator A001 02 enabling d001 d007 Freq set in monitoring 6163 01 lets you change the Output Frequency Monitor d001 setting using the Increment Decrement keys only during operation Changed Output Frequency Monitor d001 will be reflected to the
452. rive Programming A017 01 02 d023 to d027 P100 to P131 Sensorless vector control A044 03 d009 d010 d012 b040 to b046 C054 to C059 H001 H005 H020 to H024 H030 to H034 P033 P034 P036 to P040 Sensorless vector control for C001 C007 08 AND d009 d010 d012 b040 to b046 C054 to 2d motor A244 03 C059 H001 H205 H220 to H224 H230 to H234 P033 P034 P036 to P040 Free V F control A044 02 OR b100 to b113 C001 C007 08 AND A244 02 Free setting of electronic b013 02 OR b015 to b020 thermal C001 C007 08 AND b213 02 VC or VP1 7 control A044 00 01 A041 to A043 A046 A047 VC or VP1 7 control for C001 C007 08 AND A241 to A243 A246 A247 2d motor A244 00 01 DC breaking A051 01 02 OR A052 to A059 C001 C007 07 PID A071 01 02 d004 A072 to A079 A156 A157 C044 C052 C053 EzCOM C096 01 02 C098 to C100 P140 to P155 Curving accel deceleration A097 A098 01 04 A131 A132 A150 to A153 Controlled deceleration b050 01 02 03 b051 to b054 Breaking b120 01 b121 to b127 Decel overvolt suppress b130 01 02 b131 to b134 Simple positioning P003 01 d008 P004 P011 P012 P015 P026 P027 PO60to P073 P075 P077 H050 H051 2 User setting display mode b031 02 The monitor displays only the codes and items that are arbitrarily assigned to user parameters UDO I UD32 except codes dQd FOD I and b031 Refer to User parameter U00 I UD32 section for the
453. rminal Function Description Code Symbol Name UP DWN Accelerates increases output function frequency motor from current fre accelerated quency Output to motor operates normally UP DWN Decelerates decreases output function frequency motor from current fre decelerated quency Output to motor operates normally UP DWN Clears the Up Down frequency function memory data clear No effect on Up Down memory Valid for inputs C00 CO07 Required settings AQO d2 Notes This feature is available only when the frequency command source is programmed for operator control Confirm ADO is set to D2 This function is not available when JG is in use The range of output frequency is 0 Hz to the value in ADO4 maximum frequency setting This setting modifies the inverter speed from using FDO I output frequency setting as a starting point 213 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 11 Forced Operator This function permits a digital operator interface to override the following two settings in the inverter ADO Frequency reference selection ADO RUN command selection When using the OPE terminal input typically A00 and A002 are configured for sources other than the digital operator interface for the output frequency and Run command sources respectively When the OPE input is ON then user has immediate command of the inverter to start or stop the motor
454. rminal block 218 ATR 52 Torque command input permission 180 KHC 53 Integrated power clear 142 MI1 MI7 56 62 Drive programming input 1 to 7 219 AHD 65 Analog command held 220 CP1 CP3 66 68 Position command selection 1 to 3 186 221 ORL 69 Zero return limit signal 187 222 ORG 70 Zero return startup signal 187 222 SPD 73 Speed position switching 187 223 GS1 77 STO1 input Safety related signal 223 GS2 78 STO2 input Safety related signal 223 485 81 Starting communication signal 314 PRG 82 Drive program start 223 HLD 83 Retain output frequency 108 224 ROK 84 Permission of Run command 224 EB 85 Rotation direction detection phase B 179 DISP 86 Display limitation 224 NO 255 No allocation 4 4 2 Intelligent Outputs Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent output material in this chapter Input Function Summary Table Code Function Name Page Run Signal 228 Constant speed arrival signal 164 229 Over set frequency arrival signal 164 229 Overload warning 164 231 Excessive PID deviation 165 232 Alarm output 233 Set frequency only arrival signal 229 Overtorque 165 235 Signal during undervoltage 235 Torque limit 138 236 RUN time over 132 236 Power ON time over 132 236 Thermal warning 127 237 Brake release 148 237 Brake error 147 237 0 Hz signal 238 Excessive speed deviation 183 239 Position ready 183 239 199 Intelligent Terminal Listing S
455. rn this switch ON when using the safety function Turn OFF the power before turning this switch ON OFF EDM function selector switch Turn this switch ON when using the EDM output of the safety function Turn OFF the power cable before turning this switch ON OFF USB connector Use this mini B USB connector to connect a PC Even when the Inverter is being operated by a PC etc via USB connection it can still be operated using the Digital Operator Connector for Digital Operator Use this connector to connect the Digital Operator Connector for optional board Use this connector to mount the optional board The optional board will be released soon Control circuit terminal blocks A and B These terminal blocks are used to connect various digital analog input and output signals for inverter control Multi function contact terminal block Use this SPDT contact terminal block for relay outputs Main circuit terminal block Use this terminal block to connect an output to the motor and Bracking Resistor etc Also use this terminal block to connect the inverter to the main power supply CHARGE indicator Charge indicator LED 54 This LED indicator is lit if the DC voltage of the main circuit between terminals P 2 and N remains approx 45 V or above after the power has been cut off Before wiring etc confirm that the Charge LED indicator is turned OFF Step by Step Basic Installat
456. rogram parameter U 24 0 v P125 Drive Program parameter U 25 0 v P126 Drive Program parameter U 26 0 v P127 Drive Program parameter U 27 0 y P128 Drive Program parameter U 28 0 v P129 Drive Program parameter U 29 0 v P130 Drive Program parameter U 30 0 v P131 Drive Program parameter U 31 0 y P140 EzCOM number of data 5 v P141 EzCOM destination 1 address 1 y P142 EzCOM destination 1 register 0000 v P143 EzCOM source 1 register 0000 v P144 EzCOM destination 2 address 1 y P145 EzCOM destination 2 register 0000 v P146 EzCOM source 2 register 0000 v 370 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry Section C 2 P Group Parameters Default Setting User Name EU Setting EzCOM destination 3 address EzCOM destination 3 register EzCOM source 3 register EzCOM destination 4 address EzCOM destination 4 register EzCOM source 4 register EzCOM destination 5 address EzCOM destination 5 register EzCOM source 5 register Option I F cmd W register 1 Option I F cmd W register 2 Option I F cmd W register 3 Option I F cmd W register 4 Option I F cmd W register 5 Option I F cmd W register 6 Option I F cmd W register 7 Option I F cmd W register 8 Option I F cmd W register 9 Option I F cmd W register 10 Option I F cmd R register 1 Option I F cmd R register 2 Option I F cmd R register 3 Option I F cmd R register 4 Option I F cmd R register 5 Option I F cmd R register 6 Option I F cmd R register 7 Option I F cmd R register 8 Option I F cmd R r
457. ror detection 0 00 to 120 00 Hz level Position range specification for 0 to 268435455 Higher 4 digits displayed ward Position range specification 268435455 to 0 Higher 4 digits displayed reverse Positioning mode o0 With limitation ER No limitation shorter route P0O4 is to be set OD or 0 POT Encoder disconnection timeout 0 0 to 10 0 s Pgad Position restarting range 0 to 10000 pulses POB Save position at power off 00 OFF 01 ON H050 Slip compensation P gain for V f 0 00 to 10 00 control with FB HOS Slip compensation gain for V f O to 1000 s control with FB d0e9 Position command monitor 268435455 to d030 Current position monitor 268435455 C IDe Reset selection Internal data is not cleared by reset C00 I C007 Multi function input 1 selection PCLR Position deviation clear coe Cd2e Multi function output 11 12 AL DSE Excessive speed deviation COe6 selection POK Position ready Note 1 If 7 EB terminal is used P004 01 03 set 85 EB in input 7 C007 ON is forward and OFF is reverse direction Note 2 When 2 phase pulse is used maximum frequency of phase A and B are dif ferent 32kHz for A phase 2kHz for B phase In order to detect rotation direc tion over 2kHz choose detection methods in P004 Pa e tion i 90 ph difference 2 ph pulse train 1 Keep the last direction 90 ph difference 2 ph pulse train 2
458. ross V and W Ew across W and U Rectifier type voltme ter Total effective value Output current lo j lye lw W Moving coil type amme ter Total effective value Output power Wo Wo across U and V Woe2 across V and W Electronic type watt meter Total effective value Output power factor Pfo Calculate the output power factor from the output voltage E output current I and output power W Pf W x100 V3xE xlo Use a meter indicating a fundamental wave effective value for voltage and meters indicating total effective values for current and power The inverter output has a distorted waveform and low frequencies may cause erroneous readings However the measuring instruments and methods listed above provide comparably accurate results A general purpose digital volt meter DVM is not usually suitable to measure a distorted waveform not pure sinusoid 283 Maintenance and Inspection Section 6 4 The figures below show measurement locations for voltage current and power measurements listed in the table on the previous page The voltage to be measured is the fundamental wave effective voltage The power to be measured is the total effective power Single phase Measurement Diagram Inverter L1 4 L1 U Motor Three phase Measurement Diagram Inverter uh ro U
459. rque limit selection b040 4 the torque limits 1 to 4 apply Regeneration Powering as shown to the top right b042 bO4 1 Reverse rotation Forward rotation When 00 is specified for the Pov ag peut torque limit selection b040 043 b044 the torque limit 1 to 4 are set Torque as shown to the bottom right The torque limit 1 to 4 are switched by the torque limit switches 1 and 2 assigned to intelligent input terminals 7 and 8 respectively for exam ple When applying the torque limit function to the motor Ore OF 2 al l operation at low speed also on Oe 2 a use the overload restriction ore ON 2 ae ON ON gt bI function to get more stable performance Related parameters Over torque under torque signal 138 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 14 Controlled Stop Operation at Power Loss Controlled stop operation at power loss helps avoid tripping or free running coasting of the motor when power is lost while in run mode The inverter controls the internal DC bus voltage while decelerating the motor and brings the motor to a controlled stop Power DC bus voltage OFF b m bgSE I I Under voltage level Output frequency Should power be lost while the inverter is in run mode this function will have the following effect 1 When the internal DC bus voltage of the inverter comes down to the set l
460. rter logic circuit board See I O specs on page 195 Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 6 Frequency Arrival Signals The Frequency Arrival group of outputs helps coordinate external systems with the current velocity profile of the inverter As the name implies output FA1 turns ON when the output frequency arrives at the standard set fre quency parameter F001 Output FA2 relies on programmable accel decel thresholds for increased flexibility For example you can have an output turn ON at one frequency during acceleration and have it turn OFF at a different frequency during deceleration All transitions have hysteresis to avoid output chatter if the output frequency is near one of the thresholds Terminal Function Name Description Symbol Constant speed when output to motor is at the constant frequency arrival signal when output to motor is OFF or in any acceleration or deceleration ramp Over set frequency when output to motor is at or above the set frequency arrival signal thresholds for even if in acceleration or decel ramps when output to motor is OFF or during accel or decel before the respective thresholds are crossed Set frequency only when output to motor is at the set frequency arrival signal when output to motor is OFF or in any acceleration or deceleration ramp Set frequency when output to motor is at or above the set frequency exceeded 2 thresholds for even if in a
461. rve as a cross reference and an aid in showing how function interacts 2 Intelligent terminals Some functions rely on an input signal on a control logic connector terminal or generate output signals in other cases 3 Electrical interfaces This chapter shows how to make connections be tween the inverter and other electrical devices 4 Auto Tuning Performance This chapter shows how to perform auto tun ing so to achieve good performance of the motor control 5 Positioning Performance This chapter shows how to realize simple po sitioning by using encoder PG feedback 6 PID Loop Operation The MX2 has a built in PID loop that calculates the optimal inverter output frequency to control an external process This chapter shows the parameters and input output terminals associated with PID loop operation 7 Multiple motors A single MX2 inverter may be used with two or more motors in some types of applications This chapter shows the electrical connections and inverter parameters involved in multiple motor applica tions The topics in this chapter can help you decide the features that are impor tant to your application and how to use them The basic installation cov ered in Chapter 2 concluded with the powerup test and running the motor Now this chapter starts from that point and shows how to make the inverter part of a larger control or automation system 4 1 1 Caution Messages for Operating Procedures A
462. s 01h This function reads the status ON OFF of selected coils An example follows below e Read intelligent input terminals 1 to 5 of an inverter having a slave address 8 e This example assumes the intelligent input terminals have terminal states listed below Intelligent input terminal Coil number Coil Status Field Name Example i Field Name Example Hex Hex 1 Slave address 1 08 Slave address 2 Function code 01 Function code 3 Coil start address 4 00 Data size in bytes high order 4 Coil start address 4 06 Coil data 3 low order 5 Number of coils 00 CRC 16 high order high order 2 6 Number of coils 05 CRC 16 low order low order 2 CRC 16 high order 1C 8 CRC 16 low order 91 Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled Note 2 When 0 or more than 31 is specified as a number of coils error code 03h is returned Note 3 Data is transferred by the specified number of data bytes data size Note 4 The PDU Coils are addressed starting at zero Therefore coils numbered 1 31 are addressed as 0 30 Coil address value transmitted on Modbus line is 1 less than the Coil Number The data set in the response shows terminal state of coils 0007h 000Dh e Data O5h 00000101b indicates the following assuming coil 7 is the LSB Coil Number Coil Status e When a read coil is outside the defined coils the final coil data
463. s earth leakage maybe required in cer tain applications e g domestic short motor cable and convenient low leak age EMC filters should be selected Check with your supplier for additional indications 2 3 8 2 Magnetic contactor When the Inverter protective function is activated your system may fail or an accident may occur Connect a magnetic contactor to turn off the Inverter power supply Do not start or stop the Inverter by switching ON OFF the magnetic contactor provided in the Inverter power supply input primary circuit and output sec ondary circuit To start or stop the Inverter via an external signal use the operation command terminals FW RV on the control circuit terminal block Do not use this Inverter with an input phase loss connection The Inverter operating with 1 phase input may be causing a trip due to undervoltage overcurrent etc or damage to the Inverter Do not turn on the power and then turn it off again more than once every 3 minutes Doing so may damage the Inverter 46 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 3 9 Inverter output terminal U T1 V T2 W T3 For connection of the output terminal use the compatible cable or a cable with a larger section Otherwise the output voltage between the Inverter and the motor may drop Do not mount a phase advance capacitor or surge absorber because these devices may cause the Inverter to trip or cause damage to the capacitor or surge absorber
464. s internal register 4 Modbus internal register 5 Modbus internal register 6 Modbus internal register 7 Modbus internal register 8 Modbus internal register 9 Modbus internal register 10 Big Little endian selection st lt 7 lt lt sf lt lt td sf s st st ss st st sf s sb st ss sbi ss stats 372 Appendix D CE EMC Installation Guidelines D 1 CE EMC Installation Guidelines You are required to satisfy the EMC directive 2004 108 EC when using an MX2 inverter in an EU country To satisfy the EMC directive and to comply with standard you need to use a dedicated EMC filter suitable for each model and follow the guidelines in this section Following table shows the compliance condition for reference Table 1 Condition for the compliance Model 2 Carrier f Motor cable 1 ph 200V class 15 kHz 25 m Shielded 3 ph 400V class 15 kHz 100 m Shielded 3 ph 200V class 15 kHz 25 m Shielded Table 2 Applicable EMC filter 15 kHz 50 m Shielded Input class Inverter model Filter model RASMI 1 ph 200V class AB001 AB002 AB004 AX FIM1010 RE 10A AB007 AX FIM1014 RE 14A AB015 AB022 AX FIM1024 RE 24A 3 ph 200V class A2001 A2002 AX FIM2010 RE 10A A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 AX FIM2100 RE 3 ph 400V class A4004 A4007
465. s the motor at the low speed homing It performs positioning when the ORL signal is given The inverter accelerates the mo tor for the specified ramp time to the high speed homing It runs the motor at the high speed homing It starts deceleration when the ORL signal is turned on It runs the motor in the reverse direction at the low speed hom ing It performs positioning when the ORL signal is turned off Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 26 Speed position switching To perform speed control operation in absolute position control mode turn on the SPD terminal While the SPD terminal is off the current position count remains at 0 Therefore if the SPD terminal is turned off during operation the control operation is switched to position control operation based on the posi tion where the terminal is turned off Speed control operation is switched to position control operation If the position setting is 0 at this time the inverter stops the motor at that posi tion Hunting may occur if a certain position loop gain value has been set While the SPD terminal is on the rotating direction depends on the operation command When switching from speed control to position control pay atten tion to the sign of the value set in the operation command Option Terminal Function Description Code Symbol Name Speed Inverter is in a speed control mode position switching Inverter is in a position contro
466. scription Multi step position P073 to P072 Defines the different command 0 Displayed higher positions that could be 4 digits only selected by digital inputs Multi step position command 1 Multi step position command 2 Multi step position command 3 Multi step position command 4 Multi step position command 5 Multi step position command 6 Multi step position command 7 Position setting Multi step position command 0 Multi step position command 1 Multi step position command 2 Multi step position command 3 Multi step position command 4 Multi step position command 5 Multi step position command 6 Multi step position command 7 3 o0 o0 o 1 o 3 o0 o o o O O O O To avoid misinput due to time lag of each input you can adjust the determina tion time in C 169 The input status is taken the preset time C 169 after the last change of input status Note that a long determination time deteriorates the input response Determination time 59 0 Position command CP1 CP2 CP3 ON Determination time E 69 186 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 3 9 7 Speed positioning switching function SPD e Set SPD terminal ON then speed control is enabled in simple positioning mode e While SPD terminal is ON current position counter is 0 When SPD is turned OFF the inverter starts
467. sec Select method to switch to Acc2 Dec2 profile A094 00 switching by 2CH terminal 01 switching by setting 02 Forward and reverse Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transi tion point A095 high A095 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transi tion point A096 high A096 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz Acceleration curve selection A097 linear 01 S curve 02 U curve Deceleration curve setting A098 linear 01 S curve 02 U curve 0 3 inv U curve 04 EL S curve 0 3 inv U curve 04 EL S curve 0 0 0 0 Reserved Reserved 0 01 Hz 326 Ol input active range start frequency A101 high A101 low 0 to 40000 0 01 Hz ModBus Data Listing Function name Function Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items Data code resolution 1283h Ol input active range end fre A102 high R W_ 0 to 40000 1 1284h quency A102 low R W 1285h Ol input active range start ratio A103 R W 0 to Ol input active range end ratio 1 1286h Ol input active range end ratio A104 R W _ Ol input active range start ratio to 100 1287h Ol input start frequency enable A105 R W 00 start FQ 01 0 Hz 1288h to Reserved 12A4h 12A5h Acceleration curve pa
468. sec A020 Multi step speed reference 0 0 00 Start frequency to 655 35 Hz A021 Multi step speed reference 1 0 00 Start frequency to 655 35 Hz A022 Multi step speed reference 2 0 00 Start frequency to 655 35 Hz A023 Multi step speed reference 3 0 00 Start frequency to 655 35 Hz A061 Frequency upper limit 0 00 Frequency lower limit to 655 35 Hz A062 Frequency lower limit 0 00 Start frequency to 655 35 Hz A069 Acceleration stop frequency 0 00 to 655 35 Hz A145 Frequency addition amount 0 00 to 655 35 Hz A154 Deceleration hold frequency 0 00 to 655 35 Hz A156 PID sleep function action threshold 0 00 to 655 35 Hz b007 Frequency matching lower limit fre 0 00 to 655 35 Hz quency setting B 5 1 2 4 P211 P220 Modbus register format 1 to 10 Format of external register Func Code Name Seitings Pell to Modbus register format 00 Unsigned Peed 1 to 10 01 Signed This parameters could be used to adjust the user register data When data is written into the inverter the sign information from P211 to P220 is used to convert data according to MX2 Example External register signed sign having Internal register unsigned sign less After minus data is converted into the absolute value data writing is carried out after an upper and lower limit check In MX2 since the data is sign less d
469. size according to the current output rating and jo motor size for each model number All a feature the same basic Keypad and con F omon RUN m nector interface for consistent ease of nono Sed use The inverter construction has a heat i A PR y sink at the back of the housing The larger models include a fan to enhance heat sink performance The mounting holes are predrilled in the heat sink for your conve nience Smaller models have two mount ing holes while larger ones have four Be sure to use all the mounting holes pro vided Never touch the heat sink during or just after operation it can be very hot The electronics housing and front panel are built onto the front of the heat sink Inverter Keypad The inverter uses a digital operator interface or keypad The four digit display can show a variety of performance parameters LEDs indicate whether the display units are Hertz or Amperes Other LEDs indicate Power external and Run Stop mode and Pro gram Monitor Mode status Membrane keys Run and Stop Reset control monitor operation The 2 Aljand keys allow an operator to navigate to the inverter s functions and parameter values The key is used when changing a parameter res STOP RUN RESET A D XN 2
470. splay Func Parameter Starting point A Group selected Speed command source setting Press the ke Potentiometer of ext operator i Control terminals Digital operator F001 ModBus network Press the A 4 key to select 7 Digital operator selected Press the key to store Stores parameter returns to AGO l 2 Select the digital operator for RUN Command To RUN command causes the inverter to accelerate the motor to the CORR oe selected speed The Run command can suf arrive from various sources including the PACK vy control terminals the Run key on the keypad r e or the network In the figure to the right notice the Run Key Enable LED just above lt 2 the Run key If the LED is ON the Run key is already selected as the source and you may skip this step Note that the default setting depends on the country Run Key Enable LED 62 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 If the Potentiometer Enable LED is OFF follow these steps below the table resumes action from the end of the previous table Action Display Func Parameter Starting point A Speed command source setting Press the A key Run command source setting Press the C7 0 1 Control terminals Oe Digital operator 03 ModBus network input etc Press the WZ key to select Oe
471. ss model groups Note that General Specifications on page 7 in this chap ter apply to both voltage class groups Footnotes for all specification tables fol low the table below Item Single phase 200 V class Specifications 3G3MX2 inverters 200 V models ABO01 ABO04F AB007 Applica kW VT 0 2 0 55 1 1 ble motor CT 0 1 0 4 0 75 size 2 HP VT 1 4 3 4 15 CT 1 8 1 2 1 Rated 200 V VT 0 4 0 6 1 2 2 0 capacity T 2 1 0 1 7 o C 0 0 5 240 V VT 0 4 0 7 1 4 2 4 CT 0 3 0 6 1 2 2 0 Loss at 100 load 12 22 30 48 Efficiency at rated load 89 5 90 93 94 Rated input voltage Single phase 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 3 phase 200 to 240 V proportional to input voltage Rated output current VT 1 2 1 9 3 5 6 0 A 12 0 A CT 1 0 1 6 3 0 5 0 11 0 Starting torque 6 200 at 0 5 Hz Braking Without resistor 100 lt 50 Hz lt 50 Hz 20 lt 50 Hz 50 lt 60 Hz lt 60 Hz 20 lt 60 Hz With resistor 150 100 DC braking Variable operating frequency time and braking force Weight 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 4 i 1 8 2 2 2 2 2 4 3 1 4 0 Footnotes for the preceding table and the tables that follow Note 1 The protection method conforms to JEM 1030 Note 2 The applicable motor refers to a standard 3 phase motor 4p When using other motors care must be taken to prevent the rated motor current 50 60 H
472. ss variable PV for the motor Over time a faster motor speed will cause a faster change in the PV than a slow motor speed will By using the PID loop feature the inverter commands the motor to run at the optimal speed required to maintain the PV at the de sired value for current conditions Using the PID loop feature will require an additional sensor and other wiring and is considered an advanced appli cation International Standards The 3G3MX2 series inverters meet the following international standards Clasification Applicable standard EC Directives Machinery Directive 2006 94 EC EN 1S013849 1 2008 PLd EN 61800 5 2 EN 60204 1 Low voltage directive EN 61800 5 1 EMC directive EN 61800 3 Safety functions are supported UL508C CSA C22 2 No 14 The 3G3MX2 series inverters meet requirements for IEC 60204 1 Stop Cate gory 0 operation and ISO 13849 1 Performance Level PLd of the Machinery Directive SECTION 2 Inverter Mounting and Installation 2 1 Orientation to Inverter Features 2 1 1 Unpacking and Inspection Please take a few moments to unpack your new MX2 inverter and perform these steps 1 Look for any damage that may have occurred during transportation 2 Verify the contents of the box 3 Inspect the specifications label on the side of the inverter Make sure it matches the product part number you ordered 2 1 2 Main Physical Features The MX2 Series inverters vary in
473. step by step Increase the slip compensation gain for AOH ACY automatic torque boost step by step Reduce carrier frequency b083 Motor speed decreases Increase the slip compensation gain for A047 ACY stalls when a load is automatic torque boost step by step given to the motor Motor speed increases Decrease the slip compensation gain for A047 ACY when a load is given to the automatic torque boost step by step motor The inverter trips due to Decrease the voltage setting for manual AQYe AeH overcurrent when a load is torque boost step by step given to the motor Decrease the voltage compensation gain A046 A246 for automatic torque boost step by step Decrease the slip compensation gain for A047 A247 automatic torque boost step by step A Function Defaults Description Torque boost selection Two options 2nd torque boost selection D0 Manual torque boost D I Automatic torque boost Manual torque boost voltage Can boost starting torque 2nd manual torque boost between 0 and 20 above normal voltage q V f curve range is 0 0 to 20 0 Manual torque boost frequency Sets the frequency of the V f 2nd manual torque boost breakpoint A in graph top of pre frequency vious page for torque boost range is 0 0 to 50 0 103 Section 3 5 A Group Standard Functions 104 A Function V f characteristi
474. ster Internal register 120Fh Transmission 01 03 12 OE 00 01 EO B1 Reception 01 03 02 00 21 78 5C 3 Read 0x03 Object register 1219h A021 LOW Transmission 01 03 12 18 00 01 01 75 Reception 01 83 32 CO E5 Error 32h access to duplication register 4 Write 0x10 Object register 1219h A021 LOW Transmission 01 10 12 18 00 02 04 00 00 10 00 2A 65 Reception 01 90 32 CD D5 Error 32h access to duplication register 351 ModBus mapping Section B 5 B 5 1 4 4 When an external register overlaps with the existing register 2 word low rank P201 External register 1217h A020 LOW P301 Internal register 120Fh A013 P221 Scaling 1 000 P211 Format Unsigned A013 value 33 21h 1 Read 0x03 Object register External register 1217h Transmission 01 03 12 16 00 01 60 B6 Reception 01 03 02 00 21 78 5C 2 Read 0x03 Object register Internal register 120Fh Transmission 01 03 12 OE 00 01 EO B1 Reception 01 03 02 00 21 78 5C 3 Read 0x03 Object register 1216h A020 HIGH Transmission 01 03 12 15 00 01 90 B6 Reception 01 83 32 CO E5 Error 32h access to duplication register 4 Write 0x10 Object register 1216h A020 HIGH Transmission 01 10 12 15 00 02 04 00 00 10 00 EB FC Reception 01 90 32 CD D5 Error 32h access to duplication register B 5 1 4 5 When internal register is not correct 1 P201 External register 6001h P301 Internal register 0000h P221 S
475. t 4 20 mA are available on separate terminals O and Ol respec tively Terminal L serves as signal ground for the two analog inputs The analog input settings adjust the curve characteristics between the analog input and the frequency output 93 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 Adjusting O L characteristics In Max frequency the graph to the right A013 and AD H select the active portion of the input voltage range Parameters AQ and Ad i select the start and end frequency of the converted output frequency range respectively Together these four parameters define the major line seg ment as shown When the line does not Pa i i on begin at the origin AQ 11 and Ad 13 gt 0 7 then AD IS defines whether the inverter a fa outputs 0 Hz or the AQ I specified fre Input scale quency when the analog input value is less than the Ad 13 setting When the input voltage is greater than the AG 1H ending value the inverter outputs the ending frequency specified by Ad te Adjusting OI L characteristics In Max frequency the graph to the right A103 and A 104 select the active portion of the input current range Parameters Aid and A 102 select the start and end frequency of the converted output frequency range respectively Together these four parameters define the major line seg ment as shown When the line does not begin at the origin A 10 and A 103 gt 0 0 o A 103 Ip 0 then A105 de
476. t I O analog terminals etc Doing so could cause damage to the inverter Z Caution Never test the withstand voltage HIPOT on the inverter The inverter has a surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground Z Caution Power terminal assignment is different compared to old models such as L100 L200 series etc Pay attention when wiring the power cable 281 Maintenance and Inspection Section 6 4 6 4 3 IGBT Test Method The following procedure will check the inverter transistors IGBTs and diodes 1 Disconnect input power to terminals R S and T and motor terminals U V and W 2 Disconnect any wires from terminals and for regenerative braking 3 Use a Digital Volt Meter DVM and set it for 1 Q resistance range You can check the status of the charging state of terminals R S T U V W and of the inverter and the probe of the DVM by measuring the charging state PD 1 P RB D4 D5 D6 TR7 TR4 TR5 TR6 IN Table Legend Almost infinite resistance zQ Almost zero resistance 0Q Measured Part DVM Measured Part DVM Measured Value MZT Value a zQ D5 S H 0Q TR4 U H 0Q 0Q H S zQ H U Jz a o0Q D Im H z0 TR5 V H 0Q z0Q H Im z9 H IMV zea zQ TR1 U H zQ TR6 W IH 0Q 0Q U 0Q H W 0a z0Q TR2 V 0Q TR7 RB
477. t positively or negatively the inverter output frequency in real time ADO Frequency source setting Keypad potentiometer d Control terminal o F Output frequency setting Function FO setting O ModBus network input O Calculate function output ADD frequency l Sg are direction select ADD Intelligent input 3 gt Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Frequency Applies the A 4S Add Frequency addition value to the output frequency Does not apply the Add frequency The output frequency retains its normal value Valid for inputs C00 Co07 Required settings AQG A 145 A H6 Notes e ADD I may specify any source the Add Frequency will be added to or subtracted from that value to yield output frequency value 217 Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 19 Forced Terminal Block The purpose of this intelligent input is to allow a device to force the inverter to allow control of the following two parameters via the control terminals e AGO I Frequency source setting 0 control terminals O or Ol e ADD2 Run command source setting 0 control terminals FW and RW Some applications will require one or both settings above to use a source other than the terminals You may prefer to normally use the inverter s keypad and potentiometer or to use the ModBus network for control for example However an external device
478. t torque lt signed gt YA1 Drive Programming Option 00 Output FQ Digital current monitor reference value 0 32 x Rated current to 3 20 x Rated current Rated current Pulse train input scale conversion for EO output If EO terminal is configured as pulse train input C027 15 scale conversion is set in C047 Pulse out Pulse in C047 Set range is 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 159 C Group Intelligent Terminal Functions 160 Section 3 7 The output logic conversion is programmable for terminal 11 12 and the alarm relay terminal The open collector output terminal 11 and 12 defaults to normally open active low but you can select normally closed active high for the terminal in order to invert the sense of the logic You can invert the log ical sense of the alarm relay output as well C Function Multi function output terminal 11 contact selection Multi function output terminal 12 contact selection Description Select logic conversion two option codes 0a NO 01 NC Defaults Relay output AL2 AL1 contact selection You can also adjust the output with ON OFF delays DD NO contact at AL2 NC contact at AL1 01 NC contact at AL2 NO contact at AL1 C Function Output 11 ON delay Output 11 OFF delay Description Set range is 0 0 to 100 0 sec Defaults Output 12 ON delay Output
479. t Active Three option codes Frequency Matching restart 00 Off FQ Frequency at interruption D 1 Max FQ Max Frequency Oe Set FQ Set frequency 3 6 3 Electronic Thermal Overload Alarm Setting The thermal overload detection protects the inverter and motor from overheat ing due to an excessive load for inverter It uses a current inverse time curve to determine the trip point for motor is possible to select between different curves For the motor use the parameters bO 13 and 69 I0 to select the torque char acteristic that matches your load This allows the inverter to utilize the best thermal overload characteristic for your application The torque developed in a motor is directly proportional to the current in the windings which is also related to the heat generated and temperature over time Therefore you must set the thermal overload threshold in terms of current amperes for parameter bD Ie The range is 20 to 100 of the rated current for each inverter model If the current exceeds the level you specify the inverter will trip and log an event error E D5 in the history table The inverter turns the motor output OFF when tripped Separate settings are available for the second motor if applicable as shown in the following table B Function Defaults Description Electronic thermal level 0 20 x Rated current to 1 00 x Rated current 2nd electronic thermal level Rated current Rated cur
480. t to the inverter s thermis tor input see 4 5 8 Thermistor Thermal Protection on page 211 Also refer to the motor manufacturer s specifications for duty cycle recommendations dur ing DC braking 105 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 DC braking performance at start can also be set separately A057 and A058 And carrier frequency of DC braking performance can also be set separately ROS9 A Function Defaults Description DC injection braking selection Three options select codes 00 OFF Disabled D 1 ON Enabled Oe ON FQ Frequency control A052 DC injection braking frequency The frequency at which DC brak ing begins range is from the start frequency b082 to 60 00 Hz DC injection braking delay time The delay from the end of con trolled deceleration to start of DC braking motor free runs until DC braking begins range is 0 0 to 5 0 sec Level of DC braking force settable from 0 to 100 Sets the duration for DC braking range is from 0 0 to 60 0 seconds DC injection braking method Two options select codes selection 00 Edge operation D Level operation Startup DC injection braking Level of DC braking force at start power settable from 0 to 100 Startup DC injection braking Sets the duration for DC braking time range is from 0 0 to 60 0 seconds DC injection braking carrier Carrier frequency of DC braking frequency sia range is from 2 0 to Zz
481. tage input circuit uses terminals L and O Attach the signal cable s shield wire only to terminal L on the inverter Maintain the voltage within specifi cations do not apply negative voltage 1 to 2kQ 2 W 0 to 9 6 VDC 0 to 10 V nominal Analog Input Operation Section 4 7 Current Input The current input circuit uses terminals Ol and L The current comes from a sourcing type transmitter a sinking type will not work This means the current must flow into terminal Ol and ter minal L is the return back to the transmitter The input impedance from Ol to L is 100 Ohms Attach the cable shield wire only to terminal L on the inverter See I O specs on page 195 4 to 19 6 mA DC 4 to 20 mA nominal The following table shows the available analog input settings Parameter A005 and the input terminal AT determine the External Frequency Command input terminals that are available and how they function The analog inputs O and Ol use terminal L as the reference signal return AT Input Analog Input Configuration O Ol O Integrated POT on external panel Ol Integrated POT on external panel 4 7 1 Other Analog Input related topics Analog Input Settings Additional Analog Input Settings Analog Signal Calibration Settings Analog Input Current Voltage Select ADD Frequency Enable Analog Input Disconnect Detect 4 7 2
482. tallation Guidelines Choosing a Mounting Location Study the following caution messages associated with mounting the inverter This is the time when mistakes are most likely to occur that will result in expensive rework equipment damage or personal injury Hazard of electrical shock Never touch the naked PCB printed circuit board or bus bars while the unit is powered up Even for switch portion the inverter must be powered OFF before you change Be sure to install the unit on flame resistant material such as steel plate Otherwise there is the danger of fire Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter Otherwise there is the danger of fire 29 Step by Step Basic Installation Section 2 3 2 3 1 30 A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution Installation Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter hous ing such as wire clippings spatter from welding metal shavings dust etc Otherwise there is the danger of fire Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according to the specifications in the text Chapter 1 Specifications Tables Otherwise it may fall and cause injury to personnel Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to vibra tion Otherwise it may fall and cause injury to personnel Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing parts Otherwise
483. tch Thermistor Three phase power Torque Transistor Trip Event Watt Loss The difference between the theoretical speed of a motor at no load deter mined by its inverter output waveforms and the actual speed Some slip is essential in order to develop torque to the load but too much will cause excessive heat in the motor windings and or cause the motor to stall A nick name for the appearance of the rotor frame assembly for an AC induction motor The windings in a motor that are stationary and coupled to the power input of the motor See also Rotor 1 A signal generator usually attached to the motor shaft for the purpose of providing feedback to the speed controlling device of the motor 2 A speed monitoring test meter that may optically sense shaft rotation speed and display it on a readout An electromechanical safety device that opens to stop current flow when the temperature at the device reaches a specific temperature threshold Thermal switches are sometimes installed in the motor in order to protect the windings from heat damage The inverter can use thermal switch signals to trip shut down if the motor overheats See also Trip A type of temperature sensor that changes its resistance according to its tem perature The sensing range of thermistors and their ruggedness make them ideal for motor overheating detection Omron inverters have built in thermistor input circuits which can detect an overheated mo
484. te Initial display selection b036 The initial display selection function allows you to specify data displayed on the integrated operator on powerup The table below lists the display items selectable The factory setting is D I dU 1 Panel display selection b 150 When an external operator is connected to MX2 via RS 422 port the display is locked and shows only one parameter configured by b 150 Automatic return to the initial display b IBH 10 min after the last key operation display returns to the initial parameter set by 6038 Frequency conversion coefficient setting b086 By setting b086 con verted output frequency is monitored in d001 dODO dO0 x b086 Frequency set in monitoring b 163 If 0 is set in b 163 frequency can be changed by up down key in monitor display dO and d0D1 Action selection in case of external operator disconnection b 65 When an external operator is disconnected the inverter behaves according to b 165 setting B Function Defaults Description Units Initial screen selection 000 Func code that key pressed last displayed 00 060 400 dO60 displayed c01 FOD I displayed 20e B display of LCD operator 135 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 B Function Defaults Description EU Units Frequency conversion co
485. tected 13AAh to Reserved 13ADh 13AEh Inverter mode selection no 01 Std IM 02 Reserved 03 PM 13AFh to Reserved 13B6h 13B7h Initialize trigger 00 no action 01 initialize 13B8hto Reserved 13C5h 13C6h E thermal Dec Mode 00 Off 01 Fixed Linear 02 LinDec Time 03 DecTimeCnst 13C7hto E thermal Dec Time 0 10 to 100000 00 0 01 sec 13C8h 13C9hto E thermal Dec TimeCnst 0 10 to 100000 00 0 01 sec 13CAh 13CBh_ E thermal AccmGain 1 0 to 200 0 0 1 sec 13CCh unused Inaccessible to 1400h 331 ModBus Data Listing Parameter group C Register No Function name Multi function input 1 selection Function Multi function input 2 selection Multi function input 3 selection Multi function input 4 selection Multi function input 5 selection Multi function input 6 selection Multi function input 7 selection Section B 4 Monitoring and setting items 00 FW Forward RUN 01 RV Reverse RUN 02 CF1 Multispeed 1 setting 03 CF2 Multispeed 2 setting 04 CF3 Multispeed 3 setting 05 CF4 Multi speed 4 setting 06 JG Jogging 07 DB external DC braking 08 SET Set 2nd motor data 09 2CH 2 stage accel eration deceleration 11 FRS free run stop 12 EXT external trip 13 USP unattended start protectio
486. teesescsieness 373 CE EMC Installation Guidelines ee ieee ee E cece e eee nent ence ene EA 373 Omron EMC Recommendations 0 ccc eee ence ene beet eben tne e eens 377 Appendix E Safety CESO Lasse b yo i255 aaan a BARRE OO OS ORE S59 S SRR SOT a aae OTD Introductio 2555 4 sitet slits sre de Sree oes PASE AAG RAG ERA AS ASN a RAMA ORR GS hata CASE 379 Stop Category defined in EN60204 1 20 cece eect eee eens 379 HOW 1U WOrkS iis enti IE EESE ESETE EEEE EEES EEE EAAS Aiba ell g oe Ms setae reg ts ne hs 379 ACU VAllOM ie Syed aa lh eects eset e Reels RA ah WE Geis Sete he MON Ra aie ee ees a a aioe 380 Installation eenaa devastate od Sr Rens SAS etal BSS aig BST BOER Ria RE RAGES a 380 Within s examples einasi ariin eera dd trent E a tes cubed oting ended ee ao Gilead nbc a E E Ho EA 381 Components to be combined 1 0 cee ene eaer 383 Periodical check Proot test own edie BA es eae Re eae PES pales SPE 383 Precautions mecie punanna 4b AAR ea AEE leg Sie Waa SWE Oe ARAE A A E Ri bea Gut Aaa AEE EE RA tade 384 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 0 0c c eee cc ene cent been ene ene nnes 385 Safety Certification scis esheets sag die ee Sg Spee eS PEGE Spe ag eS ee seg Aes oe 388 Appendix F Unprotected Inverter Operation Mode cece cece ccc cc ccc cesccsecsscsee 389 Unprotected Inverter Operation Mode 1 2 cece eee n enn E 389 1 1 1 vi N HIGH VOLTAGE N WARNING A Caution Step 1 T
487. ter automatically restarts the operation This is the PID sleep function PID output PID sleep function AS ion acti i AIST lt gt PID sleep function action delay time i Run Stop Run Run command internal Run command external Run PID Sleep function is always enabled even the PID function is disabled 3 5 10 Automatic Voltage Regulation AVR Function The automatic voltage regulation AVR feature keeps the inverter output waveform at a relatively constant amplitude during power input fluctuations This can be useful if the installation is subject to input voltage fluctuations However the inverter cannot boost its motor output to a voltage higher than the power input voltage If you enable this feature be sure to select the proper voltage class setting for your motor A Function Defaults Description AVR selection Automatic output voltage regula AVR selection 2nd motor tion selects from three type of AVR functions three option codes oa Always ON D 1 Always OFF Oe OFF during deceleration AVR voltage selection 200V class inverter settings 200 215 220 230 240 AVR voltage selection 400V class inverter settings 2nd motor 380 400 415 440 460 480 AVR filter time constant Define the time constant of the AVR filter range is 0 000 to 10 000 sec AVR deceleration gain Gain adjustment of the braking performance range is 50 to 200
488. ter bD Ie level of electronic thermal setting is a variable param eter e Inverter and motor models are be treat separately E05 error will be reported in case of Motor overload e E38 error will be reported in case of Inverter overload e Inverter protection is set to constant torque characteristic and inverter rated current Electronic Thermal Characteristic Curve The characteristic curve depends on dual rate setting in b049 as follows 9 040 HD b0Hg 0 Trip time s Trip time s 60 0 5 109 150 200 Percentage of 0 b012 b212 116 Percentage of b012 b212 The characteristic curve is unique but reduction rate depending on frequency is selected in bD 13 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 e Reduced Torque b0 13 00 Example Reduction rate 3G3MX2 A2015 Base FQ 60Hz 60Hz Reduction rate x1 0 ND setting Rated current 9 6A b012 20Hz Reduction rate x0 8 x1 0 Trip time Trip time x0 8 s s x0 6 60 60 0 5 16 50 0 5 0 5 0 6 20 60 w 0O 414 115 144A 0 8992 15 Base FQ 116 120 150 92 8 96 120 Output frequency Hz Motor current A Motor current A e Constant Torque Cbd 13 0 Example 3G3MX2 AB015 Base FQ 60Hz HD setting Rated current 8 0A b012 Reduction rate 60Hz Reduction rate x1 0 3Hz Reduction rate x0 8 Trip time Trip time x1 0 s s x0 8 60 60 0 3 60 0 0 i i 8 72 12 0 16 0 A 7 0 9
489. ter in memory component of the inverter Option Terminal Function Code Symbol Name Analog command Description Hold the analog input value held Does not hold the analog input value Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings Using Intelligent Input Terminals Section 4 5 4 5 24 Position Command Selection 1 to 3 When 66 CP1 to 68 CP3 are assigned to input terminals you can select position settings from multistage positions 0 to 7 Use multistage position settings 0 to 7 P060 to P0671 for the position settings If no position settings are assigned to terminals multistage position O P060 is assumed Position setting Parameter Multi step position command 0 Multi step position command 1 Multi step position command 2 Multi step position command 3 Multi step position command 4 Multi step position command 5 Multi step position command 6 Multi step position command 7 You can specify a delay to be applied at multistage position setting input until the relevant terminal input is determined Use this specification to prevent the application of fluctuating terminal input before it is determined You can adjust the determination time with the multistage speed position determination time setting C 169 The input data is finally determined when the terminal input becomes stable after the delay set as C 169 Note that a long d
490. than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 or 480V maximum xix UL Cautions Warnings and Instructions 6 xx N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING When protected by CC G J or R class Fuses or when Protected By A Circuit Breaker Having An Interrupting Rating Not Less Than 100 000 rms Symmetri cal Amperes 240 or 480 Volts Maximum Install device in pollution degree 2 environment Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature 50 C Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit pro tection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electric Code and any additional local codes UL Cautions Warnings and Instructions Terminal symbols and Screw size Inverter Model 3G3MX2 AB001 3G3MX2 AB002 3G3MX2 AB004 Screw Size Required Torque N m Wire range AWG16 1 3mm 3G3MX2 AB007 AWG12 3 3mm 3G3MX2 AB015 3G3MX2 AB022 AWG10 5 3mm 3G3MX2 A2001 3G3MX2 A2002 3G3MX2 A2004 3G3MX2 A2007 AWG16 1 3mm 3G3MX2 A2015 1 4 AWG14 2 1mm 3G3MX2 A2022 1 4 AWG12 3 3mm 3G3MX2 A2037 1 4 AWG10 5 3mm 3G3MX2 A2055 3G3MX2 A2075 3 0 AWG6 13mm 3G3MX2 A2110 5 9 to 8 8 AWG4 21mm 3G3MX2 A2150 5 9 to 8 8 AWG2 34mm 3G3MX2 A4004 3G3MX2 A4007 3G3MX2 A4015 1 4 AWG16 1 3
491. the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 237 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 4 6 16 0 Hz Signal Section 4 6 The inverter outputs the OHz speed detection signal when the inverter output frequency falls below the threshold level C063 To use this function assign 21 ZS to one of the intelligent output terminals Terminal Symbol Function Name 0 Hz signal ON Description Output frequency is less than C063 OFF Output frequency is not less than C063 Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings C063 Notes The example circuit for terminal 11 drives a relay coil Note the use of a diode to prevent the negative going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor 238 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 4 6 17 Excessive Speed Deviation Section 4 6 The inverter outputs the detection signal when the deviation between the set speed and actual motor speed becomes less the threshold level P027 This function is valid when connecting the encoder feedback to the inverter To use this function assign ee DSE to one of the intelligent output termi nals Terminal Symbol Description ee DSE Deviation between the speed command and motor speed is less than Pde Function Name Excessive ON speed devi ation OFF Deviation between the speed command and
492. the data Valid for inputs C00 1 c007 Required settings 4 5 22 Drive Programming Input 1 to 7 These functions are used with Drive Programming function Refer to a description of Drive Programming for the details Option Terminal Function Code Symbol Name Drive pro gramming input 1 to 7 Description General purpose input is made ON General purpose input is made OFF Valid for inputs con i Cam Required settings 219 Using Intelligent Input Terminals 4 5 23 Analog Command Held This function allows you to make the inverter held the analog command input via the external analog input terminal when the AHD terminal is made ON While the AHD is turned ON the up down function can be used based on the analog signal held by this function as reference data 220 Note Note When 0 is specified for Up down memory mode selection C 10 1 the result of up down processing can be stored in memory If the inverter power is turned on or the RS terminal turned off with the AHD terminal left turned on the data held immediately before power on or turning off the RS terminal will be used Section 4 5 AHD Analog input command Hold the data Frequency 7 command L Set frequency remains when the inverter is switched with SET terminal with AHD on Turn AHD terminal off to re hold the set frequency Frequent use of this function may result in a shor
493. the input setting in P055 3 9 4 Torque Command Related Settings Torque control in open loop could be achieve with following parameters 100 torque is referred to inverter rated current Absolute torque value is up the motor to be combined P Function Defaults Description Torque reference input Six option codes selection O0 O Terminal O Ot Ol Terminal Ol 03 OPE Digital Operator 06 Option Torque reference setting Set range is 0 200 Torque bias mode Three option codes 00 OFF None D 1 OPE Digital Operator 05 Option 1 Torque bias value Range is 200 200 Torque bias polarity selection Two option codes 00 Sign Signed D Direction Depends on the RUN direction Speed limit value in torque Set range is 0 00 120 00Hz control forward Speed limit value in torque Set range is 0 00 120 00Hz control reverse Speed torque control Set range is 0 to 1000 ms switching time To enable the torque control is necessary to assign the ATR Enable torque command input to one of the multi function inputs that is when Se is speci fied for one of C00 P to CO01 180 P Group Other Parameters 3 9 5 Simple Positioning You can achieve simple positioning by simple encoder feedback control Section 3 9 Fol lowing pages shows the related parameters to be set for the positioning Encoder wiring The hard
494. tings ADI I Notes The use of PID and PIDC terminals are optional Use AQ 0 1 if you want PID loop control enabled all the time 3 5 8 PID Loop Configuration The inverter s PID loop algorithm is configurable for various applications PID Output Limit The PID loop controller has a built in output limit function This function monitors the difference between the PID setpoint and the loop output inverter output frequency measured as a percentage of the full scale range of each The limit is specified by parameter A018 e When the difference Setpoint loop output is smaller than or equal to the A078 limit value the loop controller operates in its normal linear range e When the difference Setpoint loop output is larger than the AQ78 limit value the loop controller changes the output frequency as needed so that the difference does not exceed the limit 111 A Group Standard Functions Section 3 5 The diagram below shows PID setpoint changes and the related output fre quency behavior when a limit value in A078 exists Limit imposed Jf on output Output limit H eH i PID Setpoint p zsz Output freq Limit imposed Output limit LK Y on output Deviation error Inversion In typical heating loops or ventilation loops an increase in energy into the process results in an increasing PV In this case the Loop
495. tion Selections 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 Specified by the capacity of each inverter model Motor pole number selection 2nd motor pole number selection Selections 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 4 4 Speed response 2nd speed response Set range is 1 to 1000 100 100 Stabilization parameter 2nd stabilization parameter Motor constant factory set range is 0 to 255 100 100 Motor parameter R1 2nd motor parameter R1 0 001 65 535 ohms Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter R2 2nd motor parameter R2 0 001 65 535 ohms Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter L 2nd motor parameter L 0 01 655 35 mH Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter lo 2nd motor parameter lo 0 01 655 35 A Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter J 2nd motor parameter J 0 001 9999 000 kgm Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter R1 auto tuning data 2nd motor parameter R1 auto tuning data 0 001 65 535 ohms Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter R2 auto tuning data 2nd motor parameter R2 auto tuning data 0 001 65 535 ohms Depends on the motor capacity Motor parameter L auto tuning data 2nd motor parameter L auto tuning data 0 01 655
496. tion 1331h to Reserved 1332h 1333h Dual rate selection b049 R W 00 CT mode 01 VT mode 1334h Selection of non stop function at b050 R W 00 disabling 01 enabling 02 momentary power interruption enabled deceleration stop 03 RUN 1335h Starting voltage of non stop b051 R W 0O to 10000 0 1 V function at momentary power interruption 1336h Stop deceleration level of non b052 R W 0O to 10000 0 1 V stop function at momentary power interruption 1337h Deceleration time of non stop b053 high R W 0 01 to 36000 0 01 sec 1338h function at momentary power b053 low R W interruption 1339h Deceleration starting width of b054 R W Oto 1000 0 01 Hz non stop function at momentary power interruption 133Ah to Reserved 133Eh 133Fh Window comparator O upper b060 R W 0 to 100 lower limit b061 b062 2 1 limit level 1340h Window comparator O lower limit b061 R W 0 to 100 lower limit b060 b062 2 1 level 1341h Window comparator O b062 R W 0 to 10 lower limit b061 b062 2 1 hysteresis width 329 ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 Register Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Data resolution Window comparator OI upper 0 to 100 lower limit b064 b066 2 1 limit level Window comparator Ol lower 0 to 100 lower limit b063 bO66 2 1 limit level 1344h Window comparator Ol hys 0 to 10
497. to decelerate rapidly resulting in a trip When set RDY function ON there will be a voltage appear at motor output ter minals U V and W even if the motor is in stop mode So never touch the inverter power terminal even the motor is not running CAUTION The digital outputs relay and or open collector available on the drive must not be considered as safety related signals The outputs of the external safety relay must be used for integration into a safety related control command circuit Dangerous voltage exists even after the Safe Stop is activated It does NOT mean that the main power has been removed Warnings and Cautions for Troubleshooting and Maintenance Wait at least ten 10 minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before performing maintenance or an inspection Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance inspection and part replacement Before starting to work remove any metallic objects from your person wristwatch bracelet etc Be sure to use tools with insu lated handles Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or injury to personnel Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads wires for cooling fan and logic P C board Otherwise there is a danger of fire due to wire breakage and or injury to personnel Do not connect the megger to any control terminals such as intelligent I O analog terminals etc Doing so co
498. tor and shut off trip the inverter output An AC power source with three Hot connections that have phase offsets of 120 degrees is a 3 phase power source Usually Neutral and Earth Ground wires accompany the three Hot connections Loads may be configured in a delta or Y configuration A Y connected load such as an AC induction motor will be a balanced load the currents in all the Hot connections are the same Therefore the Neutral connection is theoretically zero This is why inverters that generate 3 phase power for motors do not generally have a Neutral con nection to the motor However the Earth Ground connection is important for safety reasons and is provided The rotational force exerted by a motor shaft The units of measurement con sist of the distance radius from shaft center axis and force weight applied at that distance Units are usually given as pound feet ounce inches or New ton meters A solid state three terminal device that provides amplification of signals and can be used for switching and control While transistors have a linear operat ing range inverters use them as high powered switches Recent develop ments in power semiconductors have produced transistors capable of handling high voltages and currents all with high reliability The saturation voltage has been decreasing resulting in less heat dissipation Omron invert ers use state of the art semiconductors to provide high performance and reli ability i
499. tory Default Settings on page 279 57 Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 2 5 Using the Front Panel Keypad Please take a moment to familiarize yourself with the keypad layout shown in the figure below The display is used in programming the inverter s parame 1 POWER LED ters as well as monitoring specific parameter values during operation 4 RUN LED 5 Monitor LED Hz 1 POWER LED 2 ALARM LED 3 Program LED 15 USB connector 10 Stop reset key 16 RJ45 connector 12 Up key 13 Down key 14 Set Key Contents Turns ON Green while the inverter is powered up 2 ALARM LED Turns ON Red when the inverter trips 3 Program LED Turns ON Green when the display shows changeable parameter Blinks when there is a mismatch in setting 4 RUN LED Turns ON Green when the inverter is driving the motor 5 Monitor LED Hz Turns ON Green when the displayed data is frequency related 6 Monitor LED A Turns ON Green when the displayed data is current related Turns ON Green when a Run command is set to the operator Run key is effective 8 7 seg LED Shows each parameter monitors etc 9 Run key Makes inverter run 4 5 6 7 Run command LED 8 9 10 10 Stop reset key Makes inverter decelerates to a stop Reset the inverter when it is in trip situation 11 CYCLE key Go to the top of next f
500. troller or host computer in the same control cabinet and they are connected at the same ground PE potential connect the shields of the control lines to ground PE protective earth at both ends With distributed systems for exam ple the communicating supervisory controller or host computer is not in the same control cabinet and there is a distance between the systems we recommend connecting the shield of the control lines only at the end connecting to the adjustable frequency inverter If possible route the other end of the control lines directly to the cable entry section of the supervisory controller or host computer The shield conductor of the motor cables always must connected to ground PE at both ends To achieve a large area contact between shield and ground PE poten tial use a PG screw with a metallic shell or use a metallic mounting clip Use only cable with braided tinned copper mesh shield type CY with 85 coverage The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable If the use of reactors contactors terminals or safety switches in the motor output is necessary the unshielded section should be kept as short as possible Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing Very often the terminal boxes and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw connections are painted Make sure there is always a good metallic connection between the shielding of the moto
501. two input sources into one value The Calculate function can either add sub tract or multiply the two selected sources This provides the flexibility needed by various applications You can use the result for the output frequency setting use ADU l ID or for the PID Process Variable PV input use AQ715 03 igi o AY ae Digital operator ki 4 Remote operator POT A input select O input O Ol input _O Network variable O GAL result Digital operator O Remote operator POT B input select O input o Ol input _0 Network variable o Ai te A Function Defaults Description AIY Operation frequency input A 00 Operator Digital Operator x D setting F001 A192 Operation frequency inputB E VR Digital Operator FREQ x 03 adjuster setting Qe O Input O D3 OI Input Ol OY Modbus RS485 OS Option 1 06 Option 2 07 Pulse Pulse train frequency A 143 Operator selection Calculates a value based on the A x OD input source A IH I selects and B input source A IH2 selects Three options D0 ADD Addition A B D 1 SUB Substraction A B Oe MUL Multiplication A x B Add Frequency The inverter can add or subtract on offset value to the out
502. uld cause damage to the inverter Never test the withstand voltage HIPOT on the inverter The inverter has a surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground General Warnings and Cautions 4 A Caution A Caution A Caution N HIGH VOLTAGE Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such as intelligent I O analog terminals etc Doing so could cause damage to the inverter Never test the withstand voltage HIPOT on the inverter The inverter has a surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground The life of the capacitor depends on ambient temperatures Refer to the dia gram of product life specified in the manual When the capacitor stops operat ing at the end of the product s life the inverter must be replaced Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals when working with the inverters and taking measurements Be sure to place the measurement cir cuitry components above in an insulated housing before using them 4 General Warnings and Cautions Z N WARNING A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution Never modify the unit Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or injury Withstand voltage test and insulation resistance tests HIPOT are executed before the units are shipped so there is no need to conduct these tests before operation Do not attach or remove wiring or connectors when power is applied Also do
503. ult in bodily injury The user is responsible to ensure that all driven machinery drive train mecha nism not supplied by OMRON and process line material are capable of safe operation at an applied frequency of 150 of the maximum selected fre quency range to the AC motor Failure to do so can result in destruction of equipment and injury to personnel should a single point failure occur For equipment protection install a ground leakage type breaker with a fast response circuit capable of handling large currents The ground fault protec tion circuit is not designed to protect against personal injury HAZARDOUS OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DISCONNECT INCOMING POWER BEFORE CHANGING WIRING PUT ON OR TAKE OFF OPTIONAL DEVICES OR REPLACE COOLING FANS Wait at least ten 10 minutes after turning OFF the input power supply before performing maintenance or an inspection Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock Make sure to read and clearly understand these instructions before working on MX2 series equipment Proper grounds disconnecting devices and other safety devices and their location are the responsibility of the user and are not provided by OMRON Be sure to connect a motor thermal disconnect switch or overload device to the MX2 series controller to assure that the inverter will shut down in the event of an overload or an overheated motor Dangerous voltage exists until power light is OFF Wait at least ten 10 min utes after i
504. unction group when a function mode is shown Cancel the setting and return to the function code when a data is shown Moves the cursor to a digit left when it is in digit to digit setting mode Pressing for 1 second leads to display data of dQd I regardless of current display 12 Up key 13 Down key Increase or decrease the data Pressing the both keys at the same time gives you the digit to digit edit 14 SET key Go to the data display mode when a function code is shown Stores the data and go back to show the function code when data is shown Moves the cursor to a digit right when it is in digit to digit display mode 15 USB connector Connect USB connector mini B for using PC communication 16 RJ45 connector 58 Connect RJ45 jack for remote operator Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 2 5 1 Keys Modes and Parameters The purpose of the keypad is to provide a way to change modes and parameters The x2 INVERTER term function applies to both monitoring modes and parameters These are all acces sible through function codes that are primary Jr JIE 4 character codes The various functions are separated into related groups identifiable by the left most character as the table shows Function Type Category of Function Mode to Access PRG LED Group Indicator Monitoring functions Monitor Main profile parameters Program Standard functions Program Fine tuning
505. unning 01 FA1 constant speed reached 02 FA2 set frequency overreached 03 OL overload notice advance signal 1 04 OD output deviation for PID control 05 AL alarm signal 06 FA3 set frequency reached 07 OTQ over torque 09 UV undervoltage 10 TRQ torque limited 11 RNT operation time over 12 ONT plug in time over 13 THM thermal alarm signal 19 BRK brake release 20 BER braking error 21 ZS 0 Hz detection signal 22 DSE speed deviation maximum 23 POK positioning completed 24 FA4 set fre quency overreached 2 25 FA5 set frequency reached 2 26 OL2 over load notice advance signal 2 31 FBV PID feedback comparison 32 NDc communication line disconnec tion 33 LOG1 logical operation result 1 34 LOG2 logical operation result 2 35 LOG3 logical operation result 3 39 WAC capacitor life warning 40 WAF cooling fan 41 FR starting contact signal 42 OHF heat sink overheat warning 43 LOC low current indication signal 44 M01 general pur pose output 1 45 M02 general pur pose output 2 46 M03 general purpose output 3 50 IRDY inverter ready 51 FWR forward rotation 52 RVR reverse rotation 53 MJA major failur 54 WCO window comparator O 55 WCOI window comparator Ol 58 FREF 59 REF 60 SETM EO terminal selection 00 output frequency 01 output cur rent 02 output torque 03 digital out put
506. up Motor Constants Functions Section 3 8 Note 5 Ifthe inverter trips during the auto tuning the auto tuning is interrupted After removing the cause of trip retry auto tuning from the beginning Note 6 If inverter is stopped during auto tuning by stop command by STOP key or deactivate RUN input measured constants could remain Be sure to execute auto tuning again Note 7 If auto tuning is attempted in free V f setting auto tuning will fail with error dis play 3 8 4 Permanent Magnet motor When PM mode is selected on b N 03 and after initialization b IB0 0 new motor parameters appears on the H group replacing most of the standard IM parameters that dissapears Next table shows this new parameters that should be used to adjust the motor characteristics H Function Defaults Description PM motor code selection 00 Standard motor parameter 00 Dg Auto tuning parameter PM motor capacity 0 1 to 18 5 x According to PM motor pole number 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 x inverter rating selection 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 poles PM rated current 0 00 x Rated current to 1 60 x Rated current PM parameter R 0 001 to 65 535 Q PM parameter Ld 0 01 to 655 35 mH PM parameter Lq 0 01 to 655 35 mH PM parameter Ke 0 0001 to 6 5535 Vp rad s PM parameter J 0 001 to 9999 000 Kg m PM parameter R 0 001 to 65 535 Q auto tuning data PM parameter Ld 0 01 to 655 35 mH auto tuning dat
507. upply voltage connect to the R S and T terminals is within the range of specification 4 6 29 Forward and Reverse Run Signals Forward Rotation signal The inverter continues to output the forward rota tion signal FWR while it is driving the motor for forward operation The FWR signal is turned off while the inverter is driving the motor for reverse operation or stopping the motor Reverse Rotation signal The inverter continues to output the reverse rota tion signal RVR while it is driving the motor for reverse operation The RVR signal is turned off while the inverter is driving the motor for forward operation or stopping the motor Output freq Forward rotation signal FWR Co Reverse rotation signal RVR Cd j Terminal Function Description Symbol Name Forward run ON Inverter is driving the motor for signal forward operation OFF Inverter is driving the motor for reverse operation or the motor is stopped Reverse run ON Inverter is driving the motor for signal reverse operation OFF Inverter is driving the motor for forward operation or the motor is stopped Valid for inputs 11 12 ALO AL2 Required settings 247 Using Intelligent Output Terminals 4 6 30 Fatal Fault Signal Section 4 6 The inverter gives out the major failure signal in addition to an alarm signal when it trips because of one of the errors listed in note down below Terminal Symbol
508. uts a hazardous voltage on its housing Secondly motors exhibit leakage current that increase with aging Lastly a grounded chassis generally emits less electrical noise than an unground ed one Q What type of motor is compatible with the Omron inverters A Motor type It must be a three phase AC induction motor Use an in verter grade motor that has at least 800V insulation for 200V class invert ers or 1600V insulation for 400V class Motor size In practice it s better to find the right size motor for your ap plication then look for the inverter to match the motor There may be other factors that will affect motor selection including heat dis sipation motor operating speed profile enclosure type and cooling method Q How many poles should the motor have A Omron inverters can be configured to operate motors with 2 4 6 or 8 poles The greater the number of the poles the slower the top motor speed will be but it will have higher torque at the base speed Q Will be able to add dynamic resistive braking to my Omron MX2 drive after the initial installation A Yes the MX2 inverter already has a dynamic braking circuit built in Just add the resistor sized to meet the braking requirements For more informa tion contact your nearest Omron representative Q How will know if my application will require resistive braking A For new applications it may be difficult to tell before you actually test a motor
509. ve address 1 Slave address 1 Function code Function code Test subcode Test subcode high order high order Test subcode Test subcode low order low order Data high order Data high order Data low order Data low order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 low order CRC 16 low order Note 1 Broadcasting is disabled When test subcode is for echo 00h 00h only and not available to the other commands 306 Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 Write in Coils OFh This function writes data in consecutive coils An example follows e Change the state of intelligent input terminal 1 to 5 of an inverter having a slave address 8 e This example assumes the intelligent input terminals have terminal states listed below Intelligent input terminal Coil Number Terminal status Field Name Example A Field Name Example Hex Hex Slave address 1 Slave address Function code Function code Coil start address 3 Coil start address 3 high order high order Coil start address 3 Coil start address 3 low order low order Number of coils Number of coils high order high order Number of coils Number of coils low order low order Byte number 2 7 CRC 16 high order Change data CRC 16 low order high order Change data low order CRC 16 high order CRC 16 low order
510. ve going turn off spike generated by the coil from damaging the inverter s output transistor Using Intelligent Output Terminals Section 4 6 4 6 20 PID FB Status Output The inverter has a built in PID loop feature for two stage control useful for certain applications such as building ventilation or heating and cooling HVAC In an ideal control environment a single PID loop controller stage would be adequate However in certain conditions the maximum output energy from the first stage is not enough to maintain the Process Variable PV at or near the Setpoint SP And the output of the first stage is in satura tion A simple solution is to add a second stage which puts an additional and constant amount of energy into the system under control When size properly the boost from the second stage brings the PV toward the desired range allowing the first stage PID control to return to its linear range of operation The two stage method of control has some advantages for particular applica tions e The second stage is only ON in adverse conditions so there is an energy savings during normal conditions e Since the second stage is simple ON OFF control it is less expensive to add than just duplicating the first stage e At powerup the boost provided by the second stage helps the process variable reach the desired setpoint sooner than it would if the first stage acted alone e Even though the second stage is simple ON OFF contro
511. ved 1026h DC voltage monitor d102 0 to 10000 1027h Regenerative braking load rate monitor d103 0 to 1000 1028h Electronic thermal monitor d104 0 to 1000 1029h to 102Dh Reserved 102Eh Drive programming monitor UMO d025 HIGH d025 LOW 2147483647 to 2147483647 Drive programming monitor UM1 d026 HIGH d026 LOW 2147483647 to 2147483647 Drive programming monitor 1033h UM2 d027 HIGH d027 LOW 2147483647 to 2147483647 1034h to 1035h Reserved 1036h Position command monitor d029 HIGH 268435455 to 268435455 Current position monitor 1039h d030 HIGH d029 LOW d030 LOW 268435455 to 268435455 103Ah to 1056h reserved 1057h Inverter mode d060 0 IM CT 1 IM VT 2 Reserved unused 322 Inaccessible ModBus Data Listing Function name Frequency source monitor Function Monitoring and setting items 0 Operator 1 to 15 Multi speed freq 1 to 15 16 Jog frequency 18 Modbus network 19 Option 21 Potentiometer 22 Pulse train 23 Calculated function output 24 EzSQ Drive Programming 25 O input 26 Ol input 27 O Ol Section B 4 Data resolution Run source monitor 1 Terminal 2 Operator 3 Modbus network 4 Option Analog input O monitor 0 to 1023 Analog input Ol monitor
512. vel of EMI Referring to a graph of torque versus direction a four quadrant drive can turn the motor either forward or reverse as well as decelerate in either direction see also reverse torque A load that has a relatively high inertia and must move in both directions and change directions rapidly requires four quadrant capability from its drive A method of stopping a motor caused when the inverter simply turns OFF its motor output connections This may allow the motor and load to coast to a stop or a mechanical brake may intervene and shorten the deceleration time While frequency has a broad meaning in electronics it typically refers to motor speed for variable frequency drives inverters This is because the out put frequency of the inverter is variable and is proportional to the attained motor speed For example a motor with a base frequency of 60 Hz can be speed controlled with an inverter output varying form O to 60 Hz See also Base Frequency Carrier Frequency and Slip A harmonic is a whole number multiple of a base of fundamental frequency The square waves used in inverters produce high frequency harmonics even though the main goal is to produce lower frequency sine waves These har monics can be harmful to electronics including motor windings and cause radiated energy that interferes with nearby electronic devices Chokes line reactors and filters are sometimes used to suppress the transmission of har monics in an e
513. verload limit level sets a current value for this function to work The overload limit parameter sets a time of deceleration from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz When this function operates while the Inverter is accelerating the accelera tion time becomes longer than the set time When the selected control method is sensorless vector control and 03 Enabled during acceleration constant speed accelerated during regenera tion is selected for b021 b024 the frequency will increase if current exceed ing the overload limit level flows during regeneration operation If the setting of Overload Limit Parameter b023 b026 is too small an overvolt age trip may occur beacuse of regenerative energy from the motor even dur ing acceleration This is due to automatic deceleration under this function Make the following adjustments if this function operates during acceleration and the frequency doesn t reach the target level Using Intelligent Input Terminals Increase the acceleration time e Increase the overload limit level b022 b025 Overload warning level b022 b025 b222 Output current Section 4 5 Deceleration set by the overload limit parameter Maximum frequency A004 A204 Inverter output frequency Terminal Symbol Option Code b023 b026 b223 Function Name Overload ON Target frequency Description Perform overload restriction limit switching OFF Normal operation
514. verload limit parameter b0 3 Set overload limit parameter b023 b026 longer 6026 is too short 11 STOP RESET key does not respond Possible Cause s Corrective Action STOP RESET key disabled Check STOP key selection function b887 Overvoltage protection function Check b 130 and b050 selection during deceleration b 130 or selection of non stop function at momentary power interruption b050 function is enabled 12 Sound noise of motor or machine Possible Cause s Corrective Action Carrier frequency is low Set carrier frequency b083 higher This could cause electric noise and leak current higher Machine frequency and motor Change output frequency slightly If resonating in frequency are resonated accel deceleration use jump frequency function AD63 58 to avoid machine frequency Over excitation Set base frequency A003 A203 and AVR voltage selection ADB2 A2B2 according to motor rating If not improved reduce output voltage gain AD45 A245 slightly or change V f characteristics selection AGY4 Ae44 as free V f 270 Troubleshooting 13 Motor overload trip E05 Section 6 1 Possible Cause s Corrective Action Improper electronic thermal level Check electronic thermal level b8 2 60 13rb9 107 b9 I b9 12 The application needs frequent strong accelerations with high peak currents 14 Over voltage trip E07 Check if the application can acce
515. verter operate an inverter that is not mounted according to the instructions given in this ManUal ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42 Otherwise there is a danger of electric shock and or injury to personnel Make sure the input power to the inverter is OFF If the drive has been pow ered leave it OFF for ten minutes before CONTINUING ceeeeeeeeteteeees 55 Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual 3 A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution Wiring Cautions for Electrical Practice Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the table provided Check for any loose screws Otherwise there is danger of fire 0 46 Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications e Single phase 200V to 240V 50 60Hz up to 2 2kW for AB model e Three phase 200V to 240V 50 60Hz up to 15kW for A2 model e Three phase 380V to 480V 50 60HZz up to 15kW for A4 model 49 Be sure not to power a three phase only inverter with single phase power Otherwise there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of TGs ise cs ceed Sdeegen ids daatvante E aie caduhieed canvas tachacdueetna A satay 49 Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals Other wise there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury ANON TINGS a5 icant Secek AT 50 Power Input Output to Mot
516. verter s front panel keypad provides access to all functions and parameters which you can access through other devices as well The general name for all these devices is the digital operator integrated operator or digital operator panel Chapter 2 will show you how to get a motor running using a minimal set of function com mands or configuring parameters The optional read write programmer will let you read and write inverter EEPROM contents from the programmer This feature is particularly useful for OEMs who need to duplicate a particular inverter s settings in many other inverters in assembly line fashion In general braking is a force that attempts to slow or stop motor rotation So it is associated with motor deceleration but may also occur even when the load attempts to drive the motor faster than the desired speed overhauling If you need the motor and load to decelerate quicker than their natural deceleration during coasting we recommend installing a braking resistor The dynamic braking unit built into MX2 sends excess motor energy into a resistor to slow the motor and load See Introduction in section 5 1 page 255 and Dynamic Braking in section 5 3 page 262 for more information For loads that continuously overhaul the motor for extended periods of time the MX2 may not be suitable contact your Omron distributor The inverter parameters include acceleration and deceleration which you can set to match the nee
517. very rapid Acc1 or Dec1 time less than 1 0 second the inverter may not be able to change rates to Acc2 or Dec2 before reaching the target frequency In that case the inverter decreases the rate of Acci or Dec in order to achieve the second ramp to the target frequency 115 A Group Standard Functions 3 5 13 Accel Decel Acceleration curve selection Switch between accelerations and decelerations could be done also using terminal 2CH when this input is turned ON the inverter changes the rate of acceleration and deceleration from the initial settings FO0e and F003 to use the second set of accel eration deceleration values When the terminal is turned OFF the inverter is returned to the original acceleration and deceleration time FOae acceleration time 1 and F003 Section 3 5 Target frequency second Output ae frequency initial 1 2CH 2CH 0 Fury 0 deceleration time 1 Use A092 acceleration time 2 and A093 deceleration time 2 to set the second stage acceleration and deceleration times In the graph shown above the 2CH becomes active during the initial acceler ation This causes the inverter to switch from using acceleration 1 F002 to acceleration 2 A092 Terminal Function Description Symbol Name 09 2CH Two stage ON Frequency output uses 2nd stage Accelera acceleration and deceleration val tion and ues Deceleration OFF Frequency output uses the init
518. w comparator 6050 5063 0 WCO WCOI ON GN Ode 01De ee EE 141 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 3 6 16 Ambient Temperature Setting Sets the ambient temperature where the inverter is installed so to calculate internally the lifetime of cooling fan Incorrect data will result in an incorrect calculation result B Function Defaults Description Ambient temperature Set range is 10 50 C 3 6 17 Watt hour related When the watt hour monitoring function is selected the inverter displays the watt hour value of electric power given to the inverter You can also convert the value to be displayed to gain data by setting the cumulative input power display gain setting b019 Value displayed by function dd I5 is expressed as follows Watt hour kWh o co D ll Watt hour gain setting 1019 The watt hour input gain can be set within the range 1 to 1000 in step of 1 You can clear the watt hour data by specifying 01 for the watt hour clearance function 60783 and pressing the Stop Reset key You can also clear the watt hour data at an intelligent input terminal by assigning parameter 53 KHC watt hour clearance to the terminal When the watt hour display gain setting b018 is set to 1000 the watt hour data up to 999000 kWh can be displayed B Function Defaults Description Units Integrated power clear Two option codes 00 OFF D1 ON press Stop Reset key t
519. wait time 1 0 Electronic thermal level Rated current 2nd electronic thermal level Rated current Electronic thermal characteristics 00 selection 2nd electronic thermal 00 characteristics selection Free setting electronic thermal frequency 1 Free setting electronic thermal current 1 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 2 Free setting electronic thermal current 2 Free setting electronic thermal frequency 3 Free setting electronic thermal current 3 Overload limit selection 01 Overload limit selection 2nd motor 01 Overload limit level Rated current x 1 5 HD 1 2 ND Overload limit level 2nd motor Rated current x 1 5 HD 1 2 ND Overload limit parameter 1 0 Overload limit parameter 2nd motor 1 0 Overload limit selection 01 Overload limit level 2 1 50 x Rated current Overload limit parameter 2 1 00 Overcurrent suppression function 00 Active Frequency Matching restart Rated current level Active Frequency Matching restart 0 50 parameter Starting frequency at Active 00 Frequency Matching restart 361 Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry B Group Parameters Default Setting Name Soft lock selection EU Section C 2 User Setting Motor cable length parameter RUN time Power ON time setting Rotation direction limit selection Reduced voltage st
520. ware overview about pulse train input is shown below EB terminal 24 VDC Pulse input types 90 ph difference 2 ph pulse Max Freq 32 kHz Phase A 2 kHz Phase B EA terminal 5 to 24 VDC Phase A PNP open collector or Volt age output type Phase B PNP open collector or Volt age output type Single phase pulse direction 32 kHz Single phase pulse Direction PNP open collector or Volt sink source transistor or con age output type tactor Single phase pulse 32 kHz Single phase pulse 2 phase pulse input PNP open collector or Volt age output type Wire phase A to EA terminal and phase B to EB terminal Since common ter minal of EB is same as other inputs use all the input terminals as source logic PNP open collector or voltage output type Voltage of EB should be 18 to 24 VDC Assign EB in input terminal 7 7 GN D PNP open collector type or voltage output type encoder 181 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 Single phase pulse input Wire phase A to EA terminal and direction signal to EB terminal Both sink or source logic are available for EB terminal by changing position of the short bar Assign EB in input terminal 7 ON input is forward and OFF input is reverse direction PNP open collector type or voltage output type encoder Sink type transistor Souce type transistor PNP open collector type or PNP open collector type or voltage output t
521. wer The figure below shows how the variable frequency drive employs an internal inverter The drive first converts incoming AC power to DC through a rectifier bridge creating an internal DC bus voltage Then the inverter circuit converts the DC back to AC again to power the motor The special inverter can vary its output frequency and voltage according to the desired motor speed Power Variable frequency Drive Input Motor Converter Internal Inverter DC Bus The simplified drawing of the inverter shows three double throw switches In Omron inverters the switches are actually IGBTs insulated gate bipolar tran sistors Using a commutation algorithm the microprocessor in the drive switches the IGBTs on and off at a very high speed to create the desired out put waveforms The inductance of the motor windings helps smooth out the pulses 1 3 3 Torque and Constant Volts Hertz Operation In the past AC variable speed drives used Output an open loop scalar technique to control voltage speed The constant volts hertz operation y maintains a constant ratio between the applied voltage and the applied frequency With these conditions AC induction motors inherently delivered constant torque across the operating speed range For some appli g cations this scalar technique was ade 100 quate Output frequency Constant torque 14 Introduction to Variable Frequency Drives Section 1 3 Today with the advent of sophisticated m
522. while a slave not specified as the recipient of the Master also receives data if the data is not addressed to that slave the data will be discarded in the slave Network Protocol Reference Section B 3 Example of Inverter Inverter Communications Sequence Shown below is a communication sequence involving a total of four inverters from station numbers 01 to 04 where the Master Inverter is one of 01 to 03 Management Inverter 01 Receive Inverter 02 Send Inverter 03 Inverter 04 02 XXXX__XXXX Doo Sent data from the master Up to five recipients Received data in the slave can be specified ZZ Master switching command All slaves receive data from the master t1 Silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 but they will discard the data t2 Silent interval Communication Wait Time C078 if the data is not addressed to themselves t3 Communication Timeout Time C077 e For the Management Inverter be sure to set a value other than O 1 sec ond or more is recommended in Communication Error Timeout C077 When 0 is set the Co inverter communication function will stop if the data sent from the Master Inverter cannot be received If the function has stopped reconnect the Management Inverter or perform a reset by turn ing the RS terminal ON and then turning it OFF The communication timeout timer starts counting when the recipient starts waiting for data If data reception is not
523. x Default i No Function name Data setting Unit d013 Output voltage monitor 0 0 to 600 0 V Set Motor Incoming Voltage Selection A082 A282 correctly The correct value may not be displayed 3 3 14 Input Power Monitor d014 Displays the input power instantaneous value of the inverter Parameter Default No Function name Data setting Unit d014 Input power monitor 0 0 to 100 0 kW 3 3 15 Integrated Power Monitor d015 Displays the integrated power electric energy of the inverter The conversion of displayed data is performed with Integrated Power Display Scale b079 d015 display Actual integrated power kWh Integrated Power Display Scale b079 Example If b079 100 and the displayed value is 1 000 the actual integrated power is 100 000 kWh The integrated power value can be cleared by setting Integrated Power Clear b078 to 01 The integrated power value can also be cleared via terminal input if 53 KHC Integrated power clear is allocated to any of the multi function inputs When Integrated Power Display Scale b079 is set to 1000 up to 999 000 000 kWh can be displayed This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off Default setting 0 0 to 9999 Displayed in increments of the setting unit 1 kW x b079 1000 to 9999 Displayed in increments of the setting unit 10 kW x b079 Para
524. x2ms filter 31 500ms fixed filter with 0 1kHz hys The AT terminal selects whether the inverter uses the voltage O or current Ol input terminals for external frequency control When intelligent input AT is ON you can set the output frequency by applying a current input signal at Ol L When the AT input is OFF you can apply a voltage input signal at O L to set the output frequency Note that you must also set parameter ANd 01 to enable the analog terminal set for controlling the inverter frequency Terminal Function Symbol Name Description 16 AT Analog ON See the table down below Input Voltage Current OFF Select Valid for inputs C00 CO07 Required settings A00 0 Notes Combination of ADDS setting and AT input for analog input activation Example Analog Input Configuration Ol O Keypad Pot O See I O specs on page 195 Keypad Pot Ol e Be sure to set the frequency source setting A00 1 0 to select the analog input terminals If AT is not assigned to any of the intelligent input terminal inverter recog nizes the input O Ol Ad I6 External Frequency Filter Time Constant This filter smoothes the analog input signal for the inverter s output frequency reference AQ 16 sets the filter range from n 1 to 30 This is a simple moving average calculation where n number of samples is variable e AD
525. xt drawing describes the operation Output current Thermal level z Overload counter d104 100 Se Decrement rate E j l I 1 if I I l 10 min Thermal decrement mode with linear decrement ramp b910 02 Like with previous option the overload counter will decrease on a linear way when the output current is below the thermal level But on this case the decre ment rate could be adjusted by parameter b911 Output current Thermal level Overload counter d104 100 _ Decrement rate b911 B Group Fine Tuning Functions Section 3 6 Thermal decrement mode by time constant b910 03 For this option the decrement is performed by a time constant value defined on parameter b912 The curve from 100 to 0 is approximately 5 times the b912 value Output current Thermal level Overload counter d104 100 B912 5 3 6 3 3 Electronic Thermal Warning Output You can configure this function so that the inverter outputs a warning signal before the electronic thermal protection operates against motor overheat You can also set the threshold level to output a warning signal with the electronic thermal warning level setting in function C06 l To output the warning signal assign parameter 13 THM to one of the intel ligent output terminals 11 to 12 C02 to C022 or to the relay output termi nal C026 127 B Grou
526. xterior of all outer shipping packages of your products when exporting your products which the 3G3AX OP05 are installed to the State of California USA Do not short and charge disassemble heat put into the fire or apply strong impact on the battery The battery may leak explode produce heat or fire Never use the battery which was applied strong impact due to such as fall on the floor it may leak e UL standards establish that the battery shall be replaced by an expert engineer The expert engineer must be in charge of the replacement and also replace the battery according to the method described in this manual e When the display of LCD Digital Operator can not be recognized due to the ser vice life replace the LCD Digital Operator 6 UL Cautions Warnings and Instructions Warnings and Cautions for Troubleshooting and Maintenance The warnings and instructions in this section summarizes the procedures nec essary to ensure an inverter installation complies with Underwriters Laborato ries guidelines N WARNING Use 60 75 C Cu wire only for models 3G3MX2 A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 AB015 AB022 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4030 N WARNING Use 75 C Cu wire only for models 3G3MX2 AB001 AB002 AB004 AB007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 and A4150 Z N WARNING Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
527. y adjustment b082 When the inverter starts to run the output frequency does not ramp from OHz Instead it steps directly to the start fre quency b08 amp 2 and the ramp proceeds upward from there Initialization related b084 b085 b094 b IBO These functions allow you to restore the factory default settings Please refer to 6 3 Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 279 Stop key enable function b087 This function allows you to decide whether the stop key on the integrated operator is enabled or not Dynamic Braking related functions b090 b095 b096 These parameters are for using the internal brake chopper so to get more regeneration torque of the motor Cooling Fan Control b092 You can select the performance of the cooling fan if your inverter model includes a fan This function controls whether the cool ing fan stops or keeps on running after the inverter stops the motor This can result in an additional energy saving and extends fan life B Function Defaults Description Units Starting frequency Sets the starting frequency for the inverter output range is 0 01 to 9 99 Hz Initialization selection Select initialized data five option codes 00 no Clears the trip monitor D1 Trip data Initializes data Oe Parameters Clears the trip monitor and initializes data D3 Trip Param Clears the trip monitor and parameters 04 Trp Prm EzSQ Clears the trip monitor parameters and Driv
528. y starts blinking which means that new data has not been activated yet lt J Saves the data in EEPROM and returns to func code display CD Cancels the data change and returns to func code display Press the both up and down key at the same time in func code or data display A v BD then single digit edit mode will be enabled Refer to page 67 for further information Pressing the key will make the display go to the top of next function group regardless the display contents e g ADe I gt gt 627 I Using the Front Panel Keypad Section 2 5 Setting example After power ON changing from 9 00 display to change the 6083 carrier frequency data Data of J00 will be shown on the pP key to sh San PE ER display after the first power ON the function code Press CD key to move on to the function group FOD co Cy e D Press key twice to move on to the function group b00 o E co Press Up key to change increase function code b02 gt b083 A v N 73 Press 2J key to display the data of b083 Pr BUBI Gll1ll 2 se gt 50 Display is solid lighting Press up key to increase the data 5 0 gt 12 0 N A S AVAYA When data is changed the display starts blinking which means that new Press
529. your application contact your Omron representative If the inverter is operated outside the region shown in the graph in the derating curve the inverter may be damaged or its service life may be shortened Set b083 Carrier Frequency Adjustment in accordance with the expected output current level See derating curve section for the detailed information of the inverter operating range The storage temperature refers to the short term temperature during transpor tation Conforms to the test method specified in JIS C0040 1999 For the model types excluded in the standard specifications contact your Omron sales rep resentative Watt losses are calculated values based on specification of main semi con ductors You must take suitable margin when designing cabinet based on these values Otherwise there is a possibility of heating trouble MX2 Inverter Specifications Section 1 2 Item Three phase 200V class Specifications 3G3MX2 inverters 200 V models A2001 Applica kW VT 0 2 f 1 1 ble motor CT 01 size 2 HP VT 1 4 1 5 CT 1 8 1 Rated 200 V VT 0 4 1 2 2 0 WAY CT 0 2 1 0 1 7 240 V VT 0 4 1 4 2 4 CT 0 3 1 2 2 0 Loss at 100 load 12 30 48 Efficiency at rated load 89 5 93 94 Rated input voltage Three phase 200 V 15 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 5 Rated output voltage 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V proportional to input voltage Rated output current VT 1 2 1 9 3 5 6 0 A CT 1 0 1 6 3 0 5 0 Starting torque 6 200 at 0 5
530. ypad displays alternating seg ments After RS turns OFF the display recovers automatically Pressing the Stop Reset key of the digital operator can generate a reset operation only when an alarm occurs A terminal configured with the RS function can only be configured for normally open operation The terminal cannot be used in the normally closed contact state When input power is turned ON the inverter performs the same reset operation as it does when a pulse on the RS terminal occurs The Stop Reset key on the inverter is only operational for a few seconds after inverter powerup when a hand held remote operator is connected to the inverter If the RS terminal is turned ON while the motor is running the motor will be free running coasting If you are using the output terminal OFF delay feature any of C 145 C 47 C 19 gt 0 0 sec the RS terminal affects the ON to OFF transition slightly Normally without using OFF delays the RS input causes the motor output and the logic outputs to turn OFF together immediately However when any output uses an OFF delay then after the RS input turns ON that output will remain ON for an addi tional 1 sec period approximate before turning OFF 4 5 8 Thermistor Thermal Protection Motors that are equipped with a thermistor can be protected from overheating Input terminal 5 has the unique ability to sense a thermistor resistance When the resistance value of the thermist
531. ype encoder voltage output type encoder Simple positioning setting e Set 01 in EA selection P003 then pulse train input is used as feed back signal from encoder e Set 02 in simple positioning selection P012 then simple positioning is enabled If 00 is set V f control with FB is enabled Please refer to xx for further information Up to 8 position data are commanded by combination of 3 input terminals configured as CP1 to CP3 e Besides positioning input RUN command FW RV is necessary Since rotation direction does not matter for positioning both FW and RV work as RUN command e Positioning speed depends on frequency source A001 182 P Group Other Parameters Section 3 9 e More than four digits are required for positioning data but only four higher digits are displayed Data or data range Description EA terminal selection Encoder feedback Pulse train input mode for Single phase pulse train feedback 90 ph difference 2 ph pulse train 1 90 ph difference 2 ph pulse train 2 Single phase pulse train direction Encoder pulses 32 to 1024 Simple positioning selection Ge Simple positioning enabled Creep pulse ratio 0 0 to 400 0 Distance that will be use for the posi tioning sequence and the creep speed operation 100 0 means one motor turn Creep speed Start freq to 10 00 Hz Overspeed error detection level 0 0 to 150 0 Speed deviation er
532. ys ON 01 ON during RUN 02 ON by temp 1360h Clear elapsed time of cooling fan 00 OFF 01 CLR 1361h Initialization target data 00 ALL 01 Exp COM TERM 02 Only U 03 All exp U 1362h Regenerative braking function 00 disabling 01 enabling disabling operation selection while the motor is stopped 02 enabling enabling also while the motor is stopped 1363h Regenerative braking function 330 to 380 660 to 760 ON level 1364h BRD resistor Min Resitance to 600 0 1365h to Reserved 1366h 1367h Free V f frequency 1 to Free V f frequency 2 1368h Free V f voltage 1 to 8000 1369h Free V f frequency 2 to Free V f frequency 3 136Ah Free V f voltage 2 to 8000 136Bh Free V f frequency 3 to Free V f frequency 4 136Ch Free V f voltage 3 to 8000 136Dh Free V f frequency 4 to Free V f frequency 5 136Eh Free V f voltage 4 to 8000 136Fh Free V f frequency 5 to Free V f frequency 6 330 ModBus Data Listing Section B 4 Function name Function Monitoring and setting items Data resolution Free V f voltage 5 0 to 8000 Free V f frequency 6 0 to Free V f frequency 7 Free V f voltage 6 0 to 8000 Free V f frequency 7 0 to 400 Free V f voltage 7 0 to 8000 Reserved Brake control selection 00 disabling 01 enablin
533. z from exceeding the rated output current of the inverter Note 3 The output voltage decreases as the main supply voltage decreases except when using the AVR function In any case the output voltage cannot exceed the input power supply voltage Note 4 To operate the motor beyond 50 60 Hz consult the motor manufacturer for the maximum allowable rotation speed Note 5 For achieving approved input voltage rating categories 460 to 480 VAC Over voltage category 2 380 to 460 VAC Over voltage category 3 To meet the Over voltage category 3 insert an EN or IEC standard compliant isolation transformer that is earth grounded and star connected for Low Voltage Directive Note 6 At the rated voltage when using a standard 3 phase 4 pole motor MX2 Inverter Specifications Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 Note 11 Note 12 Section 1 2 The braking torque via capacitive feedback is the average deceleration torque at the shortest deceleration stopping from 50 60 Hz as indicated It is not continuous regenerative braking torque The average deceleration torque var ies with motor loss This value decreases when operating beyond 50 Hz If a large regenerative torque is required the optional regenerative braking unit and a resistor should be used The frequency command is the maximum frequency at 9 8 V for input voltage 0 to 10 VDC or at 19 6 mA for input current 4 to 20 mA If this characteristic is not satisfactory for

MX2 (Model: 3G3MX2) User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents